Home

Dell n03 Printer User Manual

1. 481 Loss of Service and Warranty Air conditioning refrigerant 481 Information Booklet 08 467 Brake fluid ceeeceesteeeseeeeeees 48 1 Identification labels c eseeeee 468 Premium unleaded gasoline 482 Layout of poly V belt drive 469 Fuel requirements 482 CEK JU 469 Gasoline additives eee 483 CLK 500 CLK 55 AMG 469 ONAN E 484 EVV ING E EE 470 Windshield washer system and RIMS and tiVS ceeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 471 headlamp cleaning system 486 Same SIZE tires sseesseesessserrresss 473 Mixed size tires ccc eecceseeeeeeeeees 475 Ds Minispare wheel sssessssseeessssee 476 Technical termS ccccccceeees 487 Electrical system cc ccccesssseeeeees 477 Main dimensions and weights 478 M Main dimensSionS sesen 478 IndeX eeeseeseessesersrrsseess 493 Weights cn sscsnseaniecansoasoeentnennorseniens 478 Y Product information Please observe the following in your own best interest We recommend using Genuine Mercedes Benz parts as well as conversion parts and accessories explicitly approved by us for your vehicle model We have tested these parts to determine their reliability safety and special suitability for Mercedes Benz vehicles We are unable to make an assessment for other products and therefore cannot be held responsible for them even if in indi vidual cases
2. 08 317 SCs At the gas station sseeeseeeeeea 318 ROTORS srera 318 Check regularly and before a long trip 066 320 Engine Compartment ccccceeeeeees 321 POOO care 321 Engine oil cccccenssercccoesssereees 322 Transmission fluid level 326 Coolant eceuseaseurienteseecnsniascondinandbies O27 BATONY siria E 328 Windshield washer system and headlamp cleaning system 329 Tires and wheels ccsssscccseseeeeees 330 Important guidelines 04 330 Tire care and maintenance 331 Direction of rotation ceee 333 Loading the vehicle 00668 333 Recommended tire inflation preSSure 666 339 Checking tire inflation pressure 341 MOExtended system 066 345 Tire labeling ou ceeccccssesceeeeeeeees 345 Load identification cce0 349 DOT Tire Identification Number IRN A T 350 Maximum tire inflation pressure 352 Uniform Tire Quality Grading Standards U S vehicles 353 Tire ply material cccceeeeee eee 354 Tire and loading terminology 355 Rotating tires cccccccsessceeeeees 358 Winter driving ccccccceeecccceeeeeeeeeeeees 359 Winter tires ccesseecceeensseeeeseees 359 Block heater Canada only 360 SNOW ChainS essssseeesssssesssseesss 360 Maintenance ssesssssesssssseeressssrrssssee 361 M
3. cceeeeeceeees 209 SOUNG SyStEM anneni eia 209 Operating and display elements 210 Button and soft key operation 212 Operati nennen 212 Radio operation csccceseeeceeees 247 Introduction to satellite radio USA ONIY heess tatuu 222 CD MOOS sacesdaseessnsace wwarescestnaanienss 227 GSM network phones 65 233 TDMA or CDMA network phones 240 Emergency calls 911 wu 247 Power WINCOWS cccesseeceesssceseeeeees 249 Opening and closing the WINdOWS 000008 249 Synchronizing power windows 251 Summer opening feature 252 Convenience closing feature 253 Opening and closing all side windows with the soft top switch 254 SONU LO Discs oreen wadiatevanedeeese accuse as 255 Opening and closing the soft top 255 Opening and closing the soft top with the SmartKey 260 Luggage COVED cccescccseseceeeceneees 262 WIN screen cccreeseecceseecenes 263 Driving SYSTEMS cccceeecceceeeeeceeeeeees 265 Cruise CONTIOL cccccceeseceeeeees 265 Parktronic system Parking assist Canada only 269 Loading saascncneennbotwnnebaendcensentesesoncseeris 273 Ski sack Canada onlly 273 Loading instructions 00 277 Useful features cccccsssseeceeeeseeees 278 Storage compartments 66 278 Center armrest c csscccseeeeees 281 Armrest in the
4. cccseeeeeeeeees 181 SVIS ONS to e ER 184 Rear window defroster 06 185 Climate control CLK 350 186 Deactivating the climate control system 189 Operating the climate control system in automatic mode 189 Setting the temperature 190 Adjusting air distribution 190 Adjusting air VOIUME cc0eeeee 191 Front defroster ccccccsessseeeees 191 Air recirculation mode 0006 192 Air CONCITIONING 0cccceneeeceeeeees 194 Rear passenger compartment adjustable air vents ccccseeee 195 Automatic climate control CLK 500 CLK 55 AMG eeeeee 196 Deactivating the automatic climate control system 199 Operating the climate control system in AUTOMATIC MOE cccccneeceeneeees 199 Setting the temperature 200 Adjusting air distribution 200 Adjusting air VOIUME c00eeee 201 Front defroster ccccccsessseeeees 201 Maximum cooling MAXCOOL 202 Air recirculation mode 0006 203 Charcoal Tilter sesde 204 Air conditioning ssseessseesseesssee 206 Residual heat and ventilation Canada Only ccatcainsnasspraseamssatwes 207 Rear passenger compartment adjustable air vents cccccceeeee 208 PUCIOSSVSECIN sccm satscsncdeamicacsawteenoasatans 209 Audio and telephone operation 209 Operating Safety
5. Controls in detail Locking and unlocking Even with the SmartKey with KEYLESS GO removed from the vehicle the trunk closing switch can be operated Therefore do not leave children unattended in the vehicle or with access to an unlocked vehicle Unsu pervised use of vehicle equipment may cause an accident and or serious personal injury A Only drive with the trunk closed as among other dangers such as blocked visibility exhaust fumes may enter the vehicle interior Warning If the vehicle was previously centrally locked the trunk will lock automatical ly after closing it gt page 110 All turn signal lamps flash three times to con firm locking Closing the trunk and locking the vehi cle from the outside vehicles with KEYLESS GO In vehicles with trunk opening closing sys tem and KEYLESS GO you can close the trunk lid and lock the vehicle simulta neously Pao 20 2794 31 1 KEYLESS GO locking closing switch gt Make sure you have the SmartKey with KEYLESS GO with you gt Press switch Q briefly The vehicle is locked and the trunk closes automatically With both doors closed all turn signal lamps flash three times to confirm locking The locking knobs in the doors move down The anti theft alarm sys tem is armed You can also close the trunk by hand gt page 111 If the trunk lid comes into contact with an object while closing e g luggage that
6. mOO 2 186 31 1 Orientation seam 2 Hex wrench 3 Press wrench down 4 Press head restraint down gt Take hex wrench out of its storage location in the storage well casing gt page 413 Align hex wrench so that its long side is parallel to orientation seam Q and in sert hex wrench 2 into gap on left side of respective head restraint Press hex wrench down firmly in direc tion of arrow 3 and hold Press head restraint down in direction of arrow Pull hex wrench 2 out and take weight off head restraint Repeat this procedure on roll bar for second head restraint Soft top emergency operation If the soft top cannot be automatically closed check the following e ls the luggage cover engaged in place gt page 262 e Have the roll bars been released If so lower the roll bars manually gt page 424 e ls the trunk lid closed gt page 110 e ls there sufficient on board voltage Start the engine if necessary These messages will also appear in the multifunction display gt page 410 If automatic operation still does not func tion properly you can close the soft top manually This procedure should be performed with great care by two persons Practical hints Opening closing in an emergency Manually closing the soft top is a com plicated and technically demanding procedure Close the soft top manually in emergency cases only Otherwise visit an authoriz
7. At a glance Center console Lower part Cigarette lighter 2 KEYLESS GO start stop button 3 Compartment in center armrest depending on vehi cle production date Design A illustrated in the picture Design B Soft top switch G Program mode selector switch for automatic trans mission e Automatic shift program e Manual shift program CLK 55 AMG 6 Gear selector lever for automatic transmission Y Overhead control panel PB2 00 2366 31 Oe oe G Item Tele Aid emergency call system button Temperature sensor for au tomatic climate control Right reading lamp on off Interior lighting control Hands free microphone for Tele Aid emergency call system and telephone Interior rear view mirror Garage door opener Left reading lamp on off Page 289 Iss 134 288 43 181 296 ss At a glance Overhead control panel At a glance Door control panel Door handle 2 Seat adjustment 3 Memory function for stor ing seat exterior mirror and steering wheel settings 4 Switches for opening clos ing front door windows 6 Rear window override switch Switches for opening clos ing rear windows Remote trunk opening switch Remote trunk opening closing switch ee a LS Getting started Unlocking Adjusting Driving Parking and locking Getting started Unlocking The Get
8. e the gear selector lever will remain locked in position P For informa tion on manually unlocking the transmission gear selector lever see gt page 422 P8B 20 2752 31 2 Cover on right side of rear bumper To remove cover p gt Press mark on cover or 1 Cover on right side of front bumper gt Lift cover off to reveal the threaded hole for towing eye bolt The towing eye bolt is supplied with the tool kit located in the compartment under neath the trunk floor gt Screw towing eye bolt in to its stop and tighten with lug wrench To reinstall cover gt Fit cover G or 2 and snap into place Practical hints Towing the vehicle Towing eye bolt CLK 500 CLK 55 AMG To remove cover 1 To reinstall cover Q gt Insert flat blunt object as a lever in Towing eye bolt in front bumper recess on the edge of cover The cover for the threaded bore in the front 5 eA i h gt Loosen cover Q from the bumper us UPET IS IGENEGA O ever ONLNE ing lever to reveal the threaded hole 3 CLK 350 A for towing eye bolt To remove and to reinstall cover see Tow i The towing eye bolt is supplied with the ing eye bolt CLK 350 gt page 460 tool kit located in the compartment underneath the trunk floor Towing eye bolt in rear bumper PBB 20 2449 31 gt Screw towing eye bolt in to its stop and gt Hook right hand side of the cover Q tighten wit
9. Operation Tires and wheels Warning J The traction grade assigned to this tire is based on straight ahead braking traction tests and does not include acceleration cornering hydroplaning or peak traction characteristics Temperature The temperature grades are A the high est B and C representing the tire s resis tance to the generation of heat and its ability to dissipate heat when tested under controlled conditions on a specified indoor laboratory test wheel Sustained high tem perature can cause the material of the tire to degenerate and reduce tire life and ex cessive temperature can lead to sudden tire failure The grade C corresponds to a level of performance which all passenger car tires must meet under the Federal Mo tor Vehicle Safety Standard No 109 Grades B and A represent higher levels of performance on the laboratory test wheel than the minimum required by law Warning A N The temperature grade for this tire is estab lished for a tire that is properly inflated and not overloaded Excessive speed underin flation or excessive loading either sepa rately or in combination can cause excessive heat build up and possible tire failure Tire ply material 1 Plies in sidewall 2 Plies under tread For illustration purposes only Actual data on tires are specific to each vehi cle and may vary from data shown in above illustration This marking tells you about the type of
10. Tr 1 Ck l fu QG J co n 7 a a MI P54 32 2129 31 C Current CD for CD changer 2 Current track gt Press button BVA or EAN repeatedly until the desired track is selected To select a CD from the magazine press a number on the audio system or the COMAND system key pad located in the center dashboard NAV menu The Nav menu contains the functions needed to operate your navigation system gt Press button or repeatedly until the message Nav appears in the multifunction display e f COMAND is switched off the mes sage Nav off appears in the multifunc tion display e With COMAND switched on but route guidance not activated the direction of travel and if available the name of the street currently traveld on appear in the multifunction display e With COMAND switched on and route guidance activated the direction of travel and maneuver instructions ap pear in the multifunction display Please refer to the COMAND manual for instructions on how to activate the route guidance system Vehicle status message memory menu Use the vehicle status message memory menu to scan malfunction and warning messages that may be stored in the system Such messages appear in the multifunction display and are based on conditions or system status the vehicle s system has recorded The vehicle status message memory menu only appears if there are any messages stored
11. gt Turn housing cover 2 counterclock wise and remove it Pull out bulb socket G with the bulb v v vy Yy Press bulb socket back into the lamp gt Align housing cover 2 and turn it clockwise Pull the bulb out of the bulb socket G Press the new bulb into bulb socket G Additional turn signal lamps The additional turn signal lamps in the ex terior rear view mirrors have LEDs If a malfunction occurs or LEDs fail to func tion the entire turn signal unit must be re placed Have the additional turn signal unit replaced by an authorized Mercedes Benz Center Front side marker lamp Since replacing the side marker lamp bulbs is a technically highly demanding process we recommend you have the side marker lamp bulbs replaced by an authorized Mercedes Benz Center Replacing bulbs for rear lamps Before you start to replace a bulb for a rear lamp do the following first gt Turn the exterior lamp switch to position IW gt page 127 Tail lamp unit gt Open trunk lid gt Swing the trim panel covering the cor responding rear lights to the side _ B P82 10 4201 31 14 Connector 2 Tab gt Disconnect electrical connector Q gt Pull tab 2 in the direction of the ar row Remove the bulb carrier Press gently onto the respective bulb and turn counterclockwise out of its bulb socket gt Press the new bulb gently into its bulb socket and turn clockwise
12. Connect the battery negative lead 2 NEVER invert the terminal connections Practical hints Battery gt Reinstall the filter box gt page 453 The following procedures must be carried out following any interruption of battery power e g due to reconnect ing e Set the clock gt page 153 Vehicles with COMAND see COMAND operator s manual e Synchronize the side windows gt page 251 Batteries contain materials that can harm the environment if disposed of improperly Large 12 volt storage batteries contain lead Recycling of batteries is the preferred method of disposal Many states require sellers of batteries to accept old batteries for recycling Practical hints Jump starting Warning Failure to follow these directions will cause damage to the electronic components and can lead to a battery explosion and severe injury or death Never lean over batteries while connecting or jump starting you might get injured Battery fluid contains sulfuric acid Do not allow this fluid to come in contact with eyes skin or clothing In case it does immediately flush affected area with water and seek medical help if necessary A battery will also produce hydrogen gas which is flammable and very explosive Keep flames or sparks away from battery avoid improper connection of jumper cables smoking etc Attempting to jump start a frozen battery can result in it exploding c
13. Controls in detail Climate control CLK 350 PBS I0 4270 31 Item Q Left side air vent adjustable 2 Thumbwheel for air volume control for center air vents 3 Right side air vent adjustable 4 Climate control panel Right center air vent adjustable 6 Thumbwheel for air volume control for right side center air vent 7 Thumbwheel for air volume control for left side center air vent Left center air vent adjustable o For draft free ventilation move the sliders for the side air vents C and and center air vents G and 8 to the middle position USA aay Controls in detail Climate control CLK 350 Item Q Air volume control 2 Left side temperature control 3 Right side temperature control Air distribution control Rear window defroster AC cooling on off Air distribution and air volume automatic mode Air recirculation 9 Front defroster Controls in detail Climate control CLK 350 The climate control is operational when Nearly all dust particles pollutants and ever the engine is running You can oper odors are filtered out before outside air en ate the climate control system in eitherthe ters the passenger compartment through automatic or manual mode The system the air distribution system cools or heats the interior depending on the selected interior temperature and the current outside temperature Severe conditions e g strong air p
14. Display message Brake lamp right Display malfunction Visit workshop Front foglamp left SPO TOOL ela PTeumte High beam left High beam right Lamp sensor Drive to workshop License plate lamp left License plate lamp right Possible cause consequence The right brake lamp is malfunctioning The display for the lamps or the system is malfunctioning The left front fog lamp is malfunctioning The right front fog lamp is malfunctioning The left high beam lamp is malfunction ing The right high beam lamp is malfunction ing The lamp sensor is malfunctioning The headlamps switch on automatically The left license plate lamp is malfunction ing The right license plate lamp is malfunc tioning Practical hints What to do if Possible solution gt Visit an authorized Mercedes Benz Center as soon as possible Visit an authorized Mercedes Benz Center as soon as possible Replace the bulb as soon as possible Replace the bulb as soon as possible Replace the bulb as soon as possible Replace the bulb as soon as possible In the control system set lamp opera tion to manual gt page 156 Switch on headlamps using the exteri or lamp switch Visit an authorized Mercedes Benz Center as soon as possible Replace the bulb as soon as possible Replace the bulb as soon as possible Practical hints What to do if Display symbol O ows 1 Display mess
15. For example a load rating of 91 corre sponds to a maximum load of 1356 Ibs 615 kg the tire is designed to support See also Maximum tire load gt page 351 where the maximum load as sociated with the load index is indicated in kilograms and lbs VAN The tire load rating must always be at least half of the GAWR gt page 355 of your vehi cle Otherwise tire failure may be the result which may cause an accident and or seri ous personal injury to you or others Warning Always replace rims and tires with the same designation manufacturer and type as shown on the original part Operation Tires and wheels A Do not overload the tires by exceeding the specified load limit or vehicle capacity weight as indicated on the placard located on the driver s door B pillar Overloading the tires can overheat them possibly causing a blowout Overloading the tires can also result in handling or steering problems or brake failure Warning For additional information on tire load rating see Load identification gt page 349 Tire load rating gt page 346 and Tire speed rating gt page 346 are also referred to as service descrip tion Operation Tires and wheels Tire speed rating The tire speed rating gt page 346 indicates the approved maximum speed for the tire Warning Even when permitted by law never operate a vehicle at speeds greater
16. Hood gt Pull lever downwards gt Push lever 2 on the hood upwards The hood is unlocked gt Pull up on the hood and then release it Warning A N T The hood will be automatically held Do not pull the release lever while the vehi daa as a so Wie nese ay i s wen ers or hood never open the hood if the wiper arms are folded forward away from the windshield Warning A N i f cle is in motion Otherwise the hood could be forced open by passing air flow Opening To help prevent personal injury stay clear of moving parts when the hood is open and the engine is running Make sure the hood is properly closed before driving When closing the hood use extreme caution not to catch hands or fingers The hood lock release lever is located to the left of the steering wheel under the dashboard The radiator fan may continue to run for approximately 30 seconds or even restart Vay SS after the engine has been turned off Stay ee fee A A PBB40 2596 31 clear of fan blades gt D 2 Lever for opening the hood 1 Hood lock release lever b gt Operation Engine compartment A If you see flames or smoke coming from the engine compartment or if the coolant tem perature gauge indicates that the engine is overheated do not open the hood Move away from vehicle and do not open the hood until the engine has cooled If necessary call the fire department Warning A The en
17. Operation Tires and wheels Example Combined Numberof Seating Occupants weight Combined Available cargo luggage and trailer weight limit occupants configura weight of all tongue weight total load limit or of occu driver and tion occupants vehicle capacity weight from plac pants and passengers ard minus combined weight of all cargo from occupants placard 1 1500 Ibs 4 front 2 Occupant 1 150 lbs 630 Ibs 1500 Ibs 630 Ibs 870 lbs Occupant 2 180 lbs rear 2 Occupant 3 160 lbs Occupant 4 140 lbs 2 1500 Ibs 3 front 1 Occupant 1 200 lbs 540 Ibs 1500 Ibs 540 Ibs 960 Ibs rear 2 Occupant 2 190 lbs Occupant 3 150 Ibs 3 1500 Ibs 1 front 1 Occupant 1 150 lbs 150 Ibs 1500 Ibs 150 Ibs 1350 Ibs The higher the weight of all occupants the less cargo and luggage load capacity is available For more information see Trailer tongue load gt page 338 Operation Tires and wheels Certification label Even after careful determination of the combined weight of all occupants cargo and the trailer tongue load if applicable gt page 338 as to not exceed the permis sible load limit you must make sure that your vehicle never exceeds the Gross Vehi cle Weight Rating GVWR and the Gross Axle Weight Rating GAWR for either the front or rear axle You can obtain the GVWR and GAWR from the Certification la bel The Certification Label can be found on the driver s door B pillar see Technical
18. The search stops Controls in detail Audio system Obtaining additional text information Storing stations Calling up the ESN information menu Additional text information artist title re Tune in desired station gt Press INF soft key ated eA Tem CAANG a eral gt Press and hold desired station button gt Press ESN soft key played l o l p INF soft k eet eee nici a brier signal toneis The twelve digit electronic serial num R REEDS SONKEN a ber ESN of the SAT tuner installed in The title being played is displayed The frequency is stored on the selected your vehicle is displayed gt Press INF soft key again STANON DURON gt Press RET soft key to exit the menu The radio saves the current station at the memory preset selected The mem ory preset selected appears in the sta Q tus line e g S3 If a button is not pressed within four seconds the radio will return to There are ten presets available the standard display The name of the artist performing the title being played is displayed An existing entry is overwritten in the memory list when a new entry Is given Controls in detail Audio system CD mode B l Warning A If you affix stickers to the CDs they can i m r he h h Safety precautions In order to avoid distraction which could eC conie a pen cee S MA i l develops in the CD drive or CD chang lead to an accident the driver should insert ae i CDs with the vehi
19. Warning A N Do not remove the cover 8 for the Bi Xe non headlamp Because of high voltage in xenon lamps it is dangerous to replace the bulb or repair the lamp and its components We recommend that you have such work done by a qualified technician 1 Bulb socket for turn signal lamp 2 Housing cover for high beam flasher parking and standing lamp 3 Housing cover for Bi Xenon headlamp P82 10 3291 31 Practical hints Replacing bulbs PB2 10 3696 31 4 Bulb holder for high beam flasher bulb Bulb socket for parking and standing lamp bulb Practical hints Replacing bulbs High beam bulb for high beam flasher gt Turn housing cover 2 counterclock wise and remove it Turn bulb holder 4 with the bulb coun terclockwise and remove it Pull the bulb at its socket out of bulb holder Insert the new bulb so that its socket locates in the recess of bulb holder and is level to it Reinsert bulb holder 4 with the bulb in the lamp and turn clockwise Align housing cover 2 and turn it clockwise Front turn signal lamp bulb gt Turn bulb socket Q counterclockwise and remove it gt Press gently onto the bulb and turn counterclockwise out of bulb socket Q gt Press the new bulb gently into bulb socket Q and turn clockwise until it engages gt Place bulb socket 1 back into the lamp and turn it clockwise Parking and standing lamp bulb
20. Do not park this vehicle in areas where combustible materials such as grass hay or leaves can come into contact with the hot exhaust system as these materials could be ignited and cause a vehicle fire Controls in detail Automatic transmission Warning A N When leaving the vehicle always remove the SmartKey or SmartKey with KEYLESS GO from the starter switch take it with you and lock the vehicle Do not leave children unat tended in the vehicle or with access to an unlocked vehicle Children could move the gear selector lever from position P which could result in an accident and or serious personal injury Controls in detail Automatic transmission Driving tips l Accelerator position Your driving style influences the transmission s shifting behavior Less throttle Earlier upshifting More throttle Later upshifting Kickdown Use kickdown when you want maximum acceleration gt Press the accelerator past the point of resistance The transmission shifts into a lower gear gt Ease on the accelerator when you have reached the desired speed The transmission shifts up again Stopping When you stop briefly e g at traffic lights gt Leave the transmission in gear gt Hold the vehicle with the brake When you stop longer with the engine idling and or on a hill gt Set the parking brake gt Move the gear selector lever to position P Maneuver
21. Operator s Manual CLK Class Cabriolet 2095849883 Order No 6515 1298 13 Part No 209 584 98 83 USA Edition A 2006 Operator s Manual CLK Class Cabriolet Mercedes Benz CLK 350 CLK 500 CLK 55 AMG Our company and staff congratulate you on the purchase of your new Mercedes Benz Your selection of our product is a demon stration of your trust in our company name Furthermore it exemplifies your desire to own an automobile that will be as easy as possible to operate and provide years of service Your Mercedes Benz represents the ef forts of many skilled engineers and crafts men To help assure your driving pleasure and also the safety of you and your passen gers we ask you to make a small invest ment of time Please read this manual carefully then return it to your vehicle where it will be handy for your reference e Please follow the recommendations contained in this manual They are de signed to acquaint you with the opera tion of your Mercedes Benz e Please pay attention to the warnings and cautions contained in this manual They are designed to help improve the safety of the vehicle operator and oc cupants We extend our best wishes for many miles of safe pleasurable driving Mercedes Benz USA LLC A DaimlerChrysler Company Introduction ccccceecececcsceceecees 9 Product information c ccccesesceceeees 9 Operators Manual ccccsseeeeceeeees 10 Ser
22. Possible cause consequence The fuel level has dropped below the re serve mark You are driving with the hood open You have forgotten to remove the SmartKey No additional code available for SmartKey or SmartKey with KEYLESS GO The SmartKey with KEYLESS GO batter les are discharged The SmartKey with KEYLESS GO is not recognized while the engine is running be cause e the SmartKey is not in the vehicle e there is strong radio frequency inter ference The SmartKey with KEYLESS GO is mo mentarily not recognized The KEYLESS GO system is malfunction ing Practical hints What to do if Possible solution gt Refuel at the next gas station gt page 318 gt Close the hood gt page 322 gt Remove the SmartKey from the start er switch gt Visit an authorized Mercedes Benz Center as soon as possible gt Change the batteries gt page 435 gt Stop the vehicle as soon as it is safe to do so gt Search for the SmartKey Otherwise the vehicle cannot be centrally locked nor can the engine be started again after the engine has been stopped gt Change the position of the SmartKey in the vehicle gt Operate the vehicle with the SmartKey in the starter switch if necessary gt Visit an authorized Mercedes Benz Center as soon as possible Practical hints What to do if Display symbol Display message Possible cause consequence Possible solution
23. The door windows are equipped with the ex press close and automatic reversal func tion If a door window encounters an obstruction that blocks its path in a circum stance where you pulled the switch past the resistance point and released it to close the window the automatic reversal function will stop the window and open it slightly Controls in detail Power windows If a door window encounters an obstruction that blocks its path in a circumstance where you are closing the window by pulling and holding the switch by pressing and holding button on the SmartKey by pressing and holding the lock button vehicles with KEYLESS GO on an outside door handle by operating the soft top switch or by press ing and holding button or EEJ on the climate control panel the automatic re versal function will not operate When leaving the vehicle always remove the SmartKey or SmartKey with KEYLESS GO from the starter switch take it with you and lock the vehicle Do not leave children unat tended in the vehicle or with access to an unlocked vehicle Unsupervised use of vehi cle equipment can cause an accident and or serious personal injury Controls in detail Power windows You can also open or close the win dows using the e Soft top switch gt page 254 e SmartKey Summer opening con venience feature gt page 252 Depending on current position the win dows may also open or close when e the
24. gt gt Turn the exterior lamp switch to position or BGR gt page 127 Push the combination switch in direction of arrow Q to switch on the high beam The high beam headlamp indicator lamp Ee in the instrument cluster comes on gt page 24 Pull the combination switch in direction of arrow 2 to its original position to switch off the high beam The high beam headlamp indicator lamp Ee in the instrument cluster goes out High beam flasher gt Pull the combination switch briefly in direction of arrow 2 Controls in detail Lighting Corner illuminating front fog lamps Sa nee a L E The corner illuminating front fog lamps im prove illumination of the road into which you are turning The corner illuminating front fog lamps will operate with the engine running and with e the exterior lamp switch in position gt page 127 or e the exterior lamp switch in position M gt page 127 or e the daytime running lamp mode activated gt page 129 Corner illuminating front fog lamps will only come on in low ambient lighting conditions The corner illuminating front fog lamps function is not available at a vehicle speed above 25 mph 40 km h Driving forward Switching on corner illuminating front fog lamps gt Depending on whether you are turning left or right switch on the left or right turn signal gt page 53 The respective front fog lamp comes on and il
25. gt Check the fuel cap gt page 318 If it is not closed properly gt Close the fuel cap If it is closed properly gt Have the fuel system checked by an autho rized Mercedes Benz Center gt After refuelling start turn off and restart the engine three or four times in succession The Limp Home mode is canceled You do not need to have your vehicle checked Practical hints What to do if Problem Possible cause consequence Suggested solution E The red coolant warning lamp There is insufficient coolant in the reservoir Add coolant to prevent engine from comes on when the engine is overheating gt page 327 running If this warning lamp comes on frequently gt Have the cooling system checked there is a leak in the cooling system If the coolant level is correct the electric ra If the coolant temperature is below diator fan may be broken 257 F 125 C you can continue driving to the nearest authorized Mercedes Benz Center gt Avoid high engine loads e g driving uphill and stop and go driving E The red coolant warning lamp The coolant temperature has exceeded gt Stop as soon as possible and allow comes on while driving and you 257 F 125 0 the engine and coolant to cool down hear a warning sound AN Steam from an overheated engine can cause Turn off the engine get out of the vehicle serious burns and can occur just by opening and do not stand near the vehicle until the the
26. gt Press and hold button until AUX appears in the display Telephone muting If your vehicle equipment includes a Mercedes Benz specified mobile tele phone you can adjust its volume sepa rately from the volume of the audio system while the telephone is being used Canceling AUX mode gt Press any audio source button Connecting an external audio source AUX to the radio An optional dealer installed cinch connec tor for connecting an external audio source may become available for your ve hicle model Feature description is based on preliminary information at time of print ing Contact an authorized Mercedes Benz Center for availability You can adjust the volume gt page 213 the sound settings gt page 213 and the volume distribution gt page 215 for the AUX input Radio operation Selecting radio mode gt Press button Calling up wavebands You can choose from among the FM AM and WB wavebands Weather band gt page 221 amp FM waveband AM waveband 87 7 107 9 mHz 930 1710 kHz Calling up wavebands for radios without SAT gt Press FM or AM soft key to switch be tween FM and AM The FM and AM wavebands are called up one after another or gt Press WB soft key The weather band menu is called up The waveband currently selected appears in the upper left hand corner of the display Controls in detail Audio system Calling up wavebands for r
27. gt page 453 Disconnect the battery negative lead from negative terminal 2 Remove cover 3 from the positive ter minal Disconnect the battery positive lead Charging and reinstalling the battery Warning A N Never charge a battery while still installed in the vehicle unless the accessory battery charge unit approved by Mercedes Benz is being used Gases may escape during charg ing and cause explosions that may result in paint damage corrosion or personal injury An accessory battery charge unit specially adapted for Mercedes Benz vehicles and tested and approved by Mercedes Benz is available permitting the charging of the bat tery in its installed position Contact an au thorized Mercedes Benz Center for information and availability Charge battery in accordance with the separate instruc tions for the accessory battery charger gt Charge battery in accordance with the instructions of the battery charger manufacturer Reinstall the charged battery Follow the previously described steps in reverse order The battery its filler caps and the vent tube must always be securely installed when the vehicle is in operation Reconnecting the battery Turn off all electrical consumers Remove SmartKey from starter switch Vehicles with KEYLESS GO gt Press the start stop button until the engine shuts off gt Open the drivers door Connect the battery positive lead and fasten its cover
28. including the spare should be checked monthly when cold and set to the recom mended tire inflation pressure as specified in the vehicle placard and owner s manual The recommended tire inflation pres sures for your vehicle can be found on the tire placard located on the driver s door B pillar gt page 333 The tire in flation pressures are not listed in the owner s manual Warning The Run Flat Indicator does not indicate a warning for wrongly selected tire inflation pressures Always adjust tire inflation pres sure according to the placard on the driver s door B pillar or fuel filler flap The Run Flat Indicator does not replace reg ular checks of the tire inflation pressures since a gradual pressure loss in all four tires cannot be detected by the Run Flat Indicator The Run Flat Indicator is not able to issue a warning due to a sudden dramatic loss of tire inflation pressure e g tire blowout caused by a foreign object In this case bring the vehicle to a halt by carefully apply ing the brakes and avoiding abrupt steering maneuvers Reactivating the Run Flat Indicator The tire inflation pressure monitor must be reactivated in the following situations e If you have changed the tire inflation pressure e If you have replaced the wheels or tires e If you have installed new wheels or tires gt Using the tire placard on the drivers door B pillar or if available the inside of the fuel
29. is a danger of steering gear damage Do not add steering oil without checking the steering system Do not drive the vehicle Have the system checked at an authorized Mercedes Benz Center as soon as possible Possible solution gt gt Lock the soft top again gt page 259 Open or close the soft top all the way Have the system checked at an autho rized Mercedes Benz Center as soon as possible Start the engine Pull over to the side of the road and re peat soft top operation while the vehi cle is stationary Have the system checked by an autho rized Mercedes Benz Center Practical hints What to do if Display symbol Display message Possible cause consequence Possible solution Function This display appears if button or Unavailable on the multifunction steering wheel is pressed and the vehicle is not equipped with a telephone Tire pressure The Run Flat Indicator indicates that the Carefully bring the vehicle to a halt Check tires pressure Is too low in one or more tires avoiding abrupt steering and braking maneuvers Observe the traffic situation around you gt Check and adjust tire inflation pres sure as required gt page 341 gt If necessary change the wheel gt page 446 gt Reactivate the Run Flat Indicator af ter adjusting the tire inflation pressure values gt page 343 Practical hints What to do if Display symbol Display message OS Trun
30. neath the vehicle This is normal and not an indication of a malfunction A If you turn off the cooling function the vehicle will not be cooled when weather conditions are warm The windows can fog up more quickly Window fogging may impair visibility and endanger you and others Warning Deactivating It is possible to deactivate the air condi tioning cooling function of the automatic climate control system The air in the vehicle will then no longer be cooled or dehumidified gt Press button or gt page 197 The indicator lamp on the button goes out The cooling function switches off after a short delay Activating Moist air can fog up the windows You can dehumidify the air with the air condi tioning gt Press button or gt page 197 again The indicator lamp on the button comes on The air conditioning uses the refrigerant R134a This refrigerant is free of CFCs which are harmful to the ozone layer If the air conditioning cannot be turned on again this indicates that the air conditioning is losing refrigerant The compressor has turned itself off Have the air conditioning checked at the nearest authorized Mercedes Benz Center Residual heat and ventilation Canada only With the engine switched off it is possible to continue to heat or ventilate the interior for up to 30 minutes This feature makes use of the residual heat produced by the engine How long the s
31. 2 Right button upshift o You cannot shift with the steering wheel gearshift buttons when the gear selector lever is in position P N or R The last selected program mode C or S is switched on when the engine is restarted in the automatic program mode The following instructions describe opera tion of the steering wheel gearshift control when driving in the automatic program mode C or S For instructions on operating the steering wheel gearshift control and gear selector lever in the manual program mode M see Manual shift program CLK 55 AMG gt page 178 Downshifting A On slippery road surfaces never downshift in order to obtain braking action This could result in drive wheel slip and reduced vehicle control Your vehicle s ABS will not prevent this type of loss of control Warning gt Briefly press button Q on the left side of the steering wheel The transmission will shift to the next lower gear as permitted by the shift program This action simultaneously limits the gear range of the transmission page 171 when you are driving in the automatic program mode C or S Upshifting gt Briefly press button 2 on the right side of the steering wheel The transmission will shift to the next higher gear as permitted by the shift program This action simultaneously extends the gear range of the transmission when you are driving in the automatic program mode C or S Cance
32. Controls in detail Control system Trip computer menu Use the trip computer menu to call up sta tistical data on your vehicle The following information is available Function Page Fuel consumption statistics after 161 start Fuel consumption statistics 162 since last reset Call up range distance to empty 163 Fuel consumption statistics after start gt Press button or repeatedly until the first function of the trip com puter menu appears in the multifunc tion display gt Press button JM or Keg repeatedly until the message After start appears in the multifunction display bb Controls in detail Control system After start 2 30h 150M 6O0mph 18 4mpqg 4 2 F P54 32 2278 31 149 8 MI 1 Distance driven since start 2 Time elapsed since start 3 Average speed since start 4 Average fuel consumption since start I All statistics stored since the last engine start will be reset approximately four hours after the SmartKey in the starter switch is turned to position 0 or removed from the starter switch Resetting will not occur if you turn the SmartKey back to position 1 or 2 within this time period Fuel consumption since last reset gt Press button or repeatedly until the first function of the trip com puter menu appears in the multifunction display gt Press button JM or Keg repeatedly until the message After reset appears in the multifunction
33. Letter P preceding the size designation Passenger car tire based on U S design standards Letter LT preceding the size designation Light Truck tire based on U S design standards Letter T preceding the size designation Temporary spare tires which are high pressure compact spares designed for temporary emergency use only Tire width The tire width G gt page 346 indicates the nominal tire width in mm Aspect ratio The aspect ratio 2 gt page 346 is the dimensional relationship between tire section height and section width and is expressed in percentage The aspect ratio is arrived at by dividing section height by section width Tire code The tire code gt page 346 indicates the tire construction type The R stands for radial tire type Letter D means diag onal or bias ply construction letter B means belted bias ply construction At the tire manufacturer s option any tire with a speed capability above 149 mph 240 km h can include a ZR in the size designation for example 245 40 ZR 18 For additional information see Tire speed rating gt page 348 Rim diameter The rim diameter 4 gt page 346 is the diameter of the bead seat not the diameter of the rim edge Rim diameter is indicated in inches in Tire load rating The tire load rating gt page 346 is a numerical code associated with the maximum load a tire can support
34. NJ 07645 0350 Introduction Operator s Manual Maintenance The Maintenance Booklet describes all the necessary maintenance work which should be performed at regular intervals Always have the Maintenance Booklet with you when you take the vehicle to your authorized Mercedes Benz Center for ser vice The service advisor will record each service in the booklet for you Roadside Assistance The Mercedes Benz Roadside Assistance Program provides factory trained technical help in the event of a breakdown Calls to the toll free Roadside Assistance number 1 800 FOR MERCedes in the USA 1 800 387 0100 in Canada will be answered by Mercedes Benz Customer Assistance Representatives 24 hours a day 365 days a year For additional information refer to the Mercedes Benz Roadside Assistance Program Brochure in your vehicle literature portfolio Change of address or ownership If you change your address be sure to send in the Change of Address Notice found in the Service and Warranty Information Booklet or simply call the Mercedes Benz Customer Assistance Center in the USA at 1 800 FOR MERCedes or Customer Service in Canada at 1 800 387 0100 It is in your own interest that we can contact you should the need arise If you sell your Mercedes please leave all literature with the vehicle to make it avail able to the next operator If you bought this vehicle used be sure to send in the
35. Stop engine off as it is safe to do so and immediately turn off the engine gt Check the poly V belt If it is broken gt Do not continue to drive Otherwise the en gine will overheat due to an inoperative water pump which may result in damage to the en gine Notify an authorized Mercedes Benz Center If it is intact gt Do not continue to drive the vehicle with this message displayed Doing so could result in serious engine damage that is not covered by the Mercedes Benz Limited Warranty gt Drive immediately to the nearest authorized Mercedes Benz Center vy Coolant The cooling fan for the coolant is mal Observe the coolant temperature display RENE a ulate Fela Have the fan replaced as soon as possible Practical hints What to do if Display symbol Display message Check gas cap see Oper s Man Display malfunction Visit workshop Display defective Visit workshop Doors open Possible cause consequence A loss of pressure has been detected in the fuel system The fuel cap may not be closed properly or the fuel system may be leaky The instrument cluster display is malfunc tioning The displays for several systems have malfunctioned Some systems them selves may also have malfunctioned Certain electronic systems are unable to relay information to the control system The following systems may have failed e Coolant temperature display e Tachometer e Cruise contr
36. The override switch is located on the door control panel of the driver s door z na P54 75 4065 31 1 Deactivating override switch 2 Activating override switch 3 Override switch A Activate the override switch when children are riding in the back seats of the vehicle The children may otherwise injure them selves e g by becoming trapped in the win dow opening Warning When leaving the vehicle always remove the SmartKey or SmartKey with KEYLESS GO from the starter switch take it with you and lock the vehicle Do not leave children unat tended in the vehicle or with access to an unlocked vehicle Unsupervised use of vehi cle equipment can cause an accident and or serious personal injury Safety and Security Occupant safety Activating override switch gt Slide override switch 3 to the right in direction 2 The rear side windows can no longer be operated using the respective switch located in the rear trim panels Operation of the rear side windows with the switches located on the door control panel of the driver s door is still possible Deactivating override switch gt Slide override switch 8 to the left in direction Q The rear side windows can be operated using the respective switch located in the rear trim panels For more information see Power win dows gt page 249 Safety and Security Panic alarm An audible alarm and fl
37. Trunk lid Releasing from inside 115 Trunk lid Unlocking 420 Unlocking locking the vehicle 419 420 Emergency tensioning device see ETD Emergency In case of Battery Jump starting 292 456 First aid kit 413 Flat tire Changing 446 Fuses 462 Hazard warning flasher 133 Roadside Assistance 12 Towing the vehicle 458 Emission control 316 Emission control information label 468 Emission control vacuum line routing diagram label 468 Emission system warranties 10 Engine Belt layout 469 Block heater Canada only 360 Break in recommendations 306 Cleaning 366 Compartment 321 Malfunction indicator lamp 25 376 Maximum engine speed 470 Messages in display 397 Number 468 488 Starting 48 Starting difficulties 50 Starting with KEYLESS GO 49 Starting with SmartKey 49 Technical data 470 Turning off 58 Turning off with KEYLESS GO 59 Turning off with SmartKey 58 Engine coolant see Coolant Engine oil 322 481 Adding 325 481 Additives 481 Changing 325 481 Checking level 320 Checking level Dipstick 324 Consumption 322 Fillercap 326 Filler neck 326 Messages in display 323 401 Viscosity 488 Engine oil level 320 323 ESP 25 89 488 Messages in display 387 388 Warning lamp 378 ETD 72 488 Safety guidelines 66 Exterior rear view mirrors 43 181 Parking position 161 183 F Filler cap Engine oil 326 Filler neck Engine oil 326 First aid kit 413 Flat tire 446 Jacking up the vehicle 447 Lowering the vehic
38. cord and number of plies in the sidewall and under the tread Accessory weight The combined weight in excess of those standard items which may be replaced of automatic transmission power steering power brakes power windows power seats radio and heater to the extent that these items are available as factory installed equipment whether installed or not Air pressure The amount of air inside the tire pressing outward on each square inch of the tire Air pressure is expressed in pounds per square inch psi or kilopascal kPa or bars Aspect ratio Dimensional relationship between tire section height and section width expressed in percentage Tire and loading terminology Bar Another metric unit for air pressure There are 14 5038 pounds per square inch psi to 1 bar there are 100 kilopascals kPa to 1 bar Bead The tire bead contains steel wires wrapped by steel cords that hold the tire onto the rim Cold tire inflation pressure Tire inflation pressure when your vehicle has been sitting for at least three hours or driven no more than one mile 1 6 km Curb weight The weight of a motor vehicle with stan dard equipment including the maximum capacity of fuel oil and coolant and if so equipped air conditioning and additional optional equipment but without passen gers and cargo Operation Tires and wheels DOT Department of Transportation A tire branding symbol
39. data gt page 468 Gross Vehicle Weight Rating GVWR The total weight of the vehicle all occupants all cargo and the trailer tongue load gt page 338 must never exceed the GVWR Gross Axle Weight Rating GAWR The to tal allowable weight that can be carried by a single axle front or rear To assure that your vehicle does not ex ceed the maximum permissible weight limits GVWR and GAWR for front and rear axle have the loaded vehicle including driver passengers and all cargo and if ap plicable trailer fully loaded weighed on a suitable commercial scale Trailer tongue load The tongue load of any trailer is an impor tant weight to measure because it affects the load you can carry in your vehicle If a trailer is towed the tongue load must be added to the weight of all occupants riding and any cargo you are carrying in the vehicle The tongue load typically is ten percent of the trailer weight and every thing loaded in it Your Mercedes Benz has been designed primarily to carry passengers and their cargo Mercedes Benz does not recom mend trailer towing with your vehicle Recommended tire inflation pressure A Warning Follow recommended tire inflation pressures Do not underinflate tires Underinflated tires wear excessively and or unevenly adversely affect handling and fuel economy and are more likely to fail from being over heated Do not overinflate tires Overinflated
40. e after 5 minutes if the outside temperature is below approximately 41 F 5 C e after 5 minutes if the air condition ing is turned off e after 30 minutes if the outside temperature is above approximately 41 F 5 C If you press and hold button R the side windows will return to their previ Ous position A side window will only return to its pre vious position if it has not been moved to another position using the respec tive side window switch after it was closed with button fy A side win dow that was moved will remain in its current position if button fey is used to re open the remaining side windows Charcoal filter An activated charcoal filter markedly reduces bad odors and removes pollutants from air entering the passenger compart ment The charcoal filter can be activated or deactivated The system switches automatically to the air recirculation mode if the e charcoal filter is switched on e carbon monoxide CO or nitrogen oxide NOx concentration of the out side air increases beyond a predeter mined level o The automatic air recirculation mode does not function if the A C indicator lamp on button or not lit mode is deactivated or if the outside temperature has fallen below 41 F 5 C Activating gt Press button EY gt page 197 The indicator lamp on the button comes on a If you press and hold button JE the side windows will close The activated char
41. eee eeeeeeeees 134 Door entry lamps ccceeeeeeees 135 Tr nk lamp asescdesshiacerecssesvsawwencoans 135 Instrument CIUStEP cece ceeeeeee ees 136 Instrument cluster illumination 136 Coolant temperature indicator 137 Trip odometer ssessseessenssensseessee k37 TACNOMEtel cccceeeecceeesceeeeesees 138 Outside temperature indicator 138 Control system cccccssseceeseeseeeees 139 Multifunction display 068 140 Multifunction steering wheel 140 MENUS a ciacasenetvoseeutmnesenennesemuanveaecess 142 Standard display menu 144 AUDIO TCO Gis itssiessoinsidscdesiteagrassavenes 145 NAV MO NU cccccessecceeseeceees 146 Vehicle status message memory menu 146 Settings MENU seccccccesesceeeees 148 Trip computer MeNU 00cc08 161 TELMEC gonst An 163 Automatic transmission ssseesee 166 Gear selector lever position 168 Driving THOS sccstosttasanceaienenseurdeasnast 170 Gear ranges onein 171 Automatic shift program 172 Gear selector lever one touch gearshifting 173 Steering wheel gearshift control one touch gearshifting 174 Manual shift program 0 El Go oe Cerrone er weer epee ete 178 Emergency operation Limp Home Mode 0006 180 GOOd VISIBILITY eanne asad iaetetocts 181 Headlamp cleaning system 181 Rear VIEW MIITOMS
42. firmly set parking brake and block wheels before raising vehicle with jack Do not disengage parking brake while the vehicle is raised Be certain that the jack is always vertical plumb line when in use especially on hills Always try to use the jack on a level surface Make sure the jack arm is fully seated in the jack take up bracket Always lower the vehicle onto sufficient capacity jackstands before working under the vehicle Practical hints Flat tire P40 10 4276 31 P40 10 42 77 31 P40 00 2040 31 C Wheel wrench 2 Jack gt Jack up the vehicle until the wheel is a 3 Take up bracket maximum of 1 2 in 3 cm from the gt On wheel to be changed loosen but do not yet remove the wheel bolts ap p gt Place jack 2 on firm ground proximately one full turn with wrench ground Never start engine while vehicle is raised gt Position jack 2 under take up The jack take up brackets are located di bracket so that it is always vertical TE E rectly behind the front wheel housings and plumb line as seen from the side es AN in front of the rear wheel housings snr the vehicle is parked on an Teen ne incline cle briefly for wheel changes It is not suited for performing maintenance work under the vehicle e Never start the engine when the vehicle is raised e Never lie down under the raised vehicle Removing the wheel Mounting the spare wheel P40 1044278 31 1 Alignment bolt
43. gt Unscrew upper most wheel bolt and remove Replace this wheel bolt with alignment bolt Q supplied in the tool kit Remove the remaining bolts Do not place wheel bolts in sand or dirt This could result in damage to the bolt and wheel hub threads Remove the wheel P40 10 3165 31 1 Wheel bolt for light alloy rims 2 Wheel bolt for Minispare wheel located in trunk with Minispare wheel H Wheel bolts 2 must be used when mounting the Minispare wheel or other steel rims The use of any wheel bolts other than wheel bolts 2 for the Minispare wheel will physically damage the vehicle s brakes Practical hints Flat tire Clean contact surfaces of wheel and wheel hub To avoid paint damage place wheel flat against hub and hold it there while in stalling first wheel bolt Practical hints Flat tire Warning A N Always replace wheel bolts that are dam aged or rusted Never apply oil or grease to wheel bolts EN Damaged wheel hub threads should be re paired immediately Do not continue to drive under these circumstances Contact an au P40 10427 9 31 Pao 104280 31 thorized Mercedes Benz Center or call o d A E gt Guide the spare wheel onto the align gt Unscrew the alignment bolt install last l ment bolt and push it on wheel bolt and tighten slightly Incorrect wheel bolts or improperly tight ened wheel bolts can cause the wheel to Insert wheel b
44. page 434 Safety and Security Occupant safety Roll bars A Make sure nothing is blocking the roll bars path of motion Otherwise someone could be injured when the roll bars are raised The head restraints should therefore always be in the raised position when the rear seat is occupied page 120 Warning The roll bars are integrated into the rear head restraints The roll bars raise automatically in an acci dent or in a critical driving situation When the roll bars are raised automati cally you will hear a ratcheting sound and the rear head restraints will also rise You can manually lower the roll bars again when the soft top is open gt page 424 With the soft top closed contact an autho rized Mercedes Benz Center to have the roll bars lowered Do not attempt to lower the roll bars manually with the soft top closed Lowering the roll bars manually with the soft top closed may impair the function of the roll bars You cannot lower the rear head restraints with the rear head restraint lowering switch gt page 120 when the roll bars are in the raised position Also you cannot operate the soft top using the soft top switch when the roll bars are in the raised position e lf the soft top is open you can man ually lower the roll bars gt page 424 e If the soft top is closed contact an authorized Mercedes Benz Center to have the roll bars lowered A If th
45. ronmental or topographic conditions and other things beyond the service provider s or our control Service might also not be available in certain places e g in tunnels parking garages or within or next to buildings or near oth Boe technologies Program categories The channels are categorized Categories allow you to tune to stations broadcasting a certain type of program category mode gt page 225 Calling up the SAT main menu gt Press SAT soft key SAT is displayed in the upper left hand corner of the display Prior to activation of the satellite radio service gt page 223 After activation of satellite radio ser vice gt page 223 Prior to activation of the satellite radio service P82 60 4463 31 The telephone number of the SIRIUS Service Center 888 539 7474 is dis played gt Press ESN soft key The twelve digit electronic serial num ber ESN of the SAT tuner installed in your vehicle is displayed This information is required to call the SIRIUS Service Center for an activation re quest Credit card information may also be re quired for your application The activation process takes approxi mately five to ten minutes after calling the SIRIUS Service Center After activation of the satellite radio ser vice The satellite radio main menu appears The radio station selected last is audible provided it can be received Controls in detail Audio s
46. stored when e the ignition is switched off e the position is stored in memory gt page 125 With the easy entry exit feature activated the steering wheel tilts upwards when you e remove the SmartKey from the starter switch or e open the driver s door with the SmartKey in starter switch position 0 or 1 or the KEYLESS GO start stop button gt page 35 in position 1 If the current position for the steering wheel is in the uppermost tilt position the steering wheel will no longer be able to move upward when the easy entry exit feature is activated Repositioning of the steering wheel e will be halted briefly when you start the vehicle e will stop if you start the vehicle and set off immediately A Let the system complete the adjustment procedure before setting the vehicle in motion All steering wheel adjustment must be completed before setting the vehicle in motion Driving off with the steering wheel still adjusting could cause the driver to lose control of the vehicle Warning Mirrors Adjust the interior and exterior rear view mirrors before driving so that you have a good view of the road and traffic condi tions A In case of an accident liquid electrolyte may escape the mirror housing if the mirror glass breaks Warning Electrolyte has an irritating effect Do not al low the liquid to come into contact with eyes skin clothing or respiratory system In case it doe
47. temporarily deactivated The brake system is still functioning normally but without the systems specified above Practical hints What to do if Possible solution gt Continue driving with added caution gt Visit an authorized Mercedes Benz Center as soon as possible Failure to follow these instructions increases the risk of an accident As soon as the brakes have cooled off the electronic traction system switches on again The display will clear after driving a short distance at more than 12 mph 20 km h Practical hints What to do if Display message ESP unavailable see Operator s Manual malfunction Visit workshop Display malfunction Visit workshop Possible cause consequence The charging voltage has fallen below 10 volts The battery might not be charged sufficiently The ESP BAS and the Run Flat Indicator are deactivated The brake system is still functioning normally but without the systems specified above The ESP is deactivated because of a malfunction The ESP BAS and the Run Flat Indicator are deactivated The brake system is still functioning normally but without the systems specified above The ESP or the ESP display is malfunctioning Possible solution gt Continue driving with added caution gt If necessary have the generator and battery checked When the voltage is above this value again the ESP is operational again
48. 122 Memory function 124 Ventilation 123 Selector lever see Gear selector lever Self test OCS 82 Tele Aid 290 service and Warranty Booklet Loss of 467 Service and warranty information 10 Service intervals see Maintenance Service indicator Service life Tires 331 service see Maintenance Service System see Maintenance service system U S vehicles or FSS Canada vehicles Service Parts 466 Settings Control system menus 142 Control system submenus 143 Date 154 155 Factory KEYLESS GO 103 Factory SmartKey 98 Global KEYLESS GO 103 Global SmartKey 98 Individual vehicle 148 Memory function 124 Menus and submenus 141 Resetting all Control system 148 Selective KEYLESS GO 104 Selective SmartKey 98 Time 153 154 Shelf below rear window Cleaning 371 Shift lever position indicator 167 Shift lock 491 Shift program mode Shifting Gear selector lever 48 166 Gear selector lever positions 168 Shifting Automatic transmission Side marker lamps Cleaning lenses 369 Messages in display 407 Replacing bulbs 438 439 Side windows see Power windows Sidewall 356 Ski sack Canada only 273 Removing 276 Ski sack roller blind 273 276 Unfolding and loading 273 Unloading and folding 275 SmartKey see Key SmartKey 96 SmartKey with KEYLESS GO see KEYLESS GO Snow chains 360 Snow tires 359 172 178 51 166 Soft top 255 491 Cleaning 367 Emergency operations 425 433 Locking after raising lowering 259 Luggage cover 262 M
49. 232 218 232 Controls in detail Audio system Button and soft key operation In these instructions the alphanumeric keypad right side of radio panel and the function buttons left side of radio panel are referred to as buttons The four keys below the display panel are referred to as soft keys Do not press directly in the display face Otherwise the display will be damaged Operation Switching the unit on off Switching on gt or If the radio is switched on without the key in the starter switch it will automatically switch off again after approx 30 minutes If your vehicle is equipped with a telephone the display may prompt you to enter your PIN GSM network or code TDMA or CDMA network Turn the SmartKey in the starter switch to position 1 or 2 If the audio system was on as you removed the SmartKey from the starter switch the audio system will automatically come back on as you turn the SmartKey to position 1 or 2 Switching off gt Remove SmartKey from starter switch or gt Press button Should excessively high temperatures occur while the audio system is being operated the display will dim If tem peratures continue to rise HIGH TEMP will appear in the display after which the audio system will be switched off for a cooling down period Press button Adjusting the volume gt Turn rotary control of button The volume will
50. 376 379 136 136 153 At a glance Multifunction steering wheel Item Page Multifunction display 140 Operating control system 140 Selecting the submenu or setting the volume Press button up to increase E down to decrease 3 Telephone Press button to take a call 164 to dial a call 164 to end a call 164 to reject an incoming call Item 4 Menu systems Press button for next menu for previous menu Moving within a menu Press button Wag for next display B for previous display Page Y Center console Upper part _ P68 20 3471 31 Oo Item Seat heater drivers side Seat ventilation driver s side Parktronic system deacti vation switch Canada only ESP control switch Hazard warning flasher switch switching on off Central unlocking switch Central locking switch Switch for lowering rear seat head restraints Tow away alarm switch Anti theft alarm system indicator lamp Page 122 123 272 89 133 118 118 120 94 94 At a glance Center console Item Seat heater passenger side Seat ventilation passenger side Front passenger front air bag off indicator lamp Audio system or COMAND see separate operating instructions Climate control CLK 350 Automatic climate control CLK 500 CLK 55 AMG Rear window defroster Page 122 123 81 381 145 186 196 185
51. 408 Night security illumination 129 Replacing bulbs 440 443 Switch 52 127 Headliner and shelf below rear window Cleaning andcare of 371 Head thorax airbag 68 489 Heated seats 122 High beam flasher Replacing bulbs Bi Xenon Replacing bulbs Halogen 438 440 High beam headlamps 52 131 Indicator lamp 25 Messages in display 405 Replacing bulbs Bi Xenon Replacing bulbs Halogen 438 440 Replacing bulbs for high beam flasher Bi Xenon 442 92 T31 438 442 438 439 Switching on 52 131 High mounted brake lamp 439 Hood 321 Message in display 403 Horn 23 Hydroplaning 311 Identification labels 468 Identification number Vehicle VIN Ignition with KEYLESS GO 36 with SmartKey 34 Immobilizer 92 Indicator lamps see Lamps indicator and warning Infant and child restraint systems see Children in the vehicle 75 Inflation pressure see Tires Inflation pressure Inside door handle 30 107 Instrument cluster 24 136 489 Cleaning 371 Illumination brightness Lamps in 374 380 Messages in display see Multifunction display messages 468 136 Multifunction display 140 Instrument lighting see Instrument cluster Illumination brightness Instrument panel see Instrument cluster Instruments and controls see Cockpit Interior lighting 134 Delayed shut off 159 Interior rear view mirror Antiglare position Auto dimming 182 Interior storage spaces see Storage compartments J Jack 415 Jacking up the vehicle
52. 438 Bulbs 438 439 Bulbs Bi Xenon 442 Bulbs Halogen 441 Bulbs rear 443 Cleaning lenses 369 Indicator lamps 25 Turning off engine 58 U Uniform Tire Quality Grading Standards 357 Units Settings Speedometer 151 Unleaded gasoline Premium 482 Upholstery Cleaning 372 Useful features 278 V Vacuum line routing diagram label Vehicle Battery 328 453 Break in the vehicle 306 Care 364 Control system Settings menu Dimensions 478 Jump starting 456 Locking unlocking KEYLESS GO 33 60 100 Locking unlocking SmartKey 32 60 96 Lowering 451 Modifications and alterations Operating safety 16 Towing 458 Unlocking locking in an emergency 419 420 Washing 366 Weights 478 Vehicle capacity weight 357 468 148 Vehicle identification number see VIN Vehicle jack 415 448 Vehicle lighting 127 320 Vehicle loading Instructions 277 333 Load limit 333 Terminology 355 Vehicle maximum load on the tire 357 Vehicle recovery services Stolen Tele Aid 296 Vehicle status message memory 146 Vehicle status messages 383 Vehicle system settings Control system 139 Vehicle tool kit 413 Vehicle washing 366 VIN 468 492 W Warning indicators Parktronic system Canada only 271 Warning sounds Parking brake 51 Parktronic system Canada only 271 272 Seat belt telltale 71 Warranty coverage 10 467 Washer fluid see Windshield washer fluid Washer reservoir level 480 Washing the vehicle 366 Wear pattern Tires 358 Wei
53. Attempting to play CDs with an eight cm diameter or playing such CDs with an adapter may cause damage to the CD drive Such dam age is not covered by the Mercedes Benz Limited Warranty Should excessively high or low tempera tures occur while in CD changer mode CD TEMP will appear in the display and the CD will be muted until the temperature has reached an acceptable level for the system to continue operation The single CD player and the CD changer play audio CDs Tips on handling CDs e Handle CDs carefully to prevent inter ference during playback e Avoid scratches fingerprints and dust on the CDs e Donot write on CDs or apply any labels or other material to them e Clean CDs from time to time with a commercially available cleaning cloth Never wipe the CD in a circular motion instead wipe it in a straight line start ing in the center and moving outward Do not use solvents anti static sprays etc for cleaning e Replace the CD in its case after use e Protect CDs from heat and direct sun light Operating the single CD player in the audio system unit Loading a CD The single CD player in the audio system unit has capacity for one CD The CD slot for loading the drive is located underneath the soft keys gt Make sure the system is switched on gt Insert CD into CD slot The label side of the CD must face upwards The system automatically pulls the CD into the CD slot The audio CD
54. Benz 325 0 Anticorrosion Anti freeze agent 49 F 45 C 4 1 US gt 3 9 1 7 0 US gt 6 61 Model Approx freeze protection 35 F 37 C CLK 350 3 75 US qi 3551 CLK 500 6 4 US qt 6 0 I CLK 55 AMG 6 4 US qt 6 0 I 7 0 US gt 6 61 Technical data Fuels coolants lubricants etc Before the start of the winter season or once a year in hot southern regions you should have the anticorrosion antifreeze concentration checked The coolant is also regularly checked each time you bring your vehicle to an authorized Mercedes Benz Center for service Technical data Fuels coolants lubricants etc Windshield washer system and headlamp cleaning system Both the windshield washer and headlamp cleaning system are supplied from the windshield washer fluid reservoir The washer fluid reservoir has a capacity of approx 6 4 US qt 6 0 I gt Refill the reservoir with MB Windshield Washer Concentrate S and water or concentrate and commercially avail able premixed windshield washer solvent antifreeze depending on ambient temperatures Warning A N Washer solvent antifreeze is highly flam mable Do not spill washer solvent antifreeze on hot engine parts be cause it may ignite and burn You could be seriously burned Windshield and headlamp washer fluid mixing ratio For temperatures above freezing point use MB Windshield Washer Concentrate S and water e p
55. Control system Setting automatic locking Use this function to activate or deactivate the automatic central locking With the automatic central locking system activated the vehicle is centrally locked at vehicle speeds of approximately 9 mph 15 km h gt Move the selection marker with button or MBM to the Vehicle submenu gt Press button JM or Keg repeatedly until the message Automatic door lock appears in the multifunction display The selection marker is on the current setting Automatic door lock OFF oF on 149 8 MI P54 32 2088 31 gt Press button or E to switch the automatic central locking on or off Controls in detail Control system Convenience submenu Access the Convenience submenu via the Settings menu Use the Convenience sub menu to change the settings for a number of convenience features The following functions are available Function Page Activating easy entry exit 160 feature Setting parking position for exte 161 rior rear view mirror Activating easy entry exit feature Use this function to activate and deacti vate the easy entry exit feature gt page 42 Warning J You must make sure no one can become trapped or injured by the moving steering wheel when the easy entry exit feature is activated To cancel steering wheel movement do one of the following e Move the steering column stalk gt page 41 e Press the memory position
56. Fuel filler flap In case the central locking system does not release the fuel filler flap you can open it manually Warning A N If you operate the emergency release but ton be careful of the sharp edges so that you do not injure yourself gt Open trunk lid gt Remove the side trim from the The release button is on the right hand right hand side of the luggage compart side of the luggage compartment behind ment the side trim gt Reach inside through opening in di rection of arrow gt Turnrelease knob Q clockwise arrow as far as will go The fuel filler flap is released and can be opened from outside gt Open the fuel filler flap from outside Unlocking locking in an emergency Manually unlocking the gear selector Center armrest design B lever Pr In case of power failure the gear selector lever can be manually unlocked e g to tow the vehicle The gear selector lever is locked again when moving it to position P gt Inserta tool e g flat blade screw Center armrest design A driver into the opening gt Pull the tab Q of the covering back in direction of the center armrest com partment gt Open the storage compartment under Perform the following two steps simul the center armrest gt page 281 taneously ae gt Insert a tool e g flat blade screw driver into the opening gt Press tool 2 forward in the direction of the ar
57. Mercedes Benz Center to have the roll bars lowered Multicontour seat The multicontour seat has a movable seat cushion and inflatable air cushions built into the backrest to provide additional lumbar and side support The seat cushion movement backrest cushion height and curvature can be continuously varied with switches on the side of the seat after switching on ignition Controls in detail Seats Seat cushion depth gt Adjust the seat cushion depth to the length of your upper leg using switch Q Backrest contour gt Adjust the contour of the backrest to the desired position using switches 2 a and 3 1 Seat cushion depth 2 Backrest bottom Backrest side bolsters 3 Backrest center gt Adjust the backrest side bolsters so 4 Side bolster adjustment that they provide good lateral support gt Switch on the ignition gt page 36 using switch Controls in detail Seats Seat heating Both switches for the front seats are located in the center console a 1 Seat heating switch P5 4 25 4752 31 The red indicator lamps on the switch show which heating level you have select ed Level 3 Three indicator lamps on highest level After approximately five minutes seat heating is automatically switched to level 2 2 Two indicator lamps on After approximately ten minutes seat heating is automatically switched to l
58. Mercedes Benz models are available Genuine Mercedes Benz parts are subject ed to stringent quality inspections Each part has been specifically developed man ufactured or selected for and adapted to Mercedes Benz vehicles Therefore Genuine Mercedes Benz parts should be installed The use of non genuine Mercedes Benz parts and accessories not authorized by Mercedes Benz could damage the vehicle which is not covered by the Mercedes Benz Limited Warranty or could compromise the vehicle s dura bility or safety Y Warranty coverage Your vehicle is covered under the terms of Replacement parts and accessories are the warranties printed in the Service and covered by the Mercedes Benz Parts and Warranty Information booklet Your autho Accessories warranties copies of which rized Mercedes Benz Center will exchange are available at any Mercedes Benz or repair any defective parts originally in Center stalled in the vehicle in accordance with the terms of the following warranties New Vehicle Limited Warranty Emission System Warranty Emission Performance Warranty California Maine Massachusetts and Vermont Emission Control Systems Warranty Technical data Warranty coverage Loss of Service and Warranty Information Booklet Should you lose your Service and Warranty Information booklet have an authorized Mercedes Benz Center arrange for a replacement It will be mailed to you Technical data Ide
59. Otherwise the tire will be underinflated Warning A N Follow recommended tire inflation pressures Do not underinflate tires Underinflated tires wear excessively and or unevenly adversely affect handling and fuel economy and are more likely to fail from being over heated Do not overinflate tires Overinflated tires can adversely affect handling and ride comfort wear unevenly increase stopping distance and result in sudden deflation blowout because they are more likely to become punctured or damaged by road debris potholes etc Do not overload the tires by exceeding the specified load limit or vehicle capacity weight as indicated on the placard on the driver s door B pillar Overloading the tires can overheat them possibly causing a blowout Operation Tires and wheels Checking tire inflation pressure manually Follow the steps below to achieve correct tire inflation pressure gt Remove the cap from the valve on one tire gt Firmly press a tire gauge onto the valve gt Read tire inflation pressure on tire gauge and check against the recom mended tire inflation pressure on the placard on the driver s door B pillar gt page 339 If necessary add air to achieve the recommended tire inflation pressure If you have overfilled the tire release tire inflation pressure by pushing the metal stem of the valve with e g a tip of a pen Then recheck the tire inflation pressure wi
60. SmartKey with KEYLESS GO Replacement batteries Lithium type CR 2025 or equivalent gt Remove the mechanical key gt page 419 gt Insert the mechanical key in side open ing and push grey slide gt page 436 The battery compartment is unlatched gt Pullthe battery compartment out of the housing gt page 436 P80 35 2160 31 1 Battery 2 Tilt battery up 3 Mechanical key gt Using mechanical key apply pressure to position 2 Battery Q tilts up slightly gt Pull batteries out in direction of arrow Practical hints Replacing SmartKey batteries Using a lint free cloth insert new batteries Q under the contact spring with the positive terminal side facing up Return battery compartment into hous ing until it locks into place Slide mechanical key back into the SmartKey Check the operation of the SmartKey and the KEYLESS GO Practical hints Replacing bulbs Safe vehicle operation depends on proper Bulbs Front lamps exterior lighting and signaling It is there fore essential that all bulbs and lamp Lamp Type assemblies are in good working order at all Q Additional turn signal LED times lamp Correct headlamp adjustment is extremely Turn signal lamp 1156 NA important Have headlamps checked and Halogen headlamp readjusted at regular intervals and when a Boa hea H7 55 W bulb has been replaced See an authorized Mercedes Benz Center for
61. System U S vehicles 361 Resetting service indicator 363 Service indicator 361 Service term exceeded 362 Maintenance system U S vehicles 361 489 Manual headlamp mode see Headlamps Manual shift program 178 MAXCOOL maximum cooling 202 Maximum load rating Tires 356 Maximum loaded vehicle weight Tire inflation pressure 356 Maximum tire inflation pressure 356 Mechanical key 419 Memory function see Seats Power Menus see Control system menus Microphone Hands free 29 Minispare wheel see Spare wheel Mirrors Adjusting 43 Antiglare position 181 Auto dimming 182 Exterior rear view mirrors 43 Parking position 126 161 183 Interior rear view mirror 43 MOE see MOExtended MOE tires see MOExtended system MOExtended 490 MOExtended system 452 MON 319 489 Motor Octane Number see MON Multicontour seat see Seats Multicontour Multifunction display 140 490 Changing settings see Control system menus and Control system submenus Displaying gear range 171 Selecting language 151 Symbol messages 395 412 Text messages 385 393 Multifunction display messages 383 ABS 385 Battery 395 Brake fluid 396 Brake lamp 404 Brake pads 396 Check engine 397 Coolant 397 399 Display 400 Doors 400 Engine 397 Engine coolant 397 399 Engine oil 323 401 ESP 387 388 Foglamps 405 Front passenger front airbag 389 392 Fuel cap 400 Fuel reserve tank 403 Gear selector lever 393 Headlamps 404 408 Hood 403 Key SmartKey 403 KEYLESS GO 4
62. T Key recognized A SmartKey with KEYLESS GO leftinthe gt Take the SmartKey out of the vehicle in venicle vehicle was recognized while locking the vehicle from the outside Key This display appears fora maximum of gt Insert SmartKey in the starter switch do not forget key 60 seconds if the driver s door is opened gt Take the SmartKey with with the engine shut off and no SmartKey KEYLESS GO with you when leaving in the starter switch the vehicle Message Is only a reminder ACILIVe LIC SySvel The Bi Xenon cornering lamps systemis gt Visit an authorized Mercedes Benz currently malfunctioning Center as soon as possible unavailable Active Light System The Bi Xenon cornering lamps system is gt Visit an authorized Mercedes Benz malfunction malfunctioning Center as soon as possible Drive to workshop Active Light System The active headlamps are malfunctioning gt Visit an authorized Mercedes Benz Substitute bulb on Another light is being used Center as soon as possible 3rd brake lamp The high mounted brake lamp is malfunc Visit an authorized Mercedes Benz tioning Center as soon as possible Brake lamp Stop lamp illumination is delayed or lamp gt Visit an authorized Mercedes Benz Drive to workshop is permanently on Center as soon as possible Brake lamp left The left brake lamp is malfunctioning gt Visit an authorized Mercedes Benz Center as soon as possible Display symbol 10 oe
63. The SmartKey can only be removed from the starter switch with the gear selector lever in position P With the SmartKey removed the gear selector lever is locked in position P If the vehicle s electrical system is malfunctioning the gear selector lever could remain locked in position P gt page 422 Reverse gear Place gear selector lever in position R only when vehicle is stopped Effect Neutral No power is transmitted from the engine to the drive axle When the brakes are released the vehicle can be moved freely pushed or towed To avoid damage to the trans mission never engage N while driving If the ESP is deactivated or malfunctioning Move gear selector lever to N only if the vehicle is in danger of skidding e g on icy roads Drive The transmission shifts automatically All forward gears are available su Coasting the vehicle or driving for any other reason with gear selector lever in N can result in transmission damage that is not covered by the Mercedes Benz Limited Warranty Warning A N Getting out of your vehicle with the gear selector lever not fully engaged in position P is dangerous Also position P alone is not intended to or capable of preventing your vehicle from moving possibly hitting people or objects Always set the parking brake in addition to shifting to position P gt page 57 When parked on an incline turn the front wheels towards the road curb
64. Warning A N The jack is designed exclusively for jacking up the vehicle at the jack take up brackets built into both sides of the vehicle To help avoid personal injury use the jack only to lift the vehicle during a wheel change Never get beneath the vehicle while it is supported by the jack Keep hands and feet away from P40 10 1 the area under the lifted vehicle Always 0 103 6031 Turn crank handle clockwise Storage position P40 10 3885 31 Operational position firmly set parking brake and block wheels Before storing the vehicle jack in its com before raising vehicle with jack gt Remove vehicle jack from its partment Do not disengage parking brake while the i e t should be fully collapsed vehicle is raised Be certain that the jack is gt Turn crank handle in direction of arrow l always vertical plumb line when in use es as far as it will go e TAE AEE EAE TAGE pecially on hills Always try to use the jack position on a level surface Make sure the jack arm is fully seated in the jack take up bracket Always lower the vehicle onto sufficient capacity jackstands before working under the vehicle Practical hints Where will I find Setting up the collapsible wheel chock Tilt both plates upward Q Minispare wheel The collapsible wheel chock serves to gt Fold the lower plate outward 2 additionally secure the vehicle e g while changing the wheel The Minispare wheel i
65. a young teenager or a small adult or a child weighing more than the weight of a typical 12 month old child in a standard child restraint instances where the system may suppress deployment of the front passenger front air bag even though the impact met the criteria and was of sufficient severity to deploy the driver front air bag Safety and Security Occupant safety The indicator lamp is located in the center console a P68 10 3459 31 Q Front passenger front air bag off indica tor lamp The EA R indicator lamp will be illuminated except with the SmartKey removed or in starter switch position 0 Safety and Security Occupant safety F e Only have the seat repaired or replaced F Kamine A by an authorized Mercedes Benz amning A If the ESM indicator lamp and the wench If the EARI indicator lamp should not EAEG indicator lamp are lit at the same e Read and observe all warnings in this illuminate the system is not functioning time there is a malfunction in the Occupant chapter You must see an authorized Mercedes Benz Classification System The front passenger Center before seating any child on the front front air bag will be deactivated in this case Self test Occupant Classification passenger seat System In order to ensure proper operation of the air bag system and OCS After turning the SmartKey in the starter More information can be found in the switch to position 1 or 2 or pressing the Practi
66. abdomen Place the seat backrest in a nearly upright position Never use a Seat belt for more than one person at a time Do not fasten a seat belt around a person and another object at the same time When using a seat belt to secure infant or toddler restraints or children in booster seats always follow the child seat manufacturer s instructions Check your seat belt periodically during travel to make sure that it is properly positioned Make sure that the seat belt is always fitted snugly Take special care of this when wearing loose clothing Getting started Driving Warning A N Do not pass belts over sharp edges They could tear Do not allow the belt to get caught in the door or in the seat adjustment mechanism This could damage the belt Never attempt to make modifications to seat belts This could impair the effective ness of the belts Do not bleach or dye seat belts as this may severely weaken them In a crash they may not be able to provide adequate protection Damaged seat belts or belts that were highly stressed in an accident must be replaced Contact an authorized Mercedes Benz Center Getting started Driving The seat belt presenter slides back e right after you pushed the latch plate into buckle and heard it click e after approximately 60 seconds if you did not push latch plate into buckle e if your door is opened e if you turn the SmartKey in the
67. air and recirculates the air in the passenger compartment Warning Fogged windows impair visibility endanger ing you and others If the windows begin to fog on the inside switching off the air recirculation mode immediately should clear interior window fogging If interior window fogging persists make sure the air conditioning page 206 is activated or press button KJ or KA Activating gt Press button gt page 197 The indicator lamp on the button comes on The air recirculation mode is activated automatically at high outside tempera tures The indicator lamp on the button is not lit when the air recirculation mode is automatically switched on A quantity of outside air is added after approximately 30 minutes Controls in detail Automatic climate control CLK 500 CLK 55 AMG A Never operate the side windows if there is the possibility of anyone being harmed by the closing procedure Warning In the event that the procedure causes po tential danger the closing of the side win dows can be immediately halted by releasing the button or by pressing or pulling the respective window switch If you press and hold button R the _ side windows will close Controls in detail Automatic climate control CLK 500 CLK 55 AMG Deactivating gt Press button gt page 197 The indicator lamp on the button goes out The air recirculation mode is deactivat ed automatically
68. air bags and in side impacts head thorax air bags and rear side impact air bags which exceed preset thresholds Only during these events will they provide their supplemental protection The driver and passengers should al ways wear their seat belts Otherwise it is not possible for the air bags to pro vide their supplemental protection In case of other types of impacts and impacts below air bag deployment thresholds air bags will not deploy The driver and passenger will then be pro tected to the extent possible by a prop erly fastened seat belt A properly fastened seat belt is also needed to provide the best possible protection in a rollover Safety and Security Occupant safety We caution you not to rely on the pres ence of the air bags in order to avoid wearing your seat belt It is important to your safety and that of your passengers that you replace de ployed air bags and repair any malfunc tioning air bags to make sure that the vehicle will continue to provide supple mental crash protection for occupants Safety guidelines for the seat belt emergency tensioning device and air bag Warning A N e Damaged seat belts or belts that were highly stressed in an accident must be replaced and their anchoring points must also be checked Only use belts in stalled or supplied by an authorized Mercedes Benz Center Air bags and emergency tensioning de vices ETDs are designed to function on a
69. air recirculation button in the control panel of the climate control gt page 187 or automatic climate control gt page 197 is pressed and held or e the charcoal filter button EEJ in the control panel of the automatic climate control gt page 197 is pressed and held Operating the rear side windows from the rear is not possible if you activate the override switch gt page 85 With the SmartKey in starter switch position O or removed from the starter switch the power windows can be operated e until you open the driver s or pas senger s door e for at least five minutes Switch on the ignition gt page 34 Opening the windows gt Press switch 1 to to the resistance point The corresponding window will move downwards until you release the switch Closing the windows gt Pull switch G to to the resistance point The corresponding window will move upwards until you release the switch Warning A N If you pull and hold the switch up when closing the window and upward movement of the window is blocked by some obstruc tion including but not limited to arms hands fingers etc the automatic reversal will not operate Fully opening the door windows Express open gt Press switch or 2 past the resistance point and release The corresponding window opens completely Fully closing the door windows Express close gt Pull switch G or 2 pas
70. and Tethers for CHildren type anchors at each of the rear seats for the installation of a LATCH type child seat with matching mounting fittings Depending on vehicle production date your vehicle is equipped with either LATCH type design A or B Your cabriolet does not have and is not required to have anchorage rings for a child seat s top tether strap in the rear seating positions Child seats can be used with the seat belt or lower anchor system and seat belt fully in accor dance with the child seat manufactur er s instructions Warning A N Children too big for a toddler restraint must ride in seats using regular seat belts Position shoulder belt across chest and shoulder not face or neck A booster seat may be necessary to achieve proper belt positioning for children from 41 Ibs until they reach a height where a lap shoulder belt fits properly without a booster Install child seat according to manufactur er s instructions The child seat must be firmly attached in the right and left side anchor 2 An incorrectly mounted child seat may come loose during an accident which could result in serious injury or death to the child Damaged or impact damaged child seats or child seat anchor fittings must be replaced Do not leave children unattended in the vehicle even if the children are secured in a child restraint system Safety and Security Occupant safety The child seat must be
71. appropriate wheel and by limiting the engine output the ESP works to stabilize the vehicle The ESP is especially useful while driving off and on wet or slippery road surfaces The ESP also stabilizes the vehicle during braking maneuvers The ESP warning lamp in the instru ment cluster flashes when the ESP is engaged The warning lamp in the instrument cluster comes on when you switch on the ignition It goes out when the engine Is running Safety and Security Driving safety systems A Never switch off the ESP when you see the ESP warning lamp flashing in the in strument cluster In this case proceed as follows Warning e While driving off apply as little throttle as possible e While driving ease upon the accelera tor e Adapt your speed and driving style to the prevailing road conditions Failure to observe these guidelines could cause the vehicle to skid The ESP cannot prevent accidents result ing from excessive speed Safety and Security Driving safety systems T Switching off the ESP j l aanne A Because of the ESP s automatic operation the engine must be shut off Warning J The ESP cannot prevent the natural laws of when physics from acting on the vehicle nor can it increase the traction afforded The ESP e the parking brake is being tested on cannot prevent accidents including those a brake test dynamometer resulting from excessive speed in turns
72. area activated RorN Front and rear area activated P Neither activated Controls in detail Driving systems As your vehicle approaches an object one or more distance segments will illuminate depending on the distance When the eighth distance segment illuminates you have reached the minimum distance e Front area An intermittent acoustic warning will sound as the first red dis tance segment illuminates and a con stant acoustic warning lasting a maximum of two seconds will sound for the second red distance segment The signal is canceled when the gear selec tor lever is placed in position P e Rear area An intermittent acoustic warning will sound as the first red dis tance segment illuminates and a con stant acoustic warning lasting a maximum of two seconds will sound for the second red distance segment The signal is canceled when the gear selec tor lever is placed in position D or P Controls in detail Driving systems Switching the Parktronic system on off The Parktronic system can be switched off manually The Parktronic switch is located in the up per part of the center console gt page 27 P54 25 4755 31 aes kj Parktronic switch Indicator lamp Switching off the Parktronic system gt Press Parktronic switch Q Indicator lamp 2 comes on Switching on the Parktronic system gt Press Parktronic switch Q again Indicator lamp 2 goes out jo The Park
73. back up to the proper level To provide important corrosion protection the solution must be at least 45 anticor rosion antifreeze equivalent to freeze protection to approx 22 F 30 C If you use a solution that is more than 55 anti corrosion antifreeze freeze protection to approx 49 F 45 C the engine temper ature will increase due to the lower heat transfer capability of the solution There fore do not use more than this amount of anticorrosion antifreeze If the coolant level is low water and MB Anticorrosion Antifreeze should be used to bring it up to the proper level have cool ing system checked for signs of leakage Please make sure the mixture is in accor dance with label instructions The water in the cooling system must meet minimum requirements which are usually satisfied by normal drinking water If you are not sure about the water quality consult an authorized Mercedes Benz Center Anticorrosion antifreeze Your vehicle contains a number of alumi num parts The use of aluminum compo nents in motor vehicle engines necessitates that anticorrosion antifreeze coolant used in such engines be specifical ly formulated to protect the aluminum Anticorrosion antifreeze quantity parts Failure to use such anticorro sion antifreeze coolant will result in a sig nificantly shortened service life Therefore the following product is strongly recommended for use in your vehicle Mercedes
74. bag is intended for stor ing light weight items only Heavy objects objects with sharp edges or fragile objects may not be transported in the ruffled storage bag In an accident during hard braking or sudden maneuvers they could be thrown around inside the vehicle and cause injury to vehicle occupants The ruffled storage bag cannot protect transported goods in the event of an accident Parcel net in front passenger footwell 1 Parcel net A small convenience parcel net is located in the front passenger footwell It is for small and light items such as road maps mail etc Warning A N The parcel net is intended for storing light weight items only Heavy objects objects with sharp edges or fragile objects may not be transported in the parcel net In an accident during hard brak ing or sudden maneuvers they could be thrown around inside the vehicle and cause injury to vehicle occupants The parcel net cannot protect transported goods in the event of an accident Controls in detail Useful features Center armrest Opening storage compartment Depending on vehicle production date gt Pull handle and lift armrest your vehicle is equipped with either arm Binsine siorsse commarineni rest design A or B amp 8 P gt Press armrest down until it engages Armrest design A into place Opening telephone compartment gt Press button on driver s side or button 2 on passenger side and l
75. be operated when the respective door is open Therefore do not leave children unat tended in the vehicle or with access to an unlocked vehicle Unsupervised use of vehi cle equipment may cause an accident and or serious personal injury Getting started Adjusting Warning According to accident statistics children are safer when properly restrained in the rear seating positions than in the front seat ing position Thus we strongly recommend that children be placed in the rear seats whenever possible Regardless of seating position children 12 years old and under must be seated and properly secured in an appropriate infant or toddler restraint or booster seat recommended for the size and weight of the child For additional information see Children in the vehicle gt page 75 A child s risk of serious or fatal injuries is significantly increased if the child restraints are not properly secured in the vehicle and or the child is not properly secured in the child restraint Getting started Adjusting Seat adjustment The seat adjustment switches are located on the respective door _ P91 10 2599 31 1 Head restraint height 2 Seat height 3 Seat cushion tilt 4 Seat fore and aft adjustment Backrest tilt gt Switch on the ignition gt page 34 or gt Open the respective door The memory function gt page 124 lets you store the settings for the seat pos
76. brakes When towing the vehicle with all wheels on the ground the selector lever must be in position N and the SmartKey must be in starter switch position 2 When towing the vehicle with all wheels on the ground or the front axle raised the vehicle may be towed only for dis tances up to 30 miles 50 km and at a speed not to exceed 30 mph 50 km h To be certain to avoid a possibility of damage to the transmission however we recommend the drive shaft be dis connected at the rear axle drive flange for any towing beyond a short tow to a nearby garage Warning A N Prior to towing the vehicle with all wheels on the ground make certain that the SmartKey is in starter switch position 2 If the SmartKey is left in starter switch posi tion O for an extended period of time it can no longer be turned in the switch In this case the steering is locked To unlock re move SmartKey from starter switch and re insert If circumstances require towing the vehicle with all wheels on the ground always tow with a tow bar if e the engine will not run e there is a malfunction in the power sup ply or in the vehicle s electrical system as that will be necessary to adequately con trol the towed vehicle Warning A N With the engine not running there is no power assistance for the brake and steering systems In this case it is important to keep in mind that a considerably higher degree of effort is necessary to bra
77. by Mercedes Benz Do not make any modifications to the seat belts This can lead to unintended activation of the ETDs or to failure Do not bleach or dye seat belts as this may severely weaken them In a crash they may not be able to provide adequate protection Have all work carried out only by qualified technicians Contact an authorized Mercedes Benz Center Warning USE SEAT BELTS PROPERLY e Seat belts can only work when used properly Never wear seat belts in any other way than as described in this sec tion as that could result in serious inju ries in case of an accident e Each occupant should wear their seat belt at all times because seat belts help reduce the likelihood of and potential severity of injuries in accidents includ ing rollovers The integrated restraint system includes SRS driver air bag pas senger front air bag head thorax air bags and rear side impact air bags ETD seat belt emergency tensioning de vice and front seat knee bolsters The system is designed to enhance the pro tection offered to properly belted occu pants in certain frontal front air bags and ETD and side head thorax air bags and rear side impact air bags and ETD impacts which exceed preset deploy ment thresholds Never wear the shoulder belt under your arm against your neck or off your shoul der In a frontal crash your body would move too far forward That would in crease the chance of head and neck
78. by the air bag control unit On the front passenger side the front air bag deployment is additionally influ enced by the passenger s weight cate gory as identified by the Occupant Classification System OCS gt page 78 The lighter the front passenger side oc cupant the higher the vehicle deceler ation rate required for the second stage inflation of the air bag The air bags will not deploy in impacts which do not exceed the system s deploy ment thresholds You will then be protect ed by the fastened seat belts Safety and Security Occupant safety The front passenger front air bag will only be deployed if e the system based on OCS weight sen sor readings senses that the front pas senger seat is occupied e the EA EJ indicator lamp in the center console is not lit gt page 8 1 e the impact exceeds a preset deploy ment threshold Head thorax air bags 1 Head thorax air bag The head thorax air bags 1 in the drivers and front passenger seat are deployed e onthe impacted side of the vehicle e in impacts exceeding a preset deploy ment threshold e independently of the front air bags The head thorax air bags are not de ployed in impacts which do not exceed the system s deployment threshold A Warning Only use seat covers which have been tested and approved by Mercedes Benz for your vehicle model Using other seat covers may interfere with or prevent the dep
79. clos ing procedure To open press and hold button Ql To continue the closing procedure after making sure that there is no danger of anyone being harmed by the closing procedure press and hold button eg Vehicles with KEYLESS GO e Release the lock button gt page 60 on exterior door handle to stop the closing procedure e Pull onthe exterior door handle and hold firmly The side windows and the soft top will open for as long as the door han dle is held but the door is not opened When you lock the vehicle you can close the windows and soft top simultaneously gt Aim transmitter eye of the SmartKey or SmartKey with KEYLESS GO at the driver s outside door handle gt page 252 The SmartKey or SmartKey with KEYLESS GO must be in close proximity to the driver s out side door handle Controls in detail gt Power windows Press and hold button until the windows and soft top are completely closed The windows and soft top begin to close after approximately one second Release button to interrupt pro cedure Make sure all side windows and the soft top are properly closed before leaving the vehicle Vehicles with KEYLESS GO gt Press and hold the lock button on an outside door handle gt page 60 until the side windows are completely closed Release the lock button on the outside door handle to interrupt procedure Controls in detail Power windows Opening and clo
80. compartment lids closed This will help to prevent stored objects from being thrown about and injuring vehicle occupants during an accident Make sure no objects fall into the open ings of the subwoofer between the rear seats If necessary contact an authorized Mercedes Benz Center to remove any objects which may have fallen into the openings Glove box 1 Glove box lid 2 Glove box lid release Opening the glove box gt Pull glove box lid release 2 The glove box lid Q opens downward Closing the glove box gt Push glove box lid Q up to close Audio system COMAND with CD changer The CD changer is located in the glove box Controls in detail Useful features Storage box Center armrest design A Opening storage box E Warning T The storage box is in front of the armrest 2 A gt Pull storage box Q in the direction of storage compartment Do not use this storage compartment as an AEON ashtray and or place hot cigarettes or other hot smoking materials in the storage box Placing such materials in the storage box gt Press storage box back until it may cause vehicle damage and or poten engages into place tially cause a vehicle fire Closing storage box 1 Storage box Controls in detail Useful features Ruffled storage bags 1 Ruffled storage bags Storage bags are located on the rear side of the front seats Warning A N The ruffled storage
81. display After reset 0 30h o 29M1 S8mph_ _ 3 18 4mpq 72 F 149 3 MI P54 32 2277 31 1 Distance driven since last reset 2 Time elapsed since last reset 3 Average speed since last reset 4 Average fuel consumption since last re set Resetting fuel consumption statistics gt Press button or repeatedly until the first function of the trip com puter menu appears in the multifunction display gt Press button JM or ed repeatedly until the reading that you want to reset appears in the multifunction display gt Press and hold the reset button in the instrument cluster gt page 136 until the value is reset to 0 Calling up range distance to empty gt Switch on the ignition gt page 36 gt Press button or repeatedly until the first function of the trip com puter menu appears in the multifunction display gt Press button EAN or eg repeatedly until the message Range appears in the multifunction display The calculated range based on the current fuel tank level appears in the multifunction display Range 163M1 72 F 149 8 MI P54 32 2094 31 TEL menu Warning A N A driver s attention to the road must always be his her primary focus when driving For your safety and the safety of others we recommend that you pull over to a safe location and stop before placing or taking a telephone call If you choose to use the telephone while driving please use the hands
82. driver s outside door handle The Warning level if activated via summer opening SmartKey or SmartKey with l feature KEYLESS GO must be in close proxim Never operate the windows or soft top if i ity to the driver s outside door handle there is the possibility of anyone bein i i i gt Press and hold button after harmed by the opening or closing proce p Here m unlocking the vehicle l In the event that the procedure causes The windows and soft top begin to potential danger the procedure can be 7 open after approximately one second immediately halted by releasing the button gt Release the button to interrupt on the SmartKey To reverse direction of procedure movement press for opening or for closing Make sure the soft top is fully opened UO 7 If the opening procedure is finished the multifunction display will briefly show the If the weather is warm you can ventilate message Top open the vehicle before driving off by simulta neously e opening the side windows e opening the soft top e turning on the seat ventilation for the drivers sear Convenience closing feature A When closing the side windows and the soft top make sure that there is no danger of anyone being harmed by the closing pro cedure Warning The windows will not automatically re open if blocked during convenience closing If potential danger exists proceed as fol lows e Release button to stop the
83. each axle its share of the maximum loaded vehicle weight and dividing it by two Operation Tires and wheels Rotating tires A Rotate front and rear wheels only if the tires are of the same dimension Warning If your vehicle is equipped with mixed size tires different tire dimensions front vs rear tire rotation is not possible Tire rotation can be performed on vehicles with tires of the same dimension all around If your vehicle is equipped with tires of the same dimension all around tires can be rotated observing a a front to rear rotation pattern that will maintain the intended rotation spinning direction of the tire gt page 333 In some cases such as when your vehicle is equipped with mixed size tires different tire dimension front vs rear tire rotation is not possible If applicable to your vehicle s tire configu ration tires can be rotated according to the tire manufacturer s recommended in tervals in the tire manufacturer s warranty pamphlet located in your vehicle literature portfolio If none is available tires should be rotated every 3000 to 6000 miles 5000 to 10000 km or sooner if neces sary according to the degree of tire wear The same rotation spinning direction must be maintained gt page 333 Rotate tires before the characteristic tire wear pattern becomes visible shoulder wear on front tires and tread center wear on rear tires Thoroughly clean t
84. firm pressure until it snaps into place The mirror housing is now properly positioned and you can adjust the mirror normally The memory function gt page 124 lets you store the setting for the exterior rear view mirrors together with the set tings for the steering wheel and seat position At low ambient temperatures the exterior rear view mirrors will be heated automatically For more information see Rear view mir rors gt page 181 Y Driving Warning Do not lay any objects in the driver s foot well Be careful that floor mats or carpets in the driver s footwell have sufficient clear ance for the pedals During sudden driving or braking maneu vers the objects could get caught between the pedals You could then no longer brake or accelerate Fastening the seat belts Warning Always fasten your seat belt before driving off Always make sure your passengers are properly restrained even those sitting in the rear and pregnant women Failure to wear and properly fasten and po sition your seat belt greatly increases your risk of injuries and their likely severity in an accident You and your passengers should always wear seat belts If you are ever in an accident your injuries can be considerably more severe without your seat belt properly buckled Without your seat belt buckled you are much more likely to hit the interior of the vehicle or be ejected from it You ca
85. firmly attached in the right and left side anchor 2 Non LATCH type child seats may also be used and can be installed using the vehicle s seat belt system gt page 69 Install child seat according to the manufacturer s instructions Safety and Security Occupant safety LATCH type anchors design A Warning The foldable LATCH type anchors are located between the seat cushion and the backrest Before installing the child seat make sure anchors 2 are folded out and locked in place gt Install child seat according to the manufacturer s instructions o If a child seat is not installed the LATCH type anchors can be folded back between the seat cushion and the seat backrest C Indicates the position of the anchors 2 Anchors Release button To fold anchors back gt Press down button on each anchor 2 and return the anchor 2 to its catch To fold anchors out gt Grip inner side of anchors 2 and fold forward until they audibly lock in place LATCH type anchors design B The LATCH type anchors are non foldable and located between the seat cushion and the backrest 1 Indicates the position of the anchors 2 Anchors gt Install child seat according to the manufacturer s instructions Blocking of rear side window operation You can block the rear side window operation for instance when you have children riding in the rear passenger compartment
86. fogged on the outside Keep this setting selected only until the windshield is clear again gt Switch the windshield wipers on gt page 54 gt Press button Bg gt page 187 The indicator lamp on the button comes on Air distribution and air vol ume are adjusted automatically If the automatic mode of the climate con trol is switched off gt Turn air distribution control G to or EM gt page 187 Air recirculation mode Switch to air recirculation mode to prevent unpleasant odors from entering the vehicle from the outside e g before driving through a tunnel This setting cuts off the intake of outside air and recirculates the air in the passenger compartment A Fogged windows impair visibility endanger ing you and others If the windows begin to fog on the inside switching off the air recirculation mode immediately should clear interior window fogging If interior window fogging persists make sure the air conditioning page 194 is activated or press button KAJ or KEA Warning Activating gt Press button gt page 187 The indicator lamp on the button comes on The air recirculation mode is activated automatically at high outside tempera tures The indicator lamp on button S not lit when the air recirculation mode is automatically switched on A quantity of outside air is added after approximately 30 minutes Warning A N Never operate the side win
87. gt Continue turning the cap 2 to the left and remove it The coolant level is correct if the level e for cold coolant reaches the marking plastic bridge inside the reservoir e for warm coolant is approx 0 6 in 1 5 cm higher gt Add coolant as required gt Replace and tighten cap 2 More information on coolant can be found in the Technical data section gt page 484 Operation Engine compartment Danet EEE Your vehicle s battery is located in the engine compartment on the right hand side gt page 453 The battery should always be sufficiently charged in order to achieve its rated service life Refer to Maintenance Booklet for battery maintenance intervals If you use your vehicle mostly for short distance trips you will need to have the battery charge checked more frequently When replacing the battery always use batteries approved by Mercedes Benz If you do not intend to operate your vehicle for an extended period of time consult an authorized Mercedes Benz Center about steps you need to observe gt OP Pp Observe all safety instructions and precautions when handling automotive batteries Risk of explosion Keep flames or sparks away from battery Do not smoke Battery acid is caustic Do not allow it to come into contact with skin eyes or clothing In case it does immediately flush affected area with clean water and seek medical
88. gt Press T soft key again If you choose to use the telephone while driving please use the hands free device The CD changer mode is interrupt The total number of tracks and the total and only use the telephone when road ed and PAUSE appears in the dis playing time of the CD appear in the weather and traffic conditions permit Some play display jurisdictions prohibit the driver from using a e Switching off pause function gt Press T soft key cellular telephone while driving a vehicle gt Press button The standard CD playback menu ap Bear in mind that at a speed of just 30 mph pears in the display approximately 50 km h your vehicle is The CD changer mode is active covering a distance of 44 feet again approximately 14 m every second Observe all legal requirements Controls in detail Audio system Using your Mercedes Benz specified mo bile telephone a number of functions and operating steps can be performed and dis played in the audio system display Further operating instructions not covered here can be found in the operating instruc tions for the multifunction steering wheel and the cellular telephone If your audio system is set up for telephone operation the symbol will appear in the display When you insert your Mercedes Benz specified mobile telephone into the tele phone cradle you will be prompted to en ter your PIN for 30 seconds gt page 234 This display disappears when
89. gt Press www or soft key Adjusting balance Call up fader and balance functions by The volume is distributed accordingly gt Press REJ button repeatedly until pressing the BEJ button between the front and rear of the vehi BALANCE appears in the display cle Fader or gt Press REJ button repeatedly until l gt Press RES soft key briefly FADER appears in the display The fader is reset to its center level The radio switches back to the stan dard radio menu eight seconds after the last soft key is pressed gt Press lt 4 or 32 soft key P82 60 4453 31 The volume is distributed between the left and right sides of the vehicle P82 60 4470 31 or gt Press RES soft key briefly The balance is reset to its center level The radio switches back to the stan dard radio menu eight seconds after the last button Is pressed Controls in detail Audio system Returning volume distribution to facto ry settings gt Press REJ button to call up settings menu in the display P82 60 4452 31 gt Press RES soft key briefly the respec tive volume distribution is reset to Its center flat level or gt Press and hold RES soft key until RESET appears in the display The volume distribution settings for fader and balance are set to their cen ter level The radio switches back to the stan dard radio menu four seconds after the last soft key is pressed Calling up AUX mode
90. has been piled too high the closing procedure is stopped and the trunk reopens slightly I To prevent a possible inadvertent lock out the trunk will open automatically if a SmartKey with KEYLESS GO is recog nized inside the vehicle or in the trunk Warning Monitor the closing procedure carefully to ensure that no one is in danger of being in jured To prevent possible personal injury always keep hands and fingers away from the trunk opening when closing the trunk Be especially careful when small children are around To stop the closing procedure do one of the following e press KEYLESS GO locking closing switch e press trunk closing switch e press the button on the SmartKey with KEYLESS GO e press the remote trunk opening or clos ing switch on driver s door Even with the SmartKey with KEYLESS GO removed from the vehicle the trunk closing switch can be operated Therefore do not leave children unattended in the vehicle or with access to an unlocked vehicle Unsu pervised use of vehicle equipment may cause an accident and or serious personal injury Warning A N Only drive with the trunk closed as among other dangers such as blocked visibility exhaust fumes may enter the vehicle interior Controls in detail Locking and unlocking Trunk emergency release With the emergency release button the trunk can be opened from inside the trunk The emergency release button is loca
91. headlamp adjustment If the headlamps or front fog lamps are fogged up on the inside as a result of high humidity driving the vehicle a Bi Xenon headlamp Low and high beam D2S 35 W 4 Halogen headlamp High beam high beam H7 55 W flasher Bi Xenon headlamp distance with the lights on should clear High beam flasher H7 55 W up the fogging Parking and standing W5W lamp a P54 00 2502 31 Front fog lamp HB4 51 W Back up bulbs will be brought into use Corner illuminating when lamps malfunction Observe the front fog lamp H7 55 W messages in the multifunction display Side marker lamp W5W gt page 404 Vehicles with Bi Xenon headlamps do not replace the Bi Xenon bulbs yourself Rear lamps Lamp Type High mounted brake LED lamp Brake lamp P21W 9 Turn signal lamp P21W Tail parking and stand P 21 4 W 0G ing lamp side marker W5W Backup lamp P21W License plate lamps C5W Rear fog lamp drivers P21 4W side A Warning Keep bulbs out of reach of children Bulbs and bulb sockets can be very hot Al low the lamp to cool down before changing a bulb Halogen lamps contain pressurized gas A bulb can explode if you e touch or move it when hot e drop the bulb e scratch the bulb Wear eye and hand protection Because of high voltage in Xenon lamps it is dangerous to replace the bulb or repair the lamp and its components We recommend that you have such wor
92. help if necessary Wear eye protection Keep children away Follow the instructions in this Operator s Manual Batteries contain materials that can harm the environment if disposed of improperly Recycling of batteries is the preferred method of disposal Many states require sellers of batteries to accept old batteries for recycling Windshield washer system and headlamp cleaning system The windshield washer reservoir is located in the engine compartment 1 Washer fluid reservoir cap Fluid for the windshield washer system and the headlamp cleaning system is supplied from the windshield washer reservoir It has a capacity of approx 6 4 US qt 6 I During all seasons add MB Windshield Washer Concentrate S to water Premix the windshield washer fluid in a suitable container A Washer solvent antifreeze is highly flam mable Do not spill washer solvent antifreeze on hot engine parts because it may ignite and burn You could be seriously burned Warning gt Refill the reservoir with MB Windshield Washer Concentrate S and water or commercially available premixed wind shield washer solvent antifreeze de pending on ambient temperatures Always use washer solvent antifreeze where temperatures may fall below the freezing point Failure to do so could result in damage to the washer system reservolr Operation Engine compartment Only use washer fluid which is suitable
93. in the multifunction display Controls in detail Soft top Warning If the soft top does not completely open or close the roof hydraulics will lose pressure and the soft top is lowered e after approximately seven minutes when the ignition is switched on e after approximately 15 seconds when the ignition is switched off Shortly before the soft top is lowered a warning will sound In the multifunction dis play you will see EEJ and the message Top being lowered appears e Properly lock the soft top gt page 259 before continuing to drive Opening and closing the soft top with the SmartKey The windows will also be opened or closed when you operate the soft top with the SmartKey Warning Before operating the soft top make sure no persons can be injured by the moving parts roll bar soft top frame and soft top com partment cover due to negligence Hands must never be placed near the roll bar soft top frame upper windshield area shelf behind roll bar or soft top storage compartment while the soft top is being raised or lowered Serious personal injury may occur If potential danger exists release the re spective button on the SmartKey This im mediately interrupts the raising or lowering procedure You then can operate to lower or to raise the soft top away from the danger zone Aim transmitter eye of the SmartKey or SmartKey with KEYLESS GO at the driver s o
94. in accordance with the child seat manufacturer s instructions Children can be killed or seriously injured by an inflating air bag Note the following important information when circumstances require you to place a child in the front passenger seat e Your vehicle is equipped with air bag technology designed to turn off the front passenger front air bag in your vehicle when the system senses the weight of a typical 12 month old child or less along with the weight of a standard appropri ate child restraint on the front passen ger seat e A child in a rear facing child restraint on the front passenger seat will be seriously injured or even killed if the front passenger front air bag inflates in a collision which could occur under some circumstances even with the air bag technology installed in your vehicle The only means to completely eliminate this risk is to never place a child in a rear facing child restraint in the front seat We therefore strongly recommend that you always place a child in a rear facing child restraint in the back seat If you must install a rear facing child restraint on the front passenger seat because circumstances require you to do so make sure that the EA E indicator lamp is illuminated indicating that the front passenger front air bag is deactivated Should the ER indicator lamp not illuminate or go out while the restraint is installed please check installation Periodically check the EA
95. in starter switch to position 0 and repeat starting procedure If you are starting the engine with KEYLESS GO Close any doors that may be open to allow for better detec tion of the SmartKey with KEYLESS GO Or Start the engine with the SmartKey as radio signals from another source may be interfering with the SmartKey with KEYLESS GO Repeat the starting procedure gt page 48 Remember that extended starting at tempts can drain the battery gt Geta jump start gt page 456 If the engine does not start after several starting attempts there could be a mal function in the engine electronics or in the fuel supply system gt Notify an authorized Mercedes Benz Center Parking brake Release handle Warning 2 A 2 Parking brake pedal When leaving the vehicle always remove the gt Release the parking brake by pulling on SmartKey or SmartKey with KEYLESS GO release handle from the starter switch take it with you and lock the vehicle Do not leave children unat tended in the vehicle or with access to an unlocked vehicle Children could release the parking brake which could result in an acci dent and or serious personal injury The indicator lamp USA only or Canada only in the clock goes out Driving gt Depress the brake pedal gt Move gear selector lever to position D or R Wait for the gear selection process to complete before setting the vehicle in
96. information Technical data Fuels coolants lubricants etc Premium unleaded gasoline A Gasoline is highly flammable and poisonous It burns violently and can cause serious injury Whenever you are around gasoline avoid inhaling fumes and skin contact extin guish all smoking materials Never allow sparks flame or smoking materials near gasoline Warning To maintain the engine s durability and performance premium unleaded gaso line must be used If premium unleaded is not available and low octane fuel is used follow these precautions Have the fuel tank only partially filled with unleaded regular and fill up with premium unleaded as soon as possible Avoid full throttle driving and abrupt acceleration Do not exceed an engine speed of 3000 rpm if the vehicle is loaded with a light load such as two per sons and no luggage Do not exceed we of maximum ac celerator pedal position if the vehi cle is fully loaded or operating in mountainous terrain Fuel requirements SEE EE E Only use premium unleaded fuel e The octane number posted at the pump must be 91 min It is an average of both the Research R octane num ber and the Motor M octane number R M 2 This is also known as the ANTI KNOCK INDEX Unleaded gasoline containing oxygenates such as ethanol IPA IBA and TBA can be used provided the ratio of any one of these o
97. it forward to windshield gt Take off protective cap on the inner frame 11 side of the soft top gt Insert hex wrench into soft top locking mechanism screw gt Turn the soft top locking mechanism screw with hex wrench clockwise in di rection of arrow as far as it will go The clasp will open and the soft top will engage audibly Practical hints Opening closing in an emergency Material tensioning frame Soft top base 5 Soft top compartment cover gt gt Lift material tensioning frame 4 into a vertical position Lower soft top compartment cover 45 Make sure the soft top compartment cover 15 does not collide or make con tact with the material tensioning frame 44 With the palm of your hand press the window in material tensioning frame 4 until it is positioned on the soft top compartment cover 5 sss BF F_00 2700 31 You and your assistant should press soft top compartment cover 15 for ward and down with the palms of your hands until it snaps into place in the guide Place your hands on the areas indicated by the arrows At the same time gently press material tensioning frame 4 down with the palms of your hands Warning A N Position hands as indicated by arrows so that when you press soft top compartment cover 5 forward and lower material ten sioning frame 4 your hands cannot be come trapped gt P7 700 2201 Locking Inser
98. l or M S for winter tires Operation Tires and wheels In addition to tire load rating special load information may be molded into the tire sidewall following the letter designating the tire speed rating gt page 349 No specification given absence of any text like in above example indicates a standard load SL tire XL or Extra Load designates an extra load or reinforced tire Light Load designates a light load tire C D E designates load range associated with the maximum load a tire can carry at a specified pressure DOT Tire Identification Number TIN U S tire regulations require each new tire manufacturer or tire retreader to mold a TIN into or onto a sidewall of each tire produced The TIN is a unique identifier which facili tates efforts by tire manufactures to notify purchasers in recall situations or other safety matters concerning tires and gives purchasers the means to easily identify such tires The TIN is comprised of Manufacturer s identification mark Tire size Tire type code and Date of manufacture DOT 2 Manufacturer s identification mark 3 Tire size 4 Tire type code at the option of the tire manufacturer Date of manufacture For illustration purposes only Actual data on tires are specific to each vehi cle and may vary from data shown in above illustration DOT Department of Transportation A tire bran
99. limited by the speed symbol in the service description Example 245 40 ZR18 97Y In this example 97Y is the service description The letter Y designates the speed rating and the speed capabil ity of the tire is limited to 186 mph 300 km h Operation Tires and wheels e Any tire with a speed capability above 0 Load identification 186 mph 300 km h must include a ZR in the size designation AND the service description must be placed in parenthesis Example 275 40 ZR 18 99Y The Y speed rating in paren thesis designates the maximum speed capability of the tire as being above 186 mph 300 km h Consult the tire manufacturer for the actual maximum permissible speed of the tire Not all M S rated tires provide special winter performance Make sure the tires you use show M S and the moun tain snowflake marking on the tire sidewall These tires meet specific snow traction performance require ments of the Rubber Manufacturers As sociation RMA and the Rubber Association of Canada RAC and have been designed specifically for use in All season and winter tires snow conditions Load identification a Index Speed rating Q M S up to 100 mph 160 km h For illustration purposes only Actual T M S upto 118 mph 190 km h data on tires are specific to each vehi H M S up to 130 mph 210 km h cle and may vary from data shown in above illustration V M S upto 149 mph 240 km h
100. locks from locking deactivate the automatic central locking when the vehicle e is pushed or towed e is ona test stand You can deactivate the automatic locking mode using the control system see Set ting automatic locking gt page 159 Controls in detail Locking and unlocking Locking and unlocking from the inside You can lock or unlock the doors and the trunk from inside using the central locking or unlocking switch This can be useful for example if you want to lock the vehicle before starting to drive You cannot lock or unlock the fuel filler flap with the central locking or unlocking switch A When leaving the vehicle always remove the SmartKey or SmartKey with KEYLESS GO from the starter switch take it with you and lock the vehicle Do not leave children unat tended in the vehicle or with access to an unlocked vehicle Unsupervised use of vehi cle equipment may cause an accident and or serious personal injury Warning The switches are located in the center console If the vehicle was previously locked with the central locking switch e while in the selective remote control mode only the door opened from inside is unlocked gt a e while in the global remote control mode the complete vehicle is unlocked when a door is opened from the inside a z 1 Central locking switch 2 Central unlocking switch P 4 75 4750 31 Locking gt Press central locki
101. lubricants etc Damage or malfunction resulting from poor fuel quality or from blending addition al fuel additives other than those tested and approved by us for use on Mercedes Benz vehicles listed in the Factory Approved Service Products pam phlet are not covered by the Mercedes Benz Limited Warranty Technical data Fuels coolants lubricants etc Coolants The engine coolant is a mixture of water and anticorrosion antifreeze which provides e Corrosion protection e Freeze protection e Boiling protection by increasing the boiling point The cooling system was filled at the factory with a coolant providing freeze protection to approximately 22 F 30 C and corrosion protection If the antifreeze mixture is effective to 22 F 30 C the boiling point of the coolant in the pressurized cooling system is reached at approx 266 F 130 C The coolant solution must be used year round to provide the necessary corro sion protection and increase boil over pro tection Refer to Maintenance Booklet for replacement interval Coolant system design and coolant used determine the replacement interval The replacement interval published in the Maintenance Booklet is only applicable if MB 325 0 Anticorrosion Antifreeze solu tion or other Mercedes Benz approved products of equal specification see Facto ry Approved Service Products pamphlet are used to renew the coolant concentra tion or bring it
102. maneuvers or in an accident Liquids spilled on vehicle occu pants may cause serious personal injury Liquids spilled on vehicle equipment may cause damage not covered by the Mercedes Benz Limited Warranty Warning When not in use keep the cup holder closed An open cup holder may cause injury to you and others when contacted during braking vehicle maneuvers or in an accident ei gt Controls in detail Useful features aa Keep in mind that objects placed in cup PUP DOIG ENE eeenpeare holder may come loose during braking vehicle maneuvers or in an accident and be thrown around in the vehicle interior Objects thrown around in the vehicle interior may cause an accident and or serious personal injury Cup holder in the center armrest Only vehicles with center armrest design B Wan gt page 282 Cover Opening cup holder gt Push cover Q Closing cup holder gt Push the cup holder back until it engages C Cup holder in compartment gt page 282 2 Cup holder The cup holder opens automatically Ashtrays Center console coda a DE BS 1 Cover plate 2 Sliding button 3 Ashtray insert Opening ashtray gt Briefly press the bottom of cover plate The cover plate opens automatically Removing ashtray insert Reinstalling the ashtray insert gt Push the ashtray insert 3 down into Warning A N the retainer until it engages gt Push down cover plate C
103. memory position appear in the up per left hand corner of the display The numbers are stored in the order of the calls received When you have selected a number press button The call will be made Controls in detail Audio system Speed dial If you have stored telephone numbers as speed dial numbers in your tele phone you can also enter these with buttons JJ to E on the radio head unit gt Press desired button EEE to EE briefly gt Press button The call will be made Turbo dial If you have stored telephone numbers as turbo dial numbers in your tele phone you can also enter these with buttons JJ to EO on the radio head unit gt Press desired button BE to EE until the call is made Controls in detail Audio system Redial If the number you have dialed is busy you can again place calls to the last ten tele phone numbers dialed using the redial function If you have activated the automatic re dial function on your telephone the number of the person being called is automatically redialed after a short waiting period if there is a busy signal Refer to the separate operating instruc tions for the mobile telephone e Manual redial Li AER GS ies CLE HOM ROU Pa 60 46271 31 Press button The telephone number last dialed will appear in the display Select desired telephone number with button WW or BA The letter L and the number of the memor
104. message memory menu in the control system gt page 146 displays both cleared and uncleared messages High priority messages appear in the multifunction display in red color Certain messages of high priority cannot be cleared from the multifunction display using the reset button gt page 136 or button Kea Bay fas or on the steering wheel Other messages of high priority and messages of less immediate priority can be cleared from the multifunction display using the reset button gt page 136 or button Kea Ba E or on the steering wheel They are then stored in the vehicle status message memory gt page 146 Remember that clearing a message will only make the message dis appear Clearing a message will not correct the condition that caused the message to appear Practical hints What to do if Warning A N All categories of messages contain important information which should be taken note of and where a malfunction is indicated addressed as soon as possible at an authorized Mercedes Benz Center Failure to repair condition noted may cause damage not covered by the Mercedes Benz Limited Warranty or result in property damage or personal injury Warning A N No messages will be displayed if either the instrument cluster or the multifunction display is inoperative Contact your nearest authorized Mercedes Benz Center Practical hints What to do if 5 0 Switching on th
105. motion Release the brake pedal Carefully depress the accelerator pedal Once the vehicle is in motion the auto matic central locking system engages and the locking knobs drop down You can open a locked door from the inside Open door only when conditions are safe to do so You can deactivate the automatic locking using the control system gt page 159 Simultaneously depressing the accelerator pedal and applying the brake reduces engine performance and causes premature brake and drivetrain wear If you hear a warning signal and the message Release parking brake ap pears in the multifunction display when driving off you have forgotten to re lease the parking brake Release the parking brake Getting started Driving After a cold start the automatic transmis sion shifts at a higher engine revolution This allows the catalytic converter to reach its operating temperature earlier Warning A N On slippery road surfaces never downshift in order to obtain braking action This could result in drive wheel slip and reduced vehi cle control Your vehicle s ABS will not pre vent this type of loss of control Place the gear selector lever in position R or P only when the vehicle is stopped in order to avoid damaging the transmission Getting started Driving T Switching on headlamps gt Turn exterior lamp switch to position ey Do not run cold engine at high engine speeds Run
106. numerical key to R The stored entries are selected ac cording to the alphabetical order of the initial letters e g for S Smith press button four times Press and hold button WW or BA The system jumps from one initial letter to the next in ascending or descending order Press and hold button WW or BA until desired initial letter has been reached gt Press button WW or BA repeat edly until desired entry has been reached The stored entries are selected in alphabetical order with the sub en tries o Several sub entries can be stored for each main entry name These entries are marked by a corresponding abbre viation that appears in the upper left hand corner of the display The fol lowing abbreviations for sub entries are possible CEL Mobile phone HOM Home WOR Work FAX Fax PAG Pager TEL Main gt When you have selected a number press button The call will be made Viewing the telephone number of a telephone book entry gt Search for desired entry gt Press NUM soft key The telephone number of the phone book entry appears in the display Returning calls received MUM RCU LLR P82 60 4467 31 Press MEM soft key or press WNE or Bg Press RCV soft key received calls The number of received calls and then the call last received appear briefly in the display Select desired telephone number with button WN or BA The letter R and the number of the
107. only The transmission shifts through fifth gear only applies to vehicles with 7 speed automatic transmission only WH The transmission shifts through fourth gear only Controls in detail Automatic transmission Effect The transmission shifts through third gear only With this selection you can use the braking effect of the engine The transmission shifts through second gear only Allows the use of engine s braking power when driving e on steep downgrades e in mountainous regions e under extreme operating conditions The transmission operates in first gear only For maximum use of engine s braking effect on very steep or lengthy downgrades Controls in detail Automatic transmission Automatic shift program T Never change the program mode when the gear selector lever is out of position P This could result in a change of driving characteristics for EET X which you may not be prepared The last selected program mode C or S is switched on when the engine is restarted The program mode selector switch is located on the lower part of the center console P27 60 2742 31 1 Program mode selector switch C Comfort For comfort driving S Sport For standard driving The current gear selector lever position and the selected program mode C S are indicated in the multifunction display gt page 167 Press program mode selector switch Q repeatedly until the
108. only Item 1 Left side air distribution control 2 Front defroster Controls in detail Automatic climate control CLK 500 CLK 55 AMG Item 3 Temperature control left raising 4 Display G Air volume control raising 6 Temperature control right raising Q Rear window defroster Right side air distribution control 9 Charcoal filter AC cooling on off Residual heat ventilation Canada only Q Temperature control right lowering 2 Air volume control lowering 3 Temperature control left lowering Air recirculation 5 Automatic climate control on off complete system Air distribution and air volume automatic mode Controls in detail Automatic climate control CLK 500 CLK 55 AMG The automatic climate control is operation Nearly all dust particles pollutants and al whenever the engine is running Youcan odors are filtered out before outside air operate the climate control system in ei enters the passenger compartment ther the automatic or manual mode The through the air distribution system system cools or heats the interior depend ing on the selected interior temperature and the current outside temperature The air conditioning will not engage no cooling if the A C mode is deactivated gt page 206 Warning A Warning A When operating the automatic climate control the air that enters the passenger compartment through the air vents can be very hot or very cold depending on the
109. otherwise injure them The Parktronic system is an electronic aid designed to assist the driver during park ing maneuvers It visually and audibly indi cates the relative distance between the vehicle and an obstacle The Parktronic system is automatically ac tivated when you switch on the ignition gt page 34 and placed the gear selector lever in position D R or N Controls in detail Driving systems The Parktronic system deactivates at speeds over approximately 11 mph 18 km h At lower speeds the Parktronic system turns on again The Parktronic system also deactivates when you place the gear selector lever in position P The Parktronic system monitors the sur roundings of your vehicle with six sensors in the front bumper and four sensors in the rear bumper D j 1 Sensors in the front bumper Controls in detail Driving systems Range of the sensors To function properly the sensors must be free of dirt ice snow and slush Clean the sensors regularly being careful not to scratch or damage the sensors see Cleaning the Parktronic system Canada only sensors gt page 369 P54 65 2868 31 E 400 50 lem o 60 120 cm 40 20 Ofin 24 48 lin P 4 65 2869 31 Front sensors Center approx 40 in 100 cm Corners approx 24 in 60 cm Rear sensors Center approx 48 in 120 cm Corners approx 32 in 80 cm During parking maneuvers pay special attentio
110. rear passenger compartment 283 Cup holders scccesscccesscceseees 283 Ashtrays axacesnemossenneshndy Seensaigenaeunaes 284 Cigarette lighter cc eececceeeeeees 286 Power outlet in the rear passenger compartment 287 PIGONINALS erreser 287 Telephone csscccccessecccesescenes 288 Tele Aid acc haeaucsonadeapiariasniseduannoaseeke 289 Garage door opener 00668 296 Operation cece ceeecccceseeeceeeeees 305 The first 1000 miles 1500 km 306 Driving INStrUCTIONS ccccceneeeeeeees 307 Drive sensibly save fuel 307 Drinking and driving cccceeeeees 307 FP CCAS eunsagievnsraeieannsemiontoemersasounen 307 Power ASSISTANCE ccceeeceeeee ees 307 Brake cccssscccesscecesseeceeeeeees 308 Driving Off oo eeecccccsseeeeeceeeeeeeees 310 PAN KIN vssastinnsn ton soadacsenssnawnneriendvehens 310 WS E EE S E NEA 311 HyCroOplaning cccccccsssesceeeeeeees 311 Tire TPA CEON sisensessansninerenenseeariccensne 312 Tire Speed rating ceecccseeeceee eee 312 Winter driving instructions 313 Standing water cccseecceeseeeeees 314 Passenger compartment 314 Driving ADrOAd cceccccseseeceeeees 315 Control and operation of radio transmitters 008 315 Catalytic converter c 0cccee 316 EMISSION control secceeeeeeeees 316 Coolant temperature
111. reset button on the instrument cluster gt page 136 until the trip odometer is reset Controls in detail Instrument cluster Tachometer The red marking on the tachometer gt page 24 denotes excessive engine speed Ha Avoid driving at excessive engine speeds as it may result in serious engine damage that is not covered by the Mercedes Benz Limited Warranty To help protect the engine the fuel supply is interrupted if the engine is operated within the red marking Outside temperature indicator A The outside temperature indicator is not de signed to serve as an ice warning device and is therefore unsuitable for that purpose Warning Indicated temperatures just above the freez ing point do not guarantee that the road sur face is free of ice The road may still be icy especially in wooded areas or on bridges The outside temperature is indicated in the multifunction display gt page 140 The temperature sensor is located in the front bumper area Due to its location the sensor can be affected by road or engine heat during idling or slow driving This means that the accuracy of the displayed temperature can only be verified by com parison to a thermometer placed next to the sensor not by comparison to external displays e g bank signs etc When moving the vehicle into colder ambi ent temperatures e g when leaving your garage you will notice a delay before the lower temperatur
112. s electronic components are interconnected any modifications made may produce an undesired effect on other systems Electronic malfunctions could seriously impair the operating safety of your vehicle See an authorized Mercedes Benz Center for repairs or modifications to electronic components Other improper work or modifications on the vehicle could also have a negative impact on the operating safety of the vehicle Some safety systems only function while the engine is running You should therefore never turn off the engine while driving Warning Heavy blows against the vehicle underbody or tires wheels for example when running over an obstacle road debris or a pothole may cause serious damage to and impair the operating safety of your vehicle If you feel a sudden significant vibration or ride distur bance or you suspect that damage to your vehicle has occurred you should turn on your hazard warning flashers carefully slow down and drive with caution to an area which is a safe distance from the road Inspect the vehicle underbody and tires wheels for possible damage If the vehicle appears unsafe have it towed to the nearest authorized Mercedes Benz Center or other qualified maintenance or repair facility for further inspection or repairs Proper use of the vehicle eee Proper use of the vehicle requires that you are familiar with the following information an
113. sales designation and manufacturer name a number of markings can be found on a tire Following are some explanations for the markings on your vehicle s tires P40 10 3561 31 Operation Tires and wheels 1 Uniform Quality Grading Standards gt page 353 2 DOT Tire Identification Number TIN gt page 350 3 Maximum tire load gt page 351 4 Maximum tire inflation pressure gt page 352 Manufacturer 6 Tire ply material gt page 354 7 Tire size designation load and speed rating gt page 346 Load identification gt page 349 9 Tire name For illustration purposes only Actual data on tires are specific to each vehi cle and may vary from data shown in above illustration For more information see Rims and tires gt page 471 Operation Tires and wheels Tire size designation load and speed rating C Tire width 2 Aspect ratio in 3 Radial tire code 4 Rim diameter Tire load rating 6 Tire speed rating For illustration purposes only Actual data on tires are specific to each vehi cle and may vary from data shown in above illustration General Depending on the design standards used the tire size molded into the sidewall may have no letter or a letter preceding the tire size designation No letter preceding the size designation as illustrated above Passenger car tire based on European design standards
114. see Oper s Man orthe message Front passenger air bag deactivated see Oper s Man should not appear in the multifunction display at any time the seat is unoccupied Wait at last 60 seconds for the system to complete the necessary check cycles and to make sure neither message appears in the multifunction display If above conditions are met you can occupy the front passenger seat again Depend ing on the front passenger classification sensed by the OCS gt page 78 the EART indicator lamp will remain illuminated or go out If above conditions are not met the system is not working properly Have the system checked as soon as possible by an authorized Mercedes Benz Center Warning N illuminated with an adult occupant on the passenger use the front passenger seat until i front passenger seat even after performing the system has been repaired If the EAEE indicator lamp remains the above corrective steps do not have any Display message P Selector lever in park position Please Shite vo N or P Possible cause consequence You have turned off the engine with the KEYLESS GO start stop button in gear selector lever position N and opened the driver s door or You have attempted to switch off the en gine with the KEYLESS GO start stop button while the gear selector lever was in position R or D You have attempted to start the engine with the KEYLESS GO start stop button while the gear selector lever was in
115. settings you have changed will not be reset unless you confirm the action by pressing the reset button a second time After approximately five seconds the Settings menu reappears in the multifunction display For safety reasons the following function is not reset while driving e the Lamp circuit headlamp func tion in the Lighting submenu Submenus in the Settings menu gt Press button a The collection of the submenus appears in the multifunction display a Settings a iq e l Moa cl ri ter rs cs ime Da Tv gee Lighting Y ie 72 F ai P 145 8 MI ya Cs P54 32 2614 31 gt Press button EE The selection marker moves to the next submenu The submenus are arranged by hierarchy Scroll down with button JM scroll up with button ES With the selection marker on the desired submenu use button EAN to access the individual functions within that submenu Once within the submenu you can use button JAM to move to the next function or button RYA to move to the previous function within that submenu The settings themselves are made with button or a Controls in detail Control system Resetting the functions of a submenu For each submenu you can reset all the functions to the factory settings gt Move to a function in the submenu gt Press the reset button gt page 136 in the instrument cluster for approxi mately three seconds The request to press the reset button once more to co
116. shifting malfunctions 180 Kickdown 170 Manual One touch gearshifting 173 Manual shift program 178 One touch gearshifting Steering wheel gearshift control 174 Shift program mode selector switch 172 178 Starting engine 48 Transmission fluid level 326 Automatic Transmission Fluid see ATF B Backrest Seat Multicontour 121 Seat Power 38 166 168 Backup lamps Messages in display 406 Replacing bulbs 438 439 Bar 355 BAS 88 487 Batteries SmartKey Changing 436 Checking battery condition 99 Batteries SmartKey with KEYLESS GO Changing 437 Checking battery condition 105 Battery Vehicle 328 453 Charging 455 Connecting 455 Disconnecting 454 Installing 455 Jump starting 456 Messages in display 395 Removing 454 Bead 355 Beverage holder see Cup holder Bi Xenon headlamps see Headlamps Block heater Canada only 360 Bolts Spare wheel 418 Brake Assist System see BAS Brake fluid 481 Checking 320 Messages in display 396 Brake lamp Cleaning lenses 369 High mounted 439 Messages in display 404 Replacing bulbs 439 443 Brake pads Messages in display 396 Brakes 308 High performance brake system CLK 55 AMG only 309 Warning lamp 375 Break in the vehicle 306 Bulbs replacing see Replacing bulbs C CAC 487 California retail buyers and lessees Important notice for 11 Call priority Tele Aid 294 Can holder see Cup holder CAN system 487 Capacities and recommended fuels lubricants 479 Cargo area see Tr
117. sparks away from battery Do not smoke Observe all safety instructions and precau tions when handling automotive batteries gt page 328 The battery is located on the right side of the engine compartment For jump start ing use the terminals in front of the bat tery gt Make sure the two vehicles do not touch Turn off all electrical consumers Apply parking brake Shift gear selector lever to position P Open the hood gt page 321 vY v vV y Yy Flip up cover from positive under hood terminal 2 in front of the filter box gt page 454 h i PSAo 1 Positive terminal of charged battery 2 Positive under hood terminal in front of discharged battery 3 Negative under hood terminal in front of discharged battery 4 Negative terminal of charged battery gt Connect the positive terminal Q of the charged battery with the positive under hood terminal 2 in front of the filter box with the jumper cable Clamp cable to charged battery Q first 7 Never invert the terminal connections Practical hints Jump starting gt Start engine of the vehicle with the charged battery and run at idle speed gt Connect the negative terminal 4 of the charged battery with the negative under hood terminal in front of the filter box with the jumper cable Clamp cable to charged battery 4 first gt Start the engine of the disabled vehi cle You can now turn on the electrical co
118. speed e Parktronic Canada only which serves as a parking assistant For information on the BAS ABS and ESP driving systems see Driving safety sys tems gt page 87 Cruise control Cruise control automatically maintains the speed you set for your vehicle Use of cruise control is recommended for driving at a constant speed for extended periods of time You can set or resume cruise control at any speed over 20 mph 30 km h The cruise control function is operated by means of the cruise control lever The cruise control lever is the uppermost lever on the left hand side of the steering column gt page 22 Controls in detail Driving systems A Cruise control is a convenience system de signed to assist the driver during vehicle op eration The driver is and must remain at all times responsible for the vehicle speed and for safe brake operation Warning Only use cruise control if the road traffic and weather conditions make it advisable to travel at a steady speed e The use of cruise control can be danger ous on winding roads or in heavy traffic because conditions do not allow safe driving at a steady speed e The use of cruise control can be danger Ous on slippery roads Rapid changes in tire traction can result in wheel spin and loss of control e Deactivate cruise control when driving in fog The Resume function should only be oper ated if the driver is fully
119. the Tele Aid system may only be performed by completing the subscriber agreement and placing an acquaintance call using the button Failure to complete either of these steps will result in a system that is not activated If you have any questions regarding activation please call the Response Center at 1 800 756 9018 in the USA or 1 888 923 8367 in Canada The Tele Aid system Telematic Alarm Identification on Demand The Tele Aid system consists of three types of response e automatic and manual emergency e roadside assistance and e information Controls in detail Useful features The Tele Aid system is operational provid ing that the vehicle s battery is charged properly connected not damaged and cellular and GPS coverage is available The speaker volume of a Tele Aid call can be adjusted when using the volume control on the multifunction steering wheel To raise press button and to lower press button EE The volume can also be adjusted using the volume knob on your audio system or COMAND head unit gt To activate press the SOS button the Roadside Assistance button or the Information button M depend ing on the type of response required The SOS button is located above the interior rear view mirror The Roadside Assistance button and the Information button are located below the center armrest cover Controls in detail Useful features Shortly after the completion of you
120. the Vehicle Tire Information placard Example B a Placard Example A Data shown on placard examples are for illustration purposes only Load lim it data is specific to each vehicle and may vary from data shown in the illus trations below Refer to placard on ve hicle for actual data specific to your vehicle i ADDTIONAL FORMATION P40 00 2062 31 1 Load limit information on the Tire and Loading Information placard The placard showing the load limit informa tion is located on the driver s door B pillar If your vehicle is equipped with the Tire and Loading Information placard Example A locate the statement The combined weight of occupants and cargo should never exceed XXX kilograms or XXX lbs on this placard The combined weight of all occupants cargo luggage and trailer tongue load if applicable should never exceed the weight referenced in that statement Placard Example B VEHICLE TIRE INFORMATION VEHICLE CAPACITY WEIGHT i KG LBS COLD TIRE PRESSURE 1 Load limit information on the Vehicle Tire Information placard The placard showing the load limit informa tion is located on the driver s door B pillar If your vehicle is equipped with the Vehicle Tire Information placard Example B locate the heading Vehicle Capacity Weight on this placard The combined weight of all occupants cargo luggage and trailer tongue if applicable should never exceed the weight listed n
121. the left in the D direction The transmission will shift from the current gear to the next lower gear as permitted by the shift program This action simulta neously limits the gear range of the transmission gt page 171 To avoid overrevving the engine when the gear selector lever is moved to the D direction the transmission will not shift to a lower gear if the engine s max speed would be exceeded Controls in detail Automatic transmission Upshifting gt Briefly press the gear selector lever to the right in the D direction The transmission will shift from the current gear to the next higher gear as permitted by the shift program This action simul taneously extends the gear range of the transmission Canceling gear range limit gt Press and hold the gear selector lever in the D direction until D reappears in the multifunction display The transmission will shift from the current gear range directly to gear range D Shifting into optimal gear range gt Press and hold the gear selector lever in the D direction The transmission will automatically select the gear range suited for optimal acceleration and deceleration This may involve shifting down one or more gears 173 Controls in detail Automatic transmission Steering wheel gearshift control one touch gearshifting The steering wheel gearshift control pro vides an alternative method for changing the gears manuall
122. the locking mechanism does not retract again If this happens pull the locking mechanism out again and rotate it approx one quarter of a turn Opening closing in an emergency 2 Trim 3 Locking mechanism 4 Hex wrench Screw of hydraulic pump gt Fold the right hand side of the trunk gt Pull locking mechanism out until it floor away stops and rotate it approx one quarter Insert hex wrench 4 into screw gt Detach trim 2 along the perforation ora sui gt Turn hydraulic pump screw counter gt Make sure the locking mechanism clockwise one revolution with hex does not retract again If this happens wrench 4 pull the locking mechanism out again and rotate it approx one quarter of a H turn Do not operate the soft top switch with screw 6 in the opened position other wise the hydraulic pump could be dam aged gt D Practical hints Opening closing in an emergency 6 Lever Strap gt Pull strap between soft top storage Soft top storage compartment hinge yyy strap supplied in vehicle tool compartment hinge and soft top com The soft top storage compartment hinges kit behind soft top storage compart PAE pnr are located on the left and right of the ment through hinge 7 gt Secure second strap to second hinge in space between the soft top compartment the same manner gt Bring strap together in front of hinge cover and the trunk seal e uiieswes Lana fojg lll the
123. the remote control buttons on the SmartKey and start the engine without in serting the SmartKey in the starter switch To unlock the vehicle the SmartKey with KEYLESS GO must be outside the vehicle no further than approx 3 feet 1 meter away from the door Warning A N When leaving the vehicle always take the SmartKey with KEYLESS GO with you and lock the vehicle Do not leave children unat tended in the vehicle or with access to an unlocked vehicle Unsupervised use of vehi cle equipment may cause an accident and or serious personal injury gt Pull an outside door handle All turn signal lamps flash once The vehicle unlocks The locking knobs in the doors move up The anti theft alarm system is disarmed gt Enter the vehicle Getting started Unlocking Opening a door causes the windows on that side of the car to open slightly They will return to the up position when the door is closed For more information see SmartKey with KEYLESS GO gt page 100 Getting started Unlocking Starter switch positions Warning J When leaving the vehicle always remove the SmartKey or SmartKey with KEYLESS GO from the starter switch take it with you and lock the vehicle Do not leave children unat tended in the vehicle or with access to an unlocked vehicle Unsupervised use of vehi cle equipment may cause an accident and or serious personal injury SmartKey Start
124. the selected maga zine slot N0 CD appears in the display with the corresponding slot number Controls in detail Audio system Direct track entry Skipping tracks forward backward e Skipping tracks forward gt Press button briefly The next track will be played e Skipping tracks backward gt Press button briefly P82 60 4456 31 If the track has been playing for more than ten seconds the unit skips back to the beginning of the track currently playing If less than ten seconds have been played the unit skips back to the beginning of the previous track Pressing the or button repeat edly will result in multiple tracks being skipped You can make a direct selection from among the tracks on a CD gt Press button gt Enter track number using buttons EE to a The number of the track being played appears next to TRACK in the display You can only enter available track num bers Controls in detail Audio system Fast forward reverse e Fast forward gt Press and hold button until desired point has been reached e Reverse gt Press and hold button until desired point has been reached The track number and the relative time of the track is shown in the display dur ing the search Scan e Starting scan gt Press SC soft key SC will appear in the display Each track on the current CD will be played for approx eight seconds in ascending order e Ending scan gt Pres
125. the total weight that can be carried in the vehicle It also contains information on the proper size and recommended tire inflation pressures for the original equipment tires on your vehicle e The Certification label also found on the driver s door B pillar tells you about the gross weight capacity of your vehi cle called the Gross Vehicle Weight Rating GVWR The GVWR includes the weight of the vehicle all occupants fuel and cargo The Certification label also tells you about Operation Tires and wheels the front and rear axle weight capacity called the Gross Axle Weight Rating GAWR The GAWR is the total allow able weight that can be carried by a sin gle axle front or rear Never exceed the GVWR or GAWR for either the front axle or rear axle 1 Driver s door B pillar P60 00 2705 31 Following is a discussion on how to work with the information contained on the two placards with regards to loading your vehi cle Operation Tires and wheels Tire and Loading Information Warning A N Do not overload the tires by exceeding the specified load limit or vehicle capacity weight as indicated on the placard on the driver s door B pillar Overloading the tires can overheat them possibly causing a blowout Overloading the tires can also result in handling or steering problems or brake failure Your vehicle is equipped with either the Tire and Loading Information placard Example A or
126. the trunk separately P8O 20 2792 31 C Trunk closing switch gt Press trunk closing switch Q briefly The trunk closes You can also close the trunk by hand page 111 If the trunk lid comes into contact with an object while closing e g luggage that has been piled too high the closing procedure is stopped and the trunk reopens slightly Warning A N Monitor the closing procedure carefully to ensure that no one is in danger of being in jured To prevent possible personal injury always keep hands and fingers away from the trunk opening when closing the trunk Be especially careful when small children are around To stop the closing procedure do one of the following e press trunk closing switch e press the button on the SmartKey e press the remote trunk opening or clos ing switch on driver s door Even with the SmartKey removed from the starter switch the trunk closing switch can be operated Therefore do not leave chil dren unattended in the vehicle or with access to an unlocked vehicle Unsu pervised use of vehicle equipment may cause an accident and or serious personal injury Warning A N Only drive with the trunk closed as among other dangers such as blocked visibility exhaust fumes may enter the vehicle interior Do not place the SmartKey in the open trunk You may lock yourself out If the vehicle was previously centrally locked the trunk will lock
127. to close Remove front ashtray only with vehicle ashtray standing still Set the parking brake to se cure vehicle from movement Move gear se The cover plate engages lector lever to position N With gear selector lever in position N turn off the engine gt Secure vehicle from movement by setting the parking brake gt Move the gear selector lever to position N Now you have more room to take out the insert gt Push sliding button to the right The ashtray is disengaged and slides a short way in direction of arrow 3 gt Remove the ashtray insert Controls in detail Rear seat ashtray 1 Button 2 Ashtray insert 3 Cover Useful features Controls in detail Useful features Opening ashtray Cigarette lighter gt Pull at top of cover ing Removing ashtray insert Warning A gt Push button Q to disengage ashtray Never touch the heating element or sides of insert 2 and remove it the cigarette lighter they are extremely hot Hold the knob only Reinstalling ashtray insert When leaving the vehicle always remove the aed gt Push the ashtray insert 2 down into SmartKey or SmartKey with KEYLESS GO _ the retainer until it engages from the starter switch take it with you and 1 Cover lock the vehicle Do not leave children unat 2 Cigarette lighter Push f r gt Push at top of cover to close tended in the vehicle or with access to an ashtray g
128. to operate when you are braking oe When the ESP is switched off and one or more drive wheels are spinning the ESP warning lamp in the instru ment cluster flashes However the ESP will then not stabilize the vehicle The switch is located on the center con sole ias A Ee P54 75 4746 31 1 ESP switch off on Press switch 1 The ESP warning lamp in the in strument cluster comes on The ESP is deactivated Safety and Security Driving safety systems Warning When the ESP warning lamp is illuminated continuously the ESP is switched off Adapt your speed and driving to the prevail ing road conditions and to the non operating status of the ESP Avoid spinning of a drive wheel for an extended period with the ESP switched off This may cause serious damage to the drivetrain which is not covered by the Mercedes Benz Limited Warranty Switching on the ESP gt Press switch Q again The ESP warning lamp in the in strument cluster goes out You are now again in normal driving mode with ESP switched on Safety and Security Anti theft systems Immobilizer The immobilizer prevents unauthorized persons from starting your vehicle Activating With the SmartKey gt Remove the SmartKey from the starter switch With KEYLESS GO gt Turn off the engine by means of the start stop button gt page 35 on the gear selector lever gt Open
129. until it engages o 1 Brake lamp 2 Turn signal lamp 3 Backup lamp 4 Standing and side marker lamp Rear fog lamp driver s side tail Practical hints Replacing bulbs gt Reinstall the bulb carrier Let tab 2 engage gt Connect the electrical connector 1 until it engage gt Reinstall trim panel License plate lamp FBZ 10 2913 31 1 Screws Loosen both screws Q Remove the license plate lamp Replace the tubular lamp Reinstall the license plate lamp Retighten the screws Q vY v yY Yy Practical hints Replacing wiper blades Removing and installing wiper blades Warning For safety reasons switch off wipers and remove SmartKey from starter switch vehicles with KEYLESS GO make sure the vehicle s on board electronics have status 0 before replacing a wiper blade Otherwise the wiper motor could suddenly turn on and cause injury Never open the hood when the wiper arms are folded forward For your convenience we recommend that you have this work carried out by an authorized Mercedes Benz Center Remove SmartKey from starter switch vehicles with KEYLESS GO make sure the vehicle s on board electronics have status 0 Removing wiper blades P82 30 2533 31 1 Unlocking 2 Tab Pull the tab 2 in the direction of arrow Q The wiper blade is unlocked Lift up the wiper arm as far as you need to remove the wiper bla
130. vehicle when the backrest is not locked in place If the warning message Lock front passenger seat or lock drivers Seat is displayed in the multifunction display then the respective backrest is not engaged in its lock Carefully slow down and drive with caution to an area which is in a safe dis tance from the roadway Always provide suf ficient room behind the backrest and fold the backrest all the way back until it locks in place The warning message is no longer displayed as soon as the backrest is locked in place If both backrests are locked in place and the warning message is still displayed have the system checked at an authorized Mercedes Benz Center immediately When leaving the vehicle always remove the SmartKey or SmartKey with KEYLESS GO from the starter switch take it with you and lock the vehicle The power seats can also be operated with the driver s or passenger door open Do not leave children unattended in the vehicle or with access to an unlocked vehicle Unsu pervised use of vehicle equipment may cause an accident and or serious personal injury Never place hands under seat or near any moving parts during a seat adjustment pro cedure For information on additional convenience features permitting easy entry and exit see Easy entry exit feature gt page 42 Steering wheel A Do not adjust the steering wheel while driv ing Adjusting the steering wheel while driv i
131. vehicle with a dif nents and connectors from contact with Vehicles with KEYLESS GO fused jet of water water and cleaning agents If a door handle is hit by a strong jet of Direct only a very weak spray towards Corrosion protection such as MB Anticor water and a SmartKey with the ventilation intake rosion Wax should be applied to the KEYLESS GO is in close proximity i e 4 Use plenty of water and rinse the engine compartment after every engine within approximately 3 ft sponge and chamois frequently cleaning Before applying all control approximately 1 m the vehicle could linkage bushings and joints should be be inadvertently locked or unlocked gt Rinse with clean water and thoroughly lubricated The poly V belt and all pulleys dry with a chamois should be protected from any wax Do not allow cleaning agents to dry on the finish Automatic car wash You can have your car washed in an auto matic car wash from the start Automatic car washes without brushes are prefera ble If the vehicle is very dirty prewash it be fore running it through the automatic car wash i Due to the width of the vehicle fold in exterior rear view mirrors prior to run ning the vehicle through an automatic car wash to prevent damage to the mirrors Make sure that the combination switch is set to O gt page 53 Otherwise the rain sensor could activate and cause the wipers to move unintentionally This may lead to vehicl
132. wire from the garage door opener assembly This may help improve transmitting and or receiving signals Certain types of garage door openers are incompatible with the integrated remote control If you should experi ence further difficulties with program ming the integrated remote control contact an authorized Mercedes Benz Center or call Mercedes Benz Customer Assistance Center in the USA only at 1 800 FOR MERCedes or Customer Service in Canada at 1 800 387 0100 USA only This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules Operation is subject to the following two conditions 1 This device may not cause harmful interference and 2 this device must accept any interference received including interference that may cause undesired operation Any unauthorized modification to this device could void the user s authority to operate the equipment Controls in detail Useful features Canada only This device complies with RSS 2 10 of Industry Canada Operation is subject to the following two conditions 1 This device may not cause interference and 2 this device must accept any interference received including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device Any unauthorized modification to this device could void the user s authority to operate the equipment Operation The first 1000 miles 1500 km Driving instructions At the gas station Engine co
133. 0 Nm 2400 5000 rpm 6300 rpm 1 4 3 6 2 5 2404 mm CLK 500 209 475 113 4 stroke engine gasoline injec tion 8 3 82 in 97 00 mm 3 31 in 84 00 mm 303 0 cu in 4966 cm 10 1 302 hp 5600 rpm 225 kW 5600 rpm 339 lb ft 2700 4250 rom 460 Nm 2700 4250 rpm 6300 rpm 1 5 4 2 6 3 7 8 2380 mm CLK 55 AMG 209 476 113 4 stroke engine gasoline injec tion 8 3 82 in 97 00 mm 3 62 in 92 00 mm 331 8 cu in 5439 cm ileal 362 hp 5750 rpm 270 kW 5750 rpm 376 Ib ft 4000 rpm 510 Nm 4000 rpm 6700 rpm 1 5 4 2 6 3 7 8 2380 mm The quoted data apply only to the standard vehicle See an authorized Mercedes Benz Center for the corresponding data of all special bodies and special equipment 2 Premium fuel required Performance may vary with fuel octane rating Y Rims and tires Only use tires which have been tested and approved by Mercedes Benz Tires approved by Mercedes Benz are devel oped to provide best possible perfor mance in conjunction with the driving safety systems on your vehicle such as ABS or ESP Tires specially developed for your vehicle and tested and ap proved by Mercedes Benz can be iden tified by finding the following on the tire s sidewall e MO Mercedes Benz Original equipment tires AMG vehicles Does not apply to all approved tires on AMG vehicles For information on tested and approved tires for AMG vehicles contact an autho rized M
134. 03 Lamp sensor 405 Lamps 404 Lamps exterior 404 408 License plate lamp 405 Parking brake 396 Parking lamps 406 Roll bars 408 Seat belts 409 Soft top 410 SRS 409 Steering gear oil 410 Tele Aid 409 Telephone 411 Trunk 412 Turn signals 407 Windshield washer fluid 412 Multifunction steering wheel 26 140 490 Button operation 140 N Navigation system 146 See separate COMAND operating instructions Net Parcel 280 Neutral gear position 168 New vehicle break in 306 Night security illumination 129 Normal occupant weight 356 Number vehicle identification VIN 468 O Occupant Classification System see OCS Occupant distribution 356 Occupant safety 62 Active head restraints 73 Air bags 63 Children and air bags 64 Children in the vehicle 75 ETD 72 Fastening the seat belts 45 Front air bags 67 Front passenger front air bag off indicator lamp 81 381 Head thorax air bags 68 Infant and child restraint systems 75 LATCH type child seat anchors 83 OCS 78 Rear side impact air bags 68 Roll bars 74 Safety guidelines Seat belts Air bag ETD 66 Seat belts 45 69 SRS 62 OCS 78 490 Self test 82 Odometer 25 Oil level see Engine oil checking level Oil see Engine oil One touch gearshifting 173 Operating safety 209 Operating the vehicle outside the USA or Canada 13 Ornamental moldings cleaning 368 Outside temperature see Displays Overdue maintenance service 362 Overhead control panel 29 Overspeed range E
135. 1 800 387 0100 in Canada When a Tele Aid call has been initiated the audio system or the COMAND system audio is muted and the selected mode radio or CD pauses The optional cellular phone if installed switches off If you must use this phone the vehicle must be parked Disconnect the coiled cord and place the call The COMAND navigation system if engaged will continue to run The display in the instrument cluster is available for use and spoken commands are only available by press ing the RPT button on the COMAND headunit A pop up window will appear in the COMAND display to indicate that a Tele Aid call is in progress Remote door unlock In case you have locked your vehicle unin tentionally e g SmartKey inside vehicle and the reserve SmartKey is not handy gt Contact the Mercedes Benz Response Center at 1 800 756 9018 in the USA or 1 888 923 8367 in Canada You will be asked to provide your pass word which you provided when you completed the subscriber agreement gt Then return to your vehicle and pull the trunk recessed handle for a minimum of 20 seconds until the SOS button is flashing The message Connecting call ap pears in the multifunction display As an alternative you may unlock the vehi cle via Internet using the ID and password sent to you shortly after the completion of your acquaintance call The Response Center will then unlock your vehicle with the remote door unlock
136. 2 01 Agent CLK 55 AMG approx 12 8 US qt 12 0 I Fuel tank 16 35 US gal 62 0 I Premium unleaded gasoline including a reserve of CLK 350 2 11 US gal 8 0 I Minimum Posted Octane 91 CLK 500 2 11 US gal 8 0 I Avg of 96 RON 86 MON CLK 55 AMG 2 64 US gal 10 0 I Air conditioning system R 134a refrigerant and special PAG lu bricant oil never R 12 Windshield washer and 6 4 US qt 6 0 I MB Windshield Washer Concentrate headlamp cleaning system Use MB Windshield Washer Concentrate S and water for temperatures above freezing point or MB Windshield Washer Concentrate S and commercially available premixed windshield washer solvent antifreeze for temperatures below freezing point Follow suggested mixing ratios gt page 486 Engine oils Engine oils are specifically tested for their suitability in our engines and durability for our service intervals Therefore only use approved engine oils and oil filters re quired for vehicles with Maintenance system U S vehicles or FSS Canada vehicles For a listing of approved engine oils and oil filters refer to the Factory Ap proved Service Products pamphlet or contact an authorized Mercedes Benz Center Using engine oils and oil filters of spec ification other than those expressly re quired for the Maintenance System U S vehicles or FSS Canada vehi cles or changing of oil and oil filter at change intervals longer than those called for by the Mainte
137. 447 Jump starting 456 43 181 181 K Key Mechanical 419 Key SmartKey 96 Batteries 99 105 Battery check lamp 98 104 Changing batteries 436 Factory setting 98 99 Ignition 34 Locking unlocking 32 60 96 Locking unlocking Global setting 98 Locking unlocking Selective setting 98 Loss of 100 106 Message in display 403 404 Opening and closing the power windows 252 Opening and closing the soft top 260 Positions in starter switch 34 Remote control 96 SmartKey with KEYLESS GO 100 Starting the engine 49 Turning off the engine 58 Unlocking opening trunk lid 99 Key SmartKey with KEYLESS GO Changing batteries 437 KEYLESS GO 100 489 Batteries in SmartKey 105 Battery check lamp SmartKey 104 Factory setting 103 105 Ignition 36 Important notes 102 Lock button 60 Locking unlocking 33 60 100 Locking unlocking Global setting 103 104 Locking unlocking Global with lock button on trunk lid 105 Locking unlocking Selective setting 104 Loss of key 106 Messages in display 403 404 Remote control 100 Start stop button 35 Starting the engine 49 Turning off the engine 59 Unlocking opening trunk lid 106 Kickdown 170 489 Kilopascal 356 L Labels 468 Certification 468 Emission control information 468 Vacuum line routing diagram 468 Lamp sensor Messages in display 405 Lamps exterior 438 Light sensor 405 Messages in display 404 408 Lamps indicator and warning ABS 25 374 Battery SmartKey Brakes 25 375 Center con
138. A Malfunction and warning messages are only indicated for certain systems and are inten tionally not very detailed The malfunction and warning messages are simply a remind er with respect to the operation of certain systems and do not replace the owner s and or driver s responsibility to maintain the vehicle s operating safety by having all required maintenance and safety checks performed on the vehicle and by bringing the vehicle to an authorized Mercedes Benz Center to address the malfunction and warning messages gt page 383 Warning gt Press button or repeatedly until the vehicle status message memory appears in the multifunction display If the vehicle status message memory menu does not appear then there are no messages stored Vehicle status messages have been recorded If conditions have occurred causing status messages to be recorded the number of messages appears in the multifunction display D G4 2 messages 7 72 F 149 8 MI P54 30 6385 31 1 Number of messages gt Press button B or Ba The stored messages will now be displayed in the order in which they have occurred For malfunction and warning messag es see Vehicle status messages in the multifunction display gt page 383 Controls in detail Control system Should the vehicle s system record any conditions while driving the number of messages will reappear in the multifunc tion display wh
139. Available languages German Deutsch English English French francais Italian italiano Spanish Espa ol Dutch Nederlands Danish Dansk Swedish Svenska Portuguese Portugu s Turkish T rk e button or E to the Instr cluster submenu Press button BN or Ref repeatedly until the message Status line dis play appears in the multifunction display The selection marker is on the current setting Status lire display Sel outside temp LaS 72 F 149 3 MI P54 32 2082 31 Press button or E to select the desired setting You will see the status line when you have called up a different display from the standard display button or E to the Instr cluster submenu Press button A or Ref repeatedly until the message Basic display appears in the multifunction display The selection marker is on the current setting Basic display U Se eee 72 F 149 8 MI 3 P54 327 7083 51 Press button or E to select the display mode shown in the basic display Controls in detail Control system Time Date submenu Setting time hours Clock hours Access the Time Date submenu via the This function can only be seen in vehicles Confirm by press R Settings menu Use the Time Date with audio system ao 2 a submenu to change the instrument cluster _ 745 am E O 72 F display settings 149 8 HI l l Vehicles with COMAND ra eae The following functions are available l os For informa
140. E indicator lamp while driving to make sure the ERI indicator lamp is illuminated If the ERI indicator lamp goes out or remains out do not transport a child on the front passenger seat until the system has been repaired A child ina rear facing child restraint on the front passenger seat will be seriously injured or even killed if the front passenger front air bag inflates If you have to place a child in a forward facing child restraint on the front passenger seat move the seat as far back as possible use the proper child restraint recommended for the age size and weight of the child and secure child restraint with the vehicle s seat belt according to the child seat manufacturer s instructions For children larger than the typical 12 month old child the front passenger front air bag may or may not be activated gt page 79 Deployment of the driver front air bag does not mean that the front passenger front air bag also should have de ployed The Occupant Classification System gt page 78 may have determined that the seat was empty or occupied by the weight up to or less than that of a typical 12 month old child seated ina standard child restraint both instances where the system sup presses deployment of the front passenger front air bag even though the impact met the criteria and was of sufficient severity to deploy the driver front air bag that the seat was occupied by a small individual such as
141. IMALERCY E E 436 SmartKey with KEYLESS GO 437 Replacing bulbS nssseessseessseessseess 438 Bulei 438 Replacing bulbs for front lamps 440 Replacing bulbs for rear lamps 443 Replacing wiper blades 0668 444 Removing and installing wiper blades cccccssecceneeeeeees 444 DEA AEE T 446 Preparing the vehicle 006 446 Mounting the Minispare wheel 447 MOExtended system 0006 452 Battery sccasccswacsvews ob teedeodeshasaatescsacoasenees 453 Disconnecting the battery 454 Removing the battery 06 454 Charging and reinstalling the battery 455 Reconnecting the battery 455 JUN SEATING sic sscnsctarinezsdarssarsaniessessesds 456 Towing the Vehicle cccceeeeceeeees 458 Towing the vehicle 00cceees 458 Installing towing eye bolt 460 gc ere ee er ee 462 Aids for replacing fuses 462 Mainfuse box in passenger COMPAItMENL cccceececeeeeceeeees 463 Fuse box in engine compartment 463 Fuse Dox In trunk eeeeeeeeeeee eee 464 Ds Fuels coolants lubricants etc 479 Technical data cccccecceeeeeees 465 Capacities ssseeeseeseesesssssssessssees 479 Parts SCIVICE esesessesseeerercessessssssssees 466 Engine oils eeceeeeeeeseeeseeteteeeees 481 Warranty coverage 467 Engine oil additives
142. Key or KEYLESS GO The turn signal lamps flash three times to indicate that the alarm system is activated Indicator lamp begins to flash after approximately 30 seconds after arming the alarm system If the turn signal lamps do not flash three times one of the following elements may not be properly closed e a door e the trunk Close the respective element and lock the vehicle again Disarming the alarm system gt Unlock the vehicle with the SmartKey or KEYLESS GO The turn signal lamps flash once to indicate that the alarm system is disarmed The alarm system will rearm automati cally after approximately 40 seconds if neither a door nor the trunk lid was opened Safety and Security Anti theft systems Canceling the alarm With the SmartKey gt Press the or button on the SmartKey or gt Insert the SmartKey in the starter switch With KEYLESS GO gt Pull an outside door handle The SmartKey with KEYLESS GO must be within 3 ft 1 m of the vehicle or gt Press the KEYLESS GO start stop button The SmartKey with KEYLESS GO must be inside the vehicle Safety and Security Anti theft systems Tow away alarm Once the tow away alarm is armed a visual and audible alarm will be triggered when someone attempts to raise the vehicle The tow away protection alarm is triggered for example if the vehicle is lifted on one side If the alarm stays
143. Keys with KEYLESS GO each with remote control and a removable mechanical key The locking tabs for the mechanical key portion of the two SmartKeys with KEYLESS GO are a different color to help distinguish each SmartKey with KEYLESS GO unit The KEYLESS GO function is integrated into the SmartKey On these vehicles the validity of the SmartKey with KEYLESS GO is checked every time you pull an outside door handle If the SmartKey with KEYLESS GO is valid your vehicle unlocks e the doors e the glove box e the trunk e the fuel filler flap P80 35 2087 31 SmartKey with KEYLESS GO Lock button Opening button for trunk 3 Mechanical key locking tab 4 Unlock button Battery check lamp 6 Panic button gt page 86 When the passenger outside door han dle is pulled the vehicle is centrally un locked Warning J When leaving the vehicle always take the SmartKey with KEYLESS GO with you and lock the vehicle Do not leave children unat tended in the vehicle or with access to an unlocked vehicle Unsupervised use of vehi cle equipment may cause an accident and or serious personal injury To prevent possible malfunction avoid exposing the SmartKey with KEYLESS GO to high levels of electro magnetic radiation USA only This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules Operation is subject to the following two conditions 1 This device may not cause harmful interference
144. Messages in display 397 399 Temperature 317 Temperature indicator 137 Warning lamp 377 Coolants 484 Corner illuminating front fog lamps 132 Replacing bulbs 438 439 Cruise control 265 488 Canceling 267 Cruise control lever 265 Current speed 266 Fine adjustment 268 Higher speed 268 Windshield 192 202 Defrosting Front 191 201 Defrosting Rear 185 Delayed shut off Exteriorlamps 158 Interior lighting 159 Department of Transportation see DOT Difficulties With starting 50 Digital soeedometer 144 Dimensions Vehicle 478 Direction of rotation tires 333 Drinking and driving 307 Driving Abroad 315 Hydroplaning 311 Inwinter 313 Instructions 45 307 Problems 56 Safety systems 87 systems 265 Through standing water 314 Driving off 310 Driving safety systems ABS 87 BAS 88 ESP 89 Driving systems Cruise control 265 Parktronic system Canada only 269 E Easy entry exit feature 42 160 Electrical fuses see Fuses Electrical outlet 287 Electrical system Technical data 477 Electronic Stability Program see ESP Emergency call system 289 Emergency calls 911 calls 247 Tele Aid calls 290 291 Emergency operation Limp Home Mode 180 Emergency operations Active head restraints Resetting 434 Center console Indicator lamps 381 382 Gear selector lever Unlocking 422 Instrument cluster Indicator lamps 374 380 Remote door unlock 295 Roll bars Lowering 424 Roll bars Releasing 423 Soft top Closing 425 433
145. Notice of Purchase of Used Car found in the Service and Warranty Information Booklet or call the Mercedes Benz Customer Assistance Center in the USA at 1 800 FOR MERCedes or Customer Service in Canada at 1 800 387 0100 Operating your vehicle outside the USA or Canada If you plan to operate your vehicle in for eign countries please be aware that e service facilities or replacement parts may not be readily available e unleaded gasoline for vehicles with cat alytic converters may not be available the use of leaded fuels will damage the catalysts e gasoline may have a considerably low er octane rating and improper fuel can cause engine damage Introduction Operator s Manual Certain Mercedes Benz models are avail able for delivery in Europe under our Euro pean Delivery Program For details consult an authorized Mercedes Benz Center or write to In the USA Mercedes Benz USA LLC European Delivery Department One Mercedes Drive Montvale NJ 07645 0350 In Canada Mercedes Benz Canada Inc European Delivery Department 98 Vanderhoof Avenue Toronto Ontario M4G 4C9 Introduction Where to find it This Operator s Manual is designed to pro vide comprehensive support information for you the vehicle operator Each section has its own reference color GS M At a glance Here you will find an overview of all the controls that can be operated from the drivers seat E Getting st
146. Page Selecting speedometer display 151 mode Selecting language 151 Selecting display speed display 152 or outside temperature for the status line Selecting display speed display 152 or outside temperature for standard display gt Selecting speedometer display mode Move the selection marker with button or E to the Instr cluster submenu Press button EAN or Ref repeatedly until the message Display unit Speed odometer appears in the multi function display The selection marker is on the current setting Display unit speed odome ter f2 149 8 MI P54 32 2086 31 Press button or E to set speedometer unit to km or miles Controls in detail Control system Selecting language gt Move the selection marker with button or E to the Instr cluster submenu Press button A or Keg repeatedly until the message Language appears in the multifunction display The selection marker is on the current setting Language _ Deutsch _ Belted fran ais 72 F 149 5 MI P54 32 3084 31 5 Controls in detail Control system gt gt Press button or E to select the language to be used for the multifunction display messages Selecting display speed display or out Selecting display speed display or out side temperature for the status line side temperature for standard display gt Move the selection marker with gt Move the selection marker with
147. Place a new call by entering tele kept on hold is also interrupted phone number manually gt Press button however reconnection is indicated p Sii The calls are combined into one by an acoustic signal P ieee aeaea call You are connected to the second caller the first caller is kept on hold gt Press button The connection to both callers is terminated e Terminating a combined call Emergency calls 911 The following describes how to dial a 9 11 emergency call using the audio system head unit when a Mercedes Benz specified mobile phone is inserted in the phone cradle Unless otherwise specified the descriptions refer to the audio system head unit Consult the separate telephone operating instructions that came with your mobile phone for information on how to place a 911 emergency call on the mobile phone Warning A N The 911 emergency call system is a public service Using it without due cause is a crim inal offense The following conditions must be met for a 911 emergency call e Telephone must be switched on e he corresponding mobile communica tions network must be available Emergency calls may not be possible with all telephone networks or if certain network services and or telephone functions are active Check with your local service providers If you cannot make an emergency call you will have to initiate rescue measures your self Controls in
148. Practical hints What to do if Display symbol Display message e Moriimer toni ere Visit workshop When the message Add 1 gt engine oil at next refueling Canada 1 liter ap pears while the engine is running and at operating temperature the engine oil level has dropped to approximately the minimum level Possible cause consequence The engine oil has dropped to a critical level Possible solution gt Check the engine oil level gt page 323 and add oil as required gt page 325 gt If you must add engine oil frequently have the engine checked for possible leaks The measuring system is malfunctioning gt Have the measuring system checked When this occurs the warning will first come on intermittently and then stay on if the oil level drops further Visually check for oil leaks If no obvious oil leaks are noted drive to the nearest ser vice station where the engine oil should be topped to the required level with an approved oil specified in the Factory Approved Service Products pamphlet by an authorized Mercedes Benz Center The engine oil level warnings should not be ignored Extended driving with the symbol displayed could result in serious engine damage that is not covered by the Mercedes Benz Limited Warranty Display symbol Display message Reserve fuel Hood open Remove key Replace key Key Check battery Key not recognized Keyless Go Check system
149. SmartKey or the SmartKey with KEYLESS GO and lock vehicle when leaving Getting started Parking and locking Parking brake m Ea ae d i x 4 5 f ne Eho r d j Ed a i i i i 4 i m i iw 4 is A X i l i ani k i pa Fi i a a al j 1 Release handle 2 Parking brake pedal gt Step firmly on parking brake pedal 2 When the engine is running the warning lamp USA only or ROJ Canada only in the instru ment cluster will be illuminated Getting started Parking and locking Warning J When leaving the vehicle always remove the SmartKey or SmartKey with KEYLESS GO from the starter switch take it with you and lock the vehicle Do not leave children unat tended in the vehicle or with access to an unlocked vehicle Children could release the parking brake and or move the gear selec tor lever from position P either of which could result in an accident and or serious personal injury Warning Getting out of your vehicle with the gear se lector lever not fully engaged in position P is dangerous Also when parked on an incline position P alone may not prevent your vehi cle from moving possibly hitting people or objects Always set the parking brake in addition to shifting to position P gt page 168 When parked on an incline turn front wheels towards the road curb Switching off headlamps gt Turn the exterior l
150. Stopping distance however is still considerably greater than when the road is not covered with snow or ice Exercise appropriate caution Avoid spinning of a drive wheel This may cause serious damage to the drivetrain which is not covered by the Mercedes Benz Limited Warranty Tire speed rating Regardless of the tire speed rating local speed limits should be obeyed Use prudent driving speeds appropriate to prevailing conditions A Even when permitted by law never operate a vehicle at speeds greater than the maxi mum speed rating of the tires Warning Exceeding the maximum speed for which tires are rated can lead to sudden tire fail ure causing loss of vehicle control and pos sibly resulting in an accident and or personal injury and possible death for you and for others CLK 350 CLK 500 Your vehicle is factory equipped with W rated tires which have a speed rating of 168 mph 270 km h An electronic speed limiter prevents your vehicle from exceeding a speed of 130 mph 210 km h CLK 55 AMG Your vehicle is factory equipped with Y rated tires which have a speed rating of 186 mph 300 km h An electronic speed limiter prevents your vehicle from exceeding a speed of 155 mph 250 km h For information on tire speed rating for winter tires see Winter tires gt page 359 For additional general information on tire speed markings on the sidewall see Tire speed rati
151. The maintenance service indicator message is cleared and the standard display appears in the multifunction display gt page 144 Maintenance service term exceeded If you have exceeded the suggested maintenance service term you will see the following message in the multifunction display Service A exceeded by XXXXX miles km Service A exceeded by XXX days In addition a signal sounds when the message appears Any authorized Mercedes Benz Center will reset the maintenance service indicator following a completed maintenance service Calling up the maintenance service indicator display You can call up the maintenance service in dicator display at any time to check when the next maintenance service Is due gt Switch on the ignition gt page 36 gt Press button or on the mul tifunction steering wheel repeatedly until the standard display appears in the multifunction display gt page 144 gt Press button BV or FA until the maintenance service indicator display with the service symbol or and the service deadline appears in the multifunction display If the battery is disconnected the days of disconnection will not be included in the count shown by the maintenance service indicator To arrive at the true maintenance service deadline you will need to subtract these days from the days shown in the maintenance service indicator message or maintenance ser vice indicator display Do not c
152. a Instrument cluster The displays and indicator warning lamps in the driver s field of vision in cluding the tachometer speedometer coolant temperature indicator and fuel display KEYLESS GO System for entering and operating the vehicle without the use of a SmartKey Kickdown Depressing the accelerator past the point of resistance shifts the transmis sion down to the lowest possible gear This very quickly accelerates the vehi cle and should not be used for normal acceleration needs Kilopascal kPa gt page 356 Locking knob Knob on the door which indicates whether the door is locked or un locked Pushing the locking knob down on the driver s or passenger door from inside will lock that door Maintenance System U S vehicles Maintenance service indicator in the multifunction display that informs the driver when the next vehicle mainte nance service is due The Maintenance System in your vehicle tracks distance driven and the time elapsed since your last maintenance service and calls for the next maintenance service accordingly Maximum load rating gt page 356 Maximum loaded vehicle weight gt page 356 Maximum tire inflation pressure gt page 356 Memory function Used to store three individual seat steering wheel and exterior mirror positions Menu The control system displays are ar ranged in menus Each menu contains a number of commands for particular systems MON Mot
153. a tion mark Tire size Tire type code and Date of manufacture Tire load rating Numerical code associated with the maximum load a tire can support Tire ply composition and material used This indicates the number of plies or the number of layers of rubber coated fabric in the tire tread and sidewall Tire manufac turers also must indicate the ply materials in the tire and sidewall which include steel nylon polyester and others Tire speed rating Part of tire designation indicates the speed range for which a tire is approved Traction Force exerted by the vehicle on the road via the tires The amount of grip provided Tread The portion of a tire that comes into contact with the road Treadwear indicators Narrow bands sometimes called wear bars that show across the tread of a tire when only le in 1 6 mm of tread remains Operation Tires and wheels Uniform Tire Quality Grading Standards A tire information system that provides consumers with ratings for a tire s traction temperature and treadwear Ratings are determined by tire manufacturers using government testing procedures The ratings are molded into the sidewall of the tire Vehicle capacity weight Rated cargo and luggage load plus 68 kilograms 150 Ibs times the vehicle s designated seating capacity Vehicle maximum load on the tire Load on an individual tire that is determined by distributing to
154. adios with SAT gt Press FM AM or WB soft key repeatedly until desired waveband has been se lected The FM AM and WB wavebands are called up one after another The waveband currently selected appears in the upper left hand corner of the display Controls in detail Audio system Selecting a station Direct frequency input The following options are available for se lecting a station e Direct frequency input gt page 218 e Manual tuning gt page 218 e Automatic seek tuning gt page 219 e Scan search gt page 219 e Station memory gt page 219 e Automatic station memory Autostore gt page 220 The station search proceeds in the follow ing frequency increments e 200 kHz in FM range e 10kHzin AM range Select desired waveband P82 60 4454 31 Press button Enter desired frequency with buttons Bio ia You can only enter frequencies within the respective waveband If a button is not pressed within four seconds the radio will return to the last station tuned Manual tuning gt Select desired waveband gt Press or button for approx three seconds gt Press button repeatedly until desired frequency has been reached Step by step station tuning takes place in ascending or descending order Each time the button is pressed the radio tunes further by 0 2 mHz During man ual tuning the radio is muted Automatic seek tuning gt Select desired wave
155. age Low beam left Low beam right Parking lamp front left Parking lamp MONTONE Rear foglamp back up lamp on Reverse lamp left Reverse lamp right Possible cause consequence Possible solution The left low beam lamp is malfunctioning Halogen headlamp gt Replace the bulb as soon as possible Bi Xenon headlamp gt Visit an authorized Mercedes Benz Center as soon as possible The right low beam lamp is malfunction Halogen headlamp ing a Replace the bulb as soon as possible Bi Xenon headlamp gt The left front parking lamp is gt malfunctioning The right front parking lamp is gt malfunctioning The foglamp is malfunctioning A back up bulb is being used The left backup lamp is malfunctioning gt The right backup lamp is malfunctioning gt Visit an authorized Mercedes Benz Center as soon as possible Visit an authorized Mercedes Benz Center as soon as possible Visit an authorized Mercedes Benz Center as soon as possible Visit an authorized Mercedes Benz Center as soon as possible Replace the bulb as soon as possible Replace the bulb as soon as possible Display symbol 0 oe Display message Side marker lamp front left Side marker lamp TOME 1a Tail lamp left back up lamp on Tail lamp right back up lamp on Turn off lamps ue Siena front left Wied on front right wen sienna left mirror Practical hints W
156. age will result in vehicle damage not covered by the Mercedes Benz Limited Warranty Maintenance service indicator message The maintenance service indicator mes sage will notify you when your next mainte nance service Is due Starting approximately 1 month before your next maintenance service is due one of the following messages will appear in the multifunction display while you are driving or when you switch on the ignition example service A Service A in XXXXX miles km Service A in XXX days Service A due now Operation Maintenance Service A in 225 miles 72 F 149 8 HI dere Ae P 4 32 2101 31 The type of maintenance service due Is indicated in the multifunction display Vehicles equipped with FSS Flexible Service System only Canada vehi cles The interval between maintenance services depends on your driving habits A gentle driving style moderate engine speeds and the avoidance of short distance trips will lengthen the interval between services Basic service A Extended service B Operation Maintenance Clearing the maintenance service indicator message The maintenance service indicator mes sage is automatically cleared after approx imately 30 seconds when you switch on the ignition or when reaching the mainte nance service threshold while driving You can also clear it yourself 1 Reset button gt Press reset button Q on the instrument cluster
157. aintenance service indicator message 361 Clearing the maintenance service indicator message 362 Maintenance service term exceeded 362 Calling up the maintenance service indicator display 362 Resetting the maintenance service INGICATON cececceeeeeeeees 363 Vehicle CALre ccssssecccecssssetccseeaees 364 Cleaning and care of vehicle 364 Practical hints cc eeeeeceeeeees 373 What to do if paceecs cep saccascecancqscatast 374 Lamps in instrument cluster 374 Lamp in center console 381 Vehicle status messages in the multifunction display 006 383 Where will find cccccceseeeeeeees 413 First aid KU ccssteatsasssnenscenenaedencaencacs 413 Vehicle tool Kit csccceseeeeees 413 Minispare wheel ccseecceeeceees 416 Spare wheel bolts cccecce ee ee 418 Unlocking locking in an emergency 419 Unlocking the vehicle 66 419 Locking the vehicle 000008 420 Fuel filler flap cccceeseceeeeeeceees 421 Manually unlocking the gear selector lever 066 422 Opening closing in an emergency 423 Operating roll bars manually 423 Soft top emergency operation 425 Resetting activated head restraints 434 Resetting activated head restraints 434 Replacing SmartKey batteries 435 S
158. amount of coolant in the cooling system The engine will overheat causing major en gine damage Practical hints What to do if Display symbol Display message Possible cause consequence Possible solution Coolant The coolant is too hot gt Stop the vehicle in a safe location or stop engine off as soon as it is safe to do so and turn off the engine gt Only start the engine again after the message disappears You could other wise damage the engine Warning AN Turn off the engine get out of the vehicle T and do not stand near the vehicle until the The engine should not be operated with engine has cooled down the coolant temperature above 248 F Driving when your engine is badly overheat ed can cause some fluids which may have leaked into the engine compartment to During severe operating conditions and catch fire You could be seriously burned stop and go city traffic the coolant tem perature may rise close to 248 F 120 C 120 C Doing so may cause serious engine damage which is not covered by the Mercedes Benz Limited Warranty Steam from an overheated engine can cause serious burns and can occur just by opening the hood Stay away from the engine if you see or hear steam coming from it Practical hints What to do if Display symbol Display message Possible cause consequence Possible solution Coolant The poly V belt could be broken gt Stop the vehicle in a safe location or as soon
159. amp switch to W gt page 52 For more information see Lighting gt page 127 Turning off the engine gt Place the gear selector lever in position P Always set the parking brake in addi tion to shifting to position P On slopes turn the front wheels to wards the curb Turning off the engine with the SmartKey gt Turn the SmartKey in the starter switch gt page 34 to position 0 and remove It The immobilizer is activated The SmartKey can only be removed from the starter switch with the gear selector lever in position P Turning off the engine with KEYLESS GO gt Press the KEYLESS GO start stop but ton to shut off the engine With the driver s door closed the start er switch is now in position 1 With the driver s door opened the starter switch is set to position 0 same as SmartKey removed from starter switch gt page 34 If you hear a warning signal you have either tried to turn off the engine while the gear selector lever is not in P Place the gear selector lever in P Releasing seat belts gt Press the seat belt release button gt page 46 Allow the retractor to completely re wind the seat belt by guiding the latch plate Make sure the seat belt retracts fully so that the seat belt and or latch plate cannot get caught or pinched in the door or in the seat mechanism This can damage the seat belt and impair the effectiveness of the sea
160. ample B gt Locate the heading Vehicle Capacity Weight on your vehicle s placard Step 2 gt Determine the combined weight of the driver and passengers that will be riding in your vehicle Step 3 gt Subtract the combined weight of the driver and passengers from XXX kilo grams or XXX lbs Step 4 gt The resulting figure equals the avail able amount of cargo and luggage load capacity For example if the XXX amount equals 1400 Ibs and there will be five 150 Ibs passengers in your vehicle the amount of available cargo and luggage load capacity is 650 Ibs 1400 750 5 x150 650 Ibs Step 5 gt Determine the combined weight of luggage and cargo being loaded on the vehicle That weight may not safely exceed the available cargo and luggage load capacity calculated in step 4 Step 6 if applicable gt If your vehicle will be towing a trailer load from your trailer will be trans ferred to your vehicle Consult this manual to determine how this reduces the available cargo and luggage load capacity of your vehicle gt page 338 The following table shows examples on how to calculate total and cargo load capacities with varying seating configura tions and number and size of occupants The following examples use a load limit of 1500 lbs This is for illustration purposes only Make sure you are using the actual load limit for your vehicle stated on the vehicle s placard gt page 334
161. an official approval or authori zation by governmental or other agencies should exist Use of such parts and acces sories could adversely affect the safety performance or reliability of your vehicle Please do not use them Introduction Product information Genuine Mercedes Benz parts as well as conversion parts and accessories approved by us are available at your authorized Mercedes Benz Center where you will receive comprehensive informa tion also on permissible technical modifi cations and where proper installation will be performed Introduction Operator s Manual This Operator s Manual contains a great deal of useful information We urge you to read it carefully and familiarize yourself with the vehicle before driving For your own safety and longer service life of the vehicle we urge you to follow the in structions and warnings contained in this manual Ignoring them could result in dam age to the vehicle or personal injury to you or others Vehicle damage caused by fail ure to follow instructions is not covered by the Mercedes Benz Limited Warranty Your vehicle may have some or all of the equipment described in this manual Therefore you may find explanations for optional equipment not installed in your vehicle If you have any questions about the operation of any equipment your authorized Mercedes Benz Center will be glad to demonstrate the proper proce dures We continuously strive
162. and 2 this device must accept any interference received including interference that may cause undesired operation Any unauthorized modification to this device could void the user s authority to operate the equipment Controls in detail Locking and unlocking Canada only This device complies with RSS 210 of Industry Canada Operation is subject to the following two conditions 1 This device may not cause interfer ence and 2 this device must accept any interference received including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device Any unauthorized modification to this device could void the user s authority to operate the equipment You can also open and close the soft top and the power windows using the SmartKey with KEYLESS GO see Summer opening feature gt page 252 and see Convenience closing feature gt page 253 Controls in detail Locking and unlocking Important notes on using KEYLESS GO You can also use the SmartKey with KEYLESS GO like a normal SmartKey gt page 96 You can combine KEYLESS GO func tions with normal SmartKey functions e g unlocking with KEYLESS GO and locking with the button Always carry the SmartKey with KEYLESS GO with you Never store the SmartKey with KEYLESS GO together with e electronic items such as a cellular phone or another SmartKey with KEYLESS GO e metallic objects such as coins o
163. and tow away alarm gt page 94 Garage door opener The integrated remote control is capable of operating up to three separately controlled devices It provides a convenient way to re place up to three hand held remote con trols used to operate devices such as garage door openers gate openers or oth er devices compatible with HomeLink or some other systems Before the integrated remote control can be used it must be programmed to the ga rage door opener gate operator or other device you wish to operate See the follow ing instructions for programming informa tion P68 05 2114 31 Interior rear view mirror with integrated re mote control Indicator lamp AA Signal transmitter button Needed for programming not part of vehi cle equipment Hand held remote control of ga rage door opener gate operator or other device 6 Hand held remote control but ton Warning A N Before programming the integrated remote control to a garage door opener or gate operator make sure people and objects are out of the way of the device to prevent po tential harm or damage When programming a garage door opener the door moves up or down When programming a gate operator the gate opens or closes Do not use the integrated remote control with any garage door opener that lacks safety stop and reverse features as required by U S federal safety standards this includes any garage door opener model manufact
164. and 225 and Canadian Motor Vehicle Safety Standards 213 and 210 2 The following settings are stored when using the buttons on the driver s door Driver s seat backrest and head restraint position e Steering wheel position e Exterior rear view mirror position A Do not activate the memory function while driving Activating the memory function while driving could cause the driver to lose control of the vehicle Warning The following settings are stored when using the buttons on the passenger door e Front passenger seat backrest and head restraint position The memory button and memory position switch are located on the door P54 25 2600 31 C Memory button 2 Memory position switch gt Switch on the ignition gt page 34 or gt Open the respective door and insert the SmartKey in the starter switch Storing positions into memory gt Adjust the seats steering wheel and exterior rear view mirrors to the desired position gt page 37 gt Turn memory position switch 2 to the desired memory position Press memory button 1 Release memory button Q and press memory position switch 2 within three seconds All settings are stored to the selected position Controls in detail Memory function Recalling positions from memory Releasing the memory position switch T stops movement to the stored Do not operate the seats using the positions immediately memory button
165. and the radio finds the ten stations with the strongest signals These stations are stored on the station buttons BE to BM in order of signal strength e Calling up stations gt Press desired station button EE to a e Leaving the Autostore memory level gt Press FM or AM soft key briefly Interrupting radio mode The radio mode is interrupted by an incom ing call on the telephone gt page 238 e Mute on gt Press button The radio mode is interrupted and MUTED appears in the display e Mute off gt Press button The radio mode is again active Weather band P82 60 4458 31 gt Press WB soft key The weather band station last received is tuned in Selecting a weather band station directly gt Select desired weather band station with buttons i to EA Ifa station cannot be tuned in a search is automatically started Search gt Press or button to tune in the next receivable weather band sta tion I O If no weather band station is received after three consecutive scans of the complete frequency range then the scan stops at the channel with which it began and NO WB FOUND appears in the display If this happens switch back to stan dard radio mode Controls in detail Audio system Scan search e Starting scan search gt Press SC soft key SC will appear in the display The ra dio briefly tunes in all receivable weather band stations e Ending scan search gt P
166. ant Windshield washer and headlamp eo cleaning system For normal replenishing use water pota amp Sy ble water quality For more information For more information on filling up the see Coolant gt page 327 and see Fu washer reservoir see Windshield washer els coolants lubricants etc system and headlamp cleaning system gt page 479 gt page 329 Brake fluid Engine oil level Removing fuse box cover gt page 463 For more information on engine oil see Engine oil gt page 322 Eg Engine compartment CLK 500 example If you find that the brake fluid in the Vehicle lighting brake fluid ir has fallen to th Coolant level i a hie Check function and cleanliness For more Brake fluid fuse box cover removed minimum mark or below have the information on replacing light bulbs see Windshield washer and headlamp brake system checked for brake pad E osce 206 cleaning system thickness and leaks immediately Notify an authorized Mercedes Benz For more information see Exterior lamp i Center immediately Do not add brake switch gt page 52 Opening the hood see gt page 321 fluid as this will not solve the problem For more information see also Practi Tire inflation pressure cal hints gt page 375 For more information see Recommended tire inflation pressure gt page 339 Operation Engine compartment Vv Engine compartment
167. any cir cumstances gt Notify local fire and or police authori ties If the extent of the damage cannot be de termined gt Notify an authorized Mercedes Benz Center If no damage can be determined on the e major assemblies e fuel system e engine mount gt Start the engine in the usual manner Y Parking and locking You have now completed your first drive You have properly stopped and parked your vehicle End your drive as follows Warning A N With the engine not running there is no power assistance for the brake and steering systems In this case it is important to keep in mind that a considerably higher degree of effort is necessary to brake and steer the vehicle Warning A N Do not park this vehicle in areas where com bustible materials such as grass hay or leaves can come into contact with the hot exhaust system as these materials could be ignited and cause a vehicle fire Warning A N To reduce the risk of personal injury as a re sult of inadvertent vehicle movement be fore turning off the engine and leaving the vehicle always e Keep right foot on brake pedal e Firmly depress parking brake pedal e Move the gear selector lever to position P e Slowly release brake pedal e When parked on an incline turn front wheel towards the road curb e Turn the SmartKey to starter switch position 0 and remove or press start stop button vehicles with KEYLESS GO e Take the
168. appears In the multifunction display TEL READY 72 F 143 8 MI PS4 32 2617 31 This standby message indicates that your telephone is ready for use and you can operate it using the control system Answering a call When your telephone is ready to receive calls you can answer a call at any time In the multifunction display you will then see the message TEL G CALL 1 72 F 149 3 MI gt Press button F You have answered the call The duration of the call appears in the multifunction display If you do not wish to accept a call press button N P54 32 2618 31 Ending a call gt Press button Fam You have ended the call The standby message appears in the multifunction display Dialing a number from the phone book If your telephone is ready to receive calls you may select and dial a number from the phone book at any time gt Press button or repeatedly until the message lel appears in the multifunction display gt Press button FA or Reg The control system reads the phone book which is stored in the telephone This may take up to 30 seconds The message Please wait appears in the multifunction display When the message Please wait disappears the phone book has been loaded gt Press button AX or Ke repeatedly Press button K until the desired name appears in the The system dials the selected phone multifunction display number The stored names are displa
169. arranty The program mode selector switch is located on the lower part of the center console EERE P27 60 2744 31 1 Program mode selector switch M Manual C Comfort S Sport For manual gear shifting For comfort driving For standard driving The current gear selector lever position and the selected program mode M C S are indicated in the multifunction display gt page 167 For information on automatic program modes C or S see Automatic shift program gt page 172 Gear selector lever one touch gearshifting gt page 173 and Steering wheel gearshift control one touch gearshift ing gt page 174 Activating manual shift program gt Press program mode selector switch Q repeatedly until the M for manual program mode M appears in the multifunction display The transmission switches to the manual program mode M Automatic shifting is switched off The gear range is not limited You can change the gears manually when the gear selector lever is in position D You can upshift or downshift through the gears in succession The manual program mode M will not be stored When the engine is turned off with the manual program mode M selected the transmission will go to the automatic program mode C or S when the engine is restarted Upshifting In the manual program mode M the transmission will not upshift even if the engine has reached its overrevving range Shift up
170. art S to 100 parts water 1 34 fl oz 40 ml S to 1 gallon 4 0 water For temperatures below freezing point use MB Windshield Washer Concentrate S and commercially available premixed windshield washer solvent antifreeze e 1 part S to 100 parts solvent 1 34 fl oz 40 ml S to 1 gallon 4 0 I solvent ABS Antilock Brake System Prevents the wheels from locking up during braking so that the vehicle can continue to be steered Accessory weight gt page 355 Air pressure gt page 355 Alignment bolt Metal pin with thread The centering pin is an aid used when changing a tire to align the wheel with the wheel hub Aspect ratio gt page 355 Bar gt page 355 BAS Brake Assist System System for potentially reducing braking distances in emergency braking situa tions The system is activated when it senses an emergency based on how fast the brake is applied Bead gt page 355 Bi Xenon headlamps Headlamps which use an electric arc as the light source and produce a more in tense light than filament headlamps Bi Xenon headlamps produce low beam and high beam CAC Customer Assistance Center Mercedes Benz customer service cen ter which can help you with any ques tions about your vehicle and provide assistance in the event of a break down CAN system Controller Area Network Data bus network serving to control ve hicle functions such as door lock
171. arted Here you will find all the information you need for your first drive You should read this section first if this is your first Mercedes Benz vehicle or if you are rent ing or borrowing this vehicle C Safety and Security Here you will find descriptions of the safety and security features of your vehicle ETN Controls in detail Here you will find detailed information about the equipment installed in your vehi cle This section expands on the Getting started section and also describes techni cal innovations If you are already familiar with the basic functions of your vehicle this section will be of particular interest to you E Operation Here you will find all the information you need for the proper operation of your vehicle EE E Practical hints This section provides fast assistance for dealing with problems you may encounter a Technical data All important technical data for your vehi cle can be found in this section el Indexes The glossary provides explanations of the most important technical terms The table of contents and the index are de signed to help you find information quickly and easily The following publications are part of your vehicle documentation e this Operators Manual e the Maintenance Booklet Separate operating instructions will be provided as required depending on the equipment options installed in your vehicle Introduction Symbols Y Symbo
172. ased on three performance factors treadwear traction and temperature resistance 1 Treadwear 2 Traction 3 Temperature resistance For illustration purposes only Actual data on tires are specific to each vehi cle and may vary from data shown in above illustration Quality grades can be found where appli cable on the tire sidewall between tread shoulder and maximum section width For example Treadwear Traction Temperature 200 AA A All passenger car tires must conform to federal safety requirements in addition to these grades Operation Tires and wheels Treadwear The treadwear grade is a comparative rat ing based on the wear rate of the tire when tested under controlled conditions on a specified government test course For ex ample a tire graded 150 would wear one and one half 1 1 3 times as well on the government course as a tire graded 100 The relative performance of tires depends upon the actual conditions of their use however and may depart significantly from the norm due to variations in driving habits service practices and differences in road characteristics and climate Traction The traction grades from highest to low est are AA A B and C Those grades rep resent the tire s ability to stop on wet pavement as measured under controlled conditions on specified government test surfaces of asphalt and concrete A tire marked C may have poor traction perfor mance
173. ashing exterior lamps will operate for approximately 2a minutes P80 35 2088 31 button i USA only This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules Operation is subject to the following two conditions 1 This device may not cause harmful interference and 2 this device must accept any inter ference received including interfer ence that may cause undesired operation Any unauthorized modification to this device could void the user s authority to operate the equipment Canada only This device complies with RSS 2 10 of Industry Canada Operation is subject to the following two conditions 1 This device may not cause interfer ence and 2 this device must accept any inter ference received including interfer ence that may cause undesired operation of the device Any unauthorized modification to this device could void the user s authority to operate the equipment Activating gt Press and hold button Q for at least one second Deactivating gt or Press button again or Insert the SmartKey or the SmartKey with KEYLESS GO in the starter switch Press the KEYLESS GO start stop button gt page 35 The SmartKey with KEYLESS GO must be inside the vehicle Y Driving safety systems In this section you will find information on the following driving safety systems e ABS Antilock Brake System e BAS Brake Assist System e ESP Electroni
174. ater can Recommended minimum tire tread depth result in damage to the tire e Summer tires H in 3 mm Always replace a damaged tire e Winter tires ae in 4 mm i l Saring A 1 TWI Tread Wear Indicator Although the applicable federal motor safety The treadwear indicator appears as a solid laws consider a tire to be worn when the band across the tread treadwear indicators TWI become visible at approximately Via in 1 6 mm we recom mend that you do not allow your tires Direction of rotation Unidirectional tires offer added advan tages such as better hydroplaning perfor mance To benefit however you must make sure the tires rotate in the direction specified An arrow on the sidewall indicates the intended direction of rotation spinning of the tire o Spare wheels may be mounted against the direction of rotation spinning even with a unidirectional tire for temporary use only until the regular drive wheel has been repaired or replaced Always observe and follow applicable tempo rary use restrictions and speed limita tions indicated on the spare wheel Loading the vehicle Two labels on your vehicle show how much weight it may properly carry e The Tire and Loading Information placard Example A or the Vehicle Tire Information placard Example B can be found on the driver s door B pillar This placard tells you important information about the number of people that can be in the vehicle and
175. atest amount of air pressure that should ever be put in the tire under normal driving conditions Normal occupant weight The number of occupants the vehicle is designed to seat multiplied by 68 kilograms 150 Ibs Occupant distribution The distribution of occupants in a vehicle at their designated seating positions Production options weight The combined weight of those installed regular production options weighing over 5 Ibs 2 3 kilograms in excess of those standard items which they replace not previously considered in curb weight or accessory weight including heavy duty brakes ride levelers roof rack heavy duty battery and special trim PSI Pounds per square inch A standard unit of measure for air pressure gt bar kilopascal kPa Recommended tire inflation pressure Recommended tire inflation pressure listed on placard located on driver s door B pillar for normal driving conditions Provides best handling tread life and riding comfort Rim A metal support for a tire or a tire and tube assembly upon which the tire beads are seated Sidewall The portion of a tire between the tread and the bead TIN Tire Identification Number Unique identifier which facilitates efforts by tire manufacturers to notify purchasers in recall situations or other safety matters concerning tires and gives purchases the means to easily identify such tires The TIN is comprised of Manufacturer s identific
176. ause an accident and or serious injury to you and others gt Briefly push cruise control lever to position 4 gt page 266 The cruise control resumes the last set speed gt Remove your foot from the accelerator pedal The selected speed appears in the multi function display for approximately five sec onds and the corresponding speedometer segments from the selected speed to the vehicle maximum speed are illuminated gt page 266 Parktronic system Parking assist Canada only AN Parktronic is a supplemental system It is not intended to nor does it replace the need for extreme care The responsibility during parking and other critical maneuvers always rests with the driver Warning Special attention must be paid to objects with smooth surfaces or low silhouettes e g trailer couplings painted posts or road curbs Such objects may not be detected by the system and can damage the vehicle The operational function of the Parktronic system can be affected by dirty sensors es pecially at times of snow and ice see Cleaning the Parktronic system Canada only sensors gt page 369 Interference caused by other ultrasonic sig nals e g working jackhammers car wash or the air brakes of trucks can cause the system to send erratic indications and should be taken into consideration Warning A N Make sure no persons or animals are in the area in which you are maneuvering You could
177. ausing personal injury Read all instructions before proceeding If the battery is discharged the engine can be started with jumper cables and the bat tery of another vehicle Observe the follow ing e Jump starting should only be performed when the engine and catalytic convert er are cold e Do not start the engine if the battery is frozen Let the battery thaw out first e Only jump start from batteries with the same voltage rating 12 V Jump start ing with a more powerful battery could damage the vehicle s electrical system which will not be covered by the Mercedes Benz Limited Warranty e Only use jumper cables with sufficient cross section and insulated terminal clamps e Always make sure the jumper cables are not on or near pulleys fans or other parts that move when an engine Is started or running Avoid repeated and lengthy starting at tempts Do not attempt to start the engine us ing a battery quick charge unit If the engine does not run after several unsuccessful starting attempts have it checked at the nearest authorized Mercedes Benz Center Excessive unburned fuel generated by repeated failed starting attempts may damage the catalytic converter and may present a fire risk Make sure the jumper cables do not have loose or missing insulation Make sure the cable clamps do not touch any other metal part while the other end is still attached to a battery Warning Keep flames or
178. automatical ly after closing it gt page 110 All turn signal lamps flash three times to con firm locking Closing the trunk from the outside vehicles with KEYLESS GO In vehicles with trunk opening closing sys tem you can close the trunk separately P80 20 2793 31 C Trunk closing switch gt Make sure you have the SmartKey with KEYLESS GO with you gt Press trunk closing switch Q briefly The trunk closes i You can also close the trunk by hand gt page 111 If the trunk lid comes into contact with an object while closing e g luggage that has been piled too high the closing procedure is stopped and the trunk reopens slightly To prevent a possible inadvertent lock out the trunk will open automatically if a SmartKey with KEYLESS GO is rec ognized inside the vehicle or in the trunk Warning Controls in detail Locking and unlocking A Monitor the closing procedure carefully to ensure that no one is in danger of being in jured To prevent possible personal injury always keep hands and fingers away from the trunk opening when closing the trunk Be especially careful when small children are around To stop the closing procedure do one of the following press trunk closing switch Q press KEYLESS GO locking closing switch press the button on the SmartKey with KEYLESS GO press the remote trunk opening or clos ing switch on driver s door bb b gt
179. automatically after approxi gt Turn the exterior lamp switch to mately 40 seconds position A when exiting the vehicle To activate locator lighting gt page 127 gt Make sure the function surround light The locator lighting feature is ing is set to on see gt page 157 activated Controls in detail Control system Setting night security illumination Headlamps delayed shut off Use this function to set whether you would like the exterior lamps to illuminate during darkness after exiting the vehicle and all doors closed With the delayed shut off feature activated and the exterior lamp switch in position Eig before the engine is turned off the following lamps will switch on for 15 seconds when the engine is turned off e Parking lamps e Tail lamps e License plate lamps e Side marker lamps e Front fog lamps If after turning off the engine you do not open a door or do not close an opened door the lamps will automatically switch off after 60 seconds o You can reactivate this function within ten minutes by opening a door Move the selection marker with button or E to the Lighting submenu Press button JA or Reg repeatedly until the message Headlamps delayed Shut off appears in the multifunction display The selection marker is on the current setting Head amps delayed shut off eo oe ff o KL off 7 Ell 149 8 MI P54 32 3324 31 Press button or E to switch the hea
180. ave any passenger exit the vehicle at a safe distance from the roadway Mounting the Minispare wheel Preparing the vehicle Prepare the vehicle as described on gt page 446 gt Take the wheel wrench and the Jack out of the trunk gt page 416 Take the Minispare wheel and wheel bolts out of the trunk gt page 416 Lifting the vehicle gt Prevent the vehicle from rolling away by blocking wheels with wheel chocks or other sizeable objects One wheel chock is included with the vehicle tool kit gt page 413 When changing wheel on a level surface gt Place the wheel chock in front of and another sizeable object behind the wheel that is diagonally opposite to the wheel being changed Always try lifting the vehicle using the jack on a level surface However should cir cumstances require you to do so ona hill place the wheel chock and the other size able object as follows gt Place the wheel chock and another sizeable object on the downhill side blocking both wheels of the axle not being worked on Practical hints Flat tire Warning A N The jack is designed exclusively for jacking up the vehicle at the jack take up brackets built into both sides of the vehicle To help avoid personal injury use the jack only to lift the vehicle during a wheel change Never get beneath the vehicle while it is supported by the jack Keep hands and feet away from the area under the lifted vehicle Always
181. aware of the previ ously set speed and wishes to resume this particular preset speed Controls in detail Driving systems 1 Set current or higher speed 2 Set current or lower speed 3 Cancel cruise control 4 Resume to last set speed Warning A N Cruise control brakes automatically so that the set speed is not exceeded The brake pedal depresses when the cruise control en gages the brakes Keep driver s foot area clear at all times in cluding the area under the brake pedal Ob jects stored in this area may impair pedal movement which could interfere with the braking ability of the cruise control system Do not place your foot under the brake pedal your foot could become caught Keep in mind that cruise control is a conve nience system designed to assist the driver during vehicle operation The driver is and must always remain responsible for the ve hicle s speed and for safe brake operation Setting current speed gt Accelerate or decelerate to the desired speed Briefly lift or depress 2 the cruise control lever gt page 266 The current speed is set gt Remove your foot from the accelerator pedal Cruise control is activated The selected speed appears in the multi function display for approximately five sec onds and the corresponding speedometer segments from the selected speed to the vehicle maximum speed are illuminated On uphill or downhill
182. ay messages If the SmartKey is not turned to position 2 in the starter switch the following message will appear Turn on ignition to see engine oil level gt Switch on the ignition gt page 36 Operation Engine compartment If you see the message Observe waiting time gt If engine is at operating temperature wait 5 minutes before repeating check procedure gt If engine is not at operating temperature yet wait 30 minutes before repeating check procedure If you see the message Engine oil level Not when engine on gt Turn off the engine gt If the engine is at operating temperature wait 5 minutes before checking oil gt If the engine is not at operating temperature yet you must wait 30 minutes before checking oil If there is excess engine oil with the engine at operating temperature the following message will appear Engine oil level Reduce oil level gt Have excess oil siphoned or drained off Contact an authorized Mercedes Benz Center Excess oil must be siphoned or drained off It could cause damage to the engine and catalytic converter not covered by the Mercedes Benz Limited Warranty For more information on messages in the multifunction display concerning engine oil see the Practical hints section gt page 401 Checking engine oil level with the oil dipstick CLK 350 When checking the oil level e the vehicle must be parked on level ground
183. band gt Press or button briefly The radio will tune to the next highest or next lowest receivable frequency If no station is received after two consecutive scans of the complete frequency range then the scan stops at the frequency from which it began Scan search e Starting scan search gt Select desired waveband P82 60 4459 31 gt Press SC soft key SC will appear in the display The ra dio briefly tunes in all receivable stations on the waveband selected e Ending scan search gt Press SC soft key or or Rey The station last played will be se lected and SC disappears from the display Controls in detail Audio system Station memory You can store ten AM and ten FM stations in the memory e Storing stations gt Tune in desired station gt Press and hold desired station button EE to BO until a brief signal tone is heard The frequency is stored on the se lected station button e Calling up stations gt Press desired station button EE to SQM briefly Controls in detail Audio system Autostore automatic station memory The Autostore memory function provides an additional memory level The station memory for manually stored stations is not overwritten e Calling up Autostore memory level and storing stations P82 60 4483 31 gt Press AS soft key briefly The radio switches to the Autostore memory level AS and SEARCH ap pear in the display
184. begins to play If a CD is already loaded it must be ejected before inserting a new CD In serting a second CD in the slot with an other CD still loaded will cause damage to the CD drive not covered by the Mercedes Benz Limited Warranty o If a CD has been inserted incorrectly or cannot be read WRONG CDO will appear in the display Ejecting a CD gt gt Make sure the system is switched on Press EJECT button The system ejects the CD NO CD will appear in the display Remove CD from slot a If you do not take the CD out of the CD slot within approx 15 seconds the sys tem automatically pulls the CD back in and plays it If a CD is pulled back in press EJECT button for five seconds the CD will then be ejected Operational readiness of CD changer If a CD changer has been installed in the vehicle it can be operated from the front control panel of the audio system A load ed magazine must be installed to play CDs The CD changer is located in the glove box Loading unloading the CD magazine The CD changer may not be able to play audio CDs with copy protection gt Slide changer door to the right and press WW button gt Magazine will be ejected CD 2 CD changer 3 CD tray 4 CD magazine gt Remove magazine and pull CD tray fully out Controls in detail Audio system Place CD 1 in recess of tray label side up Push tray into magazine in dir
185. ble as factory equipment 3 For use with snow chains contact an authorized Mercedes Benz Center CLK 55 AMG 7 5 Jx 18 H2 1 45 in 37 mm 225 40 R18 92 H XL Extra Load M S Mixed size tires CLK 350 Front axle Rims light alloy 7 5 x 17 H2 Wheel offset 1 42 in 36 mm Summer tires 225 45 R17 91W Summer tires 225 45 R17 91W MOExtended Rear axle Rims light alloy 8 5 J x17 H2 Wheel offset 1 18 in 30 mm Summer tires 245 40 R17 91W Summer tires 123 245 40 R17 91W MOExtended Radial ply tires 2 Must be used in conjunction with Run Flat Indicator only 3 Must not be used with snow chains Technical data CLK 500 7 5 x 17 H2 1 46 in 37 mm 225 45 R17 91W 225 45 R17 91W MOExtended OO H2 1 18 in 30 mm 245 40 ZR17 91W 245 40 R17 91W MOExtended Rims and tires CLK 55 AMG 7 9J x18H2 1 46 in 37 mm 225 40 ZR18 92Y XL Extra Load 8 5 J x18 H2 1 18 in 30 mm 255 35 ZR18 YAY XL Extra Load Technical data Rims and tires Minispare wheel All Models Rim 3 5 Bx 17 H2 Wheel offset 0 67 in 17 mm Tire T 125 80 R 17 99M Must not be used with snow chains Please compare the recommended tire inflation pressure for your vehicle with the tire inflation pressure on the yellow label located on the spare wheel rim If the tire inflation pressure on the yel low label on the spare wheel rim differs from the values given in this Operator s Manual inflat
186. by an authorized Mercedes Benz Center Refer to Maintenance Booklet for maintenance intervals or contact an authorized Mercedes Benz Center for further information Warning A N Do not place metal objects on the battery as this could result in a short circuit Use leak proof battery only to avoid the risk of acid burns in the event of an accident Practical hints Battery Warning A N With a disconnected battery e you will no longer be able to turn the SmartKey in the starter switch and pressing the KEYLESS GO start stop button on the gear selector lever will have no effect e the gear selector lever will remain locked in position P 2 Negative terminal 3 Positive terminal cover Disconnecting the battery Removing the battery gt Turn off the engine gt page 58 gt Remove the screw securing the Turn off all electrical consumers battery M Remove the battery support and Remove SmartKey from starter switch bracket Vehicles with KEYLESS G O a gt Pull out the ventilation tube from the gt Press the start stop button until battery depending on battery arrange the engine shuts off ment in your vehicle model the ventila gt Open the driver s door tion tube is located either on the left or right side of the battery Open the hood gt page 321 l Take out the battery Remove the filter box gt page 453 Read and observe safety instructions and precautions
187. c Stability Program In winter operation the maximum ef fectiveness of the ABS the BAS and the ESP is only achieved with winter tires gt page 359 or snow chains as required Warning The following factors increase the risk of accidents e Excessive speed especially in turns e Wet and slippery road surfaces e Following another vehicle too closely The ABS BAS and ESP cannot reduce this risk Always adjust your driving style to the prevailing road and weather conditions Safety and Security Driving safety systems ABS Warning A N Do not pump the brake pedal Use firm steady brake pedal pressure instead Pump ing the brake pedal defeats the purpose of the ABS and significantly reduces braking effectiveness The Antilock Brake System ABS regulates the brake pressure so that the wheels do not lock during braking This allows you to maintain the ability to steer your vehicle The ABS is functional above a speed of ap proximately 5 mph 8 km h independent of road surface conditions On slippery road surfaces the ABS will respond even to light brake pressure The ROJ indicator lamp in the instrument cluster gt page 24 comes on when you switch on the ignition It goes out when the engine is running Safety and Security Driving safety systems Braking At the instant one of the wheels is about to lock up a slight pulsation can be felt in the brake pedal indicati
188. cal emergency officials with the vehicle s approximate location if they receive an automatic SOS signal and cannot make voice contact with the vehicle occupants Roadside Assistance button The Roadside Assistance button is located below the center armrest cover gt Press and hold the button for longer than two seconds A call to a Mercedes Benz Roadside Assistance dispatcher will be initiated The button will flash while the call is in progress The message Connecting call will appear in the multifunction display and the audio system is muted When the connection is established the message Call connected appears in the multifunction display The Tele Aid system will transmit data generating the vehicle identification number model color and lo cation subject to availability of cellular and GPS signals A voice connection between the Roadside Assistance dispatcher and the occupants of the vehicle will be established gt Describe the nature of the need for as sistance dispatcher will either dispatch a qualified Mercedes Benz technician or arrange to tow your vehicle to the nearest authorized Mercedes Benz Center For services such as labor and or towing charges may apply Refer to the Roadside Assistance manual for more information The following is only available in the USA e Sign and Drive services Services such as jump start a few gallons of fuel or the replacement of a flat tire with the vehic
189. cal hints section gt page 381 e Have the system checked as soon as possible by qualified technicians KEYLESS GO start stop button once or Contact an authorized Mercedes Benz twice the EAE indicator lamp Warning A Center located in the center console illuminates If an adult occupant is properly sitting on the front passenger seat and the system senses the occupant as being an adult the EA E indicator lamp will illuminate and go out after approximately e Sit properly belted in a nearly upright position with your back against the seat backrest Never place anything between seat cushion and child seat e g pillow since it reduces the effectiveness of the Occupant Classifi cation System The bottom of the child seat must make full contact with the passenger e Do not lean on the armrests or lift your self from the seat by using the handle over the door as this may cause the OCS six seconds seat cushion An incorrectly mounted child to be unable to correctly approximate If the seat is not occupied and the system seat could cause injuries to the child in case the occupant weight category senses the front passenger seat as being of an accident instead of increasing protec empty the indicator lamp will tion for the child illuminate and not go out Follow the manufacturer s instructions for installation of child seats Child seat anchors LATCH type This vehicle is equipped with two LATCH Lower Anchors
190. cannot get out of the vehicle after the air bag inflates then get fresh air by opening a window or door Safety and Security Occupant safety Warning A N To reduce the risk of injury when the front air bags inflate it is very important for the driver and front passenger to always be in a properly seated position and to wear their respective seat belts For maximum protection in the event of a collision always be in normal seated position with your back against the backrest Fasten your seat belt and make sure that it is prop erly positioned on your body Since the air bag inflates with considerable speed and force a proper seating and hands on steering wheel position will help to keep you at a safe distance from the air bag Occupants who are unbelted out of position or too close to the air bag can be seriously injured or killed by an air bag as it inflates with great force in the blink of an eye e Sit properly belted in a nearly upright position with your back against the seat backrest Adjust the driver s seat as far as possi ble rearward still permitting proper op eration of vehicle controls The distance from the center of the driver s breast bone to the center of the air bag cover on the steering wheel must be at least ten inches 25 cm or more You should be able to accomplish this by a combina tion of adjustments to the seat and steering wheel If you have any prob lems please see an author
191. cedes Benz Center If the batteries are checked within signal range of the vehicle pressing the or button will lock or unlock the vehicle accordingly Controls in detail Locking and unlocking Unlocking and opening the trunk You can unlock and open the trunk separately A minimum height clearance of 5 41 ft 1 65 m is required to open the trunk lid gt Press and hold button until trunk unlocks and begins to open The trunk lid swings open upwards au tomatically Always make sure there is sufficient overhead clearance Vehicles with trunk opening closing system To stop the opening proce dure press button RRM The trunk lid stops moving If the trunk does not open it is still locked separately gt page 116 The trunk can also be opened from its in side in an emergency see Trunk emer gency release gt page 115 Controls in detail Locking and unlocking Loss of SmartKey or mechanical key If you lose a SmartKey or mechanical key you should do the following gt Have the SmartKey deactivated by an authorized Mercedes Benz Center gt Report the loss of the SmartKey or the mechanical key immediately to your car insurance company gt If necessary have the mechanical lock replaced Your authorized Mercedes Benz Center will be glad to supply you with a replacement SmartKey with KEYLESS GO Vehicles equipped with KEYLESS GO come with two Smart
192. cle at a standstill and ee Warming A ie S R A a ih Rue In certain situations the CDs can then ate the audio system only if permitted by l ve no longer be ejected and cause dam The single CD player and the CD changer road weather and traffic conditions re i age to the drive Such damage is not are Class 1 laser products There is a danger Bear in mind that at a speed of just 30 mph Boeck eee eae ee covered by the Mercedes Benz Limited of invisible laser radiation if the housing is approximately 50 km h your car covers a Warrant opened or damaged distance of 44 feet approximately 14 m ev y Do not open the housing The single CD ery second o player and the CD changer do not contain Eg any parts that can be serviced by the user General notes Your CD drive or CD changer has been For safety reasons have any service work l designed to play CDs which corre which may be necessary performed only by The system may not be able to play audio spond to the EN 60908 standard You qualified personnel CDs with copy protection can therefore only use CDs with a max Playing copied CDs may cause imum thickness of 1 3mm malfunctions during playback If you insert thicker data carriers e g ones that have data on both sides one side with DVD data the other side with audio data they cannot be ejected and will damage the drive Controls in detail Audio system Do not use CDs with an eight cm diameter not even with a CD adapter
193. coal filter should be switched off when windows fog up on the inside or if the passenger compart ment needs to be quickly heated or cooled down A Never operate the side windows if there is the possibility of anyone being harmed by the closing procedure Warning In the event that the procedure causes po tential danger the closing of the side win dows can be immediately halted by releasing the J button or by pressing or pulling the respective window switch Controls in detail Automatic climate control CLK 500 CLK 55 AMG Deactivating gt Press button EE gt page 197 The indicator lamp on the button goes out If you press and hold button EAJ the side windows will return to their previ Ous position A side window will only return to its pre vious position if it has not been moved to another position using the respec tive side window switch after it was closed with button E amp A side win dow that was moved will remain in its current position if button EM is used to re open the remaining side windows Controls in detail Automatic climate control CLK 500 CLK 55 AMG Air conditioning The cooling function only operational when the engine is running cools the vehi cle interior down to the selected tempera ture The cooling function also dehumidifies the air in the vehicle interior thus preventing the windows from fogging up j Condensation may drip out from under
194. comes on while mark gt page 318 driving The yellow roll bar warning lamp The roll bar system is malfunctioning gt Release the roll bars manually comes on or flickers when the E i Have the system checked at an autho engine is running rized Mercedes Benz Center as soon as possible The red seat belt telltale comes The seat belt telltale reminds you and your gt Fasten your seat belts on after starting the engine with passengers to fasten your seat belts before all doors closed driving off A The red seat belt telltale flashes You and or your front passenger have for gt Fasten your seat belts and you additionally hear an in gotten to fasten your seat belts termittent warning signal with in creasing intensity fora maximum of 60 seconds when the vehicle s speed exceeds 15 mph 25 km h M Remove the items from the front pas senger seat and put them in a safe place There are items placed on the front passen ger seat and therefore the system senses the front passenger seat as being occupied Practical hints What to do if Problem Possible cause consequence Suggested solution E The red SRS indicator lamp There is a malfunction in the restraint sys Drive with added caution to the comes on while driving tems The air bags or emergency tensioning nearest authorized Mercedes Benz devices ETDs could deploy unexpectedly or Center fail to deploy in an accident Warning A N In the e
195. cover Controls in detail Loading Closing ski sack roller blind P68 00 3287 31 1 Left hinge 2 Right hinge 3 Pull strap gt Pull ski sack roller blind downward us ing pull strap gt Manually fold left G and right hinges 2 of ski sack roller blind all the way down To snap ski sack roller blind into place press left and right hinges where the word PRESS can be seen Fold luggage cover back and close it securely gt page 262 Removing the ski sack For ski sack removal we recommend that you contact an authorized Mercedes Benz Center Warning J Never drive vehicle with trunk open while the ski sack is removed Deadly carbon monoxide CO gases may enter vehicle in terior resulting in unconsciousness and death To prevent unauthorized persons from access to the trunk always close the flap Loading instructions E To prevent damage to the soft top or The total load weight including vehicle oc cupants and luggage cargo should not ex ceed the load limit or vehicle capacity weight indicated on the corresponding placard located on the driver s door B pillar gt page 333 e load trunk only to the height of the luggage cover do not permit luggage cargo to push up the closed luggage cover The handling characteristics of a fully load ed vehicle depend greatly on the load dis tribution It is therefore recommended to load the heaviest items bein
196. csen 89 Anti theft SySteMS ccccsssscccsseneees 92 IMMODINIZEL ee eeccceesececeesseceeeees 92 Anti theft alarm system 0 92 Tow away alarm ccceceeeecceeeeeeeeees 94 Controls in detail ceeeceeeees 95 Locking and UnlOCKING cececee eee 96 SmartKey scsicscccshxccvoawcnnsanennde tied eaniens 96 SmartKey with KEYLESS GO 100 Opening the doors from the INSICE ceeceeceeeeeeeees 107 Opening the trunk seeeeees 108 Closing the trunk cccccsseeeees 110 Trunk emergency release 115 Valet locking cscccceseeccneeees 116 Automatic central locking 117 Locking and unlocking from the INSICE ceeceeceeeeeeeees 118 CES reiini E e 119 Front seat active head restraints 119 Rear seat head restraints 119 Multicontour seat s 121 Seat heating cccsssscerseseceeees 122 Seat ventilation sssenseeeessseess 123 Memory function sssseenssssseenssseeeess 124 Storing positions into memory 125 Recalling positions from memory 125 Storing exterior rear view mirror parking position 6 126 LEMNE sanon 127 Exterior lamp Switch 088 127 Combination switch 0006 131 Corner illuminating front fog lamps CLK with Bi Xenon headlamps 132 Hazard warning flasher 133 Interior lighting
197. ct the functions in the standard display menu The following functions are available Function Page 342 Call up digital speedometer 144 Run Flat Indicator Call up maintenance service 362 display Check engine oil level 323 Display digital speedometer gt Press button JM or Re until the digital soeedometer appears in the multifunction display The current vehicle speed is shown in the multifunction display and the sta tus line appears 55 mph 72 F J 149 8 HI rea d i i P54 32 2621 31 1 Digital Speedometer 2 Status line with outside temperature 3 Trip odometer a You can have the digital soeedometer displayed instead of the outside tem perature in the status line You can se lect the setting in the submenu Instr cluster via the function Status line display gt page 152 AUDIO menu The functions in the Audio menu operate the audio equipment which you currently have turned on If no audio equipment is currently turned on the message Audio off is shown in the multifunction display The following functions are available Function Page Select radio station 145 Select satellite radio station 145 USA only Operate CD player 146 Select radio station gt Turn on the radio gt page 212 and se lect radio Vehicles with COMAND Refer to separate operating instruc tions gt Press button or repeatedly until the currently tuned station appears in the multifun
198. ction display FM 2 101 4 2 F 149 3 MI gt F lt D P54 30 8407 31 1 Waveband setting 2 Station frequency gt Press button BVA or EAN repeatedly until the desired station is found You can only store new stations using the corresponding feature on the radio gt page 219 Vehicles with COMAND Refer to separate operating instructions You can also operate the radio in the usual manner Controls in detail Control system Select satellite radio station USA only The satellite radio is treated as a radio application gt Select satellite radio with the corresponding soft key SAT in the radio menu sar CH 55 72 F 149 8 MI sp 2 P54 32 3301 31 1 SAT mode and preset number 2 Setting for station selection using memory 3 Channel name or number gt Press button BVA or EAN repeatedly until the desired channel is found Controls in detail Control system For more information on satellite radio operation see Introduction to satellite radio USA only gt page 222 Vehicles with COMAND Refer to separate operating instructions Operate the CD player gt Turn on the radio and select CD gt page 227 Vehicles with COMAND Refer to separate operating instructions gt Press button or repeatedly until the settings for the CD currently being played appear in the multifunc tion display CG c 1 2
199. ctivating the climate control Operating the climate control system gt Use temperature controls 2 and system in automatic mode gt page 187 to separately adjust the air temperature on each side of the Deactivating Qe passenger compartment l When operating the climate control icle interi gt Setair volume control Q gt page 187 p amp i me pope a me E OEDD sa system in automatic mode you will is adjusted automatically to position O only rarely need to adjust the tempera i ture air volume and air distribution Deactivating When the climate control system is de In automatic mode cooling with dehu Press button R gt page 187 again activated the outside air supply and midify is switched on This function can The indicator lamp on the button goes circulation are also deactivated Only be switched off if necessary out The automatic operation of air vol choose this Setene for a short time ume and air distribution switches off Otherwise the windows could fog up Activating oo gt Press button RA gt page 187 while Reactvaline the engine is running gt Set airvolume control Q gt page 187 The indicator lamp on the button to any speed comes on The air volume and air distri bution are adjusted automatically Controls in detail Climate control CLK 350 Setting the temperature Use temperature controls 2 and 3 gt page 187 to separately adjust the air temperature on each side
200. ctrolyte may escape from the mirror housing if the mirror glass breaks Electrolyte has an irritating effect Do not allow the liquid to come into contact with eyes skin clothing or respiratory system In case it does immediately flush affected area with water and seek medical help if necessary Electrolyte drops coming into contact with the vehicle paint finish can be completely removed only while in the liquid state and by applying plenty of water Warning A N Exercise care when using the passen ger side exterior rear view mirror The mirror surface is convex outwardly curved surface for a wider field of view Objects in mirror are closer than they appear Check your interior rear view mirror or glance over your shoulder before changing lanes Activating exterior rear view mirror parking position Follow these steps to activate the mirror parking position so that the passenger side exterior rear view mirror will be turned downward to the stored position The buttons are located above the exterior lamp switch d k j A f mS aTi 3 Pan i 1 d 1 2 T E i s Le r n baf r i 1 Driver s side exterior rear view mirror button 2 Passenger side exterior rear view mirror button gt gt Make sure you have stored a parking position for the passenger side exterior rear view mirror gt page 126 Make sure the Mirror adjustment parking aid function i
201. d rules e the safety precautions in this manual e the Technical data section in this manual e traffic rules and regulations e motor vehicle laws and safety standards Warning A N Various warning labels are attached to your vehicle These warning labels are intended to make you and others aware of various risks You should not remove any of these warning labels unless explicitly instructed to do so by information on the label itself Removal of any of these labels may cause you and others to be unaware of certain risks which may result in an accident and or personal injury Introduction Problems with your vehicle Y Problems with your vehicle If you should experience a problem with your vehicle particularly one that you believe may affect its safe operation we urge you to immediately contact an authorized Mercedes Benz Center to have the problem diagnosed and corrected if required If the matter is not handled to your satisfaction please discuss the problem with the Mercedes Benz Center management or if necessary contact us at one of the following addresses In the USA Customer Assistance Center Mercedes Benz USA LLC One Mercedes Drive Montvale NJ 07645 0350 In Canada Customer Relations Department Mercedes Benz Canada Inc 98 Vanderhoof Avenue Toronto Ontario M4G 4C9 Introduction Reporting safety defects For the USA only The following text is published as required of manufacturers
202. d sections 4 and together Controls in detail P77 00 2174 31 3 Catch 4 Retainer claw Snap fastener gt Press retainer claw on upper sec tion into snap fastener of lower sec tion gt gt Controls in detail gt gt 7 gt Pull catch 8 back and guide left re Removing aa z a pin into mounting fixture on left gt Fold upper section of wind screen back side down gt Fold ee fee of ee up gt Pull catch back and pull wind EO War eae ie ovale Dati SEOD screen out toward front of vehicle Be careful not to damage interior trim with Warning J guide tabs gt Fold retaining lugs back 4 4 F t N a F Peman Check for secure locking by pulling up on Retaining lugs the wind screen 7 Mounting fixture on right side To prevent personal injury remove wind Catch screen if rear seats are to be occupied by gt Fold retaining lugs out passengers gt Slide pre assembled wind screen into mounting fixture on right side 7 using retaining pin on right side Simulta neously retaining lugs should slide into seat belt passage in rear bench seat P77 00 2176 31 9 Catch gt Press catch Q and fold upper and low er sections back gt Place the wind screen back into the bag Y Driving systems The driving systems of your vehicle are de scribed on the following pages e Cruise control with which the vehicle can maintain a preset
203. de Carefully fold the wiper arm back to rest on the windshield Hold on to the wiper arm when folding the wiper arm back If released the force of the impact from the tensioning spring could crack the windshield Installing wiper blades 1 Recess 2 Tab 3 Locking 4 Taper piece Square recess P82 30 2532 31 gt Lift up the wiper arm as far as you need to position the wiper blade under the wiper arm and hold it Carefully fold the wiper arm back and make sure that the taper piece slides into the recess Q at the wiper blade Make certain that the square recess on the taper piece is on the top oth erwise the taper piece can not slide in the recess Q at the wiper blade If the square recess 5 is not at the top turn the taper piece 4 around to bring the square recess to the top Slide the tab 2 back in the direction of arrow 8 until it audibly engages The wiper blade is locked Practical hints Replacing wiper blades Hold on to the wiper arm when folding the wiper arm back If released the force of the impact from the tensioning spring could crack the windshield Make certain that the wiper blades are properly installed Improperly installed wiper blades may cause windshield damage Practical hints Flat tire A The dimensions of the Minispare wheel are different from those of the road wheels As a result the vehicle handling characteristic
204. detail Audio system GSM network phones Placing a 911 emergency call using audio head unit with the phone locked Press button to switch to tele phone operation PIN appears in the audio display Enter 911 using the number keypad on the audio head unit Press OK soft key or button for dialing to begin DIALING appears in the audio display while the telephone establishes the connection Wait until the emergency call center answers then describe the emergency Controls in detail Audio system Placing a 911 emergency call using TDMA CDMA network phones audio head unit with the phone un locked Placing a 911 emergency call using gt Press button to switch to tele phone operation gt gt Enter 911 using the number keypad on the audio head unit gt Press button for dialing to begin DIALING appears in the audio display while the telephone establishes the gt connection gt Wait until the emergency call center answers then describe the emergency If no SIM card is in the mobile phone NO SERVICE appears in the audio dis play In that case you only can make an emergency call on the mobile phone it self without the use of the head unit audio head unit with the phone locked Press button to switch to tele phone operation CODE appears in the audio display Enter 911 using the number keypad on the audio head unit Press OK soft key or butto
205. ding symbol gt page 350 which denotes the tire meets require ments of the U S Department of Transpor tation Manufacturer s identification mark The manufacturer s identification mark 2 gt page 350 denotes the tire manufacturer New tires have a mark with two symbols Retreaded tires have a mark with four sym bols For more information on retreaded tires see gt page 330 Tire size The code 8 gt page 350 indicates the tire size Tire type code The code gt page 350 may at the option of the manufacturer be used as a descriptive code for identifying significant characteristics of the tire Date of manufacture The date of manufacture G gt page 350 identifies the week and year of manufac ture The first two figures identify the week starting with O1 to represent the first full week of the calendar year The second two figures represent the year For example 3202 represents the 32nd week of 2002 Operation Tires and wheels Maximum tire load 1 Maximum tire load rating For illustration purposes only Actual data on tires are specific to each vehi cle and may vary from data shown in above illustration The maximum tire load is the maximum weight the tires are designed to support Operation Tires and wheels Warning J Do not overload the tires by exceeding the specified load limit or vehicle capacity weight as indicat
206. dlamps delayed shut off feature on or off Turn the exterior lamp switch to position Eig before turning off the engine gt page 127 The headlamps delayed shut off feature is activated You can temporarily deactivate the de layed shut off feature gt Before exiting the vehicle turn the SmartKey in the starter switch to position 0 Then turn it to position 2 and back to O The delayed shut off feature is deactivated It will reactivate as soon as you reinsert the SmartKey in the starter switch Setting interior lighting delayed shut off Use this function to set whether you would like the interior lighting to remain lit during darkness after you have removed the SmartKey from the starter switch If acti vated it remains lit for 10 seconds gt Move the selection marker with button or E to the Lighting submenu gt Press button EAN or Keg repeatedly until the message Interior lamp de layed shut off appears in the multifunction display The selection marker is on the current setting Interior lamp delayed shut off f Prga ES Off zo 149 3 MI OF P54 30 8385 31 gt Press button or E to switch the interior delayed shut off feature on or off Vehicle submenu Access the Vehicle submenu via the Settings menu Use the Vehicle submenu to make general vehicle settings The following function is available Function Page Setting automatic locking 159 Controls in detail
207. does not come on briefly during check then the SmartKey with KEYLESS GO batteries are discharged Replace the batteries gt page 435 You can obtain the required batteries at any authorized Mercedes Benz Center Controls in detail Locking and unlocking If the batteries are checked within sig nal range of the vehicle pressing the or button will lock or unlock the vehicle accordingly Global locking using the lock button on the trunk lid To prevent a possible inadvertent lockout the trunk will open automatically if a SmartKey with KEYLESS GO is recognized inside the vehicle or in the trunk Controls in detail Locking and unlocking P80 20 2789 31 1 Lock button gt Press lock button Q on the trunk lid With the trunk and both doors closed all turn signal lamps flash three times The locking knobs in the doors move down The anti theft alarm system is armed You can also lock the vehicle using the lock button on an outside door handle page 60 or vehicles with trunk opening closing system KEYLESS GO locking closing switch gt page 114 Unlocking and opening the trunk You can unlock and open the trunk sepa rately A minimum height clearance of 5 41 ft 1 65 m is required to open the trunk lid gt Press and hold button until trunk unlocks and begins to open The trunk lid swings open upwards au tomatically Always make sure there is
208. dows if there is the possibility of anyone being harmed by the closing procedure In the event that the procedure causes po tential danger the closing of the side win dows can be immediately halted by releasing the button or by pressing or pulling the respective window switch If you press and hold button R the side windows will close Deactivating gt Press button gt page 187 The indicator lamp on the button goes out The air recirculation mode is deactivat ed automatically e after 5 minutes if the outside temperature is below approximately 41 F 5 C e after 5 minutes if the air condition ing is turned off e after 30 minutes if the outside temperature is above approximately 41 F 5 C Controls in detail Climate control CLK 350 If you press and hold button sey the side windows will return to their previ ous position A side window will only return to its pre vious position if it has not been moved to another position using the respec tive side window switch after it was closed with button Ey A side win dow that was moved will remain in its current position if button is used to re open the remaining side windows Controls in detail Climate control CLK 350 Air conditioning The cooling function is only operational when the engine is running cools the vehi cle interior down to the selected tempera ture The cooling function also dehumidifies th
209. dshield washer fluid fifteen times When you switch off ignition the counter resets For information on filling up the washer reservoir see Windshield washer system and headlamp cleaning system gt page 486 Controls in detail Good visibility Rear view mirrors For more information on setting the rear view mirrors see Mirrors gt page 43 Interior rear view mirror antiglare position F P68 40 2095 31 1 Lever gt Tilt the mirror to the antiglare night position by moving lever 1 towards the windshield The interior rear view mirror is dimmed Controls in detail Good visibility Auto dimming rear view mirrors The reflection brightness of the exterior rear view mirror on the driver s side and the interior rear view mirror will respond automatically to glare when the ignition is switched on and incoming light from headlamps falls on the sensor in the interior rear view mirror The rear view mirror will not react if reverse gear R is engaged the interior lighting is turned on Warning The auto dimming function does not react if incoming light is not aimed directly at sen sors in the interior rear view mirror The interior rear view mirror and the exterior rear view mirror on the driver s side do not react for example if the wind screen is installed Glare can endanger you and others Warning A N In case of an accident liquid ele
210. e and soft top compartment cover Hands must never be placed near the roll bar soft top frame upper windshield area shelf behind roll bar or soft top storage compartment while the soft top is being raised or lowered Serious personal injury may occur If potential danger exists release the soft top switch This immediately interrupts the raising or lowering procedure You then can operate the soft top switch to raise or lower the soft top away from the danger zone Warning A N When leaving the vehicle always remove the SmartKey or SmartKey with KEYLESS GO from the starter switch take it with you and lock the vehicle Do not leave children unat tended in the vehicle or with access to an unlocked vehicle Unsupervised use of vehi cle equipment can cause an accident and or serious personal injury Never sit or place heavy objects on the rear shelf Doing so could cause dam age to the soft top and the rear shelf Controls in detail Soft top When opening and closing the soft top make sure there is sufficient clearance for the soft top to move up the luggage cover is engaged in place gt page 262 the trunk is only loaded to the height of the luggage cover the luggage cargo does not push the closed luggage cover up the trunk lid is closed nothing is placed on the soft top compartment cover the outside temperature is above 5 F 15 C Otherwise the soft top and other parts of the veh
211. e 357 ual emergency roadside assistance VIN and information Tele Aid is initially ac Tire ply composition and material used Vehicle Identification Number tivated by completing a subscriber gt page 357 The number set by the manufacturer agreement and placing an acquain Tire speed rating and placed on the body to uniquely tance call gt page 357 identify each vehicle produced The Tele Aid system is operational pro ae Wind screen vided that the vehicle s battery is ee 357 Screen for deflecting wind from the ve charged properly connected not dam apace a hicle interior when the soft top is aged and cellular and GPS coverage is Tread lowered available gt page 357 Telematics Treadwear indicators A combination of the terms telecom gt page 357 Te informatics munications and informatics Uniform Tire Quality Grading Standards Tightening torque gt page 357 Force times lever arm e g a lug wrench with which threaded fasteners such as wheel bolts are tightened A ABS 25 87 487 Malfunction indicator lamp 374 Messages indisplay 385 Accelerator position automatic transmission 170 Accessory weight 355 Accident 56 Active head restraints 73 Resetting 434 Airbags 63 Children 64 Front passenger front air bag off indicator lamp 81 Front Driver 67 Front Passenger 67 Head thorax 68 Occupant Classification System OCS 78 Rear side impact 68 Safety guidlines 66 Air conditioni
212. e air in the vehicle interior thus preventing the windows from fogging up j Condensation may drip out from under neath the vehicle This is normal and not an indication of a malfunction A If you turn off the cooling function the vehicle will not be cooled when weather conditions are warm The windows can fog up more quickly Window fogging may impair visibility and endanger you and others Warning Deactivating It is possible to deactivate the air condi tioning cooling function of the climate control system The air in the vehicle will then no longer be cooled or dehumidified gt Press button gt page 187 The indicator lamp on the button goes out The cooling function switches off after a short delay Activating Moist air can fog up the windows You can dehumidify the air with the air condition ing gt Press button gt page 187 again The indicator lamp on the button comes on The air conditioning uses the refrigerant R134a This refrigerant is free of CFCs which are harmful to the ozone layer If the air conditioning cannot be turned on again this indicates that the air conditioning is losing refrigerant The compressor has turned itself off Have the air conditioning checked at the nearest authorized Mercedes Benz Center Rear passenger compartment adjustable air vents The air conditioning for the rear passenger compartment is controlled via the climate cont
213. e and to infant or child restraints Warning According to accident statistics children are safer when properly restrained in the rear seating positions than in the front seat ing position Thus we strongly recommend that children be placed in the rear seats whenever possible Regardless of seating position children 12 years old and under must be seated and properly secured in an appropriate infant or child restraint recom mended for the size and weight of the child The infant or child restraint must be properly secured with the vehicle s seat belt or seat belt and lower anchors fully in accordance with the child seat manufacturer s instructions Children can be killed or seriously injured by an inflating air bag Note the following important information when circumstances require you to place a child in the front passenger seat e Your vehicle is equipped with air bag technology designed to turn off the front passenger front air bag in your vehicle when the OCS senses the weight of a typical 12 month old child or less along with the weight of a standard appropriate child restraint on the front passenger seat e Achild in a rear facing child restraint on the front passenger seat will be seriously injured or even killed if the front passenger front air bag inflates in a collision which could occur under some circumstances even with the air bag technology installed in your vehicle The only means to completely el
214. e average of both the gt MON Motor Octane Number and RON Research Octane Number is posted at the pump also known as ANTI KNOCK INDEX RFI Run Flat Indicator The Run Flat Indicator monitors the set tire inflation pressures by evaluating each wheel s rotational speed If a wheel s rotational speed changes due to falling tire inflation pressure a corre sponding warning message appears in the multifunction display Shift lock When the vehicle is parked this lock prevents the gear selector lever from being inadvertently moved out of position P without SmartKey turned and brake pedal depressed Sidewall gt page 356 Soft top Soft top roof that can be opened by pulling and closed by pressing a switch and stored in the soft top compartment in the trunk area SRS Supplemental Restraint System Air bags air bag control unit with crash sensor emergency tensioning device Though independent systems they are closely interfaced to provide effective occupant protection Steering wheel gearshift control CLK 500 CLK 55 AMG You can change the gears yourself with the steering wheel gearshift buttons Tele Aid System TIN Vehicle capacity weight Telematic Alarm Identification on De Tire Identification Number gt page 357 mand gt page 357 Vehicle maximum load on the tire The Tele Aid system consists of three Tire load rating gt page 357 types of response automatic and man gt pag
215. e damage After running the vehicle through an au tomatic car wash wipe any wax off of the windshield gt page 370 This will prevent smears and reduce wiping noise which can be caused by residual wax on the windshield When leaving the car wash make sure that the mirrors are folded out Other wise they may vibrate Soft top Clean soft top with soft top raised and locked Lower the soft top into the storage compartment only if the soft top is com pletely dry If the soft top is kept in the storage compartment for a lengthy period raise it and air out with the windows open about every 4 months Light colored soft tops should be cleaned frequently to prevent spots and dirt from setting in which could stain and discolor the soft top material permanently Operation Vehicle care Remove bird droppings immediately The organic acid damages the material and causes the soft top to leak Never use a power washer to clean the soft top as you may damage the soft top material Do not use sharp edged instruments for the removal of ice and snow Never use hot wax when you run the vehicle through an automatic car wash as you may damage the soft top material a Depending on the operation mode of the car wash there is the possibility of water drops entering the vehicle s inte rior This is not an indication of a defect or malfunction in the soft top Operation Vehicle care Dry cleaning F
216. e ignition causes all instrument cluster lamps except low beam headlamp indicator lamp high beam headlamp indicator lamp and turn signal indicator lamps unless activated as well as the multifunction display to come on Make sure the lamps and the multifunction display are in working order before starting your journey On the pages that follow you will find a compilation of the most important warning and malfunction messages that may appear in the display For your convenience the messages are divided into two sections Text messages gt page 385 e Symbol messages gt page 395 Text messages Display message ABS malfunction Visit workshop Display malfunction Visit workshop Possible cause consequence The ABS has detected a malfunction and has switched off The ESP and the BAS are also deactivated The brake system is still functioning nor mally but without the ABS available The ABS or the ABS display is malfunc tioning Practical hints What to do if Possible solution gt Continue driving with added caution Wheels will lock during hard braking reducing steering capability Have the system checked at an autho rized Mercedes Benz Center as soon as possible Failure to follow these instructions in creases the risk of an accident gt Continue driving with added caution Wheels will lock during hard braking reducing steering capability Have the system checked a
217. e is displayed A delay also occurs when ambient temper atures rise This prevents inaccurate tem perature indications caused by heat radiated from the engine during idling or Slow driving Y Control system The control system is activated as soon as the SmartKey in the starter switch is turned to position 1 or as soon as the KEYLESS GO start stop button is in position 1 The control system enables you to e call up information about your vehicle e change vehicle settings For example you can use the control sys tem to find out when your vehicle is next due for service to set the language for messages in the instrument cluster dis play and much more The displays for the audio systems radio CD player etc will appear in En glish regardless of the language se lected Controls in detail Control system Warning A N A driver s attention to the road and traffic conditions must always be his her primary focus when driving For your safety and the safety of others selecting features through the multifunction steering wheel should only be done by the driver when traffic and road conditions permit it to be done safely Bear in mind that at a speed of just 30 mph approximately 50 km h your vehicle is covering a distance of 44 feet approxi mately 14 m every second The control system relays information to the multifunction display Controls in detail Control system Mul
218. e message Key not recognized will appear in the multifunction display while driving off Find the SmartKey with KEYLESS GO or change its present location immediate ly e g place it on the front passenger seat or insert it in shirt pocket Remember that the engine can be started by anyone with a SmartKey with KEYLESS GO that is left inside the vehicle If you leave the SmartKey with KEYLESS GO behind when exiting and locking the vehicle the message Key recognized in vehicle will appear in the multifunction display Factory setting A When leaving the vehicle always take the SmartKey with KEYLESS GO with you and lock the vehicle Do not leave children unat tended in the vehicle or with access to an unlocked vehicle It is possible for children to open a locked door from the inside which could result in an accident and or serious personal injury Warning Global unlocking gt Pull an outside door handle All turn signal lamps flash once The locking knobs in the doors move up The anti theft alarm system is disarmed If the vehicle has been parked for a longer period of time you must pull an outside door handle in order to activate the KEYLESS GO function Controls in detail Locking and unlocking The vehicle will lock again automatically and reactivate the anti theft alarm system within approximately 40 seconds of un locking if neither a door nor the trunk is opened the centra
219. e mobile telephone can be called up ei ther by name or number In addition incoming calls are stored in the phone book LLR o This is only possible however when the call information transmitted in cludes the number of the person call ing If the telephone number is not transmitted NO NUMBER will be stored in the phone book Searching and calling up phone book entries by name You can access your mobile tele phone s phone book with the audio sys tem You can access both the main entries and the sub entries of your phone book H OM ROU Pa2 60 4559 31 or or Press MEM soft key or press FS o BA Press desired numerical key to ES The stored entries are selected ac cording to the alphabetical order of the initial letters e g for S Smith press button four times Press and hold button FS BA The system jumps from one initial letter to the next in ascending or descending order Press and hold button WY or BA until desired initial letter has been reached gt Press button WW or BAZ repeat edly until desired entry has been reached The stored entries are selected in alphabetical order with the sub en tries Several sub entries can be stored for each main entry name These entries are marked by a corresponding abbre viation that appears in the upper left hand corner of the display The fol lowing abbreviations for sub entries are possible CEL Mobil
220. e phone HOM Home WOR Work FAX Fax PAG Pager TEL Main gt When you have selected a number press button The call will be made Viewing the telephone number of a phone book entry gt Search for desired entry gt Press NUM soft key The telephone number of the phone book entry appears in the display Returning calls received CLR H IM RCU P82 60 4467 31 Controls in detail Audio system Press MEM soft key or press Pwo BA Press RCV soft key received calls The number of received calls and then the call last received appear briefly in the display Select desired telephone number with button WN or BA The letter R and the number of the memory position appear in the up per left hand corner of the display The numbers are stored in the order of the calls received When you have selected a number press button The call will be made Controls in detail Audio system e Speed dial Redial gt Press button If you have stored telephone numbers If the number you have dialed is busy you The telephone number last dialed as speed dial numbers in your tele can again place calls to the last ten tele will appear in the display phone you can also enter these with phone numbers dialed using the redial gt Select desired telephone number buttons J to MQ onthe radio unit function with button IFW or EZ press desired button J to ia The letter L and the number of the brief
221. e seat belt in a collision If you slide under it the belt would apply force at the ab domen or neck This could cause serious or even fatal injuries The seat backrest and seat belt provide the best restraint when the wearer is in a nearly upright position and the belt is properly positioned on the body The seat belt presenter slides out when the Warning VAN corresponding door is closed and the igni aaaea tion is Switched on gt page 34 Read and observe the additional warning no tices printed in the Safety and Security section gt page 66 The seat belt presenter for driver and pas senger makes it easier to put on the seat belt 1 Latch plate 2 Release button 3 Buckle gt With a smooth motion pull the belt out of the seat belt presenter 1 Seat belt presenter gt Place the shoulder portion of the belt across the top of your shoulder and the lap portion across your hips gt Push latch plate into buckle until it clicks gt If necessary tighten the lap portion to a snug fit by pulling shoulder portion up Proper use of seat belts e Do not twist the belt when fastening e Adjust seat belt so that the shoulder portion is located as close as possible to the middle of the shoulder it should not touch the neck Never pass the shoulder portion of the belt under your arm Position the lap belt as low as possible on your hips over hip joint and not across the
222. e the glove box e the trunk e the fuel filler flap Warning J When leaving the vehicle always remove the SmartKey from the starter switch take it with you and lock the vehicle Do not leave children unattended in the vehicle or with access to an unlocked vehicle It is possible for children to open a locked door from the inside which could result in an accident and or serious injury To prevent possible malfunction avoid exposing the SmartKey to high levels of electromagnetic radiation USA only This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules Operation is subject to the following two conditions 1 This device may not cause harmful interference and 2 this device must accept any interference received including interference that may cause undesired operation Any unauthorized modification to this device could void the user s authority to operate the equipment Controls in detail Locking and unlocking Canada only This device complies with RSS 210 of Industry Canada Operation is subject to the following two conditions 1 This device may not cause interfer ence and 2 this device must accept any interference received including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device Any unauthorized modification to this device could void the user s authority to operate the equipment You can also open and close the soft top see Opening and closin
223. e the spare wheel tire to the recommended tire inflation pres sure given on the yellow label on the Spare wheel rim Please note that the tire inflation pres sure of the Minispare tire differs from the tire inflation pressure of the road tires Make sure the Minispare tire is inflated to approximately 60 psi 4 1 bar Y Electrical system Model Generator alternator Starter motor Battery Spark plugs Electrode gap Tightening torque CLK 350 14 V 150 A 14 V 1 4 KW 12 V 100 Ah Bosch Platin Y 7 MPP 33 NGK PLKR 6A 0 031 in 0 80 mm 15 22 lb ft 20 30 Nm Technical data CLK 500 14 V 150 A 14 V 1 7 KW 12 V 100 Ah Bosch F8 DPP 332 NGK PFR 5R 11 0 039 in 1 00 mm 18 5 22 lb ft 25 30 Nm Electrical system CLK 55 AMG 14 V 150 A 14 V 1 7 KW 12 V 100 Ah NGK ILFR 6A 0 031 in 0 8 mm 18 5 22 b ft 25 30 Nm Technical data Main dimensions and weights Main dimensions k Model Overall vehicle length Overall vehicle width exterior rear view mirrors folded out Overall vehicle height Overall vehicle height when opening closing soft top Wheelbase Track front Track rear Weights CLK 350 183 3 in 4657 mm 78 4 in 1991 mm 55 6 in 1413 mm 80 2 in 2038 mm 106 9 in 2715 mm 58 8 in 1493 mm 58 0 in 1474 mm Trunk load max 220 Ibs 100 kg CLK 500 183 3 in 4657 mm 78 4 in 1991 mm 55 4 in 1408 mm 81 0
224. e until the emergency braking situation is over The ABS will prevent the wheels from locking When you release the brake pedal the brakes function again as normal The BAS is then deactivated A If the BAS is malfunctioning the brake sys tem is still functioning normally but without the additional brake boost available that BAS would normally provide in an emergen cy braking maneuver Therefore the braking distance may increase Warning Warning A N The BAS cannot prevent the natural laws of physics from acting on the vehicle nor can it increase braking efficiency beyond that afforded by the condition of the vehicle brakes and tires or the traction The BAS cannot prevent accidents including those resulting from excessive speed in turns fol lowing another vehicle too closely or hydro planing Only a safe attentive and skillful driver can prevent accidents The capabilities of a BAS equipped vehicle must never be exploited in a reckless or danger ous manner which could jeopardize the user s safety or the safety of others For more information see Practical hints gt page 373 ESP The Electronic Stability Program ESP is operational as soon as the engine Is run ning and monitors the vehicle s traction force of adhesive friction between the tires and the road surface and handling The ESP recognizes when a wheel is Spinning or if the vehicle starts to skid By applying brakes to the
225. e wear e adversely affect fuel economy e lead to tire failure from being overheated e adversely affect handling characteristics Warning A N Follow recommended tire inflation pressures Do not underinflate tires Underinflated tires wear excessively and or unevenly adversely affect handling and fuel economy and are more likely to fail from being overheated Overinflated tire inflation pressure Overinflated tires can e adversely affect handling characteristics e cause uneven tire wear e be more prone to damage from road hazards e adversely affect ride comfort e increase stopping distance Warning A N Follow recommended tire inflation pressures Do not overinflate tires Overinflated tires can adversely affect handling and ride comfort wear unevenly increase stopping distance and result in sudden deflation blowout because they are more likely to become punctured or damaged by road debris potholes etc MOExtended system The MOExtended system allows you to continue driving your vehicle even if there is a total loss of pressure in one or more tires You may only use the MOExtended system in conjunction with the Run Flat Indicator gt page 342 For information on driving in case of pres sure loss in one or more tires emergency mode see the Practical hints section gt page 452 Tire labeling eee Saas es Besides tire name
226. e with the engine at operating tempera ture the vehicle must have been sta tionary for at least 5 minutes with the engine turned off e with the engine not at operating tem perature yet the vehicle must have been stationary for at least 30 minutes with the engine turned off 1 Oil dipstick 2 Upper max mark 3 Lower min mark To check the engine oil level with the oil dipstick do the following Open the hood gt page 321 Pull out oil dipstick Wipe oil dipstick clean Fully insert oil dipstick Q into the dipstick guide tube vv Yy gt Pull out oil dipstick Q again after approximately 3 seconds to obtain ac curate reading The oil level is correct when it is be tween the lower min mark and upper max mark 2 of oil dipstick 1 The filling quantity between the upper and lower marks on the oil dipstick is approximately 2 1 US qt 2 0 I gt If necessary add engine oil For adding engine oil see Adding en gine oil gt page 325 For more information on engine oil see Fuels coolants lubricants etc gt page 479 For more information on messages in the multifunction display concerning engine oil see the Practical hints section gt page 401 Operation Engine compartment Adding engine oil Only use approved engine oils and oil filters required for vehicles with Maintenance System U S vehicles or FSS Canada vehicle
227. e yellow roll bar warning lamp R A in the clock does not go out after starting the engine or if it comes on while driving then the roll bar system is not operating properly and may not activate in an accident In this case raise the roll bars manually before continuing to drive gt page 423 Warning For safety reasons drive only with the roll bars raised until the malfunction is repaired Have your vehicle checked at an authorized Mercedes Benz Center Children in the vehicle If an infant or child is traveling with you in the vehicle e Secure the child using an infant or child restraint appropriate to the age and size of the child e Make sure that the infant or child is properly secured at all times while the vehicle is in motion Infant and child restraint seats and information on choosing an appropriate restraint system can be obtained from any Mercedes Benz Center Infant and child restraint systems We recommend all infants and children be properly restrained at all times while the vehicle is in motion All lap shoulder belts except the driver s seat belt have special seat belt retractors for secure fastening of child restraints To fasten a child restraint follow child restraint instructions for mounting Then pull the shoulder belt out completely and let it retract During seat belt retraction a ratcheting sound can be heard to indicate that the special seat belt retractor is acti vated The belt
228. ease price if Mercedes Benz USA LLC and or its au thorized repair or service facilities fail to fix one or more substantial defects or mal functions in the vehicle that are covered by its express warranty after a reasonable number of repair attempts During the pe riod of 18 months from original delivery of the vehicle or the accumulation of 18000 miles approx 29000 km on the odometer of the vehicle whichever occurs first a reasonable number of repair at tempts is presumed for a retail buyer or lessee if one or more of the following oc curs 1 the same substantial defect or mal function results in a condition that is likely to cause death or serious bodily injury if the vehicle is driven that de fect or malfunction has been subject to repair two or more times and you have directly notified Mercedes Benz USA LLC in writing of the need for its repair 2 the same substantial defect or mal function of a less serious nature than category 1 has been subject to repair four or more times and you have direct ly notified us in writing of the need for its repair or Introduction Operator s Manual 3 the vehicle is out of service by reason of repair of the same or different sub stantial defects or malfunctions for a cumulative total of more than 30 calendar days Written notification should be sent to us not a dealer at Mercedes Benz USA LLC Customer Assistance Center One Mercedes Drive Montvale
229. ection of arrow CDs which have been inserted improp erly or are unreadable will not be played Push magazine into CD changer 2 in direction of arrow and close sliding door Controls in detail Audio system Playing CDs Single CD player in the audio unit gt Press button CD 0 will appear in the upper left hand corner of the display The CD will resume playback at the point where it was switched off CD changer gt Press button CD and the selected magazine slot num ber appear in the upper left hand cor ner of the display If you have not removed a CD since the last time the CD audio source was activated the last CD listened to will begin to play at the point where it was switched off After the last track on a CD has finished the next CD is automatically played Playing tracks You have the following options e Audio system with CD changer se lecting CDs e Direct track entry e Track skip forward reverse e Fast forward reverse e Scan e Random tracks e Repeat track Selecting CDs in the audio unit with CD changer EET RDM RPT P 2 60 4455 31 gt You can select from among the inserted CDs with buttons EN to ES ME CD player in the audio unit EE to EN CDs inthe CD changer The magazine slot number of the se lected CD appears next to CD in the dis play and the number of the currently played track appears next to TRACK If there is no CD in
230. ecurity Occupant safety Warning Infants and small children should never share a seat belt with another occupant During an accident they could be crushed between the occupant and seat belt A child s risk of serious or fatal injuries is significantly increased if the child restraints are not properly secured in the vehicle and or the child is not properly secured in the child restraint Children too big for a toddler restraint must ride in seats using regular seat belts Posi tion shoulder belt across chest and shoul der not face or neck A booster seat may be necessary to achieve proper belt positioning for children from 41 Ibs until they reach a height where a lap shoulder belt fits properly without a booster gt D b gt Safety and Security Occupant safety When the child restraint is not in use remove it from the vehicle or secure it with the seat belt to prevent the child restraint from becoming a projectile in the event of an accident Do not leave children unattended in the vehicle even if the children are secured ina child restraint system Unsupervised children in a child restraint system may use vehicle equipment and may cause an accident and or serious personal injury Occupant Classification System The Occupant Classification System OCS automatically turns the front passenger front air bag on or off based on the classi fied occupant weight category determined by weight sensor
231. ed Mercedes Benz Center Please read the instructions fully before beginning operation and only undertake it with another person and if you feel fully capable of perform ing the tasks involved A e tis important that a second person helps you Otherwise you could become trapped or injured Warning e Remove any wristwatches or jewelry such as rings or bracelets Otherwise they could get caught in the vehicle mechanism causing personal injury to yourself or damage to the vehicle e Always use the grips provided as indi cated Otherwise you could injure your self Practical hints Opening closing in an emergency gt Engage parking brake gt Lower the side windows gt Lower rear head restraints gt page 120 If the rear head restraints cannot be lowered using the rear head restraint lowering switch the roll bars may have been released For more information see Operating roll bars manually gt page 423 For safety reasons remove SmartKey from starter switch Open the trunk Remove the trunk floor cover Take the two straps for soft top emer gency operation out of vehicle tool kit gt page 413 Take hex wrench out of its storage location in the storage well casing Locking mechanism gt page 413 gt Pull locking mechanism Q out until it stops and rotate it approx one quarter of a turn Open the left side trim panel in the trunk gt Make sure
232. ed on the placard located on the driver s door B pillar Overloading the tires can overheat them possibly causing a blowout Overloading the tires can also result in handling or steering problems or brake failure For more information on tire load rating gt page 347 For information on calculating total and cargo load capacities gt page 336 Maximum tire inflation pressure Always follow the recommended tire inflation pressure gt page 339 for proper tire inflation Warning A N Never exceed the max tire inflation pressure Follow recommended tire inflation pressures Do not underinflate tires Underinflated tires cow o wear excessively and or unevenly adverse 1 Maximum permissible tire inflation ly affect handling and fuel economy and are pressure more likely to fail from being overheated amp Do not overinflate tires Overinflated tires can adversely affect handling and ride com fort wear unevenly increase stopping dis tance and result in sudden deflation blowout because they are more likely to become punctured or damaged by road de bris potholes etc For illustration purposes only Actual data on tires are specific to each vehi cle and may vary from data shown in above illustration This is the maximum permissible tire inflation pressure for the tire Uniform Tire Quality Grading Standards U S vehicles Tire manufacturers are required to grade tires b
233. edly until the desired seat venti lation level is reached Controls in detail Seats The seat ventilation for the driver s seat is automatically set to the highest level if activated via Summer opening feature gt page 252 Switching off seat ventilation gt Press seat ventilation switch Q repeatedly until all blue indicator lamps go out If one or more of the indicator lamps on the seat ventilation switch Q are flash ing there is insufficient voltage due to too many electrical consumers being switched on The seat ventilation switches off automatically The seat ventilation will switch back on again automatically as soon as sufficient voltage is available Controls in detail Memory function Prior to operating the vehicle the driver should check and adjust the seat height seat position fore and aft and seat back rest angle if necessary to ensure adequate control reach and comfort The head restraint should also be adjusted for proper height See also the section on air bags gt page 63 for proper seat positioning In addition adjust the steering wheel to ensure adequate control reach operation and comfort Both the interior and exterior rear view mirrors should be adjusted for adequate rear vision Fasten seat belts Infants and small chil dren should be seated in a properly se cured restraint system that complies with U S Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standards 213
234. eft one stop Standing lamps left turn left two stops Indicator lamp for front fog lamps Indicator lamp for rear fog lamp Controls in detail Lighting With the SmartKey removed from the starter switch or the engine turned off with KEYLESS GO and the driver s door open a warning sounds if the parking lamps or low beam headlamps are switched on The message Turn off lamps appears in the multifunction display Manual headlamp mode The low beam headlamps and the parking lamps can be switched on and off with the exterior lamp switch Automatic headlamp mode The following lamps switch on and off au tomatically depending on the brightness of the ambient light Low beam headlamps Tail and parking lamps License plate lamps Side marker lamps Warning If the exterior lamp switch is set to Bg e the headlamps may switch off unexpect edly when the system senses bright ambient light for example light from oncoming traffic e the headlamps will not be automatically switched on under foggy conditions To minimize risk to you and to others activate headlamps by turning exterior lamp switch to when driving or when traffic and or ambient lighting conditions require you to do so In low ambient lighting conditions only switch from position Eig to with the vehicle at a standstill in a safe location Switching from Wg to will briefly switch off the headlamps Doing so while driving in l
235. ehicle Make sure the soft top is fully opened Controls in detail Soft top Luggage cover Folding back luggage cover gt Press luggage cover Q in direction of rear seat To prevent damage to the soft top or The luggage cover is located in the trunk e load trunk only to the height of the luggage cover e donot permit luggage cargo to push up the closed luggage cover 1 Luggage cover gt Open the trunk e donot place anything on the shelf behind the roll bars e donot place anything on the soft Latch luggage cover top compartment cover gt Pull luggage cover Q out in direction of arrow until it engages in place luggage cargo when lowering the roof Never place anything behind the side nets when the luggage cover has been folded back You could forget about ob jects placed there which could result in damage when operating the soft top Wind screen Installing gt Remove the wind screen from its stor age bag Warning A N sulla The wind screen can restrict the driver s vi sion to the rear of the vehicle To prevent a possible accident when visibility is limited e g in darkness the upper part of the wind screen should be folded back The wind screen deflects drafts away from the driver and passenger when the soft top Cal P77 00 2112 31 is lowered It is stored in a separate stor age bag in the trunk 1 Upper section 2 Lower section gt Fol
236. ehicle handling and direc tional stability ETD Emergency Tensioning Device Device which deploys in certain frontal and rear collisions exceeding the sys tem s threshold to tighten the seat belts gt SRS FSS Canada vehicles Flexible Service System Maintenance service indicator in the multifunction display that informs the driver when the next vehicle mainte nance service is due FSS evaluates en gine temperature oil level vehicle Speed engine speed distance driven and the time elapsed since your last maintenance service and calls for the next maintenance service accordingly GAWR Gross Axle Weight Rating gt page 355 Gear range Number of gears which are available to the automatic transmission for shifting The automatic gear shifting process can be adapted to specific operating conditions using the gear selector le ver GPS Global Positioning System Satellite based system for relaying geographic location information to and from vehicles equipped with special re ceivers Employs CD digital maps for navigation GVW Gross Vehicle Weight gt page 355 GVWR Gross Vehicle Weight Rating gt page 356 Head thorax air bag Installed in the driver and the front pas senger seat these air bags protect oc cupants during side impact collisions exceeding a preset threshold Unlike normal side impact air bags head thorax air bags are also designed to provide protection for the head are
237. el filler flap is located on the right hand side of the vehicle towards the rear Locking unlocking the vehicle with the SmartKey or the SmartKey with e by pressing the KEYLESS GO KEYLESS GO automatically locks un start stop button Open the driv locks the fuel filler flap er s door with driver s door open starter switch is now in position 0 same as with SmartKey removed from starter switch Warning A N Overfilling of the fuel tank may create pressure in the system which could cause a gas discharge This could cause the gas to spray back out when removing the fuel pump nozzle which could cause personal injury gt Replace fuel cap by turning it clockwise until it audibly engages gt Close fuel filler flap Only use premium unleaded gasoline with a minimum Posted Octane Rating of 91 average of 96 RON 86 MON Information on gasoline quality can normally be found on the fuel pump For more information on gasoline see Premium unleaded gasoline gt page 482 or the Factory Approved Service Products pamphlet Operation At the gas station Leaving the engine running and the fuel cap open can cause the malfunc tion indicator lamp USA only or the E malfunction indicator lamp Canada only to illuminate More information can be found in the Practical hints section gt page 376 Operation At the gas station Check regularly and before along trip Cool
238. emoved from starter switch Switch off the exterior lamps gt Exit the vehicle take the SmartKey or the SmartKey with KEYLESS GO with you and close all doors and the trunk lid Locking with the SmartKey gt Press lock button on the SmartKey gt page 32 With the trunk and both doors closed all turn signal lamps flash three times The locking knobs in the doors move down The anti theft alarm system is armed For more information see SmartKey gt page 96 Locking with KEYLESS GO __P80 20 2343 31 1 Lock button Press lock button Q on an outside door handle or on the trunk lid gt page 106 With the trunk and both doors closed all turn signal lamps flash three times The locking knobs in the doors move down The anti theft alarm system is armed For more information see SmartKey with KEYLESS GO gt page 100 Safety and Security Occupant safety Panic alarm Driving safety systems Anti theft systems Safety and Security Occupant safety In this section you will learn the most im portant facts about the restraint system components of the vehicle e Seat belts gt page 69 e Child restraints gt page 75 e Lower anchors and tethers for children LATCH gt page 83 Supplemental Restraint System SRS with e Air bags gt page 63 e Air bag control unit with crash sensors e Emergency tensioning device ETD for seat belts
239. en 12 years tem has been repaired If the EAEE indicator lamp remains old and under and other small individuals Practical hints What to do if Display message Possible cause consequence Possible solution Front passenger Front passenger front air bag is deac Stop the vehicle in a safe location as soon as possible and check the air bag tivated while driving even though an front passenger seat for the following deactivated adult or someone larger than a small Switch off the ignition gt page 34 see Oper s Man individual is occupying the front pas 8 gt pag senger seat Forces acting on the gt Have the front passenger vacate the seat and exit the vehicle seat may make the system sensea Keep the seat unoccupied close the front passenger door and decrease in weight switch on the ignition gt page 34 Continued on next page Practical hints What to do if Display message Possible cause Possible solution consequence Front passenger Monitor the Fee indicator lamp on the center console gt page 27 and the mul air bag tifunction display in the instrument cluster gt page 24 for the following deactivated With the seat unoccupied and the ignition turned on see Oper s Man e the fee indicator lamp on the center console should illuminate and remain illuminated indicating that the OCS gt page 78 has deactivated the air bag e the message Front passenger air bag activated
240. en the SmartKey in the starter switch is turned to position O or removed from the starter switch With KEYLESS GO turn off the engine by pressing the KEYLESS GO start stop button and open the driver s door The vehicle status message memory will be cleared when you switch on the ignition gt page 34 You will then only see high priority messages in the multi function display gt page 383 Controls in detail Control system Settings menu In the Settings menu there are two functions The function Reset to factory Settings with which you can reset all the settings to the original factory settings A collection of submenus with which you can make individual settings for your vehicle Press button or repeatedly until the Settings menu appears in the multifunction display Settings To reset Press reset button for 43 seconds 72 F 143 8 Ml P54 32 2079 31 Resetting all settings You can reset all the functions of all submenus to the factory settings gt Press the reset button in the instrument cluster gt page 136 for approximately three seconds The request to press the reset button once more to confirm appears in the multifunction display Settings Reset to factory settings To confirm press reset button 72 F 149 8 MI P54 32 7591 31 gt Press the reset button once more The functions of all the submenus will reset to factory settings The
241. eners or other Canadian radio frequency laws require ANa button or rolling code equipped devices may transmitter signals to time out or quit OE OME E EOE GON O require you to press hold for 2 seconds after several seconds of transmission button as follows Press and hold and release the same signal transmit which may not be long enough for the Buren ir seconds TEIN ase ter button a third time to complete the integrated signal transmitter to pick up the i ore O AA a aes ane hold it for 2 seconds Repeat this se training process signal during programming Similar to this quence on the hand held remote con Canadian law some U S gate operators s J trol until the frequency signal has been Step 12 are designed to time out in the same G learned Upon successful training the manner i gt Confirm the garage door operation by indicator lamp will flash slowly and pressing the programmed signal trans _ If you live in Canada or if you are having then rapidly after several seconds mitter button or difficulties programming a gate operator regardless of where you live by using the gt Proceed with programming step 5 and Step 13 step 6 to complete programming procedures replace step 4 gt To program the remaining two signal with the following transmitter buttons repeat the steps Step 4 above starting with step 3 gt Press and hold the signal transmitter button or Do
242. ent your injuries can be considerably more severe without your seat belt properly buckled Without your seat belt buckled you are much more likely to hit the interior of the vehicle or be ejected from it You can be seriously injured or killed In the same crash the possibility of injury or death is lessened if you are properly wearing your seat belt Air bags can only protect as they are designed if the occupants are prop erly wearing their seat belts Safety and Security Occupant safety Warning A N Never ride in a moving vehicle with the seat backrest in an excessively reclined position as this can be dangerous You could slide under the seat belt in a collision If you slide under it the belt would apply force at the abdomen or neck That could cause serious or even fatal injuries The seat backrest and seat belt provide the best restraint when the wearer is in a nearly upright position and the belt is properly positioned on the body Warning Never let more people ride in the vehicle than there are seat belts available Make sure everyone riding in the vehicle is correctly restrained with a separate seat belt Never use a seat belt for more than one person at a time Safety and Security Occupant safety Warning A N Damaged seat belts or belts that were highly stressed in an accident must be replaced and their anchoring points must also be checked Only use seat belts which have been approved
243. ent in which the emergency tensioning devices ETDs or air bags deploy An emergency call can also be initiated manually by opening the cover next to the interior rear view mirror labeled SOS then briefly pressing the button located under the cover See gt page 291 for instructions on initiating an emergency call manually Once the emergency call is in progress the indicator lamp in the SOS button will begin to flash The message Connecting call appears in the multifunction display and the audio system is muted When the connection is established the message Call connected appears in the multifunc tion display All information relevant to the emergency such as the location of the vehicle determined by the GPS satellite location system vehicle model identifica tion number and color are generated A voice connection between the Response Center and the occupants of the vehicle will be established automatically soon af ter the emergency call has been initiated The Response Center will attempt to determine more precisely the nature of the emergency provided they can speak to an occupant of the vehicle The Tele Aid system is available if e it has been activated and is operational Activation requires a subscription for monitoring services connection and cellular air time e the relevant cellular phone network and GPS signals are available and pass the information on to the Response Center Location of the
244. enz Center immediately to have the system checked otherwise the SRS may not deploy when needed in an accident which could result in serious or fatal injury or it might deploy unexpectedly and unnec essarily which could also result in injury In addition improper repair work on the SRS creates a risk of rendering the SRS inopera tive or causing unintended air bag deploy ment Work on the SRS must therefore only be performed by qualified technicians Con tact an authorized Mercedes Benz Center If it is necessary to modify an air bag system to accommodate a person with disabilities contact your local authorized Mercedes Benz Center or call our Customer Assistance Center at 1 800 FOR MERCedes 1 800 367 6372 for details Warning A N Air bags are designed to reduce the poten tial of injury and fatality in certain frontal im pacts front air bags or side impacts head thorax air bags and rear side impact air bags However no system available to day can totally eliminate injuries and fatalities The deployment of the air bags temporarily releases a small amount of dust from the air bags This dust however is neither injurious to your health nor does it indicate a fire in the vehicle The dust might cause some tem porary breathing difficulty for people with asthma or other breathing trouble To avoid this you may wish to get out of the vehicle as soon as it is safe to do so If you have any breathing difficulty but
245. er blind all the way up Controls in detail Loading 4 Handle Cover 6 Armrest gt Fold armrest down arrow gt Pull handle and swing cover down b gt Controls in detail Loading 7 Hook and loop fastener Flap gt From trunk slide skis into ski sack 9 Catch gt Pull down catch Q gt Unfasten hook and loop fastener 7 gt Pull ski sack into passenger compart ment and unfold gt Open the flap 8 downwards in the di ee cee The ski sack is designed for up to two pairs of skis Do not load the ski sack with other objects Always fasten the ski sack securely In an accident an unfastened ski sack can cause injury to vehicle occupants lt Te Ai d P91 12 2575 31 Strap gt Tighten strap 40 by pulling at the loose end arrow until the skis in the ski sack are tightly secured f P91 12 2576 31 Connect hook 11 to eye G located on center tunnel in front of rear seat bench Tighten strap by pulling at the loose end arrow Controls in detail Loading Unloading and folding gt v v vy Yy Loosen both straps Disconnect hook 1 from eye 2 Unload skis Close flap 8 in trunk Fold and flatten ski sack lengthwise Place folded ski sack inside recess of backrest Fasten hook and loop fastener Wy ue i te na ij ee J iif ae P91 12 2561 31 whe Close ski sack compartment
246. er switch 0 For removing SmartKey The steering is locked when the SmartKey is removed from the starter switch 1 Power supply for some electrical consumers such as seat adjustment 2 Ignition power supply for all electrical consumers and driving position All lamps except low beam headlamp in dicator lamp high beam headlamp indi cator lamp and turn signal indicator lamps unless activated in the instru ment cluster come on If a lamp in the instrument cluster fails to come on when the ignition is switched on have it checked and replaced if necessary If a lamp in the instrument cluster re mains on after starting the engine or comes on while driving refer to Lamps in instrument cluster gt page 374 3 Starting position When you switch on the ignition the indicator and warning lamps except low beam headlamp indicator lamp high beam headlamp indicator lamp and turn signal indicator lamps unless activated in the instrument cluster come on The indicator and warning lamps except low beam headlamp indicator lamp high beam headlamp indicator lamp and turn signal indica tor lamps if activated will go out when the engine is running This indicates that the respective systems are operational The SmartKey can only be removed from the starter switch with the gear selector lever in position P If the SmartKey cannot be turned in the starter switch the battery may not be sufficient
247. ercedes Benz Center e MOE Mercedes Benz Original Extended tires with limited run flat characteristics original equipment tires Using tires other than those approved by Mercedes Benz may result in dam age that is not covered by the Mercedes Benz Limited Warranty For information on driving with MOExtended tires see MOExtended system gt page 345 Technical data Rims and tires Using tires other than those approved by Mercedes Benz can have detrimen tal effects such as e poor handling characteristics e increased noise e increased fuel consumption Moreover tires and rims not approved by Mercedes Benz may under load exhibit dimensional variations and dif ferent tire deformation characteristics that could cause them to come into contact with the vehicle body or axle parts Damage to the tires or the vehi cle may be the result Technical data Rims and tires Further information on tires and rims is available at any authorized Mercedes Benz Center A placard with the recommended tire inflation pres sures is located on the driver s door B pillar Some vehicles may have sup plemental tire inflation pressure infor mation for driving at high speeds page 340 or for vehicle loads less than the maximum loaded vehicle con dition gt page 339 If such information is provided it can be found on the plac ard located on the inside of the fuel fill er flap The tire inf
248. ercedes Benz Center check the automatic transmission Coolant The engine coolant is a mixture of water and anticorrosion antifreeze To check the coolant level the vehicle must be parked on level ground and the engine must be cool The coolant expansion tank is located on the passenger side of the engine compartment Warning A N In order to avoid any possibly serious burns e Use extreme caution when opening the hood if there are any signs of steam or coolant leaking from the cooling system or if the coolant temperature gauge indi cates that the coolant is overheated e Do not remove pressure cap on coolant reservoir if the coolant temperature is above 158 F 70 C Allow the coolant to cool down before removing cap The coolant reservoir contains hot fluid and is under pressure e Using arag slowly open the cap approx imately turn to relieve excess pres sure If opened immediately scalding hot fluid and steam will be blown out un der pressure e Do not spill antifreeze on hot engine parts Antifreeze contains ethylene gly col which may burn if it comes into con tact with hot engine parts a l m a n 1 Coolant expansion tank 2 Cap P a p a F i A i ee 3 a 7 ae 1 a i a2 s ae f Po F i erm oy Are Barn i FZU Operation Engine compartment gt Using a rag turn cap 2 slowly approximately one half turn to the left to release any excess pressure
249. es must be maintained This applies particularly if the tires are subject to extreme operating con ditions e g high speeds heavy loads high ambient temperatures Operation Driving instructions A Do not drive with a flat tire A flat tire affects the ability to steer or brake the vehicle You may lose control of the vehicle Continued driving with a flat tire or driving at high speed with a flat tire will cause excessive heat build up and possibly a fire Warning Hydroplaning Depending on the depth of the water layer on the road hydroplaning may occur even at low speeds and with new tires Reduce vehicle speed avoid track grooves in the road and apply brakes cautiously in the rain Operation Driving instructions Tire traction The safe speed on a wet snow covered or icy road is always lower than on a dry road You should pay particular attention to the condition of the road whenever the outside temperatures are close to the freezing point A If ice has formed on the road tire traction will be substantially reduced Under such weather conditions drive steer and brake with extreme caution Warning Mercedes Benz recommends winter tires gt page 359 with a minimum tread depth of approximately r in 4 mm on all four wheels for the winter season to ensure normal balanced handling characteristics On packed snow they can reduce your stopping distance compared to summer tires
250. es out of reach of children If a battery is swallowed seek medical help immediately Batteries contain materials that can harm the environment if disposed of improperly Recycling of batteries is the preferred method of disposal Many states require sellers of batteries to accept old batteries for recycling When inserting the batteries make sure they are clean and free of lint Practical hints Replacing SmartKey batteries When changing batteries always replace both batteries The required replacement batteries are available at any Mercedes Benz Center Practical hints Replacing SmartKey batteries SmartKey Replacement batteries Lithium type CR 2025 or equivalent gt Remove the mechanical key gt page 419 P80 35 2238 31 1 Mechanical key 2 Slide 3 Battery compartment gt Insert the mechanical key Q in direc tion of arrow in side opening Using mechanical key Q push gray slide 2 to unlatch battery compartment 3 Pull battery compartment 3 out of the housing in the direction of arrow 4 Contact spring Remove the batteries in direction of arrow Using a lint free cloth insert new batteries 4 under the contact spring with the positive terminal side facing up Return battery compartment 3 into housing until it locks into place Slide mechanical key Q back into the SmartKey Check the operation of the SmartKey
251. essages in display 410 Opening closing 255 Opening closing SmartKey 260 261 Opening closing Soft top switch 256 257 Wind screen 263 Soft top switch 254 256 Sound system 209 214 Spare fuses 413 462 Spare parts service see Parts service Spare wheel 416 Bolts 413 418 Mounting 447 sizes 476 Speedometer 25 151 SRS 63 70 491 Indicator lamp 25 63 380 Message in display 409 Standard display Selecting display 152 Standing lamps 127 Replacing bulbs 438 439 441 442 Standing water Driving through 314 Starter switch 23 34 Positions 34 Starting difficulties Engine 50 Starting Engine 48 Status line Selecting display 152 Steering column 41 Steering gear oil Message in display 410 Steering wheel 41 Buttons 26 Cleaning 371 Gearshift buttons 175 176 Gearshift control 175 176 One touch gearshifting 174 Stolen Vehicle Recovery services 296 Storage compartments 278 Armrest Front 281 282 Armrest Rear 283 Cup holder 283 Glove box 278 Parcel net 280 Storage bags 280 Storage box 279 Storing Tires 332 Submenus see Control system submenus 141 Sun visors 184 Supplemental Restraint System see SRS Switching off Parktronic system 272 Switching on Parktronic system 272 Symbols used in this operator s manual 15 T Tachometer 25 138 Overspeed range 138 Tail lamps Cleaning lenses 369 Messages in display 407 Replacing bulbs 439 443 Tar stains 365 Technical data Air conditioning
252. estraints are intend ed to help reduce injuries during an accident Head restraint adjusting Manually adjust the head restraint gt Push or pull the head restraint cushion to the desired position a Adjust the head restraint in such a way that it is as close to the head as possible For more information see Seats gt page 119 Getting started Adjusting Folding front seat backrests forward 1 Release lever Folding backrests forward gt Pull release lever Q forward and fold the seat backrest forward The head restraint will automatically move down Folding backrests back gt Fold and press the backrest rearward until it engages in driving position The head restraint returns to its previ Ous position b gt b gt Getting started Adjusting In addition to the front seat backrests the front seat cushions can also be shifted forward to permit easy access to the rear whenever the seat is located in the rear half of its adjustment range Pivot backrest forward by pulling the release lever until the seat moves in a combined forward and upward movement When moving the seat make sure there are no items in the footwell or be hind the seats Otherwise you could damage the seats Warning A N The seat belts provide protection only with the backrest locked in place Therefore the backrest must be locked in place with the vehicle in motion Do not drive the
253. etting Setting the date month This function can only be seen in vehicles with audio system Vehicles with COMAND For information on setting the date in COMAND refer to the separate COMAND operating instructions Move the selection marker with button or E to the Time Date submenu Press button JA or Ref repeatedly until the message Set date month appears in the multifunction display The selection marker is on the month setting Set date month Z E E 14 2004 P54 32 3091 31 Press button or E to set the month Setting the date day This function can only be seen in vehicles with audio system Vehicles with COMAND For information on setting the date in COMAND refer to the separate COMAND operating instructions gt Move the selection marker with button or MRM to the Time Date submenu gt Press button EA or Keg repeatedly until the message Set date day appears in the multifunction display The selection marker is on the day setting Set date day 05 fJ 2004 72 F 149 8 MI P54 32 3092 31 gt Press button or E to set the day Setting the date year This function can only be seen in vehicles with audio system ap Vehicles with COMAND For information on setting the date in COMAND refer to the separate COMAND operating instructions Controls in detail Control system Move the selection marker with button or E to the Time Date subme
254. evel 1 1 One indicator lamp on lowest level After approximately 20 minutes seat heating is automatically switched off off No indicator lamp on gt Switch on the ignition gt page 34 Switching on seat heating gt Press seat heating switch 1 once Three red indicator lamps in the switch come on Continue pressing seat heating switch Q until desired seat heating level is reached Switching off seat heating gt Press seat heating switch C repeatedly until all red indicator lamps go out If one or more of the indicator lamps on the seat heater switch Q are flashing there is insufficient voltage due to too many electrical consumers being switched on The seat heating switches off automatically The seat heating will switch back on again automatically as soon as sufficient voltage is available Seat ventilation Both switches for the front seats are located in the center console 1 Seat ventilation switch P5 4 25 4753 31 The blue indicator lamps in the switch show which ventilation level you have selected Level 3 Three indicator lamps on 2 Two indicator lamps on 1 One indicator lamp on off No indicator lamp on gt Switch on the ignition gt page 34 All lamps in the instrument cluster come on Switching on seat ventilation gt Press seat ventilation switch Q Three blue indicator lamps come on gt Press seat ventilation switch repeat
255. ext to vehicle capacity weight Seating capacity The seating capacity gives you important information on the number of occupants that can be in the vehicle Observe front and rear seating capacity Your vehicle is equipped with either placard Example A or placard Example B located on the driver s door B pillar gt page 333 Data shown on placard examples are for illustration purposes only Seating data is specific to each vehicle and may vary from data shown in the illustra tions below Refer to placard on vehicle for actual data specific to your vehicle Operation Tires and wheels ECA seos MANUAL FOR REAR P195 70RIA 200KPA 29PSI ADDITIONAL ewe reso oo P40 00 2063 31 Placard Example A 1 Seating capacity VEHICLE TIRE INFORMATION VEHI LE CAPACITY WEIGHT KG IBLBS SEATING CAPACITY eo i COLD TIRE PRESSURE Placard Example B 1 Seating capacity Operation Tires and wheels Steps for determining correct load limit The following steps have been developed as required of all manufacturers under Title 49 Code of U S Federal Regulations Part 575 pursuant to the National Traffic and Motor Vehicle Safety Act of 1966 Step 1 Vehicles equipped with placard Example A gt Locate the statement The combined weight of occupants and cargo should never exceed XXX kg or XXX Ibs on your vehicle s placard Step 1 Vehicles equipped with placard Ex
256. f automatically when the door is closed If you turn the SmartKey in the starter switch to position O and switch off the exterior headlamps the door entry lamps will remain lit for approximately five minutes Trunk lamp The trunk lamp switches on if the trunk is opened If you leave the trunk open for an extended period of time the trunk lamp will switch off automatically after approximately ten minutes Controls in detail Instrument cluster For a full view illustration of the instrument cluster see Instrument cluster gt page 24 1 Reset button The instrument cluster is activated when you e open a door e switch on the ignition gt page 36 e press reset button Q e switch on the exterior lamps You can change the instrument cluster settings in the Instrument cluster submenu of the control system gt page 151 Instrument cluster illumination Use the reset button to adjust the illumination brightness for the instrument cluster The instrument cluster illumination is dimmed or brightened automatically to suit ambient light conditions The instrument cluster illumination will also be adjusted automatically when you switch on the vehicle s exterior lamps To brighten illumination gt Turn reset button Q clockwise The instrument cluster illumination will brighten To dim illumination gt Turn reset button 1 counterclock wise The in
257. filler flap make sure the tire inflation pressure of all four tires is cor rect Warning A N The Run Flat Indicator can only warn you in a reliable manner if you have set the correct tire inflation pressures for each tire If an incorrect tire inflation pressure was set the system will monitor the pressure ac cording to the incorrect value Operation Tires and wheels Switch on the ignition gt page 34 Make sure the standard display menu appears in the multifunction display gt page 144 Press button BVA or FA repeatedly until the following message appears in the multifunction display Run Flat Indicator active Reactivation POSS 72 F 143 8 M Press button ES The following message will appear in the multifunction display Tire pres now OK No Yes P54 92 3555 31 Operation Tires and wheels If you wish to confirm activation gt Press button ES The following message will appear in the multifunction display Run Flat Indicator reactivated After a certain learning phase the Run Flat Indicator checks the set pressure val ues for all four tires If you wish to cancel activation gt Press button Sg or gt Wait until the message Tire pres now OK No Yes disappears Potential problems associated with underinflated and overinflated tires Underinflated tire inflation pressure Underinflated tires can e cause excessive and uneven tir
258. fluids which may have leaked into the engine com partment to catch fire You could be se riously burned e Steam from an overheated engine can cause serious burns and can occur just by opening the hood Stay away from the engine if you see or hear steam com ing from it Turn off the engine get out of the vehicle and do not stand near the vehicle until the engine has cooled down Operation At the gas station Refueling gt Open the fuel filler flap by pushing at the point indicated by the arrow Q Warning A N Gasoline is highly flammable and poisonous It burns violently and can cause serious inju ry Whenever you are around gasoline avoid inhaling fumes and skin contact extinguish all smoking materials Never allow sparks The fuel filler flap springs open gt Turn fuel cap counterclockwise and hold on to it until possible pressure is released gt Take off cap and set it in direction of arrow 2 in the recess on the fuel filler flap flame or smoking materials near gasoline 1 To open the fuel filler flap f To prevent fuel vapors from escapin Failure to remove the fuel cap slowly could 2 To insert the fuel filler cap ne cee air e filler ie result in personal injury gt Turn the engine off unit i e by turning the SmartKey to position 0 Remove the SmartKey from the starter switch Only fill your tank until the filler nozzle unit cuts out do not top up or overfill The fu
259. for plastic lenses Improper washer fluid can damage the plastic lenses of the headlamps For more information see Windshield washer system and headlamp cleaning system gt page 486 Operation Tires and wheels See an authorized Mercedes Benz Center for information on tested and recommended rims and tires for summer and winter operation They can also offer advice concerning tire service and purchase A Replace rims or tires with the same designa tion manufacturer and type as shown on the original part See an authorized Mercedes Benz Center for further informa tion If incorrectly sized rims and tires are mounted Warning e The wheel brakes or suspension components can be damaged e The operating clearance of the wheels and the tires may no longer be correct A Worn old tires can cause accidents If the tire tread is badly worn or if the tires have sustained damage replace them Warning When replacing rims only use Genuine Mercedes Benz wheel bolts specified for the particular rim type Failure to do so can result in the bolts loosening and possibly an accident Retreaded tires are not tested or recom mended by Mercedes Benz since previous damage cannot always be recognized on retreads The operating safety of the vehicle cannot be assured when such tires are used Important guidelines e Only use sets of tires and rims of the same type and make e Tires must be of t
260. free device and only use the tele phone when weather road and traffic conditions permit Some jurisdictions prohibit the driver from using a cellular telephone while driving a vehicle Bear in mind that at a speed of just 30 mph approximately 50 km h your vehicle is covering a distance of 44 feet approximately 14 m every second Controls in detail Control system Never operate radio transmitters equipped with a built in or attached antenna i e with out being connected to an external antenna from inside the vehicle while the engine is running Doing so could lead to a malfunc tion of the vehicle s electronic system possibly resulting in an accident and or personal injury You can use the functions in the Tel menu to operate your telephone provided it is connected to a hands free system and switched on gt Switch on the telephone and Audio or COMAND gt Press button or on the steering wheel repeatedly until the message lel appears in the multifunction display Controls in detail Control system Which messages will appear in the multifunction display depends on whether your telephone is switched on or off e lf the telephone is off the message Tel off appears in the multifunction display e f the telephone is on The telephone will then search for a network During this time the multi function display is empty As soon as the telephone has found a network the message READY
261. g With the engine not running there is no power assistance for the brake and steering systems In this case it is important to keep in mind that a considerably higher degree of effort is necessary to brake and steer the ve hicle Operation Driving instructions Brakes Warning A N After driving in heavy rain for some time without applying the brakes or through wa ter deep enough to wet brake components the first braking action may be somewhat reduced and increased pedal pressure may be necessary to obtain expected braking ef fect Maintain a safe distance from vehicles in front Resting your foot on the brake pedal will cause excessive and premature wear of the brake pads It can also result in the brakes overheating thereby significantly reducing their effec tiveness It may not be possible to stop the vehicle in sufficient time to avoid an acci dent To help prevent brake disk corrosion after driving on wet road surfaces particularly salted roads it is advisable to brake the vehicle with considerable force prior to parking The heat generated serves to dry the brakes If your brake system is normally only sub ject to moderate loads you should occa sionally test the effectiveness of the brakes by applying above normal braking pressure at higher speeds This will also enhance the grip of the brake pads A Make sure not to endanger any other road users when carrying out these braking
262. g when you valet park the vehicle lock it separately with the mechanical key Leave only the SmartKey or SmartKey with KEYLESS GO less its mechanical key with the vehicle The lock is located next to the handle above the rear license plate recess P80 20 2796 31 1 Neutral position 2 Locked Close the trunk gt page 110 Pull the mechanical key out of the SmartKey gt page 419 Insert the mechanical key in the trunk lid lock Turn the mechanical key clockwise to position 2 and remove the mechani cal key in that position to lock the trunk The trunk remains locked even when the vehicle is centrally unlocked You can only cancel the separate trunk locking mode by means of the mechanical key Insert the mechanical key in the trunk lid lock Turn the mechanical key counterclock wise to neutral position and remove the mechanical key in that position to unlock the trunk You can now open the trunk gt page 108 Controls in detail Locking and unlocking Automatic central locking The doors and the trunk automatically lock when the ignition is switched on and the wheels are turning at vehicle speeds of approximately 9 mph 15 km h or more You can open a locked door from the inside Open door only when conditions are safe to do so The doors unlock automatically after an accident if the force of the impact exceeds a preset threshold To prevent the vehicle door
263. g placed to wards the front of the vehicle do not place anything on the shelf behind the roll bar e donot place anything on the soft top compartment cover Always place items being carried against rear seat backrests and fasten them as se curely as possible The heaviest portion of the cargo should al ways be kept as low as possible since it in fluences the handling characteristics of the vehicle luggage cargo when lowering the roof Controls in detail Loading Warning Always fasten items being carried as secure ly as possible In an accident during hard braking or sud den maneuvers loose items will be thrown around inside the vehicle and can cause in jury to vehicle occupants unless the items are securely fastened in the vehicle To help avoid personal injury during a colli sion or sudden maneuver exercise care when transporting cargo Put luggage or car go in the trunk if possible Never drive vehicle with trunk open Deadly carbon monoxide CO gases may enter ve hicle interior resulting in unconsciousness and death Controls in detail Useful features Storage compartments Warning uN To help avoid personal injury during a colli sion or sudden maneuver exercise care when storing objects in the vehicle Put lug gage or cargo in the trunk if possible Do not pile luggage or cargo higher than the seat backs Parcel nets cannot secure hard or heavy ob jects Keep
264. g the soft top with the SmartKey gt page 260 and the power windows using the SmartKey see Summer opening fea ture gt page 252 and see Conve nience closing feature gt page 253 Controls in detail Locking and unlocking Factory setting Global locking Unlocking driver s door and fuel filler flap gt Press button eg Global unlocking With the trunk and both doors closed gt Press button ee gt Press button Rg all turn signal lamps flash three times All turn signal lamps flash once The All turn signal lamps flash once The The locking knobs in the doors move locking knob in the driver s door moves locking knobs in the doors move up down The anti theft alarm system is up The anti theft alarm system is The anti theft alarm system is armed disarmed disarmed The vehicle will lock again automatically Sele CUS SE EINE SlOR GL UMOEIINE and rearm the anti theft alarm system If you frequently travel alone you may wish gt Press button twice within approximately 40 seconds of to reprogram the SmartKey so that All turn signal lamps flash once The unlocking if pressing only unlocks the driver s locking knobs in the doors move up The anti theft alarm system is gt Press and hold buttons and disarmed simultaneously for about 5 seconds un til battery check lamp flashes twice Global locking e neither a door nor the trunk is opened Coor AMA TAE EPET e the SmartKey is not inserted in
265. gasoline 482 Problems While driving 56 With vehicle 17 Product information 9 Production options weight 356 Program mode Automatic shift program 172 Manual shift program 178 Program mode selector switch PSI 356 R Radio Operation 217 Selecting stations 145 Selecting stations satellite 145 Radio transmitters 315 Range distance to empty 163 Reading lamp 29 135 Rear fog lamp see Fog lamps Rear lamps see Tail lamps Rear seat ashtray see Ashtrays Rear seat head restraints see Head restraints Rear side windows Blocking operation 85 Rear side impact air bags 68 Rear view mirrors see Mirrors 172 178 490 Rear window defroster 185 Recommended engine oils and oil filter 481 Recommended tire inflation pressure 356 Recovery services Stolen vehicle Tele Aid 296 Refrigerant Air conditioning 481 Refueling 318 Regular checks 320 Reminder Seat belt see Seat belts Telltale Remote control SmartKey 96 100 SmartKey with KEYLESS GO 100 Remote door unlock Tele Aid 295 Removing Ski sack Canada only 276 Replacing bulbs 438 Additional turn signals 438 439 Backup lamps 439 443 Brake lamps 439 443 Corner illuminating front fog lamps 438 439 Foglamps 438 439 443 Headlamp bulbs 440 Headlamps 438 High beam flasher Bi Xenon 438 442 High beam flasher Halogen 438 440 High beam headlamps Bi Xenon 438 441 High beam headlamps Halogen 438 440 High mounted brake lamp 439 Licen
266. ghts Vehicle 478 Wheel Bolts 418 Change 447 Collapsible wheel chock 416 Removing 449 Spare 416 Tightening torque 451 Wrench 448 Wheels Sizes 473 Wheels Tires and 330 Wind screen 263 492 Windows see Power windows Windshield Cleaning 55 370 Defogging 192 202 Windshield washer fluid 329 486 Message in display 412 Mixing ratio 486 Refilling 329 Reservoir level 480 Wiping 55 Windshield washer system 480 486 Windshield wipers 53 Cleaning wiper blades 370 Replacing wiper blades 444 Winter driving 359 Block heater Canada only 360 Snow chains 360 Tires 359 Winter driving instructions 313 Winter tires 359 Wood trims cleaning 372 X Xenon headlamps see Headlamps Service and Literature Your authorized Mercedes Benz Center has trained technicians and original Mercedes Benz parts to service your vehicle properly For expert advice and quality service contact an authorized Mercedes Benz Center If you are interested in obtaining service literature for your vehicle please contact an authorized Mercedes Benz Center We consider this the best way for you to obtain accurate information for your vehicle For further information you can find us on the Mercedes Benz web site www mbusa com or www mercedes benz ca Warning A To help avoid personal injury be extremely careful when performing any service work or repairs Improper or incomplete service or the use of incorrect or inappropriate parts or materials
267. gine is equipped with a transistorized ignition system Because of the high voltage it is dangerous to touch any components ignition coils spark plug sockets diagnos tic socket of the ignition system Warning e with the engine running e while starting the engine e if ignition is on and the engine is turned manually Closing A Be careful that you do not close the hood on anyone Warning gt Let the hood drop from a height of approximately 1 ft 30 cm The hood will lock audibly gt Check to make sure the hood is fully closed If you can raise the hood at a point above the headlamps then it is not properly closed Open it again and let it drop with somewhat greater force Engine oil The amount of oil your engine needs will depend on a number of factors including driving style Higher oil consumption can occur when e the vehicle is new e the vehicle is driven frequently at higher engine speeds Engine oil consumption checks should only be made after the vehicle break in period Do not use any special lubricant addi tives as these may damage the drive assemblies Using special additives not approved by Mercedes Benz may cause damage not covered by the Mercedes Benz Limited Warranty More information on this subject is available at any Mercedes Benz Center Checking engine oil level with the control system When checking the oil level e the vehicle must be parked on leve
268. gine or the rear differential has been replaced Always obey applicable speed limits Y Driving instructions Drive sensibly save fuel Fuel consumption to a great extent de pends on driving habits and operating con ditions To save fuel you should e Keep tires at the recommended tire inflation pressures e Remove unnecessary loads e Allow engine to warm up under low load use e Avoid frequent acceleration and decel eration e Have all maintenance work performed at the intervals specified in the Maintenance Booklet and as required by the Maintenance System U S vehi cles or FSS Canada vehicles Contact an authorized Mercedes Benz Center Fuel consumption is also increased by driving in cold weather in stop and go traffic on short trips and in hilly area Drinking and driving Warning A N Drinking and driving and or taking drugs and driving are very dangerous combina tions Even a small amount of alcohol or drugs can affect your reflexes perceptions and judgment The possibility of a serious or even fatal ac cident are greatly increased when you drink or take drugs and drive Do not drink or take drugs and drive or allow anyone to drive who has been drinking or taking drugs Operation Driving instructions Pedals Warning VAN Keep driver s foot area clear at all times Ob jects stored in this area may impair pedal movement Power assistance Warnin
269. grades cruise control may not be able to maintain the set speed Once the grade eases the set speed will be resumed On downhill grades the cruise control will hold the set speed with braking from the vehicle s brake system In addition on longer downhill grades the automatic transmission will auto matically downshift Canceling cruise control There are several ways to cancel cruise control gt or gt Step on the brake pedal Cruise control is canceled The last speed set is stored for later use Briefly push the cruise control lever to position G Cruise control is canceled The last speed set is stored for later use The last stored speed is canceled when you turn off the engine Cruise control automatically switched off if e you step on the brake pedal e you press the parking brake pedal In this case the segments in the multifunction display gt page 266 go out and no warning sounds e the vehicle speed is below 20 mph 30 km h e ESP is in operation or switched off with the ESP switch gt page 90 e you move the gear selector lever to position N while driving The segments in the multifunction dis play gt page 266 go out and an acoustic warning sounds Controls in detail Driving systems Moving gear selector lever to position N while driving also cancels cruise control However the gear se lector lever should not be moved to position N wh
270. gt Continue driving with added caution gt Visit an authorized Mercedes Benz Center as soon as possible Failure to follow these instructions increases the risk of an accident gt Continue driving with added caution gt Visit an authorized Mercedes Benz Center as soon as possible Failure to follow these instructions increases the risk of an accident Practical hints What to do if Display message Possible cause consequence Possible solution Front passenger Front passenger front air bag is Stop the vehicle in a safe location as soon as possible and check the front air bag activated while driving eventhough passenger seat for the following activated a child small individual or object see Oper s Man below the system s weight threshold is on the front passenger gt Remove child and child restraint from front passenger seat and proper Switch off the ignition gt page 34 seat or the front passenger seat is ly secure the child in rear seat employing the child restraint if neces empty Objects on the seat or sary forces acting on the seat may gt Make sure that no objects applying supplemental weight onto the seat make the system Sense supple are present The system may recognize such supplemental weight and mental weight sense that an occupant on the front passenger seat is of a greater weight than actually present gt Keep the seat unoccupied close the front passenger door and switch on the
271. gt page 72 Air bag system components with Front passenger front air bag off indicator lamp gt page 81 e Front passenger seat with Occupant Classification System OCS gt page 78 As independent systems their protective functions work in conjunction with each other For information on infants and children traveling with you in the vehicle and restraint systems for infants and chil dren see Children in the vehicle gt page 75 The SRS system conducts a self test when the ignition is switched on and in regular intervals while the engine Is running This facilitates early detection of malfunctions The 9 indicator lamp in the instrument cluster comes on when the ignition is switched on and goes out no later than a few seconds after the engine has been started The SRS components are in operational readiness if the 8 indicator lamp is not lit when the engine is running A malfunction in the system has been detected if the ES indicator lamp e fails to go out after approximately four seconds after the engine was started e does not come on at all e comes on after the engine was started or while driving Safety and Security Occupant safety Air bags Warning A N In the event that the EGE indicator lamp comes on during driving or does not come on at all the SRS self check has detected a malfunction For your safety we strongly recommend that you visit an authorized Mercedes B
272. h lug wrench into opening gt Slide cover Q as far as it will go in the direction of the arrow gt Gently press left hand side of cover in direction of the arrow 4 The hooks on the left hand side engage a When closing the cover Q make sure the cover s check strap does not get caught PBE 20 2448 1 Cover on right side of rear bumper 2 Recess in the cover Practical hints Fuses Fuses are designed to protect the electri T Aids for replacing fuses cal circuits in your vehicle from a short cir cuit If a fuse is blown the component s and systems secured by that fuse will stop operating Never attempt to repair or bridge a blown fuse Have the cause determined Fuse chart and remedied by an authorized dercedes Bene Canter The fuse chart is located in the main fuse box in the passenger compartment gt page 463 The amperages of the fuses are also given there The following aids are available to help you replace fuses gt page 462 T e Fuse chart Keep the fuse boxes free by contamina tion and wetness Otherwise electrical Spare fuses e Spare fuses parts or systems could be damaged Spare fuses are located in the vehicle tool kit in the spare wheel well gt page 413 e Fuse extractor The electrical fuses are located in different Warning A N fuse boxes Fuse extractor e Main fuse box in passenger compartment gt page 463 The fuse extracto
273. hat to do if Possible cause consequence Possible solution The front left side marker lamp is malfunc gt Visit an authorized Mercedes Benz tioning Center as soon as possible The front right side marker lamp is mal gt Visit an authorized Mercedes Benz functioning Center as soon as possible The left tail lamp is malfunctioning A gt Visit an authorized Mercedes Benz back up bulb is being used Center as soon as possible The right tail lamp is malfunctioning A gt Visit an authorized Mercedes Benz back up bulb is being used Center as soon as possible Lamps have been turned on although the Turn off the headlamps SmartKey in the starter switch is in posi tion 0 The left front turn signal lamp is malfunc gt Replace the bulb as soon as possible tioning The right front turn signal lamp is malfunc gt Replace the bulb as soon as possible tioning The left turn signal in the side mirroris Have the LEDs replaced as soon as malfunctioning This message will only ap possible pear if all light emitting diodes have stopped working Practical hints What to do if Display symbol 10 r 1 Display message Ie sielae E O Turn signal rear left back up lamp on Turn signal rear right back up lamp on Please engage roll over bar Please release roll over bar Possible cause consequence Possible solution The right turn signal in the side mirroris malfunctioning Th
274. hazard warning flasher switches on automatically when an air bag deploys The hazard warning flasher switch is located on the upper part of the center console 1 Hazard warning flasher switch P54 29 4754 31 Controls in detail Lighting Switching on hazard warning flasher gt Press hazard warning flasher switch Q All turn signals are flashing With the hazard warning flasher activated and the combination switch set for either left or right turn only the respective turn signals will operate when the ignition is switched on Switching off hazard warning flasher gt Press hazard warning flasher switch Q again 5 If the hazard warning flasher has been activated automatically press hazard warning flasher switch Q once to switch it off Controls in detail Lighting Interior lighting The controls are located in the overhead control panel 1 Left front reading lamp 2 Rocker switch for automatic control system 3 Right front reading lamp pog 00 3435 31 Activating automatic control gt Press the rocker switch 2 to the cen ter position Interior lamps are switched on in dark ness when you e unlock the vehicle e open a door e remove the SmartKey from the starter switch The interior lamps are switched off after a preset time see Setting interior lighting delayed shut off gt page 159 If the door remains open the inter
275. he Locking the vehicle A minimum height clearance of 5 41 ft EEUU C CME GhODe 1 65 m is required to open the trunk lid gt Turn the mechanical key counterclockwise to position and hold it in this position gt Pull the trunk lid handle and lift the trunk lid If you cannot lock the vehicle with the SmartKey or SmartKey with The trunk lid lock is located next to the KEYLESS GO do the following handle above the rear license plate recess gt Close the passenger door and the trunk gt Press the central locking switch in the The trunk opens center console gt page 118 By gt Check to see whether the locking knob The trunk lid swings open upwards on the passenger door has moved automatically Always make sure there down is sufficient overhead clearance If necessary push it down manually PB0 20 2797 31 Remove the mechanical key out of the gt Turn the mechanical key back and SmartKey gt page 419 Unlocking in an emergency remove it from the trunk lid lock 2 Handle Check whether the trunk is locked If necessary lock the trunk with the mechanical key gt page 116 Except for the driver s door the vehicle should now be locked 1 Locking gt Insert the mechanical key into the driver s door lock until it stops gt Turn the mechanical key clockwise to position Q The driver s door is locked Practical hints Unlocking locking in an emergency
276. he correct size for the rim e Break in new tires for approximately 60 miles 100 km at moderate speeds e Regularly check the tires and rims for damage Dented or bent rims can cause tire inflation pressure loss and damage to the tire beads e If vehicle is heavily loaded check tire inflation pressure and correct as required e Do not allow your tires to wear down too far Adhesion properties on wet roads are sharply reduced at tread depths under J in 3 mm e When replacing individual tires you should mount new tires on the front wheels first on vehicles with same sized wheels all around Tire care and maintenance Warning A N Regularly check the tires for damage Dam aged tires can cause tire inflation pressure loss As a result you could lose control of your vehicle Worn old tires can cause accidents If the tire tread is badly worn or if the tires have sustained damage replace them Regularly check your tire inflation pressure at least once a month For more informa tion on checking tire inflation pressure see Recommended tire inflation pressure gt page 339 Tire inspection Every time you check your tire inflation pressure you should also inspect your tires for the following e excessive treadwear gt page 332 e cord or fabric showing through the tire s rubber e bumps bulges cuts cracks or splits in the tread or side of the tire Replace the tire if you find any of
277. he front passenger seat is sensed as being empty When the OCS senses that the front passen ger seat occupant is classified as being up to or less than the weight of a typical 12 month old child in a standard child restraint the EA Rt indicator lamp will illuminate when the engine is started and remain illuminated indicating that the front passenger front air bag is deactivated When the OCS senses that the front passen ger seat is classified as being empty the EAR indicator lamp will illuminate when the engine is started and remain illuminated indicating that the front passenger front air bag is deactivated When the OCS senses that the front passen ger seat occupant is classified as being heavier than the weight of a typical 12 month old child seated in a standard child restraint or as being a small individual such as a young teenager or a small adult the EA E indicator lamp will illuminate for approximately six seconds when the engine is started and then depending on occupant weight sensor readings from the seat remain illuminated or go out With the EAE indicator lamp illuminated the front passenger front air bag is deactivated With the EA ES amp S indicator lamp out the front passenger front air bag is activated When the OCS senses that the front passen ger seat occupant is classified as an adult or someone larger than a small individual the EAR indicator lamp will illuminate for approximately six seconds whe
278. he mounting face of wheels and brake disks i e the inner side of the wheels tires during each rotation Check for and ensure proper tire inflation pressure A Have the tightening torque checked after changing a wheel Wheels could become loose if not tightened with a torque of 80 Ib ft 110 Nm Warning Only use Genuine Mercedes Benz wheel bolts specified for your vehicle s rims For information on wheel change see the Practical hints section gt page 413 and gt page 446 Y Winter driving Before the onset of winter have your vehicle winterized at an authorized Mercedes Benz Center This service includes e Check of anticorrosion and antifreeze concentration e Addition of cleaning concentrate to the water of the windshield and headlamp cleaning system Add MB Concentrate S to a premixed windshield washer solvent antifreeze which is formulated for temperatures below freezing point gt page 486 e Battery test Battery capacity drops with decreasing ambient temperature A well charged battery helps to make sure that the engine can be started even at low ambient temperatures e Tire change Winter tires Always use winter tires at temperatures below 45 F 7 C and whenever wintry road conditions prevail Not all M S rated tires provide special winter performance Make sure the tires you use show the mountain snowflake marking on the tire sidewall These tires meet specific
279. he parking lamps and or the low beam headlamps on Fog lamps should only be used in conjunction with low beam headlamps Consult your State or Province Motor Vehicle Regulations regarding permis sible lamp operation Fog lamps cannot be switched on with the exterior lamp switch in position W For switching on the fog lamps turn the exterior lamp switch to position first Front fog lamps gt Switch on the low beam headlamps gt page 52 Pull out the exterior lamp switch to first stop The front fog lamps switch on The green indicator lamp in the exterior lamp switch comes on gt page 127 Push in the exterior lamp switch The front fog lamps switch off The green indicator lamp in the exterior lamp switch goes out Rear fog lamp driver s side only gt gt Switch on the front fog lamps gt page 130 Pull out the exterior lamp switch to second stop The rear fog lamp is switched on The yellow indicator lamp in the exterior lamp switch comes on gt page 127 Push in the exterior lamp switch to first stop The rear fog lamp switches off The yellow indicator lamp in the exterior lamp switch goes out The front fog lamps remain lit Combination switch The combination switch is located on the left of the steering column P54 25 4703 31 Combination switch 1 High beam 2 High beam flasher Controls in detail Lighting High beam
280. he vehicle is par tially loaded and 18 miles 30 km if the vehicle is fully loaded The point at which the maximum driv ing distance begins in emergency mode is when the warning message appears in the multifunction display indicating that there is a loss of tire inflation pressure Do not exceed the maximum speed of 50 mph 80 km h Warning In emergency mode your vehicle s driving characteristics are diminished in such situa tions as e driving around curves e while braking e while accelerating rapidly Therefore your driving style must be adapt ed accordingly Avoid abrupt steering and driving maneuvers as well as driving over obstacles road curbs potholes or off road areas This is especially important if the ve hicle is heavily loaded The emergency driving distance that can be achieved greatly depends on the demands placed on the vehicle Depending on speed load driving maneuvers road conditions outside temperature etc the distance can be significantly shorter or if the vehicle is driven cautiously somewhat longer Do not continue driving in emergency mode if you notice knocking sounds the vehicle starts to shake smoke develops and you smell rubber ESP is intervening continuously you notice tears on the tire sidewalls After driving in emergency mode you must have the rims inspected by an authorized Mercedes Benz Center to check if they are suitable for furt
281. her use The failed tire must be replaced in any case When replacing individual or all tires on the vehicle make sure only matching tires marked with MOExtendea are mounted in the size specified for your vehicle gt page 471 Y Battery The battery is located in the engine compartment on the right hand side F ae gt E 1 Clamps Removing filter box gt Release clamps 1 gt Remove filter box Installing filter box gt Insert filter box properly gt Secure it with clamps Q Warning A N Failure to follow these instructions can re sult in severe injury or death Observe all safety instructions and precautions when handling automotive batteries page 328 Never lean over batteries while connecting you might get injured Battery fluid contains sulfuric acid Do not allow this fluid to come in contact with eyes skin or clothing In case it does immediately flush affected area with water and seek medical help if necessary A battery will also produce hydrogen gas which is flammable and explosive Keep flames or sparks away from battery avoid improper connection of jumper cables smoking etc Practical hints Battery Never loosen or detach battery termi nal clamps while the engine is running or the SmartKey is in the starter switch Otherwise the alternator and other electronic components could be se verely damaged Have the battery checked regularly
282. hnician at the Driving with the message Brake fluid 2 re E g cater anie armen ice minimum mark or below have the intervals specified in the Maintenance Pee brake system checked for brake pad Booklet an accident Have your brake system checked immediately Do not add brake flu id before checking the brake system Over filling the brake fluid reservoir can result in spilling brake fluid on hot engine parts and the brake fluid catching fire You can be se riously burned thickness and leaks Practical hints What to do if Display symbol Display message Possible cause consequence Possible solution Visit workshop There may be a malfunction in the gt Have the measuring system checked by an authorized Mercedes Benz Cen e fuel injection system ter e ignition system e exhaust system e fuel system Coolant The coolant level is too low gt Add coolant gt page 327 Check level If you have to add coolant frequently have the cooling system checked by an authorized Mercedes Benz Center Eg Mania A Do not ignore the low engine coolant E T een level warning Extended driving with the message and symbol displayed may cause serious engine damage not covered by the Mercedes Benz Limited Warranty Do not spill antifreeze on hot engine parts Antifreeze contains ethylene glycol which may burn if it comes into contact with hot engine parts You can be seriously burned Do not drive without sufficient
283. hood Stay away from the engine if you engine has cooled down see or hear steam coming from it Warning Driving when your engine is badly overheat ed can cause some fluids which may have leaked into the engine compartment to catch fire You could be seriously burned Practical hints What to do if Problem The yellow ESP warning lamp comes on while driving The yellow ESP warning lamp flashes while driving Possible cause consequence The ESP is deactivated Risk of accident Adapt your speed and driving to the prevail ing road conditions The ESP or traction control has come into operation because of detected traction loss in at least one tire Suggested solution gt Switch the ESP back on gt page 91 If the ESP cannot be switched back on have the system checked at an autho rized Mercedes Benz Center as soon as possible gt When driving off apply as little throt tle as possible gt While driving ease up on the acceler ator gt Adapt your speed and driving to the prevailing road and weather condi tions gt Do not deactivate the ESP Exceptions gt page 90 Failure to follow these instructions in creases the risk of accidents Practical hints What to do if Problem Possible cause consequence Suggested solution Ws The yellow fuel tank reserve The fuel level has gone below the reserve gt Refuel at the next gas station warning lamp
284. hree minute delay When the engine is running and you e turn the exterior lamp switch to position gj the parking lamps switch on additionally e turn the exterior lamp switch to position J the manual headlamp mode has priority over the daytime running lamp mode The corresponding exterior lamps switch on gt page 127 Controls in detail Lighting USA only By default the daytime running lamp mode is deactivated Activate the daytime run ning lamp mode using the control system see Setting daytime running lamp mode USA only gt page 156 When the engine is running and you turn the exterior lamp switch to position or the manual headlamp mode has priority over the daytime running lamp mode The corresponding exterior lamps switch on gt page 127 Locator lighting and night security illumination The locator lighting and the night security illumination are described in the Control system section see Setting locator light ing gt page 157 and Setting night secu rity illumination gt page 158 Controls in detail Lighting Fog lamps Warning A N In low ambient lighting or foggy conditions only switch from position to with the vehicle at a standstill in a safe location Switching from to will briefly switch off the headlamps Doing so while driving in low ambient lighting conditions may result in an accident Fog lamps will operate with t
285. i tion together with the settings for the steering wheel and the exterior rear view mirrors Seat fore and aft adjustment gt Press switch forward or backward in direction of arrow 4 Adjust seat to a comfortable seating position that still allows you to reach the accelerator brake pedal safely The position should be as far to the rear as possible consistent with ability to properly operate controls When moving the seat make sure there are no items in the footwell or be hind the seats Otherwise you could damage the seats Seat height gt Press switch up or down in direction of arrow 2 Seat cushion tilt gt Press switch up or down in direction of arrow 3 until your upper legs are lightly supported Seat backrest tilt gt Press switch forward or backward in direction of arrow G until your arms are slightly angled when holding the steering wheel Head restraint height gt Press switch up or down in direction of arrow 1 Adjust the head restraint in such a way that it is as close to the head as possible Warning A N For your protection drive only with properly positioned head restraints Adjust head restraint so that the center of the head restraint supports the back of the head at eye level This will reduce the poten tial for injury to the head and neck in the event of an accident or similar situation Do not drive the vehicle without the seat head restraints Head r
286. i cccresvescoseetunsansaniadiasersecneenmance 37 SS E E REET T AS 37 Steering wheel esssessssersseeesssess 41 Easy entry exit feature 42 IVIL OIG E E E ETE 43 DAVIN S cacera 45 Fastening the seat belts 45 Starting the engine essssessseesssees 48 Parking brake essssnssssessseessseersse 50 FAY UNG sae sabes totbustntansedansaciaces 51 Switching on headlamps 52 VU SI SANS ereen 53 Windshield WIDEYPS cccsseccceeees 53 Problems while driving 60 56 Parking and lOCKING cccsecccesseeeeeeee 57 Parking Drake ccccccsseseeeeeeeeees 57 Switching off headlamps 58 Turning off the engine 08 58 Releasing seat belts cee 59 LOCKING ciesienahi gos renn 59 Safety and Security 0068 61 Occupant Safety cececccccesseeceeeeeees 62 PAU IAS E 63 Seat belts ee ccesssecceeseeteneeeeees 69 Active head restraints 06 73 Roll ars ane sanemengnecsaanecunanuteesoetorrnets 74 Children in the vehicle 664 75 Blocking of rear side window OPE ratlON ceecceeeeeeeees 85 Panic alarm sasasteowin schon bacheuswonaseasasonen ies 86 PICTIVALINIG eiam 86 Deactivating eeeccccseseececeesceeeeeees 86 Driving safety SySteEMS ccccseeeceees 87 AD ee 87 DA isasttlenicaeeteomeataceascetevascesuaumnccnatae 88 ESP siicsictseeeaesneseeenen
287. ially children are not prop erly seated or restrained when next to a head thorax air bag or a rear side impact air bag which needs to deploy rapidly in a side impact in order to do its job To help avoid the possibility of injury please follow these guidelines 1 Occupants especially children should never place their bodies or lean their heads in the area of the door or the rear side trim panel where the head thorax air bag and or the rear side impact air bag inflates This could result in serious injuries or death should the head thorax air bag and or the rear side impact air bag be deployed amp Always sit nearly upright properly use the seat belts and for children 12 years old and under use an appropriately sized infant or toddler restraint or booster seat recommended for the size and weight of the child 3 Always wear seat belts properly If you believe that even with the use of these guidelines it would be safer for your rear seat occupants to have the rear mount ed side impact air bags deactivated then deactivation can be accomplished upon your written request to do so at an authorized Mercedes Benz Center at an additional cost Please contact your local authorized Mercedes Benz Center or call our Customer Assistance Center at 1 800 FOR MERCedes 1 800 367 6372 for details Safety and Security Occupant safety Air bags are designed to deploy only in certain frontal impacts front
288. icle could be damaged Controls in detail Soft top Opening the soft top 1 Soft top opening Before pulling on the soft top switch you must make sure e the parking brake is engaged gt page 50 e the luggage cover is latched see Latch luggage cover gt page 262 e the trunk lid is closed e the ignition is switched on gt page 36 The soft top cannot be opened using the soft top switch when the roll bars have been released The roll bars need to be lowered before the soft top can be operated again using the soft top switch If the roll bars have released and the soft top is closed contact an authorized Mercedes Benz Center to have the roll bars lowered Do not at tempt to lower the roll bars manually with the soft top closed Lowering the roll bars manually with the soft top closed may impair the function of the roll bars gt page 423 If the roll bars have released and the soft top is open you can lower the roll bars manually gt page 424 or contact an authorized Mercedes Benz Center to have the roll bars lowered gt Pull up on the soft top switch as indi cated by the arrow Q until the soft top is completely lowered into its trunk storage compartment During the opening procedure the mul tifunction display shows the message Top in operation If the opening procedure is finished the multifunction display will briefly show the message Top open If you c
289. icle safety DaimlerChrysler may access the information and share it with others for safety research or vehicle diagnosis purposes with the consent of the vehicle owner or lessee in response to an official request by law enforcement or other government agency for use in dispute resolution involving DaimlerChrysler its affiliates or sales service organization and or as otherwise required or permitted by law Please check the Tele Aid subscription service agreement for details regarding the information that may be recorded or transmitted via that system At a glance Cockpit Instrument cluster Multifunction steering wheel Center console Overhead control panel Door control panel a glance Cockpit P68 00 4130 3 Cf O Item Steering wheel gearshift buttons CLK 500 CLK 55 AMG Combination switch e Turn signals e Windshield wipers e High beam Cruise control lever Multifunction steering wheel Instrument cluster Lever for voice control system see separate operating instructions Starter switch Front Parktronic warning indicator Canada only Page 75 176 93 93 32 265 26 140 24 136 34 269 O00 000000 Item Page Overhead control panel 29 Glove box 278 Cup holder 283 Center console 27 28 Hood lock release 321 Horn Steering wheel adjustment 41 stalk Parking brake pedal 50 Door control panel 30 Parking brake release 50 Exte
290. id may cause corrosion or damage the clear coat The vehicle should not be parked for an extended period of time immediately after it has been cleaned especially not after the wheel rims have been cleaned with wheel rim cleaner Wheel rim cleaners can lead to increased corro sion of the brake disks and brake pads Therefore the vehicle s brake system should always be warmed up before it is parked after cleaning To do so please drive your vehicle for several minutes to allow the brakes to dry When applying Mercedes Benz ap proved Tire Care and Mercedes Benz approved Wheel Care products take care not to spray them on the brake disks Plastic and rubber parts gt Use a gentle dishwashing detergent or mild detergent for delicate fabrics as a washing solution f Do not use oil or wax on these parts Instrument cluster and cup holders gt Use a gentle dishwashing detergent or mild detergent for delicate fabrics as a washing solution gt Wipe with a cloth moistened in a luke warm solution To prevent scratches do not use scour ing agents Hard plastic trim items gt Use Mercedes Benz approved Interior Care a soft lint free cloth and apply with light pressure To prevent scratches do not use scour ing agents Steering wheel and gear selector lever gt Wipe with a damp cloth and dry thor oughly or clean with Mercedes Benz approved Leather Care Carpets gt Use Mercedes Benz approved Car
291. if the seat backrest is in an excessively reclined position Doing so could cause damage to front or rear seats First move the seat backrest to an upright position Turn memory position switch 2 to the desired memory position Press and hold memory position switch 2 until the seat steering wheel and exterior rear view mirrors have completely moved to the stored positions Controls in detail Memory function Storing exterior rear view mirror parking position For easier parking you can adjust the passenger side exterior rear view mirror so that you can see the right rear wheel as soon as you engage reverse gear R For information on activating the parking position feature see Setting parking posi tion for exterior rear view mirror gt page 161 and Activating exterior rear view mirror parking position gt page 183 1 Memory button 2 Adjustment button 3 Passenger side exterior rear view mirror button Stop the vehicle Switch on the ignition gt page 34 Press button 3 The passenger side exterior rear view mirror is selected Adjust the passenger side exterior rear view mirror with button 2 so that you see the rear wheel and the road curb Press memory button 1 Within three seconds press bottom of adjustment button 2 The parking position is stored if the mirror does not move If the mirror does move repeat the above steps After the
292. ified occupant size category determined by weight sensor readings from the seat e axle shafts axles e differential Production options weight gt page 356 Program mode selector switch Used to switch the automatic transmis sion between regular operation S and comfort operation C CLK 55 AMG with steering wheel gear shift control and manual shift program In addition to S and C for regular S or comfort C operation see above you can use the M for manual shift program Pounds per Square Inch gt page 356 Recommended tire inflation pressure gt page 356 REST Residual engine heat utilization Feature that uses the engine heat stored in the coolant to heat the vehi cle interior for a short time after the en gine has been turned off Restraint systems Seat belts child restraints lower an chors and tethers for children LATCH As independent systems their protec tive functions complement one anoth er Rim gt page 356 Roll bars Occupant protection system which consists of tubular steel integrated in the rear head restraints The roll bars are lowered into the car body during normal driving conditions and raised automatically in an accident or in a crit ical driving situation RON Research Octane Number The Research Octane Number for gaso line as determined by a standardized method It is an indication of a gaso line s ability to resist undesired detona tion knocking Th
293. ift armrest Closing telephone compartment gt Press armrest down until it engages PA into place 14 Handle 2 Button passenger side 3 Button driver side 4 Compartment lock lock position Compartment lock unlock position Controls in detail Useful features Locking compartment Armrest design B Opening compartment gt Remove the mechanical key from the The compartment in the center armrest SmartKey gt page 419 contains a cup holder and the telephone compartment gt Turn the compartment lock to position Unlocking compartment gt Turn the compartment lock to position gt Insert the mechanical key in the C SmartKey Oe gt Slide cover Q in direction of arrow 1 Cover Closing compartment 3 DE COM Dalement gt Slide cover back Opening telephone compartment gt Slide cover Q in direction of arrow and open it fully Closing telephone compartment gt Slide cover Q back Armrest in the rear passenger compartment l P68 00 3701 31 gt Pull the top of the armrest out and fold it down Controls in detail Useful features Cup holders A In order to help prevent spilling liquids on vehicle occupants and or vehicle equip ment only use containers that fit into the cup holder Use lids on open containers and do not fill containers to a height where the contents especially hot liquids could spill during braking vehicle
294. ignition gt page 34 Continued on next page Practical hints What to do if Display message Possible cause Possible solution consequence Front passenger Monitor the Fee indicator lamp on the center console gt page 27 and the mul air bag tifunction display in the instrument cluster gt page 24 for the following activated With the seat unoccupied and the ignition turned on see Oper s Man e the fn indicator lamp on the center console should illuminate and remain illuminated indicating that the OCS gt page 78 has deactivated the air bag e the message Front passenger air bag activated see Oper s Man or the mes sage Front passenger air bag deactivated see Oper s Man should not ap pear in the multifunction display at any time the seat is unoccupied Wait at last 60 seconds for the system to complete the necessary check cycles and to make sure neither message appears in the multifunction display If above conditions are met you can occupy the front passenger seat again Depend ing on the front passenger classification sensed by the OCS gt page 78 the EART indicator lamp will remain illuminated or go out If above conditions are not met the system is not working properly Have the system checked as soon as possible by an authorized Mercedes Benz Center Warning N out even after performing the above correc use the front passenger seat until the sys i tive steps do not have any childr
295. ile driving except to coast when the vehicle is in danger of skid ding e g on icy roads Depressing the accelerator pedal does not deactivate cruise control After brief acceleration e g for passing cruise control will resume the last speed set Controls in detail Driving systems Setting a higher speed gt Lift the cruise control lever in direction of arrow Q gt page 266 and hold it up until the desired speed is reached Release the cruise control lever The new speed is set Setting a lower speed gt Depress the cruise control lever in direction of arrow 2 gt page 266 and hold it down until the desired speed is reached Release the cruise control lever The new speed is set o When you use the cruise control lever to decelerate the brake system will automatically brake the vehicle if the engine s braking power does not brake the vehicle sufficiently Fine adjustment in 1 mph Canada 1 km h increments Faster gt Briefly tip the cruise control lever in di rection of arrow Q gt page 266 Slower gt Briefly tip the cruise control lever in di rection of arrow 2 gt page 266 Setting to last stored speed Resume function Warning A N The speed stored in memory should only be set again if prevailing road conditions per mit Possible acceleration or deceleration differences arising from returning to the pre set speed could c
296. ile performing step 3 hold the hand held remote control at differ ent lengths and angles from the signal transmitter button or you are programming Attempt varying an If you are having difficulty programming the integrated remote control here are some helpful tips gt Switch on the ignition gt page 36 gt Simultaneously press and hold down the outer signal transmitter buttons 2 and 4 for approximately 20 seconds until the indicator lamp Q flashes rap Check the frequency of the hand held remote control typically located on the reverse side of the remote The in idly Do not hold for longer than 30 seconds The codes of all three channels are erased I If you sell your vehicle erase the codes of all three channels tegrated remote control is compatible with radio frequency devices operating between 288 399 MHZ e Puta new battery in the hand held re mote control This will increase the likelihood of the hand held remote con trol sending a faster and more accurate signal to the integrated remote control gles at the distance of 2 to 5 inches 5 to 12 cm away or the same angle at varying distances If another hand held remote control is available for the same device try the programming steps again using that other hand held remote control Make sure new batteries are in the hand held remote control before beginning the procedure Straighten the antenna
297. iminate this risk is to never place a child in a rear facing child restraint in the front seat We therefore strongly recommend that you always place a child ina rear facing child restraint in the back seat If you must install a rear facing child restraint on the front passenger seat because circumstances require you to do so make sure that the ee indicator lamp is illuminated indicating that the front passenger front air bag is deactivated Should the EAE indicator lamp not illuminate or go out while the restraint is installed please check installation Periodically check the EA RES indicator lamp while driving to make sure the ERI indicator lamp is illuminated If the indicator lamp goes out or remains out do not transport a child on the front passenger seat until the system has been repaired A child in a rear facing child restraint on the front passenger seat will be seriously injured or even killed if the front passenger front air bag inflates If you have to place a child in a forward facing child restraint on the front passenger seat move the seat as far back as possible use the proper child restraint recommended for the age size and weight of the child and secure child restraint with the vehicle s seat belt according to the child seat manufacturer s instructions For children larger than the typical 12 month old child the front passenger front air bag may or may not be activated gt page 79 Safety and S
298. in juries The belt would also apply too much force to the ribs or abdomen which could severely injure internal or gans such as your liver or spleen Never wear belts over rigid or breakable objects in or on your clothing such as eyeglasses pens keys etc as these might cause injuries Position the lap belt as low as possible on your hips and not across the abdo men If the belt is positioned across your abdomen it could cause serious injuries in a crash Never use a seat belt for more than one person at a time Do not fasten a seat belt around a person and another per son or other objects Belts should not be worn twisted In a crash you wouldn t have the full width of the belt to distribute impact forces The twisted belt against your body could cause injuries Pregnant women should also use a lap shoulder belt The lap belt portion should be positioned as low as possible on the hips to avoid any possible pres sure on the abdomen Never place your feet on the instrument panel dashboard or on the seat Always keep both feet on the floor in front of the seat When using a seat belt to secure infant or toddler restraints or children in booster seats always follow the child seat manufacturer s instructions Enhanced seat belt reminder system When the engine is started the seat belt telltale illuminates for a maximum of six seconds and a warning chime sounds to remind you and your passengers to fas te
299. in 2057 mm 106 9 in 2715 mm 58 9 in 1497 mm 58 2 in 1478 mm CLK 55 AMG 183 3 in 4657 mm 78 4 in 1991 mm 55 4 in 1408 mm 80 6 in 2047 mm 106 9 in 2715 mm 58 9 in 1497 mm 58 2 in 1478 mm Technical data Fuels coolants lubricants etc Y Fuels coolants lubricants etc Capacities Vehicle components and their respective Please refer to the Factory Approved Ser lubricants must match Therefore only use vice Products pamphlet or inquire at your products tested and approved by Mercedes Benz Center Mercedes Benz Model Capacity Fuels coolants lubricants etc Engine with oil filter CLK 350 8 5 US qt 8 0 CLK 500 7 9 US qt 7 5 CLK 55 AMG 9 0 US qt 8 5 Approved engine oils Automatic transmission CLK 350 9 0 US qt 8 5 1 MB Automatic Transmission Fluid CLK 500 9 0 US qt 8 5 I CLK 55 AMG 9 3 US at 8 7 Rear axle CLK 350 1 16 US gt 1 11 Hypoid gear oil SAE 85 W 90 CLK 500 1 69 US qt 1 6 I CLK 55 AMG 1 50 US qt 1 4 I Power steering approx 1 1 US qt 1 0 I MB Power Steering Fluid Pentosin CHF 11S Front wheel hubs approx 3 0 oz 85 g each High temperature roller bearing grease Brake system 0 64 US qt 0 6 I MB Brake Fluid DOT 4 Technical data Fuels coolants lubricants etc Model Capacity Fuels coolants lubricants etc Cooling system CLK 350 approx 7 5 US qt 7 1 MB 325 0 Anticorrosion Antifreeze CLK 500 approx 12 8 US qt 1
300. increase or decrease depending on the direction turned If your vehicle equipment includes a Mercedes Benz specified mobile telephone you can adjust its volume separately from the volume of the audio system while the telephone is being used Adjusting sound functions The bass and treble functions are called up by pressing the button Settings for bass and treble are stored separately for the AM and FM wavebands weather band CD mode and telephone mode Bass gt Press button repeatedly until BASS appears in the display or P82 60 4450 31 Press or soft key to increase or de crease tone level accordingly Press RES soft key briefly to reset bass tones to their center level The radio switches back to the stan dard radio menu eight seconds after the last soft key is pressed Controls in detail Audio system Adjusting treble gt Press button repeatedly until TREBLE appears in the display P82 60 4451 31 gt Press or soft key to increase or de crease tone level accordingly or gt Press RES soft key briefly to reset treble tones to their center level The radio switches back to the stan dard radio menu eight seconds after the last soft key is pressed Controls in detail Audio system Sound system You can either program the sound settings manually gt page 213 or choose settings via preset sound characteristics You can select from amo
301. ing When you maneuver in tight areas e g when pulling into a parking space gt Control the vehicle speed by gradually releasing the brakes gt Accelerate gently gt Never abruptly step on the accelerator Working on the vehicle A Warning When working on the vehicle set the parking brake and move gear selector lever to position P Otherwise the vehicle could roll away Gear ranges With the gear selector lever in position D and driving in the automatic shift program C or S gt page 172 you can select a gear range for the automatic transmission to operate within Gear selector lever gt page 173 You can limit the gear range by pressing the gear selector lever to the left D and reverse the gear range limit by pressing the gear selector lever to the right D Steering wheel gearshift control CLK 500 CLK 55 AMG gt page 174 You can limit the gear range by pressing the respective downshift button on the steering wheel gearshift control and reverse the gear range limit by pressing the respective upshift button on the steering wheel gearshift control The selected gear range appears in the multifunction display gt page 167 If you press on the accelerator when the engine has reached its rpm limit the transmission will upshift beyond any gear range limit selected Effect WA The transmission shifts through sixth gear only applies to vehicles with 7 speed automatic transmission
302. ing feature Controls in detail Useful features The remote door unlock feature is available if the relevant cellular phone network is available The SOS button will flash and the message Connecting call will appear in the multifunction display to indicate receipt of the door unlock command Once the vehicle is unlocked a Response Center specialist will attempt to establish voice contact with the vehicle occupants If the trunk recessed handle was pulled for more than 20 seconds before door unlock authorization was received by the Response Center you must wait 15 minutes before pulling the trunk recessed handle again Controls in detail Useful features Stolen Vehicle Recovery services In the event your vehicle was stolen gt Report the incident to the police The police will issue a numbered incident report gt Pass this number on to the Mercedes Benz Response Center along with your password issued to you when you subscribed to the service The Response Center will then attempt to covertly contact the vehicle s Tele Aid system Once the vehicle is located the Response Center will contact the local law enforcement and you The vehicle s location will only be provided to law enforcement When the anti theft alarm or the tow away alarm stays on for more than 30 seconds a call is initiated automat ically to the Response Center see An ti theft alarm system gt page 92
303. ing or windshield wiping Cockpit All instruments switches buttons and indicator warning lamps in the passen ger compartment needed for vehicle Operation and monitoring Cold tire inflation pressure gt page 355 COMAND Cockpit Management and Data Sys tem Information and operating center for vehicle sound and communications systems including the radio and the navigation system as well as other op tional equipment CD changer tele phone etc Control system The control system is used to call up vehicle information and to change component settings Information and messages appear in the multifunction display The driver uses the buttons on the multifunction steering wheel to navigate through the system and to ad just settings Cruise control Driving convenience system for auto matically maintaining the vehicle speed set by the driver Curb weight gt page 355 DOT Department Of Transportation gt page 355 Engine number The number set by the manufacturer and placed on the cylinder block to uniquely identify each engine pro duced Engine oil viscosity Measurement for the inner friction vis cosity of the oil at different tempera tures The higher the temperature an oil can tolerate without becoming thin or the lower the temperature it can tol erate without becoming viscous the better the viscosity ESP Electronic Stability Program Improves v
304. ior lamps switch off automatically after approximately five minutes when the SmartKey is removed or in starter switch position O An interior lamp switched on manually does not go out automatically Deactivating automatic control gt Press the m symbol on rocker switch 2 The interior lighting remains switched off in darkness even when you e unlock the vehicle e open a door e remove the SmartKey from the starter switch The trunk lamp switches on if the trunk is opened If you leave the trunk open for an ex tended period of time the trunk lamp will switch off automatically after ap proximately ten minutes Manual control Switching all front interior lights on and off gt Press the symbol on rocker switch 2 The front interior lights come on gt Press rocker switch 2 to center position to activate the automatic control Switching right front reading lamp on and off gt Press right button JES The right reading lamp comes on gt Press right button again The right reading lamp goes out Switching left front reading lamp on and off gt Press left button JEg The left reading lamp comes on gt Press left button again The left reading lamp goes out Controls in detail Lighting Door entry lamps The appropriate door entry lamp switches on if a door is opened in darkness and if the interior lighting is switched to automat ic function The entry lamp switches of
305. ire inflation pressure 340 Inflation pressure 320 339 341 Inflation pressure Information placard 339 Inspection 331 Load rating 357 MOExtended system 452 Ply composition and material used 357 Problems under overinflated 344 Retreads 330 Rims andtires 471 Rotation 358 Run Flat Indicator 342 Service life 331 sizes 473 Snow 359 Spare wheel 416 447 476 Speed rating 312 348 357 Storing 332 Temperature 354 Terminology 355 Tire Identification Number see TIN Traction 312 357 Tread 357 Tread depth 332 359 Treadwear indicators 357 Wear pattern 358 Winter 359 Tools 413 Tow away alarm 27 94 Towing eye bolt 460 CLK 500 CLK 55 AMG 461 Towing the vehicle 458 Traction 312 357 Transmission gear selector lever see Gear selector lever Transmission see Automatic transmission Traveling abroad 315 Tread 357 Tread depth 332 359 Treadwear indicators 357 Trip computer 161 Trip odometer 137 Trunk Closing from inside 110 Fuse box 464 Lamp 135 Lid 108 Lock button KEYLESS GO 106 Luggage cover 262 Message in display 412 Opening 108 Opening from inside 109 Trunk lid 110 Trunk lid emergency release 115 Unlocking in an emergency 420 Unlocking opening KEYLESS GO 106 Unlocking opening SmartKey 99 Valet locking 116 Turn signal lamps Cleaning lenses 369 Messages in display 407 Replacing bulbs Bi Xenon 442 Replacing bulbs Halogen 441 Replacing bulbs rear 443 Turn signals 53 Additional in mirrors
306. ired by law These systems of course will function properly only when maintained strictly ac cording to factory specifications Any ad justments to the engine should therefore be carried out only by qualified Mercedes Benz Center authorized techni cians Engine adjustments should not be altered in any way Moreover the specified service jobs must be carried out regularly accord ing to Mercedes Benz servicing require ments For details refer to the Maintenance Booklet Warning A N Inhalation of exhaust gas is hazardous to your health All exhaust gas contains carbon monoxide CO and inhaling it can cause un consciousness and lead to death Do not run the engine in confined areas such as a garage which are not properly ventilated If you think that exhaust gas fumes are entering the vehicle while driving have the cause determined and corrected immediately If you must drive under these conditions drive with at least one window fully open at all times Coolant temperature During severe operating conditions and stop and go city traffic the coolant temperature may rise close to approximately 248 F 120 C The engine should not be operated with the coolant temperature over 248 F 120 C Doing so may cause serious engine damage which is not covered by the Mercedes Benz Limited Warranty Operation Driving instructions Warning e Driving when your engine is badly over heated can cause some
307. is message will only ap pear if all light emitting diodes have stopped working The left rear turn signal lamp is malfunc gt tioning A back up bulb is being used The right rear turn signal lamp is malfunc tioning A back up bulb is being used The roll bar is malfunctioning gt The roll bar is malfunctioning gt Have the LEDs replaced as soon as possible Replace the bulb as soon as possible Replace the bulb as soon as possible Have the system checked at an autho rized Mercedes Benz Center as soon as possible Operate the roll bars manually gt page 423 Have the system checked at an autho rized Mercedes Benz Center as soon as possible Display symbol Display message Lock driver s Sed Lock front DaSSeNGelr Sea A Seat belt system Drive to workshop Tele Aid malfunction Drive to workshop Restraint system defective Drive to workshop A In the event a malfunction of the SRS is indi cated as outlined above the SRS may not be operational Warning For your safety we strongly recommend that you visit an authorized Mercedes Benz Possible cause consequence The driver seat backrest is not engaged The passenger seat backrest is not en gaged The seat belt system is malfunctioning One or more main functions of the Tele Aid system are malfunctioning The system is malfunctioning Center immediately to have the system checked otherwise the SRS may not be de p
308. is now locked Push down on child restraint to take up any slack To deactivate release seat belt buckle and let seat belt retract completely The seat belt can again be used in the usual manner For information on LATCH type child seat anchors gt page 83 Safety and Security Occupant safety The use of infant or child restraints is required by law in all 50 states the District of Columbia the U S territo ries and all Canadian provinces Infants and small children should be seated in an appropriate infant or child restraint system properly secured by a lap shoulder belt or if so equipped a lap shoulder belt and a child restraint lower anchorage system that complies with U S Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standards 213 and 225 and Canadian Motor Vehicle Safety Standards 213 and 210 2 Warning A N Never release the seat belt buckle while the vehicle is in motion since the special seat belt retractor will be deactivated Safety and Security Occupant safety A statement by the child restraint man ufacturer of compliance with this stan dard can be found on the instruction label on the restraint and in the instruc tion manual provided with the restraint When using any infant or toddler re straint or booster seat be sure to care fully read and follow all manufacturer s instructions for installation and use Please read and observe warning labels affixed to the inside of the vehicl
309. ized Mercedes Benz Center Do not lean your head or chest close to the steering wheel or dashboard Keep hands on the outside of steering wheel rim Placing hands and arms in side the rim can increase the risk and potential severity of hand arm injury when driver s front air bag inflates Adjust the front passenger seat as far as possible rearward from the dashboard when the seat is occupied e Occupants especially children should never place their bodies or lean their heads in the area of the door or the rear side trim panel where the head thorax air bag and or the rear side impact air bag inflates This could result in seri Ous injuries or death should the air bag be triggered Always sit nearly upright properly use the seat belts and use an appropriately sized infant or toddler re straint or booster seat recommended for the size and weight of the child Failure to follow these instructions can re sult in severe injuries to you or other occu pants If you sell your vehicle it is important that you make the buyer aware of this safety in formation Be sure to give the buyer this Op erator s Manual Warning A N Accident research shows that the safest place for children in an automobile is in the rear seat It should be noted that with respect to both head thorax air bags and rear side impact air bags there is a possibility for a head thorax or rear side impact air bag related injury if occupants espec
310. k done by a qualified technician Have the headlamp adjustment checked regularly Practical hints Replacing bulbs Notes on bulb replacement Only use 12 volt bulbs of the same type and with the specified watt rating Switch lights off before changing a bulb to prevent short circuits Always use a clean lint free cloth when handling bulbs Your hands should be dry and free of oil and grease If the newly installed bulb does not come on visit an authorized Mercedes Benz Center Have the LEDs and bulbs for the following lamps replaced by an authorized Mercedes Benz Center Additional turn signal lamps in the exte rior rear view mirrors High mounted brake lamp Bi Xenon lamps Front fog lamps Front side marker lamps Practical hints Replacing bulbs Replacing bulbs for front lamps 1 gt Insert the new bulb so that its socket locates in the recess of bulb holder and is level to it gt Reinsert bulb holder with the bulb in the lamp and turn clockwise Before you start to replace a bulb for a front lamp do the following first gt Turn the exterior lamp switch to lt lt r position W gt page 127 gt Open the hood gt page 321 gt Align housing cover Q and turn it clockwise Front lamps halogen type pe2 10 3695 31 High beam bulb 3 Bulb socket for turn signal lamp bulb gt 4 Bulb holder of low beam bulb Bulb holder of high beam bulb Bulb s
311. k in snow make sure snow is kept clear of the exhaust pipe and from around the vehicle with the engine running Otherwise deadly carbon monox ide CO gases may enter vehicle interior re sulting in unconsciousness and death Warning To assure sufficient fresh air ventilation open a window slightly on the side of the ve hicle not facing the wind Warning A N The outside temperature indicator is not de signed to serve as an ice warning device and is therefore unsuitable for that purpose In dicated temperatures just above the freez ing point do not guarantee that the road surface is free of ice Do not drive through flooded areas or water of unknown depth Before driving through water determine its depth Never accelerate before driving into water The bow wave could force water into the engine and auxiliary equip ment thus damaging them If you must drive through standing wa ter drive slowly to prevent water from entering the passenger compartment or the engine compartment Water in these areas could cause damage to electrical components or wiring of the engine or transmission or could result in water being ingested by the engine through the air intake causing severe internal engine damage Any such dam age is not covered by the Mercedes Benz Limited Warranty A Warning Always fasten items being carried as securely as possible In an accident during hard braking or sud den maneuvers lo
312. k open Close trunk lid Trunk partitioner Please close BS Washer fluid Check level Possible cause consequence This message will appear whenever the trunk is open This message will appear when the soft top is operated with the trunk open This message will appear when the soft top is operated with the luggage cover open Possible solution gt Close the trunk gt Close the trunk gt Fold down and latch luggage cover gt page 262 The fluid level has dropped to about We of gt Add washer fluid gt page 329 total reservoir capacity Y Where will I find First aid kit The first aid kit is located in the trunk on the right side secured by a hook and loop fastener P86 30 2026 31 Q First aid kit 2 Hook and loop fastener gt Loosen hook and loop fastener 2 gt Remove first aid kit Q Check expiration dates and contents for completeness at least once a year and replace missing expired items Vehicle tool kit The vehicle tool kit is stored in the com partment underneath the trunk floor The following is included Towing eye bolt Wheel wrench Alignment bolt Vehicle jack Collapsible wheel chock Spare fuses Fuse extractor Straps for soft top emergency opera tion A pair of gloves The spare wheel bolts are fixed at the Minispare wheel Practical hints Where will I find Hex wrench You will find the hex wrench for manually o
313. ke and steer the ve hicle Adapt your driving accordingly To signal turns while being towed with the hazard warning flasher in use switch on the ignition and activate the combination switch for the left or right turn signal in the usual manner only the selected turn signal will operate Upon canceling the turn signal the haz ard warning flasher will operate again Practical hints Towing the vehicle When towing the vehicle with all wheels on the ground please note the follow ing With the automatic central locking acti vated and the SmartKey in starter switch position 2 or KEYLESS GO start stop button in position 2 the ve hicle doors lock if the left front wheel as well as the right rear wheel are turn ing at vehicle speeds of approx 9 mph 15 km h or more Switch off the tow away alarm gt page 94 To prevent the vehicle door locks from locking deactivate the automatic cen tral locking gt page 159 Towing of the vehicle should only be done using the properly installed tow ing eye bolt Never attach tow cable tow rope or tow rod to the vehicle chas sis frame or suspension parts Practical hints Towing the vehicle Installing towing eye bolt If the battery is disconnected or discharged Towing eye bolt CLK 350 e the SmartKey will not turn in the starter switch For more informa tion see Battery gt page 453 and Jump starting gt page 456
314. l ground e with the engine at operating tempera ture the vehicle must have been stationary for at least 5 minutes with the engine turned off e with the engine not at operating tem perature yet the vehicle must have been stationary for at least 30 minutes with the engine turned off To check the engine oil level via the multifunction display do the following gt Switch on the ignition gt page 34 The standard display gt page 144 should appear in the multifunction display gt Press button B or EAN on the mul tifunction steering wheel until the fol lowing message is seen in the multifunction display Measuring now Measurement 72 F gt 1498M A ie P yo i i i One of the following messages will subsequently appear in the multifunc tion display Engine oil level ok Add 1 0 qt to reach max oil level Canada 1 0 liter Add 1 5 qt to reach max oil level Canada 1 5 liter Add 2 0 qt to reach max oil level Canada 2 0 liter Engine oil level U aN correct ETT only if veh level EMC Um Operation Engine compartment If you want to interrupt the checking procedure press the BVA or Ba button on the multifunction steering wheel gt If necessary add engine oil For adding engine oil see gt page 325 For more information on engine oil see the Technical data section gt page 479 and gt page 481 Other displ
315. l locking switch is not activated The vehicle could inadvertently be unlocked if the SmartKey with KEYLESS GO is within 3 ft 1 m of the vehicle and e an outside door handle is splashed with water or e you attempt to clean an outside door handle Controls in detail Locking and unlocking Global locking gt Press the lock button on an outside door handle gt page 60 or the trunk lid gt page 106 With the trunk and both doors closed all turn signal lamps flash three times The locking knobs in the doors move down The anti theft alarm system is armed Selective setting If you frequently travel alone you may wish to reprogram the SmartKey with KEYLESS GO so when you pull the driver s door handle only the driver s door and the fuel filler flap unlocks gt Press and hold buttons and simultaneously for about 5 seconds un til battery check lamp flashes twice The SmartKey with KEYLESS GO will then function as follows Unlocking driver s door and fuel filler flap gt Pull the drivers outside door handle All turn signal lamps flash once The locking knob in the driver s door moves up The anti theft alarm system is disarmed Global unlocking gt Pull the outside door handle on the pas senger side All turn signal lamps flash once The locking knobs in the doors move up The anti theft alarm system is disarmed Global locking gt Press the lock butto
316. l transmit data generating the vehicle identification number model color and location subject to availability of cellular and GPS signals A voice connection between the Customer Assistance Center representative and the occupants of the vehicle will be established Information regarding the operation of your vehicle the nearest Controls in detail Useful features Mercedes Benz Center or Mercedes Benz USA products and services is available to you For more details concerning the Tele Aid system please visit www mbusa com and use your ID and password sent to you separately to learn more USA only The indicator lamp on the Information button remains illuminated in red for approximately ten seconds during the system self check after switching on ignition together with the SOS button and the Roadside Assistance button Fad See System self check gt page 290 when the indicator lamp does not come on in red or stays on longer than approximately ten seconds Controls in detail Useful features If the indicator lamp on the Information button is flashing continuously and there was no voice connection to the Response Center established then the Tele Aid system could not initiate an Information call e g the relevant cellular phone network is not available The message Call failed appears in the multifunction display Information calls can be terminated using the button on the multifunction stee
317. lation pressure should be checked regularly and should only be adjusted on cold tires Follow tire manufacturer s mainte nance recommendation included with vehicle The following pages also list the ap proved wheel rim and tire sizes for equipping your vehicles with winter tires Winter tires are not available as standard or optional factory equip ment but can be purchased from an authorized Mercedes Benz Center Depending on vehicle model and the standard or optional factory equipped wheel rim tire configuration on your vehicle Appearance Package Sport Package etc equipping your vehicle with winter tires approved for your vehicle model may also require the purchase of two or four wheel rims of the recommended size for use with these winter tires See an authorized Mercedes Benz Center for more information Same size tires CLK 350 Rims light alloy 7 5 x 17 H2 Wheel offset 1 42 in 36 mm Winter tires 225 45 R17 91 H M S Winter tires 2 gt 225 45 R1791HM S 4 MOExtended Radial ply tires 2 Must be used in conjunction with Run Flat Indicator only 3 Not available as factory equipment Technical data Rims and tires CLK 500 7 9Jx 17 H2 1 45 in 37 mm 225 45 R17 91 H M S 225 45 R17 91 H M S MOExtended Technical data Rims and tires CLK 55 AMG Rims light alloy 75I I7 TAZ Wheel offset 1 45 in 37 mm Winter tires 3 225 45 R17 91 H M S Radial ply tires 2 Not availa
318. ld be inadvertently locked or unlocked Operation Vehicle care Tar stains Quickly remove tar stains before they dry and become more difficult to remove A tar remover is recommended Paintwork painted body components Affixing stickers adhesive tape or sim ilar materials to painted body compo nents may damage the paintwork Mercedes Benz approved Paint Care should be applied when water drops on the paint surface do not bead up This should normally be done every 3 to 5 months depending on the climate and washing detergent used Mercedes Benz approved Paint Cleaner should be applied if the paint surface shows signs of embedded dirt i e loss of gloss Do not apply any of these products or wax if your vehicle is parked in the sun or if the hood is still hot Operation Vehicle care gt gt Use the appropriate MB Touch Up Vehicle washing Hand wash Stick for quick and provisional repairs of minor paint damage i e chips from stones vehicle doors etc In the winter thoroughly remove all traces Do not use hot water or wash your vehicle of road salt as soon as possible in direct sunlight When washing the vehicle underbody do gt Only use a mild car wash detergent Engine cleaning not forget to clean the inner sides of the such as Mercedes Benz approved Car wheels Shampoo Prior to cleaning the engine compartment make sure to protect electrical compo ep gt Thoroughly spray the
319. le 451 Minispare wheel 416 Mounting the spare wheel 447 Preparing the vehicle 446 Flexible Service System see FSS Canada vehicles Floormats 287 Fluids Brake fluid 320 481 Engine coolant 327 484 Engine oil 322 481 Transmission fluid 326 Windshield washer and headlamp cleaning system 329 486 Fog lamps 131 439 Messages in display 405 Replacing bulbs 438 439 443 Front airbags 67 Front lamps see Headlamps Front passenger front airbag 63 67 Messages in display 389 392 Front passenger front air bag off indicator lamp 27 81 381 FSS Canada vehicles 361 488 Fuel 319 479 Additives 483 Automatic transmission fluid 479 Brake fluid 479 Capacities 479 Capacities Fuel tank 480 Engine coolant 480 Engine oil 479 Filling the tank 318 Fuel display 25 Fuel filler flap and cap 318 421 Fuel filler flap and cap Multifunction display messages 400 Fuel reserve warning lamp 379 Power steering fluid 479 Premium unleaded gasoline 319 480 482 Requirements Octane rating 482 Technical data 479 Fuel cap Message in display 376 Fuel consumption statistics After start 161 Resetting 162 Since last reset 162 Fuel filler flap 318 Locking unlocking 318 Opening inanemergency 421 Fuel reserve warning lamp 25 Fuel tank Capacity 480 Filler flap 318 Message in display 403 Fuel Premium unleaded gasoline 319 482 Fuels coolants lubricants etc Capacities 479 Fuses 462 Aids for changing fuses 462 Fuse box main in pas
320. le spare tire are obtainable a The indicator lamp on the Roadside Assistance button remains illumi nated in red for approximately ten seconds during the system self check after switching on the ignition together with the SOS button and the Informa tion button RSM See system self check gt page 290 when the indicator lamp does not come on in red or stays on longer than approximately ten seconds If the indicator lamp on the Roadside Assistance button is flashing continuously and there was no voice connection to the Response Center es tablished then the Tele Aid system could not initiate a Roadside Assis tance call e g the relevant cellular phone network is not available The message Call failed appears in the multifunction display Roadside Assistance calls can be terminated using the button on the multifunction steering wheel or the respective button for ending a telephone call on the audio system or the COMAND headunit Information button The Information button is located be low the center armrest cover gt Press and hold the button for longer than two seconds A call to the Customer Assistance Center will be initiated The button will flash while the call is in progress The message Connecting call will appear in the multifunction display and the audio system is muted When the connection is established the message Call connected appears in the multifunction display The Tele Aid system wil
321. letter of the desired program mode appears in the multifunction display Select C for comfort driving e The vehicle starts out in second gear both forward and reverse for gentler starts This does not apply if full throttle is applied or gear range 1 is selected e Traction and driving stability are improved on icy roads e Upshifts occur earlier even when you give more gas The engine then operates at lower roms and the wheels are less likely to spin Gear selector lever one touch gearshifting Even with an automatic transmission you can change the gears manually and limit or extend the gear range for automatic shifting with the gear selector lever in position D and driving in the automatic program mode C or S Allow engine to warm up under low load use Do not place full load on the engine until the operating temperature has been reached Shift into reverse gear R or parking position P only when the vehicle is stopped Avoid spinning of a drive wheel for an extended period when driving off on slippery road surfaces This may cause serious damage to the drivetrain which is not covered by the Mercedes Benz Limited Warranty Downshifting A On slippery road surfaces never downshift in order to obtain braking action This could result in drive wheel slip and reduced vehicle control Your vehicle s ABS will not prevent this type of loss of control Warning gt Briefly press the gear selector lever to
322. lever out of P or N if the engine speed is higher than idle speed If your foot is not firmly on the brake pedal the vehicle could accelerate quickly forward or reverse You could lose control of the vehicle and hit someone or something Only shift into gear when the engine is idling normally and when your right foot is firmly on the brake pedal Warning Controls in detail Automatic transmission Allow engine to warm up under low load use Do not place full load on the engine until the operating temperature has been reached Shift into reverse gear R or parking position P only when the vehicle is stopped Avoid spinning of a drive wheel for an extended period when driving off on slippery road surfaces This may cause serious damage to the drivetrain which is not covered by the Mercedes Benz Limited Warranty When the gear selector lever is in position D you can influence transmission shifting by e limiting the gear range e changing gears manually Controls in detail Automatic transmission Gear selector lever position Effect Park position Gear selector lever position when the vehicle is parked Place gear selector lever in position P only when vehicle is stopped The park position is not intended to serve as a brake when the vehicle is parked Rather the driver should always set the parking brake in addition to placing the gear selector lever in position P to secure the vehicle Effect
323. lid The remote trunk opening switch is locat ed on the driver s door vehicles without trunk opening closing system AU Tj F 4 Remote trunk opening switch The remote trunk opening switch and the trunk closing switch are located on the driver s door vehicles with trunk open ing closing system C Remote trunk opening switch 2 Remote trunk closing switch gt Press remote trunk opening switch until the trunk begins to open The trunk opens The indicator lamp comes on and remains lit until the trunk is closed Controls in detail Locking and unlocking The trunk lid swings open upwards au tomatically Always make sure there is sufficient overhead clearance Vehicles with trunk opening closing system To stop the opening proce dure press switch or If the trunk does not open it is still locked separately gt page 116 The trunk can also be opened using button on the SmartKey or SmartKey with KEYLESS GO or from its inside in an emergency see Trunk emergency release gt page 115 Controls in detail Locking and unlocking Closing the trunk Closing the trunk from the inside automatically In vehicles with trunk opening closing sys tem you can close the trunk from the in side using the remote trunk closing switch gt Press the remote trunk closing switch 2 gt page 109 until the indi cator lamp in the swi
324. ling gear range limit gt Press and hold button 2 on the right side of the steering wheel until D reappears in the multifunction display The transmission will shift from the current gear range directly to gear range D Controls in detail Automatic transmission Shifting into optimal gear range gt Press and hold button on the left side of the steering wheel The transmission will automatically select the gear range suited for optimal acceleration and deceleration This may involve shifting down one or more gears Controls in detail Automatic transmission Manual shift program CLK 55 AMG In addition to the automatic shift program C or S your vehicle is equipped with the manual shift program M In the manual program mode M system controlled automatic gearshifting is switched off and you need to change the gears by manually upshifting or downshift ing using the steering wheel gearshift but tons to the left and right of the steering wheel gt page 176 or the gear selector lever Allow engine to warm up under low load use Do not place full load on the engine until the operating temperature has been reached Shift into reverse gear R or parking position P only when the vehicle is stopped Avoid spinning of a drive wheel for an extended period when driving off on slippery road surfaces This may cause serious damage to the drivetrain which is not covered by the Mercedes Benz Limited W
325. llowing lamps will switch on additionally e Parking lamps e Tail lamps e License plate lamps e Side marker lamps Controls in detail Control system For more information on the daytime run Setting locator lighting gt Move the selection marker with ning lamp mode see Lighting With the locator lighting feature activated button or E to the Lighting gt page 127 and the exterior lamp switch in Supine E position A the following lamps will gt Press button EN or Keg repeatedly switch on during darkness when the vehi until the message Function Surround If you turn the exterior lamp switch to l M aud cle is unlocked with the SmartKey lighting appears in the multifunction another position the corresponding disola lamp s will switch on e Parking lamps Prad E E A e Tail lamps D a marker is on the current Lighting submenu to factory settings e License plate lamps gt page 149 while driving will not Function deactivate the daytime running lamp e Side marker lamps Surround lighting mode e Front fog lamps Z 3D d D The following message appears inthe The locator lighting switches off when the oi 72 F multifunction display driver s door is opened 143 8 MI E EER Lighting Cannot be completely reset to factory settings while driving If you do not open a door after unlocking Press button or E to switch the vehicle with the SmartKey the lamps the locator lighting function On will switch off
326. lly gt Press button You are connected to the second caller the first caller is kept on hold or gt Press button to accept a sec ond call Controls in detail Audio system You will be notified of the second call acoustically but you will not see this in the display You are connected with the second caller the first caller is kept on hold Switching between calls gt Press and buttons This switches between the calls The non active call is kept on hold Controls in detail Audio system e Terminating a call gt Press button The current call is terminated You are again connected with the caller previously placed on hold e Combining two calls gt Press EEN and buttons The calls are combined into one call e Terminating a combined call gt Press button The connection to both callers is terminated TDMA or CDMA network phones Warning Please do not forget that your primary re sponsibility is to drive the vehicle A driver s attention to the road must always be his her primary focus when driving For your safety and the safety of others we rec ommend that you pull over to a safe location and stop before placing or taking a tele phone call If you choose to use the telephone while driving please use the hands free device and only use the telephone when road weather and traffic conditions permit Some jurisdictions prohibit the drive
327. losed and locked or not fully opened if e the message lop in operation is shown in the multifunction display e a warning sounds for 10 seconds and the message Lock top is shown in the multifunction display when starting to drive To prevent possible accidents drive the ve hicle only with the soft top either completely closed and locked or fully lowered into its storage compartment If the soft top is not properly locked lock it as described below Unlocked status noticed when stopped gt gt Or Switch on the ignition gt page 36 To lock the soft top in its fully closed position press soft top switch The message Top closed will be shown in the multifunction display To lock the soft top in its fully opened position pull up on the soft top switch The message Top open will be shown in the multifunction display Controls in detail Soft top Unlocked status noticed while driving Warning A N Stop the vehicle in a safe location or as soon as it is safe to do so and lock the soft top be fore continuing to drive You could other wise endanger yourself and others Stop the vehicle Leave the ignition switched on To lock the soft top in its fully closed position press soft top switch The message Top closed will be shown in the multifunction display Or gt To lock the soft top in its fully opened position pull up on the soft top switch The message Top open will be shown
328. low is directed in the corre sponding direction For draft free ventilation push slides 2 and upward Adjusting air volume gt Turn thumbwheel C to the left or right The air volume is increased or de creased Vv Audio system Audio and telephone operation These instructions are intended to help you become familiar with your Mercedes Benz audio system They con tain useful tips and a detailed description of the user functions A In order to avoid distraction which could lead to an accident the driver should enter system settings with the vehicle at a standstill and operate the system only when road and traffic conditions permit Always pay full attention to traffic conditions first before operating system controls while driving Warning Bear in mind that at a speed of just 30 mph approximately 50 km h your car is covering a distance of 44 feet approximately 14 m every second Operating safety A Warning Any alterations made to electronic components can cause malfunctions The radio amplifier CD changer satellite radio and telephone are interconnected When one of the components is not opera tional or has not been removed replaced properly the function of other components may be impaired This condition might seriously impair the operating safety of your vehicle We recommend that you have any service work on electronic components carried out by an autho
329. loy when needed in an accident which could result in serious or fatal injury or it might deploy unexpectedly and unnecessar ily which could also result in injury Practical hints What to do if Possible solution Fold back and push the seat backrest un til the seat cushion and seat backrest au dibly engage into the driving position Fold back and push the seat backrest un til the seat cushion and seat backrest au dibly engage into the driving position gt Visit an authorized Mercedes Benz Center as soon as possible gt Have the Tele Aid system checked by an authorized Mercedes Benz Center gt Drive with added caution to the near est authorized Mercedes Benz Center Practical hints What to do if Display symbol Display message Lock top Top being opened Top Visit workshop Start engine to SERA Le LO Top locked as vehicle is moving Steering oil Visit workshop Warning UN If the level of steering gear oil in reservoir is too low the steering power assistance could fail Much greater effort will then be needed to turn the steering wheel Possible cause consequence The soft top is not properly locked The soft top is not completely open or closed The hydraulics are losing pres sure The soft top is malfunctioning The on board voltage is too low You have attempted to open or close the soft top while driving The steering gear oil level is too low There
330. loyment of the head thorax air bags Contact your authorized Mercedes Benz Center for availability Rear side impact air bags 1 Rear side impact air bag The rear side impact air bags Q are deployed e onthe impacted side of the vehicle e inimpacts exceeding a preset deploy ment threshold e independently of the front air bags The rear side impact air bags Q are not deployed in impacts which do not exceed the system s deployment threshold Seat belts The use of seat belts and infant and child restraint systems is required by law in all 50 states the District of Columbia the U S territories and all Canadian provinces Even where this is not the case all vehicle occupants should have their seat belts fastened whenever the vehicle is in motion For more information see Fastening the seat belts gt page 45 For information on infants and children traveling with you in the vehicle and restraint systems for infants and children see Children in the vehicle gt page 75 Warning A N Always fasten your seat belt before driving off Always make sure all of your passengers are properly restrained even those sitting in the rear and pregnant women Failure to wear and properly fasten and po sition your seat belt greatly increases your risk of injuries and their likely severity in an accident You and your passengers should always wear seat belts If you are ever in an accid
331. ls Trademarks The following symbols are found in this gt This symbol points to instructions for e ESP is a registered trademark of PET ATOE Santa yoe DaimlerChrysler A Optional equipment is identified gt Anumber of these symbols appearing HomeLink is a registered trademark with an asterisk Since standard in succession indicates a multiple step of Prince a Johnson Controls equipment varies between models procedure the descriptions and illustrations in Company gt Page This symbol tells you where to anda bees OT SEAE EN look for further information on a e SIRIUS and related marks are trade the actual equipment of your marks of Sirius Satellite Radio Inc de SUpIG gt D This continuation symbol marks an interrupted procedure which Warning A will be continued on the next i page Warning notices draw your attention to haz ards that may endanger your health or life aa In the glossary of technical or the health or life of others terms this symbol is used to indicate cross references to T term definitions Highlights hazards that may result in Display Words appearing in the multi damage to your vehicle function display are printed in the type shown here Helpful hints or further information you may find useful Introduction Operating safety Warning Work improperly carried out on electronic components and associated software could cause them to cease functioning Because the vehicle
332. luminates the road onto which you are turning The corner illuminating front fog lamps will come on automatically depending on the steering angle even if you did not switch on either turn signal If the corner illuminating front fog lamps came on automatically they will also go out automatically depending on the steering angle Switching off corner illuminating front fog lamps The combination switch for the turn signal resets automatically after major steering wheel movements This will switch off the corner illuminating front fog lamps if they where activated by switching on the left or right turn signal If the turn signal should stay on after mak ing the turn the turn signal and corner illu minating front fog lamps can be switched off by returning the combination switch to its original position Driving rearward Switching on corner illuminating front fog lamps gt Place the gear selector lever in position R The inverse front fog lamp comes on automatically depending on the steer ing direction and steering angle Switching off corner illuminating front fog lamps gt Place the gear selector lever out of position R The respective front fog lamp goes out Hazard warning flasher The hazard warning flasher can be switched on at all times even with the SmartKey or the SmartKey with KELESS GO removed from the starter switch or with the SmartKey with KEYLESS GO removed from the vehicle The
333. ly i 7 l If you have activated the automatic re memory position appears in the gt Press button dial function on your mobile telephone left hand corner of the display The ecam benade the number of the person being called numbers are stored in the order of is automatically redialed after a short the calls made e Turbo dial waiting period if there is a busy signal gt When you have selected a number If you have stored telephone numbers Refer to the separate operating instruc press button as turbo dial numbers in your tele tions for the mobile telephone phone you can also enter these with The call will be made buttons J to MQ on the radio unit e Manual redial gt Press desired button EEE to EE until the call is made ing TERE eS CLER H OM ROU PEZ 00 4021 31 Accepting an incoming call If the telephone is active in the background reception symbol is visible in the display the audio source is muted when an incom ing call is received A ringing tone can be heard and the caller s telephone number or the name under which the telephone number has been saved in the telephone book appears in the display If the caller s number is not relayed CALL will appear in the display gt Press button The call is accepted Muting a call It is possible to mute a call the caller is then no longer able to hear you e Mute on gt Press MUT soft key gt MIC MUTE will appear in the display e M
334. ly charged e Check the battery and charge it if necessary gt page 453 e Geta jump start gt page 456 To prevent accelerated battery dis charge or a completely discharged bat tery always remove the SmartKey from the starter switch when the engine is not in operation For more information see SmartKey gt page 96 For information on starting the engine us ing the SmartKey see Starting with the SmartKey gt page 49 SmartKey with KEYLESS GO Pressing the KEYLESS GO start stop but ton on the gear selector lever corresponds to turning the SmartKey to the various starter positions If you firmly depress the brake pedal dur ing pressing the KEYLESS GO start stop button the engine starts automatically You can also use the SmartKey with KEYLESS GO like a normal SmartKey The function of the SmartKey overrules the KEYLESS GO function Getting started Unlocking c EN 32 00 2395 31 KEYLESS GO start sion E 1 USA only 2 Canada only The SmartKey with KEYLESS GO must be located in the vehicle gt Make sure the gear selector lever is set to P gt Do not depress the brake pedal Getting started Unlocking Position 0 Ignition or position 2 a Before you press the KEYLESS GO gt Press the KEYLESS GO start stop but When you switch on the ignition the in start stop button the vehicle s on board ton twice dicator and warning lamps except low bea
335. m headlamp indicator lamp high beam headlamp indicator lamp and turn signal indicator lamps unless acti electronics have status O as with This supplies power for all electrical SmartKey removed ieee consumers All the lamps except low beam headlamp indicator lamp high Position 1 A vated in the instrument cluster come peace AOD MA Or a an on The indicator and warning lamps gt Press the KEYLESS GO start stop turn signal indicator lamps unless acti amp i p j except low beam headlamp indicator button once vated in the instrument cluster come lamp high beam headlamp indicator lamp and turn signal indicator lamps if activated will go out when the engine is running This indicates that the re spective systems are operational on If a lamp in the instrument cluster fails to come on when the ignition is switched on have it checked and re placed if necessary If a lamp in the in If you now press the KEYLESS GO strument cluster remains on after starting the engine or comes on while start stop button driving refer to Lamps in instrument FOr more information see SmartKey with e once again the ignition position 2 cluster gt page 374 KEYLESS GO gt page 100 is switched on This supplies power for some electrical consumers such as seat adjustment For information on starting the engine e twice the power supply is again using the KEYLESS GO start stop button switched off If you
336. maneuvers Warning Refer to the description of the Brake Assist System BAS gt page 88 If the parking brake is released and the brake warning lamp in the instrument clus ter stays on the brake fluid level in the res ervoir is too low Brake pad wear or a leak in the system may be the reason for low brake fluid in the res ervoir Have the brake system inspected immedi ately Contact an authorized Mercedes Benz Center All checks and service work on the brake system should be carried out by qualified technicians only Contact an authorized Mercedes Benz Center Only install brake pads and brake fluid rec ommended by Mercedes Benz A If other than recommended brake pads are installed or other than recommended brake fluid is used the braking properties of the vehicle can be degraded to an extent that safe braking is substantially impaired This could result in an accident Warning When driving down long and steep grades relieve the load on the brakes by shifting into a lower gear to use the engine s braking power This helps pre vent overheating of the brakes and re duces brake pad wear After hard braking it is advisable to drive on for some time rather than immediately park so that the air stream can cool down the brakes faster High performance brake system CLK 55 AMG only The high performance brake system is de signed to operate under the extremely high operating demands required
337. may damage the vehicle or its equipment which may in turn result in personal injury If you have questions about carrying out any type of service turn to the advice of an authorized Mercedes Benz Center We reserve the right to modify the technical details of the vehicle as given in the data and illustrations of this Operator s Manual Re printing translation and copying even of excerpts is not permitted without our prior authorization in writing Title illustration no P00 0 1 3057 3 1 Press time May 27 2005 GSP TIP Printed in Germany
338. mp EN or SM in the instrument cluster flashes gt page 24 The combination switch resets automati cally after major steering wheel move ments To signal minor directional changes such as changing lanes press combi nation switch only to the point of resis tance and release The corresponding turn signals will flash three times Getting started Windshield wipers The combination switch is located on the left of the steering column i Ezt Combination switch 1 Single wipe Wiping with windshield washer fluid 2 Switching on windshield wipers gt Switch on the ignition gt page 34 Getting started Driving Do not operate the windshield wipers when the windshield is dry Dust that accumulates on a windshield might scratch the glass and or damage the wiper blades when wiping occurs on a dry windshield If it is necessary to op erate the windshield wipers in dry weather conditions always operate the windshield wipers with windshield washer fluid gt page 55 Switching on windshield wipers gt Turn the combination switch to the de sired position depending on the intensity of the rain O Windshield wipers off Intermittent wiping Il Normal wiper speed Ill Fast wiper speed Intermittent wiping Do not leave windshield wipers in intermittent setting when the vehicle is taken to an automatic car wash or during windshield cleaning Windshield wipers will
339. mpartment Tires and wheels Winter driving Maintenance Vehicle care Operation The first 1000 miles 1500 km In the Operation section you will find de tailed information on operating maintain ing and caring for your vehicle The more cautiously you treat your vehicle during the break in period the more satis fied you will be with its performance later on e Drive your vehicle during the first 1000 miles 1500 km at varying but moderate vehicle and engine speeds e During this period avoid heavy loads full throttle driving and excessive engine speeds no more than of maximum rpm in each gear e Shift gears in a timely manner e Avoid accelerating by kickdown e Do not attempt to slow the vehicle down by shifting to a lower gear using the gear selector lever e Select positions 3 2 or 1 only when driving at moderate speeds for hill driving e Select mode C as the preferred shift program gt page 172 for the first 1000 miles 1500 km After 1000 miles 1500 km you may gradually increase vehicle and engine speeds to the permissible maximum T Additional instructions for AMG vehicles e During the first 1000 miles 1500 km do not exceed a speed of 85 mph 140 km h e During this period avoid engine speeds above 4500 rpm in each gear All of the above instructions as may apply to your vehicle type also apply when driving the first 1000 miles 1500 km after the en
340. mple tuning in channel 16 Tuning via the program category list The category list contains all currently re ceivable categories of programs It is arranged alphabetically e Selecting a category gt Press PTY soft key P82 60 4462 31 The current PTY category of the sta tion is displayed or gt Press lt lt lt or gt gt gt soft key This switches between the individu al categories When changing the category the chan nel selected last in the new category becomes audible The system will automatically switch to a station of the selected category if the currently selected station is not of the selected category Otherwise the cur rently selected station remains tuned Tuning a station within the selected category The channels identified for the current ly selected category are arranged numerically Only one entry is visible at a time gt Press Baa or button briefly The next station within the category is started gt Press and hold Bag or but ton for approx three seconds until desired station has been reached Controls in detail Audio system Tuning via scan search Scan search is characterized as follows Scan search plays a channel for ap prox eight seconds and then skips to the next channel within the current cat egory Scan search can be terminated manu ally Press SC soft key The search starts SC appears in the display Press SC soft key again
341. n Activating gt Press button K J or gt page 197 The indicator lamp on the button comes on Controls in detail Automatic climate control CLK 500 CLK 55 AMG The air conditioning switches Windshield fogged on the outside Maximum cooling MAXCOOL automatically to the following functions s coding onthedehumiaiy a If the left and right air distribution controls Keep this setting selected only untilthe as well as the airflow volume control are e maximum blowing and heating _ windshield is clear again set to BGR gt page 197 and there is a power high need for cooling the display e air flows onto the windshield and gt Switch the windshield wipers on MAXCOOL appears the front side windows gt page 54 This provides the fastest possible cooling e the air recirculation mode is If the automatic mode of the automatic cli Of the vehicle interior when side windows ewiiehedor mate control is switched off and soft top are closed gt Turn air distribution control Q or Deactivating to or EEJ gt page 197 gt Press button Keg or gt page 197 again The indicator lamp on the button goes out The previous settings are once again in effect I The cooling remains switched on Air recirculation mode Switch to air recirculation mode to prevent unpleasant odors from entering the vehicle from the outside e g before driving through a tunnel This setting cuts off the intake of outside
342. n sumers Do not turn on the lights under any circumstances gt Remove the jumper cables first from the negative terminals 3 and and then from the positive terminals 2 and 1 You can now turn on the lights gt Have the battery checked at the near est authorized Mercedes Benz Center Do not tow start the vehicle Practical hints Towing the vehicle Towing the vehicle Mercedes Benz recommends that the vehi cle be transported with all wheels off the ground using flatbed or appropriate wheel lift dolly equipment Use flatbed or wheel lift dolly equip ment with SmartKey in starter switch turned to position 0 Do not tow with sling type equipment Towing with sling type equipment over bumpy roads will damage radiator and supports To prevent damage during transport do not tie down vehicle by its chassis or suspension parts Switch off the tow away alarm gt page 94 and the automatic central locking gt page 159 When circumstances do not permit the recommended towing methods the vehi cle may be towed with all wheels on the ground or front wheels raised only so far as necessary to have the vehicle moved to a safe location where the recommended towing methods can be employed If the vehicle is towed with the front axle raised the engine must be shut off SmartKey in starter switch position O or 1 Otherwise the ESP will immedi ately be engaged and will apply the rear wheel
343. n be seriously injured or killed In the same crash the possibility of injury or death is lessened if you are wearing your seat belt The air bags can only provide the protection they where designed to afford if the occupants are using their seat belts gt page 62 Getting started Warning According to accident statistics children are safer when properly restrained in the rear seating positions than in the front seat ing position Thus we strongly recommend that children be placed in the rear seats Regardless of seating position children 12 years old and under must be seated and properly secured in an appropriate infant or toddler restraint or booster seat recom mended for the size and weight of the child For additional information see Children in the vehicle gt page 75 A child s risk of serious or fatal injuries is significantly increased if the child restraints are not properly secured in the vehicle and or the child is not properly secured in the child restraint Getting started Driving Warning A N Never let more people ride in the vehicle than there are seat belts available Be sure everyone riding in the vehicle is correctly restrained with a separate seat belt Never use a seat belt for more than one person at a time Warning A N Never ride in a moving vehicle with the seat backrest in an excessively reclined position as this can be dangerous You could slide under th
344. n detail Seats Rear seat head restraints A For safety reasons always drive with the rear head restraints in the raised position when the rear seats are occupied Warning Keep the area around head restraints clear of articles e g clothing to not obstruct the lowering raising operation of the head restraints Controls in detail Seats Raising rear head restraints Lowering rear head restraints with 4 switch in the center console The rear head restraints cannot be low ered using the switch Q when the roll bars have been released The roll bars need to be lowered before the rear head restraints can be operated again using switch Q e fthe roll bars have released and the soft top is closed contact an authorized Mercedes Benz Center to have the roll bars lowered Do not attempt to lower the roll bars manually with the soft top closed i Ma me eas ih Or P54 25 47 1 Rear seat head restraint i 1 Rear head restraint lowering switch gt Pull head restraint 4 to its highest position gt Switch on the ignition gt page 34 Lowering the roll bars manually gt Push the rear head restraints lowering with the soft top closed may impair switch 4 the function of the roll bars The rear head restraints are lowered e If the roll bars have released and the soft top is open you can lower the roll bars manually gt page 424 or contact an authorized
345. n for di aling to begin DIALING appears in the audio display while the telephone establishes the connection Wait until the emergency call center answers then describe the emergency Placing a 911 emergency call using audio head unit with the phone un locked gt vy Press button to switch to tele phone operation Enter 911 using the number keypad on the audio head unit Press button for dialing to begin DIALING appears in the audio display while the telephone establishes the connection Wait until the emergency call center answers then describe the emergency YV Power windows Opening and closing the windows The side windows are opened and closed electrically The switches for all the side windows are on the driver s door The switches for the respective windows are on the front passenger door and the rear side trim panels 4 C Left front window 2 Right front window 3 Right rear window 4 Left rear window Rear window override switch gt page 85 P54 29 35931 31 Warning A N When closing the windows make sure there is no danger of anyone being harmed by the closing procedure The closing of the door windows can be im mediately halted by releasing the switch or if switch was pulled past the resistance point and released by either pressing or pulling the respective switch The closing of the rear side windows can be immediately halted by releasing the switch
346. n on an outside door handle With the trunk and both doors closed all turn signal lamps flash three times The locking knobs in the doors move down The anti theft alarm system is armed You can also lock the vehicle using the lock button on the trunk lid page 106 or vehicles with trunk opening closing KEYLESS GO lock ing closing switch gt page 114 Restoring to factory setting gt Press and hold buttons and simultaneously for about 6 seconds un til battery check lamp flashes twice If you can no longer lock or unlock the vehicle with the SmartKey with KEYLESS GO then the batteries in the SmartKey with KEYLESS GO are dis charged the SmartKey with KEYLESS GO is malfunctioning or the vehicle battery is drained e Check the batteries in the SmartKey with KEYLESS GO gt page 105 and replace them if necessary gt page 435 e Use the mechanical key to unlock the driver s door gt page 419 and the trunk gt page 420 e Use the mechanical key to lock the driver s door gt page 420 and the trunk gt page 116 e Have the vehicle battery and the battery connections checked gt page 453 If the SmartKey with KEYLESS GO is malfunctioning contact an authorized Mercedes Benz Center Checking the batteries gt Press button or a Battery check lamp comes on briefly to indicate that the SmartKey with KEYLESS GO batteries are in or der If battery check lamp
347. n order to obtain braking action This could result in drive wheel slip and reduced vehicle control Your vehicle s ABS will not prevent this type of loss of control Warning gt Briefly press the inside Q of one of the buttons on the steering wheel The transmission will shift to the next lower gear as permitted by the shift program This action simultaneously limits the gear range of the transmission gt page 171 Controls in detail Automatic transmission Upshifting gt Briefly press the outside 2 of one of the buttons on the steering wheel The transmission will shift to the next higher gear as permitted by the shift program This action simultaneously extends the gear range of the transmis sion Canceling gear range limit gt Press and hold the outside 2 of one of the buttons on the steering wheel until D reappears in the multifunction display The transmission will shift from the current gear range directly to gear range D Shifting into optimal gear range gt Press and hold the inside Q of one of the buttons on the steering wheel The transmission will automatically select the gear range suited for optimal acceleration and deceleration This may involve shifting down one or more gears Controls in detail Automatic transmission Steering wheel gearshift control CLK 55 AMG The steering wheel gearshift buttons are located to the left and right of the steering wheel
348. n the Convenience submenu of the control system is switched to on gt page 161 Switch on the ignition gt page 34 Press button 2 for the passenger side exterior rear view mirror Place the gear selector lever in reverse gear R The passenger side exterior rear view mirror will be turned downward to the stored position Controls in detail Good visibility The exterior rear view mirror returns to its previously stored driving position e ten seconds after you put the gear se lector lever out of position R e immediately once your vehicle exceeds a speed of approx 6 mph 10 km h e immediately when you press button for the driver s side mirror Controls in detail Good visibility Sun visors N The sun visors protect you from sun glare UZD while driving D Warning A N I 1 ft amp s j Keep the mirrors in the sun visors closed P68 60 2124 31 P68 60 2066 31 while vehicle is in motion Reflected glare Mirror lamp can endanger you and others Do not use the vanity mirror while driving If sunlight enters through a side window Mirror cover 2 gt disengage sun visor from mounting 3 3 Mounting gt Swing sun visor down when you 4 Sun visor gt pivot sun visor to the side expenenGe Bale gt Touse the illuminated mirror lift up The sun visors are extendable mirror cover gt Adjust the sun visors by pushing or GP pulling in the direction
349. n the engine is started and then go out indicating that the front passenger front air bag is activated Safety and Security Occupant safety If the EARE indicator lamp is illuminated the front passenger front air bag is deactivated and will not be deployed If the EARI indicator lamp is not illuminated the front passenger front air bag is activated and will be deployed e inthe event of certain frontal impacts e if impact exceeds a preset deployment threshold e independently of the head thorax air bags and or rear side impact air bags If the front passenger front air bag is deployed the rate of inflation will be influenced by e the rate of relevant vehicle deceleration as assessed by the air bag control unit e front passenger s weight category as identified by the Occupant Classification System OCS Safety and Security Occupant safety Warning A N According to accident statistics children are safer when properly restrained in the rear seating positions than in the front seat ing position Thus we strongly recommend that children be placed in the rear seats whenever possible Regardless of seating position children 12 years old and under must be seated and properly secured in an appropriate infant or child restraint recom mended for the size and weight of the child The infant or child restraint must be properly secured with the vehicle s seat belt or seat belt and lower anchors fully
350. n to objects located above or below the height of the sensors e g planters or trailer hitches The Parktronic system will not detect such objects at close range and damage to your vehicle or the object may result Ultrasonic signals from outside sourc es e g truck air brakes car wash or jackhammers may impair the opera tion of the Parktronic system Minimum distance Center approx 8 in 20 cm Corners approx 6 in 15 cm If the system detects an obstacle in this range all the distance warning segments illuminate and you hear a warning signal If the obstacle is closer than the minimum distance the actual distance may no long er be indicated by the system Warning indicators Visual signals indicate to the driver the rel ative distance between the sensors and an obstacle The warning indicator for the front area is located above the center air vents in the dashboard The warning indi cator for the rear area is integrated in the rear dome lighting an es a ae e MTT TES T bk n a E Coki 1 Left side of the vehicle 2 Right side of the vehicle Each warning indicator Is divided into six yellow and two red distance segments for either side of the vehicle The Parktronic system is ready when the border around the indicator is illuminated The position of the gear selector lever de termines which warning indicators will be activated Gear selector le ver position Warning indicator D Front
351. n when driving in the manual program mode M is not possible Deactivating manual shift program gt Press the program mode selector switch gt page 178 repeatedly until C or Sappears in the multifunction display or gt Restart the engine The transmission will go to the automatic program mode C or S The manual program mode M is not stored Emergency operation Limp Home Mode If vehicle acceleration worsens or the transmission no longer shifts the trans mission is most likely operating in limp home emergency operation mode In this mode only second gear and reverse gear can be activated Stop the vehicle Vv Move gear selector lever to P Vv Turn off the engine Wait at least ten seconds before restarting Vv Restart the engine Move gear selector lever to position D for second gear or R gt Have the transmission checked at an authorized Mercedes Benz Center as soon as possible Y Good visibility For information on the windshield wipers see Windshield wipers gt page 53 Headlamp cleaning system The button is located on the left side of the dashboard 1 Headlamp washer button gt Switch on the ignition gt page 36 gt Press button Q The headlamps are cleaned with a high pressure water jet The headlamps will automatically be cleaned when you have e switched on the headlamps and e operated the windshield wipers with win
352. n your seat belts If after these six seconds the driver s or the front passenger s seat belt with the front passenger seat occupied are not fas tened with all doors closed and the vehicle speed does not exceed 15 mph 25 km h the seat belt tell tale remains illuminated for as long as either the driver s or front pas senger s seat belt is not fastened and the vehicle speed exceeds 15 mph 25 km h the seat belt telltale starts flashing and a warning chime sounds with increasing intensity until both the driver s and front passenger s seat belt are fastened or for a maxi mum of 60 seconds from the time the Safety and Security Occupant safety vehicle speed exceeded 15 mph 25 km h if either the driver s or front passenger s seat belt remains unfas tened If the driver s or front passenger s seat belt remains unfastened after 60 sec onds the seat belt telltale stops flashing and the warning chime stops sounding The seat belt telltale then continues to be illuminated for as long as either the driver s or front pas senger s seat belt are not fastened The seat belt telltale will only go out if both the driver and front passenger s seat belt with the front passenger seat oc cupied are fastened or the vehicle is standing still and a front door is opened For more information on the seat belt telltale Mam see Practical hints gt page 379 Safety and Security Occ
353. nal transmitter buttons repeat the steps above starting with step 3 Rolling code programming To train a garage door opener or other rolling code devices with the rolling code feature follow these instructions after completing the Programming portion steps 1 through 6 of this text A second person may make the following training procedures quicker and easier Step 8 gt Locate training button on the garage door opener motor head unit Exact location and color of the button may vary by garage door opener brand Depending on manufacturer the training button may also be referred to as learn or smart button If there is difficulty locating the transmitting button refer to the garage door opener operator s manual Controls in detail Useful features Step 9 gt Press the training button on the ga rage door opener motor head unit The training light is activated You have 30 seconds to initiate the following two steps Step 10 gt Return to the vehicle and firmly press hold for 2 seconds and release the pro grammed signal transmitter button or Step 11 gt Press hold for 2 seconds and release same signal transmitter button a sec ond time to complete the training process gt gt Controls in detail Useful features gt F Gate operator Canadian programming While still holding down the signal Some garage door op
354. nance System U S vehicles or FSS Canada vehi cles will result in engine damage not covered by the Mercedes Benz Limited Warranty Please follow Maintenance System U S vehicles or FSS Canada vehi cles recommendations for scheduled oil changes Failure to do so will result in engine damage not covered by the Mercedes Benz Limited Warranty Engine oil additives Do not blend oil additives with engine oil They may damage the engine Damage or malfunctions resulting from blending oil additives are not covered by the Mercedes Benz Limited Warranty Air conditioning refrigerant R 134a HFC refrigerant and special PAG lubricating oil are used in the air conditioning system Never use R 12 CFC or mineral based lubricating oil Otherwise damage to the system will occur Technical data Fuels coolants lubricants etc Brake fluid During vehicle operation the boiling point of the brake fluid is continuously reduced through the absorption of moisture from the atmosphere A Under extremely strenuous operating condi tions this moisture content can lead to the formation of bubbles in the system thus re ducing the system s efficiency Warning Therefore the brake fluid must be replaced regularly Refer to your vehicle s Mainte nance Booklet for replacement interval Only brake fluid approved by Mercedes Benz is recommended An authorized Mercedes Benz Center will provide you with additional
355. nfirm appears in the multifunction display gt Press the reset button once more All functions of the submenu will reset to factory settings The settings you have changed will not be reset unless you confirm the action by pressing the reset button a second time After approximately five seconds the Settings menu reappears in the multifunction display Controls in detail Control system The table below shows what settings can Detailed instructions on making individual be changed within the various menus settings can be found on the following pages INSTRUMENT CLUSTER TIME DATE LIGHTING VEHICLE CONVENIENCE Selecting speedometer Setting time hours Setting daytime running Setting automatic lock Activate easy entry exit display mode lamp mode USA only ing feature Selecting language Setting time minutes Setting locator lighting Setting parking position for exterior rear view mirror Selecting display speed Setting the date month Exterior lamps delayed display or outside shut off temperature for the status line Selecting display speed Setting the date day Interior lighting delayed display or outside tem shut off perature for standard display Setting the date year Instrument cluster submenu Access the Instr cluster submenu via the Settings menu Use the Instr clus ter submenu to change the instrument cluster display settings The following functions are available Function
356. ng gt page 346 Winter driving instructions The most important rule for slippery or icy roads is to drive sensibly and to avoid abrupt acceleration braking and steering maneuvers Do not use the cruise control system under such conditions When the vehicle is in danger of skidding move gear selector lever to position N Try to keep the vehicle under control by cor rective steering action For information on driving with snow chains see Snow chains gt page 360 A On slippery road surfaces never downshift in order to obtain braking action This could result in drive wheel slip and reduced vehi cle control Your vehicle s ABS will not pre vent this type of control loss Warning Operation Driving instructions Road salts and chemicals can adversely af fect braking efficiency Increased pedal force may become necessary to produce the normal braking effect Depressing the brake pedal periodically when traveling at length on salt strewn roads can bring road salt impaired braking efficiency back to normal If the vehicle is parked after being driven on salt treated roads the braking efficien cy should be tested as soon as possible af ter driving is resumed A Make sure not to endanger any other road users when carrying out these braking ma neuvers Warning Operation Driving instructions Standing water Passenger compartment A If the vehicle becomes stuc
357. ng could cause the driver to lose control of the vehicle Warning When leaving the vehicle always remove the SmartKey or SmartKey with KEYLESS GO from the starter switch take it with you and lock the vehicle Even with the SmartKey or SmartKey with KEYLESS GO removed from the starter switch or the SmartKey with KEYLESS GO removed from the vehicle the steering wheel adjustment feature can be operated when the driver s door is open Therefore do not leave children unattended in the ve hicle or with access to an unlocked vehicle Unsupervised use of vehicle equipment may cause an accident and or serious personal injury Steering wheel adjustment The stalk for steering wheel adjustment is located on the lower left of steering column am willl S o P54 25 4678 31 1 Adjusting steering column in or out 2 Adjusting steering column up or down gt Switch on the ignition gt page 34 or gt Open the driver s door Getting started Adjusting Adjusting steering column in or out gt Move stalk forward or back in direction of arrow Q until a comfortable steer ing wheel position is reached with your arms slightly bent at the elbow Adjusting steering column up or down gt Move stalk up or down in direction of arrow 2 Make sure your legs can move freely and all the displays including malfunc tion and indicator lamps on the instrument cluster are clearly visible The memo
358. ng products and keep them out of reach of children While in operation even while parked your vehicle is subject to varying external influences which if gone unchecked can attack the paintwork as well as the underbody and cause lasting damage Such damage is caused not only by extreme and varying climatic conditions but also by e Air pollution e Road salt e far e Graveland stone chipping To avoid paint damage you should immediately remove e Grease and oil e Fuel e Coolant e Brake fluid e Bird droppings e Insects e Tree resins etc Frequent washing reduces and or elimi nates the aggressiveness and potency of the above adverse influences More frequent washings are necessary to deal with unfavorable conditions e near the ocean e in industrial areas smoke exhaust emissions e during winter operation You should check your vehicle from time to time for stone chipping or other damage Any damage should be repaired as soon as possible to prevent corrosion In doing so do not neglect the underbody of the vehicle A prerequisite for a thor ough check is a washing of the underbody followed by a thorough inspection Dam aged areas need to be re undercoated Your vehicle has been treated at the facto ry with a wax base rustproofing in the body cavities which will last for the lifetime of the vehicle Post production treatment is neither necessary nor recommended by Mercedes Benz because of
359. ng refrigerant 481 Air conditioning system see Climate control system Air conditioning Cooling 194 206 Air distribution 190 200 Air pressure see Tires Inflation pressure Air recirculation mode 192 203 Airvents 195 208 Air volume 190 201 Alarm system see Anti theft systems Alignment bolt vehicle tool kit 413 449 487 Anticorrosion antifreeze 484 485 Antiglare Rear view mirror 181 182 Antilock Brake System see ABS Anti theft systems 92 Anti theft alarm system 92 Immobilizer 92 Tow away alarm 94 Aquaplaning see Hydroplaning Armrest 281 282 283 Storage box 279 Ashtrays 284 Aspect ratio 355 ATF 326 AUDIO menu 145 Audio system 209 Button and soft key operation 212 CD changer 229 CD operation 227 Emergency calls 911 247 Operating and display elements 210 Operating audio system 209 Operating safety 209 Radio operation 217 Sound system 209 214 Switching on off 212 Telephone operation 209 233 Auto dimming Rear view mirror 182 Automatic central locking Control system 117 159 Automatic climate control see Climate control system Automatic headlamp mode see Headlamps Automatic lighting control Interior lighting 134 Automatic locking when driving 117 Automatic shift program 172 Automatic transmission 166 Accelerator position 170 Emergency operation Limp Home Mode 180 Gearranges 171 Gear selector lever 48 166 Gear selector lever position Gear selector lever One touch gearshifting 173 Gear
360. ng switch Q If both doors are closed the vehicle i locks You can open a locked door from the inside Open door only when conditions are safe to do so Unlocking gt Press central unlocking switch If the vehicle was previously centrally locked with the SmartKey or the SmartKey with KEYLESS GO it will not unlock using the central unlocking switch 2 The vehicle unlocks V Seats For information on seat adjustment see Adjusting gt page 37 Front seat active head restraints VAN For your protection drive only with properly positioned head restraints Warning Adjust head restraint so that the center of the head restraint supports the back of the head at eye level This will reduce the poten tial for injury to the head and neck in the event of an accident or similar situation Do not drive the vehicle without the seat head restraints Head restraints are intend ed to help reduce injuries during an accident You cannot remove the active head re straints on the driver s and passenger s seats For removal of the active head restraints we recommend that you contact an authorized Mercedes Benz Center Adjust the head restraint in such a way that it is as close to the head as possible For information on head restraint adjust ment see Seats gt page 37 For information on active head restraints see Active head restraints gt page 73 Controls i
361. ng that the ABS is in the regulating mode gt Keep firm and steady pressure on the brake pedal while experiencing the pulsation Continuous steady brake pedal pressure yields the advantages provided by the ABS namely braking power and the ability to steer the vehicle The pulsating brake pedal can be an indication of hazardous road conditions and functions as a reminder to take extra care while driving Emergency brake maneuver gt Keep continuous full pressure on the brake pedal A The ABS cannot prevent the natural laws of physics from acting on the vehicle nor can it increase braking or steering efficiency beyond that afforded by the condition of the vehicle brakes and tires or the traction af forded The ABS cannot prevent accidents including those resulting from excessive speed in turns following another vehicle too closely or hydroplaning Only a safe atten tive and skillful driver can prevent acci dents The capabilities of an ABS equipped vehicle must never be exploited in a reck less or dangerous manner which could jeop ardize the user s safety or the safety of others Warning For more information see Practical hints gt page 373 BAS The Brake Assist System BAS operates in emergency situations If you apply the brakes very quickly the BAS automatically provides full brake boost thereby poten tially reducing the braking distance Apply continuous full braking pressur
362. ng the following settings STANDARD conventional stereo sound SURROUND the sound is set for better three dimensional acoustic character The sound setting is reset depending on the sound source activated e Radio mode STANDARD e CD AUX mode SURROUND e Telephone SPEECH The radio switches back to the stan dard radio menu eight seconds after the last soft key is pressed or Press RES soft key briefly the respec tive sound function is reset to its center level Press and hold RES soft key until RESET appears in the display The sound settings for bass and treble are returned to their center level and the volume is set to a predefined level istics Returning sound functions to factory settings Vehicles with sound system e SPEECH the sound is optimized for the spoken word The sound setting is reset depending on the sound source activated gt Press button to call up settings menu in the display gt Press button repeatedly until e Radio mode STANDARD STANDARD SURROUND or SPEECH appears CD AUX mode SURROUND in the display e Telephone SPEECH gt Press lt i or 32 soft key repeatedly until the desired sound setting has The radio switches back to the stan been reached dard radio menu four seconds after the last soft key is pressed The sound is set accordingly Sees or gt Press RES soft key briefly Controls in detail Audio system Adjusting volume distribution
363. ngine 490 P Paintwork Cleaning 365 Panic alarm 86 Parcel net Front passenger footwell 280 Parking 57 310 On hills 57 310 Over combustible materials Parking assist see Parktronic system Canada only Parking brake 50 57 Message in display 396 Warning sounds 51 57 310 Parking lamps 127 Message in display 406 Replacing bulbs 438 439 441 442 Parking position Exterior rear view mirrors 126 161 183 Parktronic system Canada only 269 Cleaning system sensors 369 Malfunction 272 Range of the sensors 270 Switching on off 272 Warning indicators 271 Warning sounds 271 272 Parts service 466 PASS AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp see Front passenger front air bag off indicator lamp Passenger compartment Electrical outlet 287 Interior lighting 134 Interior rear view mirror 43 Main fuse box 463 Parcel net in front passenger footwell 280 Storage bags rear side of the front seats 280 314 Passenger safety see Occupant safety Pedals 307 Phone see Telephone Plastic and rubber parts Cleaning 371 Poly V belt drive 490 Layout 469 Positions Memory function see Seats Power Power assistance 307 Power seat see Seats Power Power train 490 Power washer 365 Power windows 249 Cleaning 370 Convenience closing feature 253 Express opening closing 251 Opening with soft top switch 254 Operating 249 Rear side windows Blocking operation 85 Summer opening feature 252 Synchronizing 251 Practical hints 373 Premium unleaded
364. ning The battery has insufficient voltage The battery has insufficient voltage Practical hints What to do if Possible solution gt Stop immediately in a safe location or as soon as itis safe to do so and check the poly V belt If it is broken gt Do not continue to drive Otherwise the engine will overheat due to an inoperative water pump which may result in damage to the engine Notify an authorized Mercedes Benz Center If it is intact gt Drive immediately to the nearest authorized Mercedes Benz Center gt Start the engine gt page 48 gt Turn off unnecessary electrical con sumers Practical hints What to do if Display symbol Display message Possible cause consequence Possible solution O Brake wear The brake pads have reached their wear Have the brake pads replaced as soon Visit workshop limit as possible USA only Release parking You are driving with the parking brake set Release the parking brake Canada only brake gt page 50 Brake fluid There is insufficient brake fluid in the res Risk of accident Stop the vehicle in a Visit workshop ervolr safe location as soon as possible and notify an authorized Mercedes Benz Center Do not add brake fluid This will not solve the problem ng A la y Sarmnine If you find that the brake fluid in the Brake pad thickness must be visually 7 r I brake fluid reservoir has fallen to the checked by a qualified tec
365. ning a cold engine at high The low beam headlamp indicator engine speeds may shorten the service lamp in the instrument cluster life of the engine s Low beam headlamps Pomem RAE A For more information on headlamps see Lighting gt page 127 The exterior lamp switch is located on the High beam Warning AN dashboard to the left of the steering wheel f oNN The combination switch is located on the left of the steering column It is dangerous to shift the gear selector lever out of P or N if the engine speed is higher than idle speed If your foot is not firmly on the brake pedal the vehicle could accelerate quickly forward or in reverse You could lose control of the vehicle and hit someone or something Only shift into gear when the engine is idling normally and when your right foot is firmly on the brake pedal Exterior lamp switch For more information on driving see Driv Off ing instructions gt page 307 2 Low beam headlamps on Combination switch 1 High beam 2 High beam flasher gt Pushcombination switch in direction of arrow 1 The high beam headlamp indicator lamp E in the instrument cluster comes on gt page 24 Turn signals The combination switch is located on the left of the steering column C Turn signals right 2 Turn signals left gt Press combination switch in direction of arrow C or 2 The corresponding turn signal indicator la
366. not release this button until it has been successful ly trained Upon completion of programming the integrated remote control make sure you retain the hand held remote con trol that came with the garage door opener gate operator or other device You may need it for use in other vehi cles for future programming of an integrated remote control or simply for continued use as a hand held remote control to operate the respective device in other situations Reprogramming a single signal trans mitter button To program a device using a signal trans mitter button previously trained follow these steps gt Switch on the ignition gt page 36 gt Press and hold the desired signal transmitter button or Do not release the button gt The indicator lamp Q will begin to flash after 20 seconds Without releas ing the signal transmitter button pro ceed with programming starting with step 3 Controls in detail Useful features Operation of integrated remote control gt Switch on the ignition gt page 36 gt Select and press the appropriate integrated signal transmitter button or to activate the remote controlled device The integrated remote control trans mitter continues to send the signal as long as the button is pressed up to 20 seconds Controls in detail Useful features Erasing the integrated remote control memory Programming tips e Wh
367. now press the KEYLESS GO see Starting with KEYLESS GO start stop button once the power sup gt page 49 ply is again switched off Vv Adjusting Warning All seat head restraint steering wheel and rear view mirror adjustments as well as fas tening of seat belts must be done before the vehicle is put into motion Seats Warning A N Do not adjust the driver s seat while driving Adjusting the seat while driving could cause the driver to lose control of the vehicle Never ride in a moving vehicle with the seat back in an excessively reclined position as this can be dangerous You could slide un der the seat belt in a collision If you slide under it the belt would apply force at the ab domen or neck That could cause serious or fatal injuries The seat back and seat belts provide the best restraint when the wearer is in a nearly upright position and belts are properly positioned on the body Your seat must be adjusted so that you can correctly fasten your seat belt gt page 45 Never place hands under the seat or near any moving parts while a seat is being adjusted Warning VAN When leaving the vehicle always remove the SmartKey or SmartKey with KEYLESS GO from the starter switch take it with you and lock the vehicle Even with the SmartKey or SmartKey with KEYLESS GO removed from the starter switch or the SmartKey with KEYLESS GO removed from the vehicle the power seats can
368. ntenna must be approved by Mercedes Benz Please contact an autho rized Mercedes Benz Center for informa tion on the installation of an approved external antenna Refer to the radio trans mitter operation instructions regarding use of an external antenna Warning A N Please do not forget that your primary re sponsibility is to drive the vehicle A driver s attention to the road must always be his her primary focus when driving For your safety and the safety of others we rec ommend that you pull over to a safe location and stop before placing or taking a tele phone call If you choose to use the telephone while driving please use the hands free device and only use the telephone when road weather and traffic conditions permit Some jurisdictions prohibit the driver from using a cellular telephone while driving a vehicle Only operate the audio system or CO MAND Cockpit Management and Data System if road weather an traffic condi tions permit Observe all legal requirements Bear in mind that at a speed of just 30 mph approximately 50 km h your vehicle is covering a distance of 44 feet approximately 14 m every second You can take and place telephone calls using the and buttons on the steering wheel To carry out other tele phone functions use the control system gt page 163 See separate operating manual for instruc tions on how to use the telephone Tele Aid The initial activation of
369. ntification labels 1 1 hy Y s gt gt a Sw C Certification label includes 2 Vehicle Identification Number VIN Paintwork code P60 00 2706 31 includes both federal and California certification exhaust emission standards 4 Vacuum line routing diagram label VIN visible lower edge of windshield 6 Engine number engraved on engine When ordering parts please specify ve hicle identification and engine numbers Technical data Layout of poly V belt drive Vv Layout of poly V belt drive CLK 350 CLK 500 CLK 55 AMG a P13 22 2096 31 6 5 4 P13 22 2040 31 1 Idler pulley 1 Automatic belt tensioner 2 Idler pulley 2 Power steering pump 3 Automatic belt tensioner 3 Air conditioning compressor 4 Power steering pump 4 Crankshaft Air conditioning compressor Coolant pump 6 Crankshaft 6 Generator alternator 7 Coolant pump 7 Idler pulley Generator alternator Technical data Engine Model Engine Mode of operation No of cylinders Bore Stroke Total piston displacement Compression ratio Output acc to SAE J 1349 Maximum torque acc to SAE J 1349 Maximum engine speed Firing order Poly V belt CLK 350 209 456 272 4 stroke engine gasoline injec tion 6 3 66 in 92 90 mm 3 39 in 86 00 mm 213 5 cu in 3498 cm 10 5 1 268 hp 6000 rpm 200 kW 6000 rpm 258 b ft 2400 5000 rpm 35
370. nu Press button A or Ref repeatedly until the message Set date year appears in the multifunction display The selection marker is on the year setting Set date year T 05 14 E 72 F 149 3 MI P54 32 3093 31 Press button or E to set the year Controls in detail Control system Lighting submenu Setting daytime running lamp mode USA only Lamp circuit Access the Lighting submenu via the Set head amp tings menu Use the Lighting submenu Q D h he lighti i a l anua stan toc anget e lamp and lighting settings on E E E EE E A MEEN _constant your vehicle 149 8 MI countries where the daytime running ze pas 209084 The following functions are available lamp mode is mandatory and therefore jak gt Press button or E to select y in a constant mode i Function Page manual operation manual or daytime Setting daytime running lamp 156 running lamp mode constant activat gt Move the selection marker with mode USA only button or BEBE to the Lighting Setting locator lighting 157 submenu With daytime running lamp mode activated and the exterior lamp switch in P iii delayed 158 gt Press button AM or ESA repeatedly Josien MO or ee ihe ow bean dil until the message anp bo headlamps are switched on when the Interior lighting delayed 159 headlamp appears in the multifunction engine is running switch off display pei In low ambient light conditions the a Marker is OMNE Current fo
371. ocation and e remove SmartKey from starter switch or e turn off the engine by pressing the KEYLESS GO start stop button and open the driver s door with the driver s door open starter switch is in posi tion 0 same as with SmartKey removed from starter switch before attempting to remove any blockage Getting started Driving e Remove blockage e Turn the windshield wipers on again If windshield wipers fail to function at all in combination switch position l e set the combination switch to the next higher wiper speed e have the windshield wipers checked at the nearest authorized Mercedes Benz Center Getting started Driving Problems while driving The engine runs erratically and misfires e An ignition cable may be damaged e The engine electronics may not be op erating properly e Unburned gasoline may have entered the catalytic converter and damaged it gt Give very little gas Have the problem repaired by an au thorized Mercedes Benz Center as soon as possible The coolant temperature is above 248 F 120 C The coolant is too hot and is no longer cooling the engine gt Stop the vehicle in a safe location as soon as possible and turn off the en gine Allow engine and coolant to cool gt Check the coolant level and add coolant if necessary gt page 327 In case of accident If the vehicle is leaking gasoline gt Do not start the engine under
372. ocket for parking and standing gt Turn bulb holder G with the bulb coun Turn housing cover 2 counterclock wise and remove it lamp bulb terclockwise and remove it gt Pull the bulb at its socket out of bulb Low beam bulb holder gt Turn housing cover Q counterclock Insert the new bulb so that its socket P82 10 2905 31 wise and remove it locates in the recess of bulb holder Housing cover for low beam headlamp Turn bulb holder with the bulb coun and is level to it 2 Housing cover for high beam head terclockwise and remove it gt Reinsert bulb holder with the bulb in ga Pale d a wimp gt Pull the bulb at its socket out of bulb the lamp and turn clockwise holder gt Align housing cover 2 and turn it clockwise Front turn signal lamp bulb gt Turn bulb socket 3 counterclockwise and remove it Press gently onto the bulb and turn counterclockwise out of bulb socket 3 Press the new bulb gently into bulb socket 3 and turn clockwise until it engages Place bulb socket 3 back into the lamp and turn it clockwise Parking and standing lamp bulb gt v v vy iv Turn housing cover 2 counterclock wise and remove it Pull out bulb socket with the bulb Pull the bulb out of the bulb socket Press the new bulb into bulb socket Press bulb socket 6 back into the lamp Align housing cover 2 and turn it clockwise Front lamps Bi Xenon type
373. of the arrows If sun visor is disengaged from T mounting with mirror cover Close mirror cover if open before open mirror lamp Q will switch off you disengage the sun visor from mounting 3 and pivot it to the side Rear window defroster The rear window defroster uses a large amount of power To keep the battery drain to a minimum switch off the defroster as soon as the rear window is clear The defroster is automatically deactivated after approximately 6 to 17 minutes of operation depending on the outside temperature Activating gt Press button EAJ or in the climate control panel gt page 187 or automatic climate control panel gt page 197 The indicator lamp on the button comes on Deactivating gt Press button Raj or again The indicator lamp on the button goes out Controls in detail Good visibility A Any accumulation of snow and ice should be removed from the rear window before driving Visibility could otherwise be impaired endangering you and others Warning If the rear window defroster switches off too soon and the indicator lamp starts flashing this means that too many electrical consumers are operating simultaneously and there is insufficient voltage in the battery The system responds automatically by deactivating the rear window defroster As soon as the battery has sufficient voltage the rear window defroster automatically switches on again
374. of the passenger compartment You should raise or lower the temperature setting in small incre ments preferably starting at 72 F 22 C The climate control will adjust to the set temperature as fast as possible Increasing gt Turn temperature control and or 3 gt page 187 slightly clock wise The climate control system will corre spondingly adjust the interior air tem perature Decreasing gt Turn temperature control and or 3 gt page 187 slightly coun terclockwise The climate control system will corre spondingly adjust the interior air tem perature Adjusting air distribution Use air distribution control gt page 187 to adjust the air distribution The following symbols are located on the controls Symbol Function Directs air through the center side and rear passenger compartment air vents Directs air to the windshield and the side defroster vents ted Directs air into the entire vehicle interior vel Directs air to the footwells gt Press button RA gt page 187 The indicator lamp on the button goes out The automatic air distribution is switched off The air distribution is controlled according to the selected control setting gt Turn air distribution control gt page 187 to the desired symbol Opening center and side air vents gt Turn thumbwheels and gt page 186 upward The side air vents Q and G and cen ter ai
375. ol CLK 350 Automatic climate control CLK 500 CLK 55 AMG Audio system Power windows Soft top Driving systems Loading Useful features Controls in detail Locking and unlocking In the Controls in detail section you will For more information on locking and find detailed information on how to oper unlocking see Getting started ate the equipment installed in your vehicle gt page 32 and gt page 57 If you are already familiar with the basic functions of your vehicle this section will SmartKey be of particular interest to you Your vehicle comes supplied with two SmartKeys each with remote control and a removable mechanical key To quickly familiarize yourself with the ba sic functions of the vehicle refer to the Getting started section of this manual The corresponding page numbers are giv The locking tabs for the mechanical key P80 35 2087 31 SmartKey with remote control en at the beginning of each segment portion of the two SmartKeys are a different color to help distinguish each Lock button SmartKey unit Opening button for trunk 3 Mechanical key locking tab The SmartKey provides an extended oper D rilec bittor ating range To prevent theft however it is advisable to only unlock the vehicle when you are in close proximity to it Battery check lamp Panic button gt page 86 The SmartKey centrally locks and unlocks e the doors
376. ol CLK 500 CLK 55 AMG Setting the temperature Use temperature controls and 43 for the left side or and Q for the right side gt page 197 to separately adjust the air temperature on each side of the passenger compartment You should raise or lower the temperature setting in small incre ments preferably starting at 72 F 22 C The automatic climate control will adjust to the set temperature as fast as possible Increasing gt Press and hold temperature button and or gt page 197 until the de sired temperature appears in the dis play of the control panel gt page 197 The automatic climate control system will correspondingly adjust the interior air temperature Decreasing gt Press and hold temperature button 11 and or 3 gt page 197 until the de sired temperature appears in the dis play of the control panel gt page 197 The automatic climate control system will correspondingly adjust the interior air temperature Adjusting air distribution Use the air distribution controls G and gt page 197 to separately adjust the air distribution on each side of the passenger compartment The following symbols are located on the controls Symbol Function id Directs air to the windshield and the side defroster vents Directs air into the entire vehicle interior Directs air to the footwells Directs air through the center side and rear passenger com
377. ol display You are attempting to drive with one or more doors open Possible solution gt Check the fuel cap gt page 318 If it is not closed properly gt Close the fuel cap If it is closed properly gt gt Have the fuel system checked by an authorized Mercedes Benz Center Continue driving with added caution Visit an authorized Mercedes Benz Center as soon as possible Have the electronic systems checked by an authorized Mercedes Benz Cen ter Have the electronic systems checked by an authorized Mercedes Benz Cen ter Close the doors Practical hints What to do if Display symbol Display message Possible cause consequence Possible solution USA only The engine oil level is too low gt Addengine oil gt page 325 and check Add 1 qt engine oil the engine oil level gt page 323 at next refueling Canada only Add 1 liter engine oi at next refueling Engine oil level You have added too much engine oil gt Have oil siphoned or drained off Ob Reduce oil level There is a risk of damaging the engine or serve all legal requirements with re the catalytic converter spect to its disposal Engine oil level There is no oil in the engine There isa gt Carefully bring the vehicle to a halt as stop engine off danger of engine damage soon as possible gt Turn off the engine gt Addengine oil gt page 325 and check the engine oil level gt page 323
378. ollution may require replacement of the filter before its scheduled interval A clogged filter will reduce the air volume to the interior The air conditioning will not engage no cooling if the A C mode is deactivated gt page 194 If the vehicle interior is hot ventilate the interior before driving off see Warning A Warning A N Summer opening feature gt page 252 The climate control will When operating the climate control the air that enters the passenger compartment Follow the recommended settings for heat ing and cooling given on the following pag through the air vents can be very hot or very cold depending on the set temperature This may cause burns or frostbite on unpro tected skin in the immediate area of the air vents Always keep sufficient distance be tween unprotected parts of the body and the air vents If necessary use the air distribu tion control gt page 187 to direct the air to air vents in the vehicle interior that are not in the immediate area of unprotected skin es Otherwise the windows could fog up impairing visibility and endangering you and others then adjust the interior temperature to the set value much faster Keep the air intake grille in front of the windshield free of snow and debris Do not obstruct air flow by placing objects on the air flow through exhaust slots below the rear window Controls in detail Climate control CLK 350 Dea
379. olts and tighten them come off This could cause an accident slightly Warning VAN Make sure to use the correct wheel bolts Only use Genuine equipment Mercedes Benz wheel bolts Other wheel bolts may come loose Do not tighten the wheel bolts when the ve hicle is raised Otherwise the vehicle could fall off the jack Lowering the vehicle gt Lower vehicle by turning crank coun terclockwise until the full weight of the vehicle is resting on the ground Remove the jack Practical hints Flat tire Warning A N Have the tightening torque checked after changing a wheel The wheels could come loose if they are not tightened to a torque of 80 Ib ft 110 Nm Before storing the jack it should be fully di collapsed with handle folded in storage Wheel bolts position gt page 415 gt Tighten the five wheel bolts evenly gt Store the jack and the other vehicle following the diagonal sequence tools in the trunk illustrated 1 to G until all bolts are tight Observe a tightening torque of 80 Ib ft 110 Nm Practical hints Flat tire MOExtended system The MOExtended system allows you to continue driving your vehicle even if there is a total loss of pressure in one or more tires You may only use the MOExtended system in conjunction with the Run Flat Indicator The maximum distance in emergency mode depends on the vehicle s load It is 30 miles 50 km if t
380. on 2ookna 2vesi_ ELT orere r2szo0is zona consi asl P40 00 27064 31 1 Tire and Loading Information placard with recommended cold tire inflation pressures Placard Example A lists the recommend ed cold tire inflation pressures for maxi mum loaded vehicle weight The tire inflation pressures listed apply to the tires installed as original equipment Operation Tires and wheels Placard Example B VEHICLE TIRE INFORMATION VEHIq LE CAPACITY WEIGHT KG IELBS SEATI IG CAPACITY zzz 1 Vehicle Tire Information placard with recommended cold tire inflation pressures Placard Example B lists the recommend ed cold tire inflation pressures for maxi mum loaded vehicle weight The tire inflation pressures listed apply to the tires installed as original equipment Placard Example B may list recommended cold tire inflation pressures for different vehicle loads Important notes on tire inflation pressure A If the tire inflation pressure repeatedly drops Warning e Check the tires for punctures from foreign objects e Check to see whether air is leaking from the valves or from around the rim Tire temperature and tire inflation pressure are also increased while driving depending on the driving speed and the tire load If you will be driving your vehicle at high speeds of 100 mph 160 km h or higher where it is legal and conditions allow consult the placard on the in
381. on for more than 30 seconds a call to the Response Center is initiated automatically by the Tele Aid system gt page 289 provided Tele Aid service was subscribed to and properly activated and that necessary cellular service and GPS coverage are available Arming tow away alarm gt Lock the vehicle with the SmartKey or KEYLESS GO The tow away alarm is automatically armed after about 30 seconds When you unlock the vehicle the tow away protection disarms automatically The tow away alarm remains disarmed until you lock the vehicle again Disarming tow away alarm To prevent triggering the tow away alarm switch off the tow away alarm feature before towing the vehicle or when parking on a surface subject to movement such as a ferry or auto train 1 Tow away alarm off switch 2 Indicator lamp P5 4 75 4748 31 Switch off the ignition and remove the SmartKey You cannot disarm the tow away alarm while the ignition is switched on Press switch 1 Indicator lamp 2 in switch Q comes on briefly Exit and lock the vehicle with the SmartKey or vehicles with KEYLESS GO the lock button on each outside door handle or trunk The tow away alarm remains disarmed until you lock the vehicle again Controls in detail Locking and unlocking Seats Memory function Lighting Instrument cluster Control system Automatic transmission Good visibility Climate contr
382. on the ignition gt page 36 SCHON O Pull at top of cover gt Remove the floormats Flip cover Q to the left and insert electrical plug cigarette lighter type The power outlet can be used to accommodate electrical consumers e g air pump auxiliary lamps up to a maximum of 180 W Installing gt Lay down the floormat gt Press the floormat eyelets 4 onto re tainer pins G in direction of arrow Controls in detail Useful features Warning Whenever you are using floormats make sure there is enough clearance and that the floormats are securely fastened Floormats should always be securely fas tened using eyelets 4 and retainer pins Before driving off check that the floormats are securely in place and adjust them if nec essary A loose floormat could slip and hinder proper functioning of the pedals Telephone Warning A N Never operate radio transmitters equipped with a built in or attached antenna i e with out being connected to an external antenna from inside the vehicle while the engine is running Doing so could lead to a malfunc tion of the vehicle s electronic system pos sibly resulting in an accident and or serious personal injury Radio transmitters such as a portable tele phone or a citizens band unit should only be used inside the vehicle if they are con nected to an antenna that is installed on the outside of the vehicle The external a
383. one time only basis An air bag or ETD that is deployed must be replaced Do not pass belts over sharp edges They could tear Do not make any modification that could change the effectiveness of the belts No modifications of any kind may be made to any components or wiring of the SRS This includes changing or removing any component or part of the SRS the installation of additional trim material seat covers badges etc over the steering wheel hub front passenger front air bag cover outboard sides of the front seat backrests door frame trims or rear side trim panels and installation of additional electrical electronic equipment on or near SRS components and wiring Keep area between air bags and occupants free from objects e g packages purses umbrellas etc Do not bleach or dye seat belts as this may severely weaken them In a crash they may not be able to provide ade quate protection Air bag system components will be hot after an air bag has inflated Do not touch Never place your feet on the instrument panel dashboard or on the seat Always keep both feet on the floor in front of the seat In addition improper repair work on the SRS creates a risk of rendering the SRS inoperative or causing unintended air bag deployment Work on the SRS must therefore only be performed by qualified technicians Contact an authorized Mercedes Benz Center For your protection and the protection of others when scrap
384. onfuse the maintenance service indicator with the engine oil level indicator EA Resetting the maintenance service indicator In the event that the maintenance service on your vehicle is not carried out by an authorized Mercedes Benz Center you can have the maintenance service indicator reset The automotive maintenance facility carrying out the maintenance service will find the information for resetting the maintenance service indicator in the maintenance relevant information for your vehicle Such information is available from either your authorized Mercedes Benz Center or directly from Mercedes Benz Operation Maintenance If the maintenance service indicator was inadvertently reset have an authorized Mercedes Benz Center correct it Only reset if the proper maintenance service has been performed Resetting the system without performing the proper service as called for by the maintenance service indicator will result in engine damage and or other vehicle damage not covered by the Mercedes Benz Limited Warranty Operation Vehicle care Cleaning and care of vehicle A Many cleaning products can be hazardous Some are poisonous others are flammable Always follow the instructions on the partic ular container Always open your vehicle s doors or windows when cleaning the inside Warning Never use fluids or solvents that are not designed for cleaning your vehicle Always lock away cleani
385. ontinuously pull on the soft top switch the windows will close However the windows can also be closed opened later on for more informa tion see Opening and closing all side win dows with the soft top switch gt page 254 or see Opening and closing the windows gt page 249 For safety reasons the soft top cannot be opened while driving Make sure the soft top is dry before you open it Otherwise water may enter the trunk interior To prevent mildew the soft top must be dry before lowering it into the storage compartment Do not lower a frozen soft top until thawed and dry Lowering a frozen soft top may result in damage not covered by the Mercedes Benz Limited Warranty Warning A N Do not place anything on the soft top com partment cover The soft top compartment cover must never be used by any persons as a seat bench Raising of the roll bars could result in seri ous personal injury Controls in detail Soft top Closing the soft top 1 Soft top closing Before pressing the soft top switch you must make sure e the parking brake is engaged gt page 50 e the trunk lid is closed e the ignition is switched on gt page 36 Controls in detail Soft top gt Press the soft top switch as indicated by the arrow Q until the soft top is completely closed and locked During the closing procedure the multi function display shows the message Top in ope
386. ontrol system 139 487 Functions 143 Multifunction display 140 Multifunction steering wheel 140 Resetting to factory default 148 Control system menus 142 143 489 AUDIO 145 NAV 146 Settings 148 Settings Submenus 149 Standard display 144 Submenus 141 TEL 163 Trip computer 161 Vehicle status message memory 146 Control system submenus 141 143 150 Last stored speed Displays Convenience 160 Resume function 268 Digital speedometer 144 Instrument cluster 151 Slower speed 268 Maintenance service indicator 361 Lighting 156 Cup holder 283 Messages in display 383 Time Date 153 Curb weight 355 Multifunction display 140 Vehicle 159 Customer Assistance Center see CAC Outside temperature 138 Controller Area Network see CAN system D Symbol messages 395 412 Coolant 327 484 Date 153 Text messages 385 393 Adding 327 Anticorrosion antifreeze mixing ratio and quantity 484 Vehicle status message memory 147 Vehicle status messages see Multifunction display messages Date Setting 154 155 Daytime running lamp mode 129 Capacities 479 peut We Distance to empty Range l Deep water see Standing water i Checking coolant level 327 Trip computer 161 Defogging Door Control panel 30 Entry lamps 135 Handle 30 107 Locking unlocking KEYLESS GO 33 60 103 Locking unlocking SmartKey 32 60 98 Messages in display 400 Opening from inside outside 107 Remote door unlock Tele Aid 295 Unlocking Mechanical key 419 DOT 355
387. operate in the presence of water sprayed on the windshield and windshield wipers may be damaged as a result Intermittent wiping interval is dependent on wetness of windshield gt Turn the combination switch to position I After the initial wipe pauses between wipes are automatically controlled by the rain sensor Intermittent wiping is interrupted when the vehicle is at a standstill and a door is opened This protects persons get ting into or out of the vehicle from be ing sprayed Intermittent wiping will be continued when e all doors are closed and e the gear selector lever is in position DorR or e the wiper setting is changed using the combination switch Single wipe gt Press the combination switch briefly in direction of arrow Q to the resistance point The windshield wipers wipe one time without washer fluid Wiping with windshield washer fluid gt Press the combination switch in direc tion of arrow Q past the resistance point The windshield wipers operate with washer fluid To prevent smears on the windshield wipe with windshield washer fluid every now and then even when it is raining For information on filling up the washer reservoir see Windshield washer system and headlamp cleaning system gt page 329 If anything blocks the windshield wipers leaves snow etc switch them off immediately e For safety reasons stop the vehicle in a safe l
388. or hydroplaning Only a safe attentive and skillful driver can prevent accidents The The ESP should not be switched off during normal driving other than in the circum stances described below Disabling of the system will reduce vehicle stability in stan dard driving maneuvers e the vehicle is being towed with the front axle raised capabilities of an ESP equipped vehicle Active braking action through the ESP Do not switch off the ESP when a Minis must never be exploited in a reckless or dan may otherwise seriously damage the pare or collapsible tire is mounted gerous manner which could jeopardize the brake system user s safety or the safety of others To improve the vehicle s traction turn off a gt the ESP in driving situations where it The ESP will only function properly if would be advantageous to have the drive you use wheels of the recommended wheels spin and thus cut into surfaces for tire size better grip such as e when driving with snow chains For more information see Practical hints gt page 373 e in deep snow e in sand or gravel Turn on the ESP immediately if the aforementioned circumstances do not apply anymore When you switch off the ESP the ESP does not stabilize the vehicle the engine output is not limited which allows the drive wheels to spin and thus cut into surfaces for better grip the traction control will still brake a spinning wheel the ESP continues
389. or Octane Number The Motor Octane Number for gasoline as determined by a standardized meth od It is an indication of a gasoline s ability to resist undesired detonation knocking The average of both the MON Motor Octane Number and gt RON Research Octane Number is posted at the pump also known as ANTI KNOCK INDEX MOE Overspeed range Mercedes Benz Original Extended Engine speeds within the red marking equipment tires on the tachometer dial Avoid this en Tires with limited run flat characteris gine speed range as it may result in se tics The MOExtended system allows rious engine damage that is not you to continue driving your vehicle covered by the Mercedes Benz Limited even if there is a total loss of pressure Warranty In one or more tires Poly V belt drive Multifunction display Drives engine components alternator Display field in the speedometer used AC compressor etc from the engine to present information provided by the Powertrain COTOS ENN Collective term designating all Multifunction steering wheel components used to generate and Steering wheel with buttons for operat transmit motive power to the drive ing the control system axles including Normal occupant weight e engine page 339 e clutch torque converter OCS es eet ut e transmission Occupant Classification System The system automatically turns the e transfer case front passenger front air bag on or off e drive shaft based on the class
390. or cleaning soft top or wind screen never gt Brush the dry top with a soft bristled brush e gasoline Brush top always from front to rear e thinner Wet cleaning e tar and stain removers gt Brush the top with a soft bristled e glass cleaner brush Wash with clear water or with a mild detergent and an ample supply of luke warm water by wiping with a soft bris tled brush or sponge from front to rear Then rinse thoroughly with clear water e similar organic solvents They will cause damage which is not cov ered by the Mercedes Benz Limited Warranty Wash the top only when heavily soiled If only parts of the top have been washed wet the entire top and allow it to air dry be fore lowering it into the storage compart ment In general regular spraying or cleaning with clear water is sufficient to keep the soft top clean Ornamental moldings For regular cleaning and care of ornamen tal moldings use a damp cloth Do not use chrome cleaner on orna mental moldings Although ornamental moldings may have chrome appear ance they could be made of anodized aluminum that will be damaged when cleaned with chrome cleaner Instead use a damp cloth to clean those orna mental moldings For very dirty ornamental moldings of which you are sure are chrome plated use a chrome cleaner If in doubt whether an ornamental molding is chrome plated contact an authorized Mercedes Benz Center Headlamp
391. or other steel rims The use of any wheel bolts other than wheel bolts 2 for the Minispare wheel will physically damage the vehicle s brakes Warning A N Make sure to use the original length wheel bolts when remounting the original wheel after it has been repaired Y Unlocking locking in an emergency Unlocking the vehicle If you are unable to unlock the vehicle with the SmartKey or KEYLESS GO open the driver s door and the trunk using the mechanical key 5 0 Unlocking and opening the driver s door and or the trunk with the mechanical key will trigger the anti theft alarm system 2 Mechanical key To cancel the alarm do one of the following arrow Press button sa onthe Slide mechanical key out of the SmartKey housing e Insert the SmartKey in the starter switch Vehicles with KEYLESS GO e Pull the outside door handle e Press the KEYLESS GO start stop button gt page 35 C Mechanical key locking tab gt Move locking tab Q in direction of Practical hints Unlocking locking in an emergency Unlocking the driver s door P80 20 2390 31 P80 00 2087 31 1 Unlocking gt Insert the mechanical key into the driver s door lock until it stops gt Turn the mechanical key counterclock wise to position Q The driver s door is unlocked Practical hints Unlocking locking in an emergency Unlocking the trunk gt Insert the mechanical key into t
392. ose items will be thrown around inside the vehicle and cause injury to vehicle occupants unless the items are securely fastened in the vehicle The trunk is the preferred place to carry objects For more information see Winter driving gt page 359 Driving abroad Abroad there is an extensive Mercedes Benz service network at your disposal If you plan to drive into areas which are not listed in the index of your Mercedes Benz Center directory you should request pertinent information from an authorized Mercedes Benz Center Control and operation of radio trans mitters COMAND radio and telephone VAN Please do not forget that your primary re sponsibility is to drive the vehicle safely Only operate the COMAND Cockpit Man agement and Data System radio or tele phone if road weather and traffic conditions permit Warning Bear in mind that at a speed of just 30 mph approximately 50 km h your vehicle is covering a distance of 44 feet approximately 14 m every second Observe all legal requirements Operation Driving instructions Telephones and two way radios A Never operate radio transmitters equipped with a built in or attached antenna i e with out being connected to an external antenna from inside the vehicle while the engine is running Doing so could lead to a malfunc tion of the vehicle s electronic system pos sibly resulting in an accident and or serious
393. ot il Possible cause consequence The front passenger front airbag The system is malfunctioning off indicator lamp does not illu minate and or does not remain illuminated with the weight of a typical 12 month old child in a standard child restraint or less on the front passenger seat weight of a typical 12 month old child in a standard child restraint or less on the front passenger seat do not transport a child on the front passenger seat until the system has been repaired Suggested solution gt Make sure that there is nothing be tween seat cushion and child seat and check installation of the child seat Make sure that no objects applying supplemental weight onto the seat are present If the front passenger front air bag off indicator lamp remains out have the system checked as soon as possible by an authorized Mercedes Benz Center Do not transport a child on the front passenger seat until the sys tem has been repaired Read and observe messages in the multifunction display and follow cor rective steps gt page 389 Vehicle status messages in the multifunction display Warning and malfunction messages appear in the multifunction display located in the instrument cluster Certain warning and malfunction messag es are accompanied by an audible signal Address these messages accordingly and follow the additional instructions given in this Operator s Manual Selecting the vehicle status
394. ound adjustment gt page 213 Placing a call Entering a telephone number and starting the dialing process PR 60 1556 31 gt Enter desired telephone number using buttons EEE to Rg The number can have up to 32 digits but only twelve of these are visible in the display Controls in detail Audio system gt If necessary correct number entered with the CLR soft key Press soft key briefly to delete the last digit entered press soft key and hold to delete the complete number gt After correct telephone number has been entered press button If the telephone number has been saved together with a name in the tele phone book the name will appear in the display Phone book The numbers stored in the phone book of the telephone can be called up either by name or number In addition incoming calls are stored in the phone book Controls in detail Audio system This is only possible however when the call information transmitted in cludes the number of the person call ing If the telephone number is not transmitted NO NUMBER will be stored in the phone book Searching and calling up telephone book entries by name You can access your mobile tele phone s phone book using the audio system You can access both the main entries and the sub entries of your phone book CLER MUM RC Pe2 60 4559 31 or or Press MEM soft key or press WN or Bg Press desired
395. ow ambient lighting conditions may result in an accident The automatic headlamp feature is only an aid to the driver The driver is responsible for the operation of the vehicle s lights at all times gt Turn the exterior lamp switch to position Bag With the SmartKey in starter switch position 1 or the KEYLESS GO start stop button pressed once only the parking lamps will switch on and off automatically When the engine is running the low beam headlamps the tail and parking lamps the license plate lamps and the side marker lamps will switch on and off automatically Daytime running lamp mode gt Turn the exterior lamp switch to position WJ or Big When the engine is running the low beam headlamps are switched on In low ambient light conditions the following lamps will switch on additionally e Tail and parking lamps e License plate lamps e Side marker lamps For nighttime driving you should turn the exterior lamp switch to position to permit activation of the high beam head lamps With the daytime running lamp mode activated and the exterior lamp switch in position RH the high beam head lamps cannot be switched on The high beam flasher is available at all times Canada only The daytime running lamp mode is manda tory and therefore in a constant mode When the engine is running and you shift from a driving position to position N or P the low beam headlamps will switch off with a t
396. p the engine gradually Do not place full load on the engine until the oper ating temperature has been reached When starting off on a slippery surface do not allow a drive wheel to spin for an extended period with the ESP switched off Doing so may cause serious damage to the drivetrain which is not covered by the Mercedes Benz Limited Warranty Simultaneously depressing the acceler ator pedal and applying the brake re duces engine performance and causes premature brake wear and drivetrain wear Parking Set the parking brake whenever park ing or leaving the vehicle In addition move gear selector lever to position P When parking on hills turn front wheels towards the road curb A Do not park this vehicle in areas where com bustible materials such as grass hay or leaves can come into contact with the hot exhaust system as these materials could be ignited and cause a vehicle fire Warning Warning A To reduce the risk of personal injury as a re sult of inadvertent vehicle movement be fore turning off the engine and leaving the vehicle always Keep right foot firmly on brake pedal Firmly depress parking brake pedal Move the gear selector lever to position P Slowly release brake pedal When parked on an incline turn front wheels towards the road curb Turn the SmartKey in the starter switch to position O and remove the SmartKey from the starter switch or press KEYLESS GO start s
397. page 58 Starting with KEYLESS GO Warning A N As long as the SmartKey with KEYLESS GO is in your vehicle the vehicle can be started Therefore never leave children unattended in the vehicle as they could otherwise acci dentally start the engine When leaving the vehicle always take the SmartKey with KEYLESS GO with you and lock the vehicle Do not leave children unat tended in the vehicle or with access to an unlocked vehicle You can start your vehicle without the SmartKey in the starter switch using the KEYLESS GO start stop button on the gear selector lever The SmartKey with KEYLESS GO must be located in the vehicle gt Make sure the gear selector lever is set to P gt Do not depress accelerator Getting started Driving gt Depress the brake pedal during the starting procedure The gear selector lever lock is released r P es o 4 7 i Ai 4 F 5 ff LAT KEYLESS GO start stop button 1 USA only 2 Canada only gt Press KEYLESS GO start stop button once The engine starts if the SmartKey with KEYLESS GO is in the vehicle For information on turning off the engine with KEYLESS GO see Turning off the en gine with KEYLESS GO gt page 59 Getting started Driving Starting difficulties If the engine does not start as described carry out the following steps gt If you are starting the engine with the SmartKey turn SmartKey
398. partment air vents gt Turn air distribution control Q or gt page 197 to the desired symbol The indicator lamp on the button Mg goes out The automatic air distribution is switched off The air distribution is controlled according to the selected control setting You can also turn the air distribution control to a position between two symbols Opening center and side air vents gt Turn thumbwheels 2 and gt page 196 upward The center air vents and 8 and side air vents Q and gt page 196 are open Closing center and side air vents gt Turn thumbwheels and gt page 196 downward The center air vents and 8 and side air vents Q and gt page 196 are closed Adjusting air volume Use button WM gt page 197 for auto matic mode or air volume controls or gt page 197 to adjust air volume manually Seven blower speeds are available gt Press button to decrease or gt page 197 to increase air volume to the desired level The indicator lamp on the button Mg goes out The automatic air distribution remains switched on Controls in detail Automatic climate control CLK 500 CLK 55 AMG Front defroster You can use this setting to defrost the windshield for example if it is iced up You can also defog the windshield and the side windows Keep this setting selected only until the windshield or the side windows are clear agai
399. perating the roll bars page 423 or the soft top gt page 425 at the lower edge of the storage well casing Practical hints Where will I find Removing the vehicle tool kit Arrow 3 on vehicle tool kit storage well casing G must point in the direc tion of travel Otherwise you cannot place the storage well casing 2 on top and secure the Minispare wheel with retaining screw 1 p gt Lift up trunk floor cover and engage trunk floor handle in upper edge of trunk Disengage trunk floor handle in upper edge of trunk and lower trunk floor cov 3 Arrow 4 Minispare wheel a Vehicle tool kit storage well casing T EN Vehicle tool kit To prevent damage always disengage Q Retaining screw gt Remove vehicle tool kit trunk floor handle from upper edge of trunk and lower trunk floor before 2 Storage well casing o Storing the vehicle tool kit closing the trunk gt Loosen retaining screw Q in the mid dle of storage well casing by turning Place vehicle tool kit in vehicle tool it counterclockwise kit storage well casing gt Remove storage well casing 2 gt Place storage well casing 2 over the vehicle tool kit storage well casing and turn retaining screw Q clockwise as far it will go to secure the Minispare wheel Practical hints Where will I find Vehicle jack The vehicle jack is located in the storage compartment underneath the trunk floor
400. personal injury Warning Radio transmitters such as a portable tele phone or a citizens band unit should only be used inside the vehicle if they are con nected to an antenna that is installed on the outside of the vehicle Refer to the radio transmitter operation in structions regarding use of an external antenna Operation Driving instructions Catalytic converter Your Mercedes Benz is equipped with monolithic type catalytic converters an important element in conjunction with the oxygen sensors to achieve substantial con trol of the pollutants in the exhaust emis sions Keep your vehicle in proper operating condition by following our recommended maintenance instructions as outlined in your Maintenance Booklet To prevent damage to the catalytic converters only use premium unleaded gasoline in this vehicle Any noticeable irregularities in engine operation should be repaired promptly Otherwise excessive unburned fuel may reach the catalytic converter causing it to overheat and potentially start a fire Warning As with any vehicle do not idle park or op erate this vehicle in areas where combusti ble materials such as grass hay or leaves can come into contact with the hot exhaust system as these materials could be ignited and cause a vehicle fire Emission control Certain systems of the engine serve to keep the toxic components of the exhaust gases within permissible limits requ
401. pet and Fabric Care for cleaning the car pets Operation Vehicle care Headliner and shelf below rear window gt Use a soft bristle brush or a dry sham poo cleaner in case of excessive dirt Seat belts gt Only use clear lukewarm water and soap The webbing must not be treated with chemical cleaning agents Do not dry the webbing at temperatures above 176 F 80 C or in direct sunlight Warning A N Do not bleach or dye seat belts as this may severely weaken them In a crash they may not be able to provide adequate protection Operation Vehicle care Upholstery Using aftermarket seat covers or wearing clothing that have the tendency to give off coloring e g when wet etc may cause the upholstery to become permanently dis colored By lining the seats with a proper intermediate cover contact discoloration will be prevented Leather upholstery gt Wipe leather upholstery with a damp cloth and dry thoroughly or clean with Mercedes Benz approved Leather Care Exercise particular care when cleaning per forated leather as its underside should not become wet Nubuck leather upholstery only for Wood trims Pena ane gt Dampen cloth using water and use The nubuck leather upholstery is treated damp cloth to clean wood trims in your with a protective coating vehicle gt Wipe nubuck leather upholstery with T damp microfiber cloth to remove dust i Do not use solvents like ta
402. ping the air bag unit or emergency tensioning device our safety instructions must be fol lowed These instructions are available from your authorized Mercedes Benz Center e Given the considerable deployment speed required inflation volume and the textile structure of the air bags there is the possibility of abrasions or other more significant injuries resulting from air bag deployment A Warning Only use seat covers which have been tested and approved by Mercedes Benz for your vehicle model Using other seat covers may interfere with or prevent the deployment of the head thorax air bags Contact your authorized Mercedes Benz Center for availability When you sell your vehicle we strongly urge you to give notice to the subsequent owner that it is equipped with an SRS by alerting them to the applicable section in the Operator s Manual Front air bags E m PO1 60 3090 31 1 Driver air bag 2 Passenger air bag Driver and front passenger front air bags are deployed e inthe event of certain frontal impacts e ifimpact exceeds a preset deployment threshold independently of the head thorax air bags and or rear side impact air bags Safety and Security Occupant safety The front air bags in this vehicle have been designed to inflate in two stages This allows the air bag to have different rates of inflation that are based on the rate of relevant vehicle deceleration as assessed
403. position R or D Practical hints What to do if Possible solution gt Place the gear selector lever in position P gt Place the gear selector lever in position P or N Practical hints What to do if Display message Warning kun Far Indicator inactive Check tires Then reactivate Run Flat Indicator Run Flat Indicator unavailable Possible cause consequence Run Flat Indicator is malfunctioning There was a warning message about a loss in the tire inflation pressure and the Run Flat Indicator has not been reactivated yet The Run Flat Indicator has been switched off due to an error A Do not drive with a flat tire A flat tire affects the ability to steer or brake the vehicle You may lose control of the vehicle Continued driving with a flat tire will cause excessive heat build up and possibly a fire Possible solution gt Have the Run Flat Indicator checked by an autho rized Mercedes Benz Center gt Make sure that the correct tire inflation pressure is set for each tire gt Then reactivate the Run Flat Indicator gt Have the Run Flat Indicator checked by an autho rized Mercedes Benz Center Symbol messages Display symbol Display message Visit workshop Low voltage Charge battery Low voltage Switch off consumers Possible cause consequence The battery is no longer charging Possible causes e broken poly V belt e alternator malfunctio
404. r Tele Aid acquaintance call you will receive a user ID and password By visiting www mbusa com and selecting Tele Aid USA only you will have access to account information remote door unlock and more The Tele Aid system utilizes the cellular network for communication and the GPS Global Positioning System satel lites for vehicle location If either of these signals is unavailable the Tele Aid system may not function and if this occurs assistance must be sum moned by other means System self check Initially after switching on the ignition malfunctions are detected and indicated the indicator lamps in the SOS button the Roadside Assistance button and the Information button stay on longer than ten seconds or do not come on The message Tele Aid malfunction Drive to workshop appears in the multifunction dis play A If the indicator lamps in the SOS button in the Roadside Assistance button and or in the Information button remain illuminated constantly in red and or message Tele Aid malfunction Drive to workshop is displayed in the multifunction display after the system self check a mal function in the system has been detected Warning If a malfunction is indicated as outlined above the system may not operate as expected Have the system checked at the nearest Mercedes Benz Center as soon as possible Emergency calls An emergency call is initiated automatically following an accid
405. r s and front passenger s seats are designed to move forward in the direction of travel providing the head with increased support earlier on in the collision sequence The ac tive head restraints move forward whether the seat is occupied or not Warning A N Only use seat or head restraint covers which have been tested and approved by Mercedes Benz for your vehicle model Using other seat or head restraint covers may interfere with or prevent the activation of the active head restraints Contact your authorized Mercedes Benz Center for availability Warning A N For your protection drive only with properly positioned head restraints Adjust head restraint so that the center of the head restraint supports the back of the head at eye level This will reduce the poten tial for injury to the head and neck in the event of an accident or similar situation Do not drive the vehicle without the seat head restraints Head restraints are intend ed to help reduce injuries during an accident Safety and Security Occupant safety You cannot remove the active head re straint on the driver s and passengers seats For removal of the active head restraints we recommend that you contact an authorized Mercedes Benz Center For information on head restraint adjust ment see Seats gt page 37 For information on resetting the activated active head restraints see Resetting acti vated head restraints gt
406. r metal foil Doing so could impair the function of the KEYLESS GO system To lock or unlock the vehicle the SmartKey with KEYLESS Go must be located outside the vehicle within ap proximately 3 ft 1 m of a door or the trunk lid In order to start the engine with the SmartKey with KEYLESS GO e The SmartKey with KEYLESS GO must be located in the vehicle e All doors must be closed e The brake pedal must be firmly de pressed Do not depress the accel erator If you have started the engine with the KEYLESS GO start stop button gt page 35 you can only turn it off again with this button even if you have put the SmartKey in the starter switch in the meantime This does not apply if after starting the gear selector lever is still in position P and the SmartKey is then inserted in the starter switch The SmartKey will then have priority over the KEYLESS GO function and the vehicle s electrical system will operate accord ing to the position of the SmartKey in the starter switch even stopping the engine If the SmartKey with KEYLESS GO is positioned farther away from the vehi cle the system may no longer recog nize the SmartKey with KEYLESS GO The vehicle then cannot be locked or the engine started via the KEYLESS GO system If the SmartKey with KEYLESS GO is re moved from the vehicle while the igni tion is switched on e g if passenger exits the vehicle with the SmartKey with KEYLESS GO th
407. r a short time Otherwise the windows could fog up Reactivating gt Press button gt page 197 The indicator lamp on the button goes out Operating the climate control system in automatic mode When operating the climate control system in automatic mode you will only rarely need to adjust the tempera ture air volume and air distribution In automatic mode cooling with dehu midify is switched on This function can be switched off if necessary o You can switch the automatic climate control system on and off for each side of the passenger compartment as de sired Activating gt Press button RA gt page 197 while the engine is running The indicator lamp on the button comes on The air volume and air distri bution are adjusted automatically Controls in detail Automatic climate control CLK 500 CLK 55 AMG a i i EHHG faf Four of atk n po PBa 40 2079 31 14 Temperature left 2 Blower speed 3 Temperature right gt Use temperature controls 3 and 3 or 6 and G gt page 197 to sepa rately adjust the air temperature on each side of the passenger compart ment The temperature of the vehicle interior is adjusted automatically Deactivating gt Press button Bigy gt page 197 again The indicator lamp on the button goes out The automatic operation of air vol ume and air distribution switches off Controls in detail Automatic climate contr
408. r from using a cellular telephone while driving a vehicle Bear in mind that at a speed of just 30 mph approximately 50 km h your vehicle is covering a distance of 44 feet approximately 14 m every second Observe all legal requirements Using your Mercedes Benz specified mo bile telephone a number of functions and operating steps can be performed and dis played in the audio system display Further operating instructions not covered here can be found in the operating instruc tions for the multifunction steering wheel and the mobile telephone If your audio system is set up for telephone operation the symbol will appear in the display When you insert your Mercedes Benz specified mobile telephone into the tele phone cradle you will be prompted to en ter your PIN for 30 seconds gt page 241 This display disappears when you press any button When your mobile telephone is inserted into the telephone cradle you will see the reception strength in the upper right hand corner of the display Switching on the telephone Switching on the telephone gt Press button If you have programmed an unlock code for the telephone you must now enter the code P82 60 4469 31 gt Enter code using buttons J to gt If necessary correct number entered with the CLR soft key Press soft key briefly to delete the last digit entered press soft key and hold to delete the complete number gt Pres
409. r is located in the trunk underneath the trunk floor cover in the e Fuse box in engine compartment storage well casing gt page 413 gt page 463 Only use fuses approved for Mercedes Benz with the specified amperage for the system in question Using other fuses may cause an overload leading to a fire and or cause damage to electrical components and or e Fuse box in trunk gt page 464 systems Mainfuse box in passenger compartment The main fuse box is located in the passen ger compartment on the driver s side of the cockpit y C i i iI Ay A eh d n 1 Main fuse box cover Do not use sharp objects such as a screw driver to open the fuse box cover 1 in the cockpit as this could damage it Opening fuse box gt Open the drivers door gt Insert flat blunt object as a lever into the edge of the fuse box cover Q at the position indicated by the arrow gt Loosen fuse box cover Q from cockpit using lever gt Using your hands remove fuse box cover 1 rearward Closing fuse box gt Attach fuse box cover Q in the front gt Fold fuse box cover Q in until it engages Practical hints Fuses Fuse box in engine compartment The fuse box is located in the engine com partment on the driver s side 1 Cover 2 Screw 3 Retainer Removing cover gt Twist screws 2 90 counterclock wise gt Lift the rear of cover Q Slide ou
410. r manually operating the active head restraints in the Mercedes Benz vehicle literature pouch Je Per Hi P91 16 2386 31 1 Head restraint cushion 2 Head restraint cover 3 Reset tool 4 Hole gt Take the reset tool 3 out of the Mercedes Benz vehicle literature pouch Guide reset tool 3 into the hole be tween the rear head restraint cover 2 and the head restraint cushion Q Be careful not to damage upholstery gt Press the reset tool G downward until you hear the active head restraint re lease mechanism audibly engage Pull out reset tool G Firmly press the head restraint cushion 1 back toward the rear head restraint cover 2 until it engages Warning A N When pushing back the head restraint cush ion take care that your fingers do not be come caught between the head restraint cushion and the cover Failing to do so may lead to injury gt Repeat this procedure on the active head restraint for the second seat For information on active head restraints see Active head restraints gt page 73 For information on head restraint adjust ment see Seats gt page 37 Y Replacing SmartKey batteries If the batteries in the SmartKey or the SmartKey with KEYLESS GO are dis charged the vehicle can no longer be locked or unlocked It is recommended to have the batteries replaced at an authorized Mercedes Benz Center Warning A N Keep the batteri
411. r pattern e If you press button or repeatedly you will pass through each menu one after the other e If you press button A or Ba repeatedly you will pass through each function display one after the other in the current menu Controls in detail Control system In the Settings menu instead of functions you will find a number of submenus for calling up and changing settings For instructions on using these submenus see Submenus in the Settings menu gt page 149 The number of menus available in the sys tem depends on which optional equipment is installed in your vehicle The menus are described on the following pages Controls in detail Control system Menus This is what you will see when you scroll The table on the next page provides an through the menus overview of the individual menus After start 2 36h 158M 8nph 18 4mpq PS4 30 8382 31 Controls in detail Control system Menus submenus and functions Menu 1 Menu 2 Menu G Menu 4 Menu Menu Menu 7 Standard display AUDIO NAV Vehicle status Settings Trip computer Telephone message memory gt page 144 gt page 145 page 146 gt page 146 gt page 148 gt page 161 gt page 163 Run Flat Indicator Select radio Show route Calling up vehicle Reset to factory Fuelconsumption Load phone station guidance in malfunction warning settings statistics after book 2 structions cur and sy
412. r remover or and other light stains wheel cleaner nor polishes or waxes as gt Carefully dab nubuck leather uphol these may be abrasive stery with a dry microfiber cloth to re move oil stains Do not use Mercedes Benz approved Leather Care or any solvents to clean nubuck leather upholstery Avoid hard scrubbing on nubuck leath er upholstery Practical hints What to do if Where will I find Unlocking locking in an emergency Opening closing in an emergency Resetting activated head restraints Replacing SmartKey batteries Replacing bulbs Replacing wiper blades Flat tire Battery Jump starting Towing the vehicle Fuses Practical hints What to do if Lamps in instrument cluster Problem The yellow ABS indicator lamp comes on while driving General information If any of the following bulbs in the instru ment cluster fails to come on during the Possible cause consequence The ABS has detected a malfunction and has switched off The BAS and the ESP are also switched off see messages in display The brake system is still functioning normally but without the ABS available If the ABS control unit is malfunctioning other systems such as the navigation system or the automatic transmission may also be malfunctioning The charging voltage has fallen below 10 volts and the ABS has switched off The battery might not be charged sufficiently bulb self check when
413. r vents G and 8 are open Closing center and side air vents gt Turn thumbwheels and gt page 186 downward The side air vents Q and G and cen ter air vents G and 8 are closed Adjusting air volume Six blower speeds are available gt Press button A gt page 187 The indicator lamp on the button goes out The automatic air volume control is switched off The air volume is con trolled according to the currently se lected control setting gt Use the air volume control gt page 187 to adjust the air volume Controls in detail Climate control CLK 350 Front defroster The air conditioning switches You can use this setting to defrost the windshield for example if it is iced up You can also defog the windshield and the side windows Q Keep this setting selected only until the automatically to the following functions cooling on to dehumidify maximum blowing and heating power air flows onto the windshield and the front side windows windshield or the side windows are e theair recirculation mode is clear again switched off Activating Deactivating gt Press button Ka or gt Press button Ke or gt page 187 gt page 187 again The indicator lamp on the button comes on The indicator lamp on the button goes out Defrosting is turned off The cooling remains switched on Controls in detail Climate control CLK 350 Windshield
414. ration If the soft top is closed and locked the multifunction display will briefly show the message Top closed If you continuously press on the soft top switch the windows will close However the windows can also be closed opened later on for more informa tion see Opening and closing all side win dows with the soft top switch gt page 254 or see Opening and closing the windows gt page 249 For safety reasons the soft top cannot be closed while driving The soft top cannot be closed using the soft top switch when the roll bars have been released The roll bars need to be lowered before the soft top can be op erated again using the soft top switch If the roll bars have released and the soft top is open you can lower the roll bars manually gt page 424 or contact an authorized Mercedes Benz Center to have the roll bars lowered Warning To prevent possible accidents drive the ve hicle only with the soft top either completely closed and locked or fully lowered into its storage compartment If the soft top does not completely open or close a warning sounds In the multifunc tion display you will see EBJ and the mes sage lop being lowered appears After about 15 seconds the roof hydraulics lose pressure Properly lock the soft top gt page 259 be fore continuing to drive Locking the soft top after raising low ering Warning The soft top is not fully c
415. re wheel with the retaining screw gt page 414 Practical hints Where will I find gt Disengage trunk floor handle in upper edge of trunk and lower trunk floor cov er To prevent damage always disengage trunk floor handle from upper edge of trunk and lower trunk floor before closing the trunk Warning uN The dimensions of the Minispare wheel are different from those of the road wheels As a result the vehicle handling characteristics change when driving with a Minispare wheel mounted The Minispare wheel should only be used temporarily and should be replaced with a regular road wheel as quickly as possible Do not switch off the ESP when a Minis pare wheel is mounted Practical hints Where will I find In case of a flat tire you may temporarily use the Minispare wheel when observing the following restrictions Do not exceed a vehicle speed of 50 mph 80 km h Drive to the nearest tire repair facility to have the flat tire repaired or replaced as appropriate Do not operate vehicle with more than one Minispare wheel mounted For more information see Rims and tires gt page 471 Spare wheel bolts The spare wheel bolts are fixed at the Minispare wheel P40 10 3165 31 1 Wheel bolt for light alloy rims 2 Wheel bolt for Minispare wheel located in trunk with spare wheel T Wheel bolts 2 must be used when mounting the Minispare wheel
416. readings from the front passenger seat i The system does not deactivate the head thorax air bag and the emergency tensioning device Occupants must sit properly belted in a nearly upright position with their back against the seat backrest and feet on the floor to be correctly classified If the occupant s weight is transferred to another object in the vehicle e g by leaning on armrests the OCS may not be able to properly approximate the occupant s weight category If your seat including your trim cover and cushion needs to be serviced in any way take the vehicle to an authorized Mercedes Benz Center Only seat accessories approved by Mercedes Benz may be used Both driver and the front passenger should always use the IEA EJ indicator lamp as an indication of whether or not the front passenger is properly positioned Warning If the EARI indicator lamp illuminates when an adult or someone larger than a small individual is in the front passenger seat have the front passenger re position himself or herself in the seat until the Fee indicator lamp goes out More information about air bag display messages gt page 389 In the event of a collision the air bag control unit will not allow front passenger front air bag deployment when the OCS classified the front passenger seat occupant as being up to or less than the weight of a typical 12 month old child in a standard child restraint or if t
417. red signal trans gin directly with step 3 mitter button or Do not Step 3 release the buttons until step 5 is com gt Hold the end of the hand held remote control of the device you wish to train approximately 2 to 5 in 5 to12 cm away from the signal trans mitter button or to be pro grammed while keeping the indicator lamp in view pleted The indicator lamp Q will flash first Slowly and then rapidly a The indicator lamp Q flashes immedi ately the first time the signal transmit ter button is programmed If this button has already been programmed the in dicator lamp will only start flashing af ter 20 seconds Step 5 gt After the indicator lamp Q changes from a slow to a rapidly flashing light release the hand held remote control button and the signal transmitter but ton Step 6 gt Press and hold the just trained signal transmitter button or and observe the indicator lamp Q If the indicator lamp Q stays on constantly programming is complete and your device should activate when the respective signal transmitter button or 4 is pressed and re leased 5 9 If the indicator lamp Q flashes rapidly for about 2 seconds and then turns toa constant light continue with programming steps 8 through 12 as your garage door opener may be equipped with the rolling code feature Step 7 gt To program the remaining two sig
418. refrigerant 481 Brake fluid 481 Capacities fuels coolants lubricants etc Coolant 480 484 479 480 Electrical system 477 Engine 470 Engine oil 481 Engine oil additives 481 Fuel capacity 480 Fuel requirements 482 Gasoline additives 483 Lubricants 479 Premium unleaded gasoline 482 Rims and tires 471 Tires Mixed size 475 Tires Same size 473 Tires Spare wheel sizes 476 Vehicle dimensions 478 Weights 478 Windshield washer and headlamp cleaning system 480 486 Tele Aid 29 289 492 Call priority 294 Emergency calls 290 Hands free microphone 29 Information 293 Initiating an emergency call manually 291 Messages in display 409 Remote door unlock 295 Roadside Assistance 292 SOS button 291 Stolen Vehicle Recovery services 296 System self check 290 Tele Aid System 289 Telematics 492 Telephone 26 163 288 Answering ending acall 164 Hands free microphone 29 Messages indisplay 411 Operation 163 233 Phone book 164 Redialing 165 TEL menu 163 Temperature Interior temperature Tightening torque Wheel bolts Time 153 Time Setting TIN 357 Tire and Loading Information Placard 334 Terminology 355 Tire inflation pressure Checking 339 190 200 451 492 153 154 Tire inflation pressure see the placard on the fuel filler flap Tires 330 471 Air pressure 355 Care and maintenance 331 Chains 360 Cleaning 332 Direction of rotation Spinning 333 Driving instructions 311 Important notes T
419. repaired Have your vehicle checked at an authorized Mercedes Benz Center gt Take hex wrench out of its storage location in the storage well casing gt page 413 trunk A Make sure no one is located in the roll bar s path of motion while the next steps are be ing carried out Warning When the roll bar is manually released the rear head restraints and the roll bar under neath shoot up almost instantaneously gt gt Practical hints Opening closing in an emergency 2 Hex wrench gt Insert long side of hex wrench 2 into opening gt Using hex wrench press release catch down in direction of arrow The roll bar extends with a loud sound gt Repeat this step for the second roll bar Have the systems checked at an autho rized Mercedes Benz Center as soon as possible Lowering roll bars manually With the soft top open you can lower the roll bars manually after they have been re leased With the roll bars released the soft top cannot be operated using the soft top switch and the rear head restraints cannot be lowered using the rear head restraint lowering switch Warning A N Never lower the roll bars manually unless the soft top is open Otherwise the roll bars function could be impaired no longer reduc ing your risk of injury in an optimal manner Contact an authorized Mercedes Benz Cen ter to have the roll bar lowered when the soft top is closed
420. ress SC soft key or or By The weather band station last played will be selected and SC dis appears from the display Controls in detail Audio system Introduction to satellite radio USA only SIRIUS satellite radio provides 100 chan nels of digital quality radio among others music sports news and entertainment free of commercials SIRIUS satellite radio uses a fleet of high power satellites to broadcast 24 hours per day coast to coast in the contiguous U S This diverse satellite delivered program ming is available for a monthly subscrip tion fee For more information and service availability call the SIRIUS Service Center gt page 226 or contact www siriusradio com o Additional satellite radio equipment and a subscription to a satellite radio service provider are required for the satellite radio operation described here Contact an authorized Mercedes Benz Center for details and availability for your vehicle Note that categories and channels shown in illustrations are dependent on programming content delivered by the service provider Programming content is subject to change Therefore chan nels and categories shown in illustra tions and descriptions contained in this manual may differ from the channels and categories delivered by the service provider Satellite radio service may be unavail able or interrupted from time to time for a variety of reasons such as envi
421. ring wheel or the respective button for ending a telephone call on the audio system or the COMAND headunit If the indicator lamps do not start flash ing after pressing one of the buttons or remain illuminated in red at any time the Tele Aid system has detected a malfunction or the service is not currently active and may not initiate a call Visit an Mercedes Benz Center and have the system checked or contact the Response Center at 1 800 756 9018 in the USA or 1 888 923 8367 in Canada as soon as possible Call priority If other service calls such as a Roadside Assistance call or Information call are ac tive an Emergency call is still possible In this case the Emergency call will take pri ority and override all other active calls The indicator lamp in the respective button flashes until the call is con cluded Calls can only be terminated by a Response Center or Customer Assistance Center representative except Roadside Assistance and Information calls which can also be terminated by pressing button on the multifunction steering wheel or the respective button for ending a telephone call on the audio system or the COMAND head unit If the indicator lamp continues to flash or the system does not reset contact the Response Center at 1 800 756 9018 in the USA or 1 888 923 8367 in Canada or Mercedes Benz Customer Assistance at 1 800 FOR MERCedes 1 800 367 6372 in the USA or Customer Service at
422. rior lamp switch 52 127 Exterior rear view mirror ad 43 justment Headlamp washer switch 181 At a glance Cockpit a Instrument cluster P54 32 3601 31 GJO G Item R E Left turn signal indica tor lamp ESP warning lamp Speedometer Multifunction display Distance warning lamp Warning lamp without func tion It illuminates with the ig nition on It should go out when the engine is running BW Right turn signal indi cator lamp Coolant temperature indi cator with Coolant temperature warning lamp Page 53 378 140 53 137 377 398 Item Tachometer with AN U Supplemental Restraint System SRS indicator lamp Antilock Brake Sys tem ABS indicator lamp Seat belt telltale Low beam headlamp indicator lamp High beam headlamp indicator lamp 9 Main odometer with e Gear selector lever position e Program mode Page 138 380 409 374 AF 379 131 131 140 140 At a glance Instrument cluster Item Clock with Brake warning lamp USA only Brake warning lamp Canada only Engine malfunction in dicator lamp USA only Ew Engine malfunction in dicator lamp Canada only Roll bar warning lamp QD Fuel display with E Fuel reserve warning lamp 2 Reset button for e Resetting trip odometer e Adjusting instrument cluster illumination e Confirming new time set tings Page 153 375 376
423. rized Mercedes Benz Center Controls in detail Audio system Sound system Your vehicle is equipped with a sound sys tem The subwoofer is located between the rear seats PB2 62 2446 31 Make sure no objects fall into the open ings of the subwoofer between the rear seats If necessary contact an authorized Mercedes Benz Center to remove any objects which may have fallen into the openings a Audio system Operating and display elements 3 RADIO MUTE 4 l SEEK a larei 3 ABG am Se linen kL GHI MNO 7 8 9 PORS TUW WAYE em ah PAZ 60 4555 31 Item 1 CD changer mode selector AUX mode selector 2 Single CD mode selector 3 Radio mode selector 4 Mute function radio Pause CD Volume distribution Sound settings 7 Display Alphanumeric keypad Page 227 216 228 220 233 215 213 Item 9 Speed dialing memory tele phone in descending order Accepting a call telephone QD Telephone mode selector 2 Speed dialing memory tele phone in ascending order 3 Terminating a call telephone CD slot 5 CD ejection Page 238 233 239 239 229 Controls in detail Audio system Item Soft keys 7 Volume Switching on off Manual tuning seek tuning radio Track search reverse CD Manual tuning seek tuning radio Track search fast forward CD Page 212 213 212 218
424. rol panel gt page 187 The temperature at the center air vents for the rear passenger compartment 2 and gt page 195 is the same as at the dashboard center air vents Controls in detail Climate control CLK 350 The air vents for the rear passenger Adjusting air distribution compartment are located in the rear center console gt Push the slide for the left center vent 2 or right center vent 3 to the left right up or down The air flow is directed in the corre sponding direction For draft free ventilation push slides 2 and upward Tien C Thumbwheel for air volume control for center air vents 2 Left center air vent 3 Right center air vent Adjusting air volume gt Turn thumbwheel C to the left or right The air volume is increased or decreased Controls in detail Automatic climate control CLK 500 CLK 55 AMG PAS 40 3048 31 Item Q Left side air vent adjustable 2 Thumbwheel for air volume control for center air vents 3 Right side air vent adjustable 4 Automatic climate control panel Right center air vent adjustable 6 Thumbwheel for air volume control for right side center air vent 7 Thumbwheel for air volume control for left side center air vent Left center air vent adjustable For draft free ventilation move the slid ers for the center air vents to the middle position USA
425. row gt Perform the following two steps simul gt Move selector lever from taneously position P gt Push tool 2 down and forward in gt Reinstall the storage box after re 8 2 the direction of the arrow moving the tool 2 from the opening gt Move gear selector lever from position P gt Take out storage box Q Remove the tool 2 from the opening gt Push the tab CQ of the covering back Practical hints Opening closing in an emergency Vv Opening closing in an emergency Operating roll bars manually gt Close the soft top gt page 257 With the roll bars released the soft top cannot be operated using the soft top switch and the rear head restraints cannot be lowered using the rear head restraint lowering switch Releasing roll bars manually If the roll bar system is malfunctioning you can release the roll bars manually Warning A N If the yellow roll bar warning lamp EEN in gt Open the trunk gt page 108 the clock does not go out after starting the gt Fold back the luggage cover Perforation engine or if it comes on while driving then the roll bar system is not operating properly gt Push hex wrench through perforation Q in trim of rear wall in gt page 262 and may not activate in an accident In this case raise the roll bars manually before continuing to drive For safety reasons drive only with the roll bars raised until the malfunction is
426. ry function gt page 124 lets you store settings for the steering wheel together with the settings for the exterior rear view mirrors and the seat position Getting started Adjusting Easy entry exit feature This feature allows for easier entry into and exit from the vehicle When entering and exiting the vehicle the steering wheel is in its uppermost position The easy entry exit feature can be activated or deactivated in the Convenience submenu of the control system gt page 160 A You must make sure that no one can be come trapped or injured by the moving steering wheel when the easy entry exit feature is activated Warning To stop steering wheel movement do one of the following e Move the steering column stalk gt page 41 e Press the memory position switch gt page 124 Do not leave children unattended in the ve hicle or with access to an unlocked vehicle Children could open the driver s door and unintentionally activate the easy entry exit feature which could result in an accident and or serious personal injury With the easy entry exit feature activated the steering wheel will return to its last set position when you e close the drivers door with the ignition switched on or e insert the SmartKey into the starter switch or press the KEYLESS GO start stop button gt page 35 once with the driver s door closed The last set steering wheel position is
427. s For a listing of approved engine oils and oil filters refer to the Factory Approved Service Products pamphlet in your vehicle literature portfolio or contact an authorized Mercedes Benz Center Using engine oils and oil filters of specification other than those expressly required for the Maintenance System U S vehicles or FSS Canada vehicles or changing of oil and oil filter at change intervals longer than those called for by the Maintenance System U S vehicles or FSS Canada vehi cles will result in engine damage not covered by the Mercedes Benz Limited Warranty Operation Engine compartment sie TAC 4 aa CLK 350 Filler leap CLK 500 CLK 55 AMG 1 Filler cap gt Unscrew filler cap G from filler neck gt Add engine oil as required Be careful not to overfill with oil Be careful not to spill any oil when adding Avoid environmental damage caused by oil entering the ground or water Excess oil must be siphoned or drained off It could cause damage to the engine and catalytic converter not covered by the Mercedes Benz Limited Warranty gt Screw filler cap Q back on filler neck More information on engine oil can be found in the Technical data section gt page 479 and gt page 481 Transmission fluid level The transmission fluid level does not need to be checked If you notice transmission fluid loss or gear shifting malfunctions have an authorized M
428. s change when driving with a Minispare wheel mounted Adapt your driving style accordingly Warning The spare wheel is for temporary use only When driving with spare wheel mounted ensure proper tire inflation pressure and do not exceed a vehicle speed of 50 mph 80 km h Drive to the nearest Mercedes Benz Center as soon as possible to have the spare wheel replaced with a regular road wheel Never operate the vehicle with more than one Minispare wheel mounted Do not switch off the ESP when a Minis pare wheel is mounted Preparing the vehicle gt gt gt Park the vehicle in a safe distance from moving traffic on a hard flat surface when possible Turn on the hazard warning flashers gt page 133 Turn the steering wheel so that the front wheels are in a straight ahead position Set the parking brake gt page 57 Move the gear selector lever to P Vehicles with SmartKey gt gt Turn off the engine gt page 58 Remove the SmartKey from the starter switch Vehicles with SmartKey with KEYLESS GO gt Turn off the engine by pressing the gt KEYLESS GO start stop button on the gear selector lever once gt page 59 Open the driver s door this puts the ig nition in position O gt page 36 same as with the SmartKey removed from the starter switch The driver s door then can be closed again Open door only when conditions are safe to do so H
429. s immediately flush affected area with water and seek medical help if necessary Electrolyte drops coming into contact with the vehicle paint finish can only be completely removed while in their liquid state and by applying plenty of water Getting started Adjusting Interior rear view mirror gt Manually adjust the interior rear view mirror For more information see Rear view mir rors gt page 181 Exterior rear view mirrors A Warning Exercise care when using the passen ger side exterior rear view mirror The mirror surface is convex outwardly curved surface for a wider field of view Objects in mirror are closer than they appear Check your in terior rear view mirror or glance over your shoulder before changing lanes gt D Getting started Adjusting gt The buttons are located above the exterior lamp switch C Adjustment button 2 Passenger side exterior rear view mirror button 3 Driver s side exterior rear view mirror button gt gt Switch on the ignition gt page 34 Press button 3 for the driver s side exterior rear view mirror or button 2 for the passenger side exterior rear view mirror Push adjustment button up down left or right according to the desired setting If an exterior rear view mirror was forcibly pushed forward hit from the rear or forcibly pushed rearward hit from the front reposition it by applying
430. s tail lamps side markers turn signal lenses gt Use a mild car wash detergent such as Mercedes Benz approved Car Sham poo with plenty of water Only use window cleaning solutions that are suitable for plastic lamp lens es Window cleaning solutions which are not suitable may damage the plas tic lamp lenses of the headlamps Therefore do not use abrasives sol vents or cleaners that contain solvents Never apply strong force and only use a soft non scratching cloth when clean ing the lenses Do not attempt to wipe dirty lenses with a dry cloth or sponge Otherwise you may scratch or damage the lens surface Cleaning the Parktronic system Canada only sensors 1 Parktronic system sensors in front bumper gt Usea mild car wash detergent such as Mercedes Benz approved Car Sham poo with plenty of water and a soft non scratching cloth to clean sensors 1 on the bumpers Operation Vehicle care Do not apply strong pressure to the sensor covers Applying strong pres sure may damage the sensor covers Follow the instructions provided by the power washer manufacturer on main taining a distance between the vehicle and the nozzle of the power washer To prevent scratches never apply strong force and only use a soft non scratching cloth when cleaning the sensors Do not attempt to wipe dirty sensors with a dry cloth or sponge Operation Vehicle care Cleaning the windo
431. s OK soft key after entering correct code The telephone is unlocked If you have entered an incorrect code you must enter the correct code Switching off the telephone gt Press button for approx three seconds PROCESSING appears in the display until the telephone is off Afterward PHONE OFF appears in the display Adjusting the volume gt Turn rotary control of button dur ing a telephone call The volume will increase or decrease depending on the direction turned The volume can be adjusted separately for telephone mode and audio mode Controls in detail Audio system Adjusting sound gt Adjust sound during a telephone call Sound adjustment gt page 213 Placing a call Entering a telephone number and starting the dialing process Pa 60 4556 31 gt Enter desired telephone number using buttons EAN to Rg The number can have up to 32 digits but only twelve of these are visible in the display gt gt Controls in detail Audio system gt gt If necessary correct number entered with the CLR soft key Press soft key briefly to delete the last digit entered press soft key and hold to delete the complete number gt After correct telephone number has been entered press button If the telephone number has been saved together with a name in the phone book the name will appear in the display Phone book The numbers stored in the phone book of th
432. s SC soft key or or Bg Random play The random function RDM plays the tracks of the current CD in random order When you start the RDM function the RPT function is automatically switched off e Switching on random gt Press RDM soft key RDM appears in the display A ran domly selected track is played e Switching off random gt Press RDM soft key again Repeat The track being played is repeated until the repeat function is switched off When you start the RPT function the RDM function is automatically switched off e Switching on repeat gt Press RPT soft key RPT appears in the display e Switching off repeat gt Press RPT soft key again Controls in detail Audio system Pause function Track and time display GSM network phones The CD changer mode is interrupted by an incoming call on the telephone gt page 238 Warning A N Please do not forget that your primary re sponsibility is to drive the vehicle A driver s attention to the road must always be e Switching on pause function RDM RPT Pa2 60 4557 31 CHT his her primary focus when driving For gt Press I soft key your safety and the safety of others we rec The number of the track being played ommend that you pull over to a safe location ROM RPT and the elapsed playing time appear in and stop before placing or taking a tele i h Il P82 60 4556 31 the display panone ca l gt Press button
433. s and leaks Driving with the brake warning lamp illumi nated can result in an accident Have your brake system checked immediately if the brake warning lamp stays on Do not add brake fluid before checking the brake system Overfilling the brake fluid reservoir can re sult in spilling brake fluid on hot engine parts and the brake fluid catching fire You can be seriously burned Practical hints What to do if Problem check engine USA only Canada only The yellow engine malfunction indi cator lamp comes on while driving Possible cause consequence There is a malfunction in The fuel management system The ignition system The emission control system Systems which affect emissions Such malfunctions may result in ex cessive emissions values and may switch the engine to its Limp Home Mode emergency operation A loss of pressure has been detected in the fuel system The fuel cap may not be closed properly or the fuel system may be leaky Your fuel tank is empty Suggested solution gt Have the vehicle checked as soon as possi ble by an authorized Mercedes Benz Center An on board diagnostic connector is used by the service station to link the vehicle to the shop diagnostics system It allows the accu rate identification of system malfunctions through the readout of diagnostic trouble codes It is located in the front left area of the footwell next to the parking brake pedal
434. s located in the Guide the tabs of the lower plate allthe storage compartment underneath the way into the openings of the base trunk floor plate 3 Removing the Minispare wheel gt Lift up trunk floor cover and engage trunk floor handle in upper edge of trunk gt Loosen the retaining screw in the mid dle of storage well casing by turning it counterclockwise gt page 414 gt Remove the storage well casing gt page 414 P40 10 2776 31 1 Tilt the plate upward 2 Fold the lower plate outward 3 Insert the plate 1 Vehicle tool kit Wheel wrench Jack 2 Arrow 3 Minispare wheel Wheel bolts for Minispare wheel 4 Vehicle tool kit storage well casing gt Remove vehicle tool kit storage well casing 4 gt Remove Minispare wheel Storing the Minispare wheel gt Place Minispare wheel 3 in wheel well Place vehicle tool kit storage well casing 4 over the Minispare wheel Make sure arrow 2 on vehicle tool kit storage well casing points in the direction of travel Place storage well casing gt page 414 over the vehicle tool kit storage well casing 4 and turn the retaining screw gt page 414 clockwise as far it will go to secure the Minispare wheel Arrow 2 on vehicle tool kit storage well casing 4 must point in the direction of travel Otherwise you cannot place the storage well casing gt page 414 on top and secure the Minispa
435. se plate lamps 439 443 Low beam headlamps Bi Xenon 438 441 Low beam headlamps Halogen 438 440 Parking lamps 438 439 441 442 Side marker lamps 438 Standing lamps 438 439 441 442 Taillamps 439 443 Turn signallamps 438 439 443 Turn signal lamps Bi Xenon 442 Turn signal lamps Halogen 441 Reporting safety defects 18 Research Octane Number see RON Reset button In instrument cluster 25 136 148 149 Residual heat and ventilation see REST Residual heat utilization see REST REST 207 490 Restraint system see Children in the vehicle Restraint system see SRS Restraint systems 491 Reverse gear position 168 RFI see Run Flat Indicator Rims 356 471 Roadside Assistance Roll bar 74 491 Messages in display 408 Operating manually 423 Warning lamp 379 RON 319 491 Rubber and plastic parts Cleaning 371 Run Flat Indicator 491 Run Flat Indicator Canada only 342 S Safety Driving safety systems 87 Occupant 62 Reporting defects 18 Safety belts see Seat belts Satellite radio 222 Seat belts 69 12 292 Automatic comfort fit feature 72 Children in the vehicle 75 Cleaning 371 ETD 72 Fastening 45 Force limiter 72 Messages in display 409 Proper use of 47 70 Safety guidelines 66 Telltale 25 71 379 Seating capacity 335 Seats Multicontour 121 Backrest contour 121 Backrest side bolsters 121 Cushion depth 121 Seats Power 37 119 Active head restraints 73 Adjustment 38 Easy entry exit feature 42 Heating
436. senger compartment 463 Fuse box in engine compartment 463 Fuse box in trunk 464 Fuse chart 462 Fuse extractor 462 Replacing 462 Spare fuses 462 G Garage door opener Gasoline see Fuel GAWR 355 Gearrange 171 488 Automatic transmission 171 Limiting 171 Shifting into optimal 173 Gear selector lever 28 48 166 Cleaning 371 Lock 49 Message in display 393 One touch gearshifting 173 Position 166 168 Position indicator 25 140 167 Unlocking in an emergency 422 Global locking unlocking see Key SmartKey or KEYLESS GO 98 Global Positioning System see GPS Glove box 23 278 Gloves 413 Good visibility 181 GPS 488 Gross Axle Weight Rating see GAWR Gross Vehicle Weight Rating see GVWR Gross Vehicle Weight see GVW 29 296 GVW 355 GVWR 356 H Halogen headlamp see Headlamps Hands free microphone 29 Hard plastic trim items cleaning 371 Hazard warning flasher 133 Head restraints 38 119 Active head restraints 73 Front seat 119 Power seat Adjusting 38 Rearseat 119 Rear seat Lowering 120 Rear seat Raising 120 Headlamp cleaning system 181 329 486 Headlamp delayed shut off see Delayed shut off Exterior lamps Headlamps Automatic headlamp mode 128 Bi Xenon 441 487 Cleaning lenses 369 Daytime running lamp mode 129 Halogen 440 High beam see High beam flasher High beam see High beam headlamps Lamp sensor 405 Locator lighting 129 Low beam see Low beam headlamps Manual headlamp mode 128 Messages in display 404
437. set temperature This may cause burns or frost bite on unprotected skin in the immediate area of the air vents Always keep sufficient distance between unprotected parts of the body and the air vents If necessary use the air distribution controls gt page 197 to direct the air to air vents in the vehicle inte rior that are not in the immediate area of un protected skin Follow the recommended settings for heating and cooling given on the following pages Otherwise the windows could fog up impairing visibility and endangering you and others Severe conditions e g strong air pollution may require replacement of the filter before its scheduled interval A clogged filter will reduce the air volume to the interior If the vehicle interior is hot ventilate the interior before driving off see Summer opening feature gt page 252 The automatic climate control will then adjust the interior temperature to the set value much faster Keep the air intake grille in front of the windshield free of snow and debris Do not obstruct air flow by placing objects on the air flow through exhaust slots below the rear window Deactivating the automatic climate control system Deactivating gt Press button gt page 197 The indicator lamp on the button comes on When the air conditioning is switched off the outside air supply and circula tion are also switched off Only choose this setting fo
438. setting is stored you can move the mirror again Y Lighting For information on how to switch on the headlamps and use the turn signals see Switching on headlamps gt page 52 and Turn signals gt page 53 If you drive in countries where vehicles drive on the other side of the road than the country in which the vehicle is reg istered you must have the headlamps modified for symmetrical low beams Relevant information can be obtained at an authorized Mercedes Benz Center Vehicles equipped with active Bi Xe non headlamps The active Bi Xenon headlamps monitor your steering angle and driving speed then automatically shift their beams to either side to bet ter follow the curvature of the road ahead increasing usable illumination over conventional headlamps Exterior lamp switch The exterior lamp switch is located on the dashboard to the left of the steering wheel H i i F Jg lt a ah gt as ___ Pbiki25 4701 31 Exterior lamp switch S005 NN U OF wwe t hr m 1 Controls in detail Lighting Off Daytime running lamp mode gt page 129 Automatic headlamp mode Daytime running lamp mode gt page 129 Parking lamps also tail lamps license plate lamps side marker lamps instrument panel lamps Low beam headlamps or high beam headlamps when the combi nation switch is pushed forward and parking lamps Standing lamps right turn l
439. side of the fuel filler flap on how to adjust the cold tire in flation pressure If you do not adjust the tire inflation pressure excessive heat can build up and result in sudden tire failure Be sure to readjust the tire inflation pressure for normal driving speeds You should wait until the tires are cold before adjusting the tire inflation pressure Some vehicles may have supplemental tire pressure information for vehicle loads less than the maximum loaded vehicle condi tion If such information is provided it can be found on the placard located on the in side of the fuel filler flap Tire inflation pressure changes by approxi mately 1 5 psi 0 1 bar per 18 F 10 C of air temperature change Keep this in mind when checking tire inflation pressure where the temperature is different from the outside temperature Checking tire inflation pressure Regularly check your tire inflation pressure at least once a month Check and adjust the tire inflation pressure when the tires are cold The tires can be considered cold if the vehicle has been parked for at least three hours or driven less than one mile 1 6 km If you check the tire inflation pressure when the tires are warm the vehicle has been driven for several miles or sitting less than three hours the reading will be approximately 4 psi 0 3 bar higher than the cold reading This is normal Do not let air out to match the specified cold tire in flation pressure
440. side with the handle through B4 ull the two levers apart and fo the loop on the opposite side Do not pull the straps when the trunk is levers 6 of soft top storage compart open ment hinge 7 forward on both sides over the detent position Practical hints Opening closing in an emergency Q Do not place the SmartKey in the open trunk You may lock yourself out Vehicles with KEYLESS GO To pre vent a possible inadvertent lockout the trunk lid will open automatically if a SmartKey with KEYLESS GO is recog nized in the area of the rear shelf or in P P 77 00 2270 34 side the trunk p7700 2271 34 gt Place both straps on soft top compart gt You and your assistant should each ment cover T take one of the straps by the handle Take hex wrench out of trunk The trunk lid must remain closed during With a strong simultaneous tug on the Dn erence wise the trunk lid and the soft top com upward and out to the rear You will only have access to the trunk partment cover may come into contact again when the emergency operation with one another and be damaged has been completed Warning A N At this point the remaining procedure needs to be done by two people Otherwise you could be injured Practical hints Opening closing in an emergency Warning In the next step you and your assistant should each take hold of the soft top com partment cover as shown in the illustration Both of
441. sing all side windows with the soft top switch The soft top switch is located in the center console pere O 1 Soft top switch As an alternate method to using the power window switches all side windows can be opened or closed using the soft top switch Q Warning A N Never operate the windows if there is the possibility of anyone being harmed by the opening or closing procedure In case the procedure causes potential dan ger the procedure can be immediately halt ed by releasing the soft top switch To open the windows again press the soft top switch twice Press the switch briefly the first time Then press the switch a second time and hold it until the side windows have reached the desired position gt Switch on the ignition Opening gt Press soft top switch 1 twice Press the switch briefly the first time Then press the switch a second time and hold it until the side windows have reached the desired position Closing gt Pull soft top switch Q twice Pull the switch briefly the first time Then pull the switch a second time and hold it until the side windows have reached the desired position Y Soft top Opening and closing the soft top For safety reasons the soft top can only be opened and closed when the vehicle is standing still Warning A N Before operating the switch for the soft top make sure no persons can be injured by the moving parts roll bars soft top fram
442. smission gt page 48 upshifting is delayed This allows the catalytic converter to heat up more quickly to operating temperature Your vehicle s transmission adapts its gear shifting process to your individual driving style by continually adjusting the shift points up or down These shift point adjust ments are performed based on current operating and driving conditions If the operating conditions change the automatic transmission reacts by adjusting its shift program P27 00 2259 31 Gearshift pattern for automatic transmission The automatic transmission selects indi vidual gears automatically depending on the gear selector lever position D page 168 with gear ranges gt page 171 the selected program mode C S gt page 172 or M C S CLK 55 AMG only gt page 178 the position of the accelerator pedal gt page 170 the vehicle speed 149 5 D 26753 MI 1 Current gear range gear selector lever position 2 Current program mode The current gear range gear selector lever position and program mode C S or M C S appear in the multifunction display An additional indication of the current gear selector lever position can be found on the cover of the shifting gate The indicators come on when you activate a switch e g unlocking the vehicle or opening a door and go out after approxi mately 15 minutes A It is dangerous to shift the gear selector
443. snow traction performance requirements of the Rubber Manufacturers Association RMA and The Rubber Association of Can ada RAC and have been designed specif ically for use in Snow conditions Use of winter tires is the only way to achieve the maximum effectiveness of the ABS and the ESP in winter operation For safe handling make sure that all mounted winter tires are of the same make and have the same tread design Operation Winter driving A Winter tires with a tread depth under i in 4 mm must be replaced They are no longer suitable for winter operation Warning Always observe the speed rating of the winter tires installed on your vehicle If the maximum speed for which your tires are rated is below the speed rating of your ve hicle you must place a notice to this effect where it will be seen by the driver Such no tices are available at your tire dealer or any authorized Mercedes Benz Center Operation Winter driving Snow chains e Only use snow chains that are Warning A we approved by Mercedes Benz Any Snow chains should only be driven on authorized Mercedes Benz Center will If you use your spare tire when winter tires snow covered roads at speeds not to be glad to advise you on this subject are fitted on the other wheels be aware that exceed 30 mph 50 km h Remove chains a the difference in tire characteristics may as soon as possible when driving on roads e Use of OWN chains may be prohibi
444. sole 381 382 CHECK ENGINE 376 Coolant 377 Coolant temperature Distance warning 25 Engine diagnostics 376 Engine malfunction 25 376 ESP 25 378 Foglamps 130 Front passenger front air bag off 68 Front passenger front air bag off indicator lamp 381 98 104 29 137 Fuel reserve 25 379 High beam headlamp 25 Instrument cluster 374 380 Low beam headlamp 25 Maintenance service 361 Parktronic system warning indicators 271 Roll bar 379 Seat belt telltale 25 71 379 Seat belts 379 SRS 25 63 380 Turn signals 25 Language Setting 151 LATCH type child seat anchors see Children in the vehicle License plate lamps Messages in display 405 Replacing bulbs 439 443 Light alloy wheels cleaning 370 Light sensor see Lamp sensor Lighter see Cigarette lighter Lighting Exterior and interior 127 Limp Home Mode 180 Loading Ski sack Canada only 273 Loading see Vehicle loading Loading the vehicle 333 Locator lighting 129 157 Lock buttons Door handle KEYLESS GO 60 104 Trunk lid KEYLESS GO 106 Lock knob 489 Locking 60 Loss of keys 100 106 Loss of Service and Warranty Information Booklet 467 Low beam headlamps Indicator lamp 25 Messages in display 406 Replacing bulbs Bi Xenon 438 Replacing bulbs Halogen 438 440 Switching on 52 Lubricants 479 Luggage cover 262 Folding back 273 M Maintenance 12 361 Calling up service indicator 362 Clearing service indicator 362 FSS Canada vehicles 361 Maintenance
445. starter switch to position O e if you release a front seat backrest and fold it forward Warning A N The seat belt presenter must be retracted while the vehicle is in motion Only when the seat belt presenter is retracted can the seat belt be properly positioned on the body and protect the occupant as intended Starting the engine Warning A N Inhalation of exhaust gas is hazardous to your health All exhaust gas contains carbon monoxide and inhaling it can cause uncon sciousness and possible death Do not run the engine in confined areas such as a garage which are not properly ventilated If you think that exhaust gas fumes are entering the vehicle while driving have the cause determined and corrected immediately If you must drive under these conditions drive with at least one window fully open Automatic transmission oa Gearshift pattern for automatic transmission P77 00 7259 31 P Park position with gear selector lever lock R Reverse gear N Neutral D Drive position For more information see Automatic transmission gt page 166 Starting with the SmartKey gt Make sure the gear selector lever is set to P Do not depress accelerator Turn the SmartKey in the starter switch to position 3 gt page 34 and release It again immediately touch start The engine then starts automatically For information on turning off the engine with the SmartKey see gt
446. stem status start c rent direction messages stored in traveled memory Digital speedometer Select satellite Instrument clus Fuelconsumption Search for 9 radio station ter submenu statistics since name in USA only the last reset phone book Callup maintenance Operate CD Time Date sub Call up range amp service display player menu Check engine oil lev Lighting el except CLK 350 submenu Vehicle submenu Convenience submenu The vehicle status message memory menu is only displayed if there is a message stored Controls in detail Control system The headings used in the menus table are designed to facilitate navigation within the system and are not neces sarily identical to those shown in the control system displays The first function displayed in each menu will automatically show you which part of the system you are in Standard display menu In the standard display the outside tem perature and the trip odometer are shown in the multifunction display You can have the digital speedometer displayed instead of the outside tem perature in the standard display You can select the setting in the submenu Instr cluster via the function Basic display gt page 152 72 F 149 8 0 P54 32 2620 31 1 Outside temperature 2 Trip odometer If you see another display press button or repeatedly until the standard display appears gt Press button Bg or FAN to sele
447. strument cluster illumination will dim Coolant temperature indicator The coolant temperature indicator is on the right side in the instrument cluster gt page 24 Warning A N e Driving when your engine is badly over heated can cause some fluids which may have leaked into the engine com partment to catch fire You could be se riously burned e Steam from an overheated engine can cause serious burns and can occur just by opening the hood Stay away from the engine if you see or hear steam com ing from it Turn off the engine get out of the vehicle and do not stand near the vehicle until the engine has cooled down I O Excessive coolant temperature triggers a warning in the multifunction display gt page 398 and the red coolant warn ing lamp in the instrument cluster comes on gt page 377 During severe operating conditions e g stop and go traffic the coolant tempera ture may rise close to 120 C The engine should not be operated with the coolant temperature above 120 C Doing so may cause serious engine damage which is not covered by the Mercedes Benz Limited Warranty Controls in detail Instrument cluster Trip odometer Make sure you are viewing the stan dard display in the multifunction dis play gt page 144 gt Ifitis not displayed press button or on the multifunction steering wheel repeatedly until the standard dis play appears gt page 140 gt Press and hold the
448. sufficient overhead clearance Vehicles with trunk opening closing system To stop the opening proce dure press button RRM The trunk lid stops moving a If the trunk does not open it is still locked separately gt page 116 The trunk can also be opened from its in side in an emergency see Trunk emer gency release gt page 115 Loss of the SmartKey with KEYLESS GO If you lose your SmartKey with KEYLESS GO you should do the following gt Have the SmartKey with KEYLESS GO deactivated by an authorized Mercedes Benz Center gt Report the loss of the SmartKey with KEYLESS GO or the mechanical key immediately to your car insurance company gt Have the mechanical lock replaced if necessary Your authorized Mercedes Benz Center will be glad to supply you with a replacement Opening the doors from the inside You can open a locked door from the in side Open doors only when conditions are safe to do so Q Locking knob 2 Inside door handle gt Pull on door handle 2 If door was locked locking knob Q will move up If the vehicle has previously been locked with the SmartKey or KEYLESS GO opening a door from the inside will trigger the anti theft alarm system To cancel the alarm do one of the following e Insert the SmartKey in the starter switch e Press button or on the SmartKey In vehicles with KEYLESS GO e Pull an outside door handle The Smar
449. switch gt page 124 Do not leave children unattended in the ve hicle or with access to an unlocked vehicle Children could open the driver s door and unintentionally activate the easy entry exit feature which could result in an accident and or serious personal injury Move the selection marker with button or E to the Convenience submenu Press button JA or Ref repeatedly until the message Function Easy entry feature appears in the multifunction display The selection marker is on the current setting Function Easy entry feature 4 a Bel off __ n on 143 8 MI P54 32 3326 91 Press button or E to switch the easy entry exit feature on or off Setting parking position for exterior rear view mirror Use the Mirror adjustment parking aid function to select whether the passen ger side exterior rear view mirror should be turned downward during parking maneu vers when reverse gear R is engaged For additional information see Activating ex terior rear view mirror parking position gt page 183 gt Move the selection marker with button or E to the Convenience submenu gt Press button EAN or Keg repeatedly until the message Mirror adjustment parking aid appears in the multifunction display The selection marker is on the current setting Mirror adjust ment parking aid F off or 72 F 143 8 MI Ps54 32 7091 31 Press button or E to switch function on or off
450. switching on the igni tion have the respective bulb checked and replaced if necessary Suggested solution gt Continue driving with added caution Wheels will lock during hard braking reducing steering capability gt Read and observe messages in the multifunction display gt page 383 gt Have the system checked at an autho rized Mercedes Benz Center as soon as possible Failure to follow these instructions in creases the risk of an accident gt Switch off electrical consumers that are currently not needed e g seat heating gt If necessary have the generator al ternator and battery checked When the voltage is above this value again the ABS Is operational again Practical hints What to do if Problem Possible cause consequence Suggested solution USA only The red brake warning lamp You are driving with the parking gt Release the parking brake A Canada only comes on while driving and brake set gt page 50 you hear a warning sound The red brake warning lamp There is insufficient brake fluid gt Risk of accident Carefully stop the comes on while driving in the reservoir vehicle and notify an authorized Mercedes Benz Center Do not add brake fluid This will not solve the problem l Bi aE A If you find that the brake fluid in the ERR aa A N S A A SE A el brake fluid reservoir has fallen to the minimum mark or below have the brake system checked for brake pad thicknes
451. t Briefly press the bottom of cover unlocked vehicle Unsupervised use of vehi plate cle equipment may cause an accident l and or serious personal injury The cover plate opens automatically gt Push in cigarette lighter 2 gt switch on the ignition gt page 36 The cigarette lighter will pop out automatically when hot gt Push down cover plate Q to close ashtray The cover plate engages The lighter socket can accommodate 12V DC electrical accessories up to a maximum of 85 W designed for use with the standard cigarette lighter plug type Keep in mind however that connecting accessories to the lighter socket for example extensive connect ing and disconnecting or using plugs that do not fit properly can damage the lighter socket With the socket dam aged the lighter may no longer be able to be placed in the heating pushed in position or the lighter may pop out too early with the lighter not hot enough To help avoid damaging the cigarette lighter socket we recommend con necting 12V DC electrical accessories designed for use with the standard cigarette lighter plug type to the 12V power outlet gt page 287 in your vehi cle whenever possible Power outlet in the rear passenger compartment 1 Power outlet 2 Cover gt gt gt Controls in detail Useful features Floormats Removing gt Pull floormats off of retainer pins 2 in Switch
452. t an autho rized Mercedes Benz Center as soon as possible Failure to follow these instructions in creases the risk of an accident Practical hints What to do if Display message ABS Anti lock braking system inoperative Possible cause consequence The charging voltage has fallen below 10 volts and the ABS has switched off The brake system is still functioning nor mally but without the ABS available Possible solution gt When the voltage is above this value again the ABS is operational again gt Continue driving with added caution Wheels will lock during hard braking reducing steering capability gt Have the system checked at an autho rized Mercedes Benz Center as soon as possible Failure to follow these instructions in creases the risk of an accident Display message ESP unavailable See Operator s Manual Possible cause consequence The ESP was deactivated because of a malfunction or interrupted power supply The BAS and the Run Flat Indicator are also deac tivated The ABS might not be operational The brake system is still functioning normally but without the systems specified above If the yellow ESP warning lamp flashes while driving and this message appears the electronic traction system has switched off to prevent overheating of the drive wheel brakes The self diagnosis has not been completed yet The ESP BAS and the Run Flat Indicator are
453. t belt and or cause damage to the door and or door trim panel Such damage is not covered by the Mercedes Benz Limit Warranty Damaged seat belts must be replaced Contact an authorized Mercedes Benz Center Getting started Parking and locking Locking Warning A N To prevent possible personal injury always keep hands and fingers away from the door openings when closing the doors Be espe cially careful when small children are around Before closing doors make sure there is no possibility of someone getting caught in a door during closing Warning When leaving the vehicle always remove the SmartKey or SmartKey with KEYLESS GO from the starter switch take it with you and lock the vehicle Do not leave children unat tended in the vehicle or with access to an unlocked vehicle Unsupervised use of vehi cle equipment may cause an accident and or serious personal injury Getting started Parking and locking o Opening a door causes the windows on that side of the car to open slightly They will return to the up position when the door is closed ap A warning sounds and the message Turn off lamps appears in the multi function display if the vehicle s exterior lamps are not switched off e with the SmartKey removed from the starter switch and the driver s door open e with the engine turned off using the KEYLESS GO start stop button and the driver s door open same as SmartKey r
454. t hex wrench into soft top locking mechanism screw Turn the soft top locking mechanism screw with hex wrench counterclock wise in direction of arrow 17 as far as it will go The soft top is locked onto the wind shield frame Practical hints Opening closing in an emergency Make sure you turn the hex wrench counterclockwise as far as it will go Otherwise the soft top may not lock properly Have the soft top operation checked at an authorized Mercedes Benz Center as soon as possible If after completing the soft top emer gency operation the trunk cannot be opened using the remote trunk lid re lease switch in the driver s door the button on the SmartKey or the trunk lid release handle in the li cense plate recess press the soft top compartment cover down again as de scribed above Do not open the trunk with the emer gency key as this could otherwise damage the trunk lid and the soft top compartment cover Practical hints Resetting activated head restraints Resetting activated head restraints If the active head restraints have been trig gered in a rear end collision the active head restraints must be reset Otherwise the active head restraints cannot offer any additional protection in the event of anoth er rear end collision For your convenience we recommend that you have this work carried out by an authorized Mercedes Benz Center You will find the reset tool fo
455. t retainer and remove cover Q by pulling towards front Practical hints Fuses Opening fuse box Closing fuse box Fuse box in trunk gt Make sure that the sealing rubber is a The fuse box is located in the trunk behind properly positioned the left hand trim panel gt Press fuse box cover 4 down and secure with clamps Installing cover gt Insert cover Q sideways into retainer 3 P 4 15 27639 31 gt Twist screws 2 90 clockwise 4 Fuse box cover Clamps gt With a dry cloth remove any moisture C Trim panel from the fuse box gt Release clamps Opening fuse box gt Remove fuse box cover 4 gt To open pull trim panel in the direc tion of the rear light and outward Closing fuse box gt Press trim panel 1 back into place Technical data Parts service Warranty coverage Identification labels Layout of poly V belt drive Engine Rims and tires Electrical system Main dimensions and weights Fuels coolants lubricants etc Technical data Parts service The Technical data section provides the necessary technical data for your vehicle All authorized Mercedes Benz Centers maintain a stock of Genuine Mercedes Benz parts required for mainte nance and repair work In addition strate gically located parts distribution centers provide quick and reliable parts service More than 300000 different parts for
456. t the resistance point and release The corresponding window closes completely If the upward movement of a door win dow is blocked during the closing pro cedure the door window will stop and open slightly Remove the obstruction pull the switch again past the resistance point and release If the door window still does not close when there is no obstruction then pull the switch and hold it The door window will then close without the obstruction sensor function AN Warning Driver s door only If within five seconds you again pull the switch past the resistance point and re lease the automatic reversal will not func tion Controls in detail Power windows Stopping windows during Express operation gt Press or pull the respective power win dow switch again Synchronizing power windows The power windows must be resynchro nized each time after the battery has been disconnected if the power windows cannot be fully opened Express open or closed Express close Switch on the ignition gt page 36 Pull the power window switches until the side windows are closed Hold the switches for approximately One second The power windows are synchronized Controls in detail Power windows Summer opening feature E O gt Aim transmitter eye of the SmartKey or The seat ventilation for the driver s omane with KEYLESS GO at the _ A seat is automatically set to the highest
457. tKey with KEYLESS GO must be within 3 ft 1 m of the ve hicle e Press the KEYLESS GO start stop button gt page 35 The SmartKey with KEYLESS GO must be inside the vehicle Controls in detail Locking and unlocking If you open a door the side windows on that side of the vehicle will lower slight ly The windows close again when you close the door Controls in detail Locking and unlocking Opening the trunk The handle is located in the rear license T plate recess The trunk lid swings open upwards au tomatically Always make sure there is sufficient overhead clearance Opening the trunk from outside A minimum height clearance of 5 41 ft 1 65 m is required to open the trunk lid Vehicles without KEYLESS GO The vehicle must be unlocked Vehicles with trunk opening closing system To stop the opening proce dure press button on the Smart Key or SmartKey with KEYLESS GO ee If the trunk does not open it is still 14 Handle locked separately gt page 116 gt Pull on handle The trunk opens o The trunk can also be opened using button on the SmartKey or SmartKey with KEYLESS GO or from its inside in an emergency see Trunk emergency release gt page 115 Opening the trunk from the inside You can open the trunk from the inside if the vehicle is stationary A minimum height clearance of 5 41 ft 1 65 m is required to open the trunk
458. tch goes out and the trunk lid is closed To interrupt the closing procedure gt Release remote trunk closing switch 2 i You can also close the trunk by hand gt page 111 Warning A N Maintain sight of trunk area while operating the door mounted remote trunk closing switch Monitor the closing procedure care fully to ensure that no one is in danger of be ing injured To interrupt the closing procedure release the door mounted remote trunk closing switch Even with the SmartKey or the SmartKey with KEYLESS GO removed from the start er switch or the SmartKey with KEYLESS GO removed from the vehicle the remote trunk opening closing switch can be operated Therefore do not leave children unattended in the vehicle or with access to an unlocked vehicle Unsuper vised use of vehicle equipment may cause an accident and or serious personal injury Warning A N Only drive with the trunk closed as among other dangers such as blocked visibility exhaust fumes may enter the vehicle interior If the trunk lid comes into contact with an object while closing e g luggage that has been piled too high in the sequence the upper motion the closing procedure is stopped and the trunk reopens slightly Closing the trunk from the outside manually n PB0 20 2791 31 1 Handle 2 Handles gt Lower trunk lid by pulling firmly on handle 1 or handles 2 gt Close trunk from the outside
459. ted on the inside of the trunk lid Pao 20 2795 31 ME a os Q Emergency release button gt Briefly press emergency release button Q The trunk unlocks and opens slightly gt Push up the trunk lid to fully open Controls in detail Locking and unlocking The emergency release button unlocks and opens the trunk while the vehicle is standing still or in motion Illumination of the emergency release but ton e The button will flash for 30 minutes after opening the trunk e The button will flash for 60 minutes after closing the trunk o The emergency release button does not open the trunk if the vehicle battery is discharged or disconnected If the trunk does not open it is still locked separately gt page 116 If the vehicle has previously been locked using the SmartKey or KEYLESS GO opening the trunk from the inside using the emergency release button will trigger the anti theft alarm system To cancel the alarm do one of the following e Insert the SmartKey in the starter switch e Press button or on the SmartKey In vehicles with KEYLESS GO e Pullan outside door handle The SmartKey with KEYLESS GO must be within 3 ft 1 m of the ve hicle e Press the KEYLESS GO start stop button gt page 35 The SmartKey with KEYLESS GO must be inside the vehicle Valet locking To deny any unauthorized person ac cess to the trunk e
460. ted very well impair turning stability and that without snow depending on location Always check overall driving stability may be reduced local and state laws before installing Adapt your driving style accordingly snow chains Have the spare tire replaced with a winter When driving with snow chains you T may wish to deactivate the ESP a A a oe clearance for snow chains To help inet avoid serious damage to your vehicle or vehicle s traction ae l Block heater Canada only tires use of snow chains is not permit E ted with the following tire sizes tire at the nearest authorized Mercedes Benz Center Some tire sizes do not leave adequate The engine is equipped with a block Please observe the following guidelines heater when using snow chains e 245 40R17 91W The electrical cable may be installed atan Using snow chains is not permissible e 245 40 R17 91W MOExtended authorized Mercedes Benz Center with all wheel tire combinations e 7125 80 R17 99M e Snow chains should only be used on the rear wheels Follow the manufac turer s mounting instructions Vv Maintenance We strongly recommend that you have your vehicle serviced by an authorized Mercedes Benz Center in accordance with the Maintenance Booklet at the times called for by the maintenance service indicator Failure to have the vehicle maintained in accordance with the Maintenance Booklet and maintenance service indicator at the designated times mile
461. th the tire gauge gt gt Operation Tires and wheels gt gt Install the valve cap gt Repeat this procedure for each tire Run Flat Indicator While the vehicle is being driven the Run Flat Indicator monitors the set tire inflation pressures by evaluating each wheel s rota tional speed This allows the system to de tect a significant loss of pressure in a tire If a wheel s rotational speed changes due to falling tire inflation pressure you will see a corresponding warning message in the multifunction display The Run Flat Indicator may function in a re stricted manner or with a delay if e snow chains are mounted to the vehicle e winter road conditions prevail e you are driving on a loose surface e g sand or gravel e you are driving in a very sporty manner involving rapid acceleration or high Speeds in curves Warning A N When the multifunction display shows the message Low pres mode Check tire Max speed 50 mph one or more of your tires is significantly under inflated You should stop and check your tires as soon as possible and inflate them to the proper tire inflation pressure as indicated on the vehi cle s tire information placard Driving on a significantly under inflated tire causes the tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure Under inflation also reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life and may affect the vehi cle s handling and stopping ability Each tire
462. than the maximum speed rating of the tires Exceeding the maximum speed for which tires are rated can lead to sudden tire failure causing loss of vehicle control and possibly resulting in an accident and or personal injury and possible death for you and for others Summer tires Index Q Ee ie ee 3 e Atthe tire manufacturer s option any Speed rating up to 100 mph 160 km h up to 106 mph 170 km h up to 112 mph 180 km h up to 118 mph 190 km h up to 130 mph 210 km h up to 149 mph 240 km h up to 168 mph 270 km h up to 186 mph 300 km h above 186 mph 300 km h above 149 mph 240 km h ees ee eee eee tire with a speed capability above 149 mph 240 km h can include a Tire load rating gt page 346 and Tire speed rating gt page 346 are also referred to as service descrip tion ZR in the size designation for exam ple 245 40 ZR18 To determine the maximum speed capability of the tire the service description for the tire must be referred to The service description is comprised of the tire load rating gt page 346 and the tire speed rating gt page 346 If your tire includes ZR in the size designation and no service description G and gt page 346 is given the tire manufacturer must be consulted for the maximum speed ca pability If a service description and gt page 346 is given the speed capa bility is
463. the starter switch e the central locking switch is not aated The SmartKey will then function as follows Press button BAN With the trunk and both doors closed all turn signal lamps flash three times The locking knobs in the doors move down The anti theft alarm system is armed Restoring to factory setting gt Press and hold buttons and simultaneously for about 6 seconds un til battery check lamp flashes twice If you can no longer lock or unlock the vehicle with the SmartKey then the batteries in the SmartKey are dis charged the SmartKey is malfunction ing or the vehicle battery is drained e Check the batteries in the SmartKey gt page 99 and replace them if necessary gt page 435 e Use the mechanical key to unlock the driver s door gt page 419 and the trunk gt page 420 e Use the mechanical key to lock the driver s door gt page 420 and the trunk gt page 116 e Have the vehicle battery and the battery connections checked gt page 453 If the SmartKey is malfunctioning contact an authorized Mercedes Benz Center Checking the batteries gt Press button or a Battery check lamp comes on briefly to indicate that the SmartKey batteries are in order If battery check lamp G does not come on briefly during check then the SmartKey batteries are discharged Replace the batteries gt page 435 You can obtain the required batteries at any authorized Mer
464. the above conditions Make sure you also inspect the spare tire periodically for condition and inflation Spare tires will age and become worn over time even if never used and thus should be inspected and replaced when necessary Operation Tires and wheels Life of tire The service life of a tire is dependent upon varying factors including but not limited to e Driving style e Tire inflation pressure e Distance driven A Tires and spare tire should be replaced after six years regardless of the remaining tread Warning Operation Tires and wheels Tread depth Storing tires to wear down to that level As tread depth Do not allow your tires to wear down too approaches g in 3 mm the adhesion T far Adhesion properties on wet roads are properties on a wet road are sharply re Keep unmounted tires in a cool dry Sarpi reduced at tread depths under duced place with as little exposure to light as C a aii Depending upon the weather and or road possible Protect tires from contact Treadwear indicators TWI are required by surface conditions the tire traction varies with oil grease and gasoline law These indicators are located in six widely places on the tread circumference and Cleaning tires become visible at a tread depth of approx imately 4 in 1 6 mm at which point the tire is considered worn and should be replaced Never use a round nozzle to power wash tires The intense jet of w
465. the driver s door Deactivating With the SmartKey gt Insert the SmartKey in the starter switch With KEYLESS GO gt Switch on the ignition gt page 36 Starting the engine will also deactivate the immobilizer In case the engine cannot be started yet the vehicle s battery is charged the system is not operational Contact an authorized Mercedes Benz Center or call 1 800 FOR MERCedes in the USA or 1 800 387 0100 in Canada Anti theft alarm system Once the alarm system has been armed a visual and audible alarm is triggered when someone opens e adoor e the trunk e the hood The alarm will stay on even if the activating element a door for example is immedi ately closed The alarm system will also be triggered when e someone attempts to raise the vehicle e the vehicle is opened with the mechanical key e someone opens a door from the inside e someone opens the trunk with the emergency release button If the alarm stays on for more than 30 seconds a call to the Response Center is initiated automatically by the Tele Aid system gt page 289 provided Tele Aid service was subscribed to and properly activated and that necessary cellular service and GPS coverage are available Arming the alarm system The indicator lamp is in the switch for the tow away alarm in the center console Po4 25 4747 31 1 Indicator lamp gt Lock the vehicle with the Smart
466. the possibility of incompatibility between materials used in the production process and others applied later We have selected car care products and compiled recommendations which are specially matched to our vehicles and which always reflect the latest technology You can obtain Mercedes Benz approved car care products at an authorized Mercedes Benz Center scratches corrosive deposits corrosion or damage due to negligent or incorrect care cannot always be removed or repaired with the car care products recommended here In such cases it is best to seek aid at an authorized Mercedes Benz Center The following topics deal with the cleaning and care of your vehicle and give important how to information as well as references to Mercedes Benz approved car care products Power washer Follow the instructions provided by the power washer manufacturer on main taining a distance between the vehicle and the nozzle of the power washer Never use a round nozzle to power wash tires The intense jet of water can result in damage to the tire Always replace a damaged tire Always keep the jet of water moving across the surface Do not aim directly at electrical parts electrical connec tors seals or other rubber parts Vehicles with KEYLESS GO If a door handle is hit by a strong jet of water and a SmartKey with KEYLESS GO is in close proximity i e within approximately 3 ft approximately 1 m the vehicle cou
467. tifunction display Sc Multifunction steering wheel Multifunction display The displays in the multifunction display Operating the control system and the settings in the control system are Selecting the submenu or setting the controlled by the buttons on the multifunc volume tion steering wheel gt page 26 Press button up to increase E down to decrease 3 Telephone Press button to take a call to end a call 4 Menu systems Press button for next menu for previous menu Moving within a menu Press button WA for next display B for previous display D z26752mMI 5b 1 Outside temperature 2 Trip odometer 3 Current shift program mode 4 Main odometer Current gear selector lever posi tion gear range For more information on menus displayed in the multifunction display see Menus gt page 142 Pressing any of the buttons on the multi function steering wheel will alter what is shown in the multifunction display The information available in the multifunc tion display is arranged in menus each containing a number of functions or sub menus The individual functions are then found within the relevant menu radio or CD op erations under Audio for example These functions serve to call up relevant informa tion or to customize the settings for your vehicle It is helpful to think of the menus and the functions within each menu as being arranged in a circula
468. ting started section provides an overview of the vehicle s most basic func tions First time Mercedes Benz owners should pay special attention to the infor mation given here Unlocking with the SmartKey If you are already familiar with the basic functions described here the Controls in detail section will provide you with further information The corresponding page references are located at the end of each segment P80 35 2086 31 SmartKey with remote control 1 Lock button 2 Opening button for trunk 3 Unlock button 4 Panic button gt page 86 gt Press unlock button on the SmartKey All turn signal lamps flash once The locking knobs in the doors move up The anti theft alarm system is disarmed gt Enter the vehicle and insert the SmartKey in the starter switch A When leaving the vehicle always remove the SmartKey from the starter switch take it with you and lock the vehicle Do not leave children unattended in the vehicle or with access to an unlocked vehicle Unsupervised use of vehicle equipment may cause an accident and or serious personal injury Warning Opening a door causes the windows on that side of the car to open slightly They will return to the up position when the door is closed For more information see SmartKey gt page 96 Unlocking with KEYLESS GO With the KEYLESS GO function you can lock and unlock the vehicle without using
469. tion on setting the time in gt Press button or to set the Function Page COMAND refer to the separate hour r COMAND operating instructions Setting the time hours 153 j j gt Press the reset button in the instru ment cluster gt page 136 to confirm Saing e Wine inue Ie gt Move the selection marker with gt pag Setting the date month 154 button or EBM to the Time Date The hour is set and stored Setting the date day 155 submenu Setting the date year 155 gt Press button ZW or Beg repeatedly until the message Clock hours Confirm by press R appears in the multifunction display The selection marker is on the hour setting Controls in detail Control system Setting time minutes This function can only be seen in vehicles with audio system a Vehicles with COMAND For information on setting the time in COMAND refer to the separate COMAND operating instructions gt Move the selection marker with button or E to the Time Date submenu Clock minutes Confirm biy press R mim F oe i cay i 1 i 10325 am 72 F 149 8 MI P54 32 2471 31 Press button or E to set the minutes Press the reset button in the instru ment cluster gt page 136 to confirm The minutes are set and stored Press button A or Ref repeatedly until the message Clock minutes Confirm by press R appears in the multifunction display The selection marker is on the minutes s
470. tires can adversely affect handling and ride comfort wear unevenly increase stopping distance and result in sudden deflation blowout because they are more likely to become punctured or damaged by road debris potholes etc Your vehicle is equipped with either the Tire and Loading Information placard Example A or the Vehicle Tire Information placard Example B located on the drivers door B pillar gt page 333 The tire inflation pressure should be checked regularly and should only be ad justed on cold tires The tires can be con sidered cold if the vehicle has been parked for at least three hours or driven less than one mile 1 6 km Follow recommended cold tire inflation pressures listed on placard Keeping the tires properly inflated provides the best handling tread life and riding comfort In addition to the tire placard on the driver s door B pillar also consult the fuel filler flap for any additional information pertaining to special driving situations For more information see Important notes on tire inflation pressure gt page 340 o Data shown on placard examples are for illustration purposes only Tire data is specific to each vehicle and may vary from data shown in the illustrations below Refer to placard on vehicle for actual data specific to your vehicle Operation Tires and wheels Placard Example A SEE OWNER S FRONT Pigs FOR 4 ZOOKPA 29P 1 MANUAL FOR Rear prs 7
471. to accommo date the performance capabilities of the vehicle The brakes may produce a squeak ing type noise depending on the e vehicle speed e brake force applied e ambient conditions e g temperature and humidity As with any brake system the wear of indi vidual brake system components such as brake pads or discs strongly depends on your driving style and the conditions under which you operate the vehicle Thus a driv ing style calling for high demand braking will cause your vehicle s brakes to wear more quickly Operation Driving instructions A New vehicle brake pads and discs and re placement brake pads and discs may take several hundred miles of driving until they provide optimum braking efficiency Until that time you may need to use increased brake pedal pressure while braking Please be aware of this and adjust your driving and braking accordingly during this break in period Warning Excessive high demand braking will cause correspondingly high brake wear Please be attentive to the brake warning lamp in the instrument cluster and brake condition mes sages in the multifunction display Especial ly for high performance driving it is important to maintain the brake system and have it checked regularly Operation Driving instructions Driving off Apply the brakes to test them briefly after driving off Perform this procedure only when the road is clear of other traffic Warm u
472. to improve our product and ask for your understanding that we reserve the right to make changes in design and equipment Therefore infor mation illustrations and descriptions in this Operator s Manual might differ from your vehicle Optional equipment is also described in this manual including operating instruc tions wherever necessary Since they are special order items the descriptions and illustrations herein may vary slightly from the actual equipment of your vehicle If there are any equipment details that are not shown or described in this Operator s Manual your authorized Mercedes Benz Center will be glad to inform you of correct care and operating procedures The Operator s Manual and Maintenance Booklet are important documents and should be kept with the vehicle Service and warranty information The Service and Warranty Information Booklet contains detailed information about the warranties covering your Mercedes Benz including e New Car Limited Warranty e Emission System Warranty e Emission Performance Warranty e California Maine Massachusetts and Vermont Emission Control System Warranty California Maine Massachusetts and Vermont only e State Warranty Enforcement Laws Lemon Laws Important notice for California retail buyers and lessees of Mercedes Benz automobiles Under California law you may be entitled to a replacement of your vehicle or a refund of the purchase price or l
473. to the next gear before the engine has reached its overrevving range Make absolutely certain that the engine speed does not reach the red marking on the tachometer gt page 24 Otherwise the engine could be damaged which is not covered by the Mercedes Benz Limited Warranty or Controls in detail Automatic transmission Briefly press the gear selector lever to the right in the D direction Briefly press button 2 on the right side of the steering wheel gt page 176 The transmission shifts to the next higher gear If instead of the manual program mode symbol M the symbol appears in the multifunction display gt page 167 shift to the next higher gear The fuel supply will otherwise be interrupted to prevent the engine from overrevwving Controls in detail Automatic transmission Downshifting A On slippery road surfaces never downshift in order to obtain braking action This could result in drive wheel slip and reduced vehicle control Your vehicle s ABS will not prevent this type of loss of control Warning gt Briefly press the gear selector lever to the left in the D direction or gt Briefly press button 1 on the left side of the steering wheel gt page 176 The transmission shifts to the next lower gear I 9 When you brake or stop the transmis sion shifts down to a gear from which you can easily accelerate or take off Kickdown Using the kickdow
474. top button vehicles with KEYLESS GO Take the SmartKey or the SmartKey with KEYLESS GO with you and lock vehicle when leaving Tires A If you feel a sudden significant vibration or ride disturbance or you suspect that possi ble damage to your vehicle has occurred you should turn on the hazard warning flash ers carefully slow down and drive with cau tion to an area which is a safe distance from the road Warning Inspect the tires and the vehicle underbody for possible damage If the vehicle or tires appear unsafe have the vehicle towed to the nearest Mercedes Benz Center or tire dealer for repairs Treadwear indicators TWI are required by law These indicators are located in six places on the tread circumference and be come visible at a tread depth of approxi mately in 1 6 mm at which point the tire is considered worn and should be re placed The treadwear indicator appears as a solid band across the tread A Warning Although the applicable federal motor vehicle safety laws consider a tire to be worn when the treadwear indicators TWI become visible at approximately Wie in 1 6 mm we recommend that you do not al low your tires to wear down to that level As tread depth approaches We in 3 mm the adhesion properties on a wet road are sharply reduced Depending upon the weather and or road surface conditions the tire traction varies widely Specified tire inflation pressur
475. tronic system is automatically switched on when the ignition is w switched on gt page 34 Parktronic system malfunction If only the red distance segments illumi nate and a acoustic warning sounds there is a malfunction in the Parktronic system The Parktronic system will auto matically switch off after 20 seconds and the indicator lamp in the Parktronic switch comes on gt Have the Parktronic system checked by an authorized Mercedes Benz Center as soon as possible If only the red distance segments illumi nate and no acoustic warning sounds the Parktronic system sensors are dirty or there is an interference from other radio or ultrasonic signals The Parktronic system will automatically switch off after 20 sec onds and the indicator lamp in the Park tronic switch comes on gt Switch off the ignition gt page 34 gt Clean the Parktronic system sensors gt page 369 gt Switch on the ignition or gt Check the Parktronic system operation at another location to rule out interfer ence from outside radio or ultrasonic signals Vv Loading Ski sack Canada only Unfolding and loading gt Close soft top completely gt page 257 gt Open the trunk gt Fold luggage cover back in direction of the arrow C Left hinge 2 Right hinge 3 Pull strap gt Pull ski sack roller blind upward using pull strap gt Manually fold left Q and right hinges 2 of ski sack roll
476. under Title 49 Code of U S Federal Regulations Part 575 pursuant to the National Traffic and Motor Vehicle Safety Act of 1966 Reporting safety defects If you believe that your vehicle has a defect which could cause a crash or could cause injury or death you should immediately inform the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration NHTSA in addition to notifying Mercedes Benz USA LLC If NHTSA receives similar complaints it may open an investigation and if it finds that a safety defect exists in a group of vehicles it may order a recall and remedy campaign However NHTSA cannot become involved in individual problems between you your dealer or Mercedes Benz USA LLC To contact NHTSA you may either call the Auto Safety Hotline toll free at 1 888 327 4236 or 366 0123 in Washington D C area or write to NHTSA U S Department of Transportation Washington D C 20590 You can also obtain other information about motor ve hicle safety from the Hotline Introduction Vehicle data recording Y Vehicle data recording Information regarding electronic recording devices Including notice pursuant to California Code 9951 Please note that your vehicle is equipped with devices that can record vehicle systems data and if equipped with the Tele Aid system may transmit some data in certain accidents This information helps for example to diagnose vehicle systems after a collision and to continuously improve veh
477. unk Carpets cleaning 371 Catalytic converter 316 CD changer 227 CD player 146 227 Center console 27 Lower part 28 Upper part 27 Central locking Automatic 117 159 Locking unlocking from inside 118 Central locking switch 118 Certification label 468 Charcoal filter 204 Children in the vehicle 75 Airbags 64 Blocking rear side window operation 85 Front passenger front air bag off indicator lamp 81 Infant and child restraint systems 69 75 LATCH type child seat anchors 83 LATCH type child seat anchors designA 84 LATCH type child seat anchors design B 84 Occupant Classification System OCS 78 Cigarette lighter 286 Climate control see climate control system 186 Climate control system Air conditioning refrigerant 481 Air conditioning Cooling 194 206 Air distribution 190 200 Air recirculation mode 192 203 Airvents 195 208 Air volume 190 191 201 Charcoal filter 204 Control panel Automatic climate control 197 Control panel Climate control 187 Deactivating Reactivating 189 199 Defogging 202 Defrosting 201 Defrosting Rear window 185 Front defroster 191 MAXCOOL 202 Residual engine heat and ventilation REST 207 REST 490 Temperature 190 200 Clock 25 153 154 Setting time 153 154 Cockpit 22 487 Cockpit Management and Data System see COMAND Cold tire inflation pressure 355 Collapsible wheel chock 413 416 COMAND 487 COMAND see separate COMAND operating instructions Combination switch 52 131 C
478. upant safety Emergency tensioning device ETD seat belt force limiter The seat belts are equipped with emergen cy tensioning devices and belt force limiters The ETD is designed to activate in the following cases e in frontal or rear end impacts exceeding a preset severity level e if the restraint systems are operational and functioning correctly see EGS indicator lamp gt page 62 The ETDs for the front seats will only activate if the front seat belts are fas tened latch plate properly inserted into buckle The ETDs for the rear seats will activate with or without the respective seat belts fastened In an impact emergency tensioning devices remove slack from the belts Belt force limiters reduce the force exerted by the seat belts on occupants during a crash Warning A N An emergency tensioning device ETD that was activated must be replaced When disposing of the emergency tension ing device our safety instructions must be followed These are available at your authorized Mercedes Benz Center Automatic comfort fit feature seat belt An automatic comfort fit feature for front seats reduces the retracting force of the seat belts when they are in normal use Active head restraints The active head restraints are intended to offer the driver and front passenger in creased protection from head and neck in jury In the event of a rear end collision the active head restraints on the drive
479. ured before April 1 1982 A garage door that cannot detect an object signaling the door to stop and reverse does not meet current U S federal safety standards When programming a garage door opener park the vehicle outside the garage Do not run the engine while programming the integrated remote control Inhalation of exhaust gas is hazardous to your health All exhaust gas contains carbon monoxide and inhaling it can cause unconsciousness and possible death Controls in detail Useful features Programming the integrated remote control Step 1 gt Switch on the ignition gt page 36 Step 2 gt If you have previously programmed an signal transmitter button and wish to retain its programming proceed to step 3 If you are programming the integrated remote control for the first time press and hold the two outer signal transmit ter buttons 2 and 4 and release them only when the indicator lamp begins to flash after approximately 20 seconds do not hold the button for longer than 30 seconds This proce dure erases any previous settings for all three channels and initializes the memory b gt b gt Controls in detail Useful features If you later wish to program a second Step 4 and or third hand held transmitter to gt Using both hands simultaneously the remaining two signal transmitter press the hand held remote control buttons do not eps O SE ana button 6 and the desi
480. ute off gt Press MUT soft key again Terminating a call gt Press button The current call is terminated and the muted audio source becomes active again Controls in detail Audio system Accepting a second incoming call If you receive another call during an al ready active call you can accept the sec ond call and switch between the two e Accepting a second call gt Place new call by entering tele phone number manually _ PiS You will be notified of the second call acoustically but you will not see this in the display You are connected to the second caller the first caller is kept on hold Controls in detail Audio system e Switching between calls Placing a second call e Terminating a call gt Press button If you wish to place another call during an gt Press button already active call you can place the sec ond call and switch between the callers or combine them into one call Note that this This switches between the calls The non active call is kept on hold The current call is terminated The connection to the caller previously kept on hold is also interrupted e Terminating a call i ilabili 8 feature is dependent on availability from however reconnection is indicated gt Press button your mobile phone service provider by an acoustic signal The current call is terminated The Placing a second call e Combining two calls connection to the caller previously gt
481. utside door handle The SmartKey or SmartKey with KEYLESS GO must be in close proxim ity to the driver s outside door handle Opening Summer opening feature gt Press and hold button until the soft top is completely open The windows and soft top begin to open after approximately one second During the opening procedure the mul tifunction display shows the message Top in operation If the opening procedure is finished the multifunction display will briefly show the message Top open Release transmit button to inter rupt procedure Closing Convenience feature gt Press and hold button until the soft top is completely closed The windows and soft top begin to close after approximately one second During the closing procedure the multi function display shows the message Top in operation If the soft top is closed and locked the multifunction display will briefly show the message Top closed Release transmit button to inter rupt procedure Controls in detail Soft top Warning If the soft top does not completely open or close a warning sounds and the soft top switch flashes In the multifunction display you will see EEJ and the message Top being lowered appears After about 15 seconds the roof hydraulics lose pres sure Properly lock the soft top gt page 259 be fore continuing to drive Make sure all side windows and the soft top are properly closed before leaving the v
482. vehicle on a map is only possible if the vehicle is able to receive signals from the GPS satellite network and pass the information on to the Response Center A If the indicator lamp in the SOS button is flashing continuously and there was no voice connection to the Response Center established then the Tele Aid system could not initiate an emergency call e g the rele vant cellular phone network is not available The message Call failed appears in the multifunction display for approximately ten seconds Warning Should this occur assistance must be summoned by other means Controls in detail Useful features Initiating an emergency call manually Pa2 95 2412 31 1 Cover 2 SOS button gt Briefly press on cover Q The cover will open Press SOS button 2 briefly The indicator lamp in SOS button 2 will flash until the emergency call is concluded bb Controls in detail Useful features gt gt Wait for a voice connection to the The Mercedes Benz Roadside Assistance Response Center gt Close cover 1 after the emergency call is concluded Warning A N If you feel at any way in jeopardy when in the vehicle e g smoke or fire in the vehicle vehicle in a dangerous road location please do not wait for voice contact after you have pressed the emergency button Carefully leave the vehicle and move to a safe loca tion The Response Center will automatically contact lo
483. vent a malfunction of the SRS is indi cated as outlined above the SRS may not be operational For your safety we strongly recommend that you visit an authorized Mercedes Benz Center immediately to have the system checked otherwise the SRS may not be deployed when needed in an acci dent which could result in serious or fatal injury or it might deploy unexpectedly and unnecessarily which could also result in an accident and or injury to you or to others Practical hints What to do if Lamp in center console Problem Possible cause consequence Suggested solution The front passenger front airbag The system is malfunctioning gt Have the system checked as soon as off indicator lamp illuminates possible by an authorized and remains illuminated with the Mercedes Benz Center weight of a typical adult or some one larger than a small individual on the front passenger seat gt Read and observe messages in the multifunction display and follow cor rective steps gt page 389 Warning A N If the EA EX indicator lamp illuminates and remains illuminated with the weight of a typical adult or someone larger than a small individual on the front passenger seat do not have any passenger use the front passenger seat until the system has been repaired Practical hints What to do if Problem e PASS Ae eo Warning If the EAER luminate or remains out with the sao indicator lamp does n
484. vice and warranty information 10 Important notice for California retail buyers and lessees of Mercedes Benz automobiles 11 Maintenance ccecececeecscececeeees 12 Roadside Assistance 0008 12 Change of address or ownership 12 Operating your vehicle outside the USA or Canada 13 Where to find it eececccsessecceneeeeees 14 SVINGO aseran 15 Operating safety cecccccceseseseeeeeees 16 Proper use of the vehicle 16 Problems with your vehicle 0 17 Reporting safety defects cc60 18 Reporting safety defects 18 Vehicle data recording cccsseecceees 19 Information regarding electronic recording CEVICES ssccccreeeeees 19 At a glance coscccienscaxaonsdveincsenisvaarsannerors 21 GOED aE 22 Instrument ClUSter ccssesceseseeees 24 Multifunction steering wheel 26 Genter console cccccssssesccecesssereees 27 Upper part ccccsesseeccessescneeees 27 Lower part sesssssessssesssseresseesssseess 28 Overhead control panel cceeeee 29 Door control panel cccceeeeceseeeeees 30 Getting started ccc eeeeeees 31 Unlocking cpascacuastatenaaiatetneisasemesasonreteenta 32 Unlocking with the SmartKey 32 Unlocking with KEYLESS GO 33 Starter switch positions 34 AdJUSTNE e
485. which denotes the tire meets requirements of the U S Department of Transportation GAWR Gross Axle Weight Rating The GAWR is the maximum permissible axle weight The gross vehicle weight on each axle must never exceed the GAWR for the front and rear axle indicated on the certification label located on the driver s door B pillar GVW Gross Vehicle Weight The GVW comprises the weight of the vehicle including fuel tools spare wheel installed accessories passengers and cargo and if applicable trailer tongue load The GWV must never exceed the GWVR indicated on the certification label located on the driver s door B pillar Operation Tires and wheels GVWR Gross Vehicle Weight Rating This is the maximum permissible vehicle weight of the fully loaded vehicle weight of the vehicle including all options passen gers fuel and cargo and if applicable trailer tongue load It is indicated on certification label located on the driver s door B pillar Kilopascal kPa The metric unit for air pressure There are 6 9 kPa to 1 psi another metric unit for air pressure is bars There are 100 kilopascals kPa to 1 bar Maximum load rating The maximum load in kilograms and pounds that can be carried by the tire Maximum loaded vehicle weight The sum of curb weight accessory weight vehicle capacity weight and production options weight Maximum tire inflation pressure This number is the gre
486. with hands placed flat on the trunk lid Warning A N To prevent possible personal injury always keep hands and fingers away from the trunk lid opening when closing the trunk Be espe cially careful when small children are around When leaving the vehicle always remove the SmartKey or SmartKey with KEYLESS GO from the starter switch take it with you and lock the vehicle Do not leave children unat tended in the vehicle or with access to an unlocked vehicle It is possible for children to open a locked door from the inside which could result in an accident and or serious personal injury Warning A N Only drive with the trunk closed as among other dangers such as blocked visibility exhaust fumes may enter the vehicle interior Controls in detail Locking and unlocking Do not place the SmartKey in the open trunk You may lock yourself out Vehicles with KEYLESS GO To prevent a possible inadvertent lock out the trunk lid will open automatical ly if a SmartKey with KEYLESS GO is recognized inside the vehicle or in the trunk If the vehicle was previously centrally locked the trunk will lock automatical ly after closing it gt page 110 All turn signal lamps flash three times to con firm locking Controls in detail Locking and unlocking Closing the trunk from outside vehicles without KEYLESS GO In vehicle with trunk opening closing sys tem you can close
487. ws and the wiper blades Warning For safety reasons switch off wipers and remove SmartKey from starter switch vehicles with KEYLESS GO Make sure the vehicle s on board electronics have status 0 before cleaning the windshield and or the wiper blades Otherwise the wiper mo tor could suddenly turn on and cause injury gt Fold the wiper arms forward until they Snapes into place gt Clean the wiper blade inserts with a clean cloth and detergent solution gt Use a soft clean cloth and a mild win dow cleaning solution on all outside and inside glass surfaces An automotive glass cleaner is recommended Fold the windshield wiper arms back onto the windshield before turning the SmartKey in the starter switch or pressing the KEYLESS GO start stop button vehicles with KEYLESS GO Hold on to the wiper when folding the wiper arm back If released the force of the impact from the tensioning spring could crack the windshield To clean the window interior do not use a dry cloth abrasives solvents or cleaners containing solvents Do not touch the inside of the front rear or side windows with hard objects such as an ice scraper or ring Doing so may damage the windows Light alloy wheels If possible clean wheels once a week gt Use Mercedes Benz approved Wheel Care a soft bristle brush and a strong spray of water for cleaning the light al loy wheels Only use acid free cleaning materials Ac
488. xygenates to gasoline does not exceed 10 MTBE not to exceed 15 The ratio of methanol to gasoline must not exceed 3 plus additional cosolvents Using mixtures of ethanol and methanol is not allowed Gasohol which contains 10 ethanol and 90 unleaded gasoline can be used These blends must also meet all other fuel requirements such as resistance to spark knock boiling range vapor pressure etc Gasoline additives A major concern among engine manufac turers is carbon build up caused by gaso line Mercedes Benz recommends only the use of quality gasoline containing additives that prevent the build up of carbon depos its After an extended period of using fuels without such additives carbon deposits can build up especially on the intake valves and in the combustion area leading to en gine performance problems such as e Warm up hesitation e Unstable idle e Knocking pinging e Misfire e Power loss In areas where carbon deposits may be en countered due to lack of availability of gas olines which contain these additives Mercedes Benz recommends the use of additives approved by us for use on Mercedes Benz vehicles Refer to Factory Approved Service Products pamphlet for a listing of approved product s Follow di rections on product label Do not blend other fuel additives with fuel This only results in unnecessary cost and may be harmful to the engine operation Technical data Fuels coolants
489. y and limiting or extend ing the gear range for automatic shifting with the gear selector lever in position D and driving in the automatic program mode C or S For information on using the steering wheel gearshift control in manual pro gram mode M CLK 55 AMG only see Manual shift program gt page 178 o To avoid overrevving the engine when downshifting with steering wheel gearshift buttons the transmission will not shift to a lower gear if the engine s max speed would be exceeded Allow engine to warm up under low load use Do not place full load on the engine until the operating temperature has been reached Shift into reverse gear R or parking position P only when the vehicle is stopped Avoid spinning of a drive wheel for an extended period when driving off on slippery road surfaces This may cause serious damage to the drivetrain which is not covered by the Mercedes Benz Limited Warranty Steering wheel gearshift control CLK 500 The steering wheel gearshift buttons are located to the left and right of the steering wheel P27 60 2740 31 C Button inside downshift 2 Button outside upshift I You cannot shift with the steering wheel gearshift buttons when the gear selector lever is in position P N or R The last selected automatic program mode C or S is switched on when the engine is restarted Downshifting A On slippery road surfaces never downshift i
490. y position appears in the left hand corner of the display The numbers are stored in the order of the calls made When you have selected a number press button The call will be made Accepting an incoming call If the telephone is active in the background reception symbol is visible in the display the audio source is muted when an incom ing call is received A ringing tone can be heard and the caller s telephone number or the name under which the telephone number has been saved in the phone book appears in the display If the caller s num ber is not transmitted with the call CALL will appear in the display gt Press button The call is accepted Muting a call lt is possible to mute a call the caller is then no longer able to hear you e Mute on gt Press MUT soft key gt MIC MUTE will appear in the display e Mute off gt Press MUT soft key again Terminating a call gt Press button The current call is terminated and the muted audio source becomes active again Talking with two callers at the same time If you wish to receive or place another call during an already active call you can ac cept or place the second call and switch between the callers or combine them into one call Note that the features described here are depending on availability from your mobile phone service provider e Placing accepting a second call gt Place new call by entering tele phone number manua
491. yed in e If the connection is successful the ascending or descending alphabetical name of the party you called and order the duration of the call will appear TEL in the multifunction display TEL 00 01 15 72 F NEWMAN SEN P54 32 2639 31 72 F Name from the phone book 143 8 MI P54 32 2610 31 e f no connection is made the control system stores the dialed If you press and hold button Eeg number in the redial memory or KA for longer than one second the system scrolls rapidly through the list of names until you release the button again Cancel the quick search mode by pressing Fam Controls in detail Control system Redialing The control system stores the most recently dialed phone numbers This eliminates the need to search through your entire phone book gt Press button or repeatedly until the message Tel appears in the multifunction display gt Press button F The first number in the redial memory appears in the multifunction display gt Press button JM or Keg repeatedly until the desired name appears in the multifunction display a If you do not want to use the telephone press button Fama gt Press button F The control system dials the selected phone number Controls in detail Automatic transmission For more information on driving with an i automatic transmission see Automatic TE During the brief warm up transmission tran
492. you press any button When your mobile telephone is inserted into the telephone cradle you will see the reception strength in the upper right hand corner of the display Switching on the telephone Switching on the telephone gt Press button If the telephone was previously switched off PROCESSING appears in the display and you will then be prompted to enter your PIN Switching off the telephone gt Press button for approx three seconds PROCESSING appears in the display until the telephone is off Afterward PHONE OFF appears in the display PIN entry P82 60 4464 31 gt Enter PIN number using buttons EEE to E gt If necessary correct number entered with the CLR soft key Press soft key briefly to delete the last digit entered press soft key and hold to delete the complete number gt Press OK soft key after entering correct PIN gt READY or ROAMING will appear in the dis play If the PIN is entered incorrectly three times NEED PUK will appear in the dis play Enter PUK via your telephone Please refer to the separate telephone operating instructions for more infor mation Adjusting the volume gt Turn rotary control of button dur ing a telephone call The volume will increase or decrease depending on the direction turned The volume can be adjusted separately for telephone mode and audio mode Adjusting sound gt Adjust sound during a telephone call S
493. you should use your free hand to support yourselves on the edge of the trunk lid as shown in the illustration If either you or your helper assume a differ gt 9 Soft top compartment cover ent position one or both of you could be Edge of soft top gt One person should stand on the left appetere gt From left and right sides reach into side of the vehicle and the other on the soft top compartment underneath right side gt Pulling the cover back in one smooth edge of soft top 0 motion lift soft top compartment cover 9 into a vertical position until it on j Warning A N T Do not place your hands near the upper windshield area trunk lid or between soft top roof panels and hinges while the soft top is being raised and locked Serious personal injury may occur Make sure the soft top storage com partment hinges do not fold down dur ing this procedure Otherwise your vehicle could be damaged Practical hints Opening closing in an emergency _ gt Turn the soft top locking mechanism screw with hex wrench counterclock wise in direction of arrow 3 as far as it will go P f Xi The clasp will close and the soft top is aie P y now locked onto the windshield frame iic T JA Make sure you turn the hex wrench l counterclockwise as far as it will go 2 Opening Otherwise the soft top may not lock 3 Locking properly gt D gt Lift soft top out of soft top compart ment and pull
494. ystem The system will tune to a default sta tion if no station had been selected pre viously P82 60 4460 31 The first channel 001 is called up and the PTY system changes to All categories If no station can be received ACQUIRING appears in the display If the Satellite radio service is not activated ACQUIRING will also appear in the radio display and NO SAT will appear in the multifunction display Controls in detail Audio system Selecting a station Accessing via number keys gt Press EJ The following options are available gt Enter number of preset you wish to se Input line appears in the main radio e Selecting a station using the selected lect e g ME i category gt page 225 The radio plays the station stored un gt Use number keys to enter desired der this number and the PTY function channel within eight seconds e Tuning via station presets gt page 224 changes to the category corresponding e g BE EJ to the station e Tuning via scan search gt page 225 TNE SyS Er TUNES HOC NAMME gt Tuning via manual channel input Tuning via manual channel input The station you have selected begins to gt page 224 play You can only enter available channel numbers e Tuning via the program category list gt page 225 Tuning via station presets Ten satellite radio station presets are avail able You can access the presets via number keys P82 60 4461 31 Exa
495. ystem will provide heating depends on e the coolant temperature e the temperature set by the operator The blower will run at speed setting 1 regardless of the air distribution control setting Activating gt Switch off the ignition gt page 36 gt Press button gt page 197 The indicator lamp on the button comes on Controls in detail Automatic climate control CLK 500 CLK 55 AMG Deactivating gt Press button gt page 197 The indicator lamp on the button goes out The residual heat is automatically turned off e when the ignition is switched on e after about 30 minutes e if the battery voltage drops Controls in detail Automatic climate control CLK 500 CLK 55 AMG Rear passenger compartment adjustable air vents The air conditioning for the rear passenger compartment is controlled via the auto matic climate control panel gt page 197 The temperature at the center air vents for the rear passenger compartment 2 and gt page 208 is the same as at the dashboard center air vents The air vents for the rear passenger compartment are located in the rear center console al ve h iat a 4 Thumbwheel for air volume control for center air vents 2 Left center air vent 3 Right center air vent Adjusting air distribution gt Push the slide for the left center vent 2 or right center vent G to the left right up or down The air f

Dell n03 Printer User Manual

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents